Materials in Atchin, Malekula: Grammar, Vocabulary and Texts

PACIFIC LINGUISTICS

Se�ie� V - No. 20

MATERIALS IN ATCHIN, MALEKULA: GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND TEXTS

A. Capell and J. Layard

Department of Linguistics

Research School of Pacific Studies

THE AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL UNIVERSITY

Capell, A. and Layard, J. Materials in Atchin, Malekula: Grammar, vocabulary and texts. D-20, vi + 265 pages. Pacific Linguistics, The Australian National University, 1980. DOI:10.15144/PL-D20.cover ©1980 Pacific Linguistics and/or the author(s). Online edition licensed 2015 CC BY-SA 4.0, with permission of PL. A sealang.net/CRCL initiative. PACIFIC LINGUISTICS is issued through the Lingui¢tie Ci�ele 06

Canbe��a and consists of four series:

SERIES A - OCCASIONAL PAPERS SERIES B - MONOGRA PHS SERIES C - BOOKS SERIES V - SPECIAL PUB LICATIONS

EDITOR: S.A. Wurm.

ASSOCIATE EDITORS: D.C. Laycock, C.L. Voorhoeve, D.T. Tryon, T.E. Dutton.

EDITORIAL ADVISERS: B. Bender, University of Hawaii K.A. MCElhanon, University of Texas D. Bradley, University of Melbourne H. MCKaughan, University of Hawaii A. Capell, University of Sydney P. Muhlhausler, Linacre College, Oxford S. Elbert, University of Hawaii G.N. O'Grady, University of Victoria, K. Franklin, Summer Institute of B.C. Linguistics A.K. Pawley, University of Hawaii W.W. Glover, Summer Institute of K. Pike, University of Michigan; Summer Linguistics Institute of Linguistics G. Grace, University of Hawaii E.C. polome, University of Texas M.A.K. Halliday, University of Sydney G. Sankoff, Universite de Montreal A. Healey, Summer Institute of W.A.L. Stokhof, National Center for Linguistics Language Development, Jakarta; L. Hercus, Australian National University University of Leiden N.D. Liem, University of Hawaii J.W.M. verhaar, University of Indonesia, J. Lynch, University of Papua New Guinea Jakarta

ALL CORRESPONDENCE concerning PACIFIC LINGUISTICS, including orders and subscriptions, should be addressed to:

The Secretary, PACIFIC LINGUISTICS, Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University,

Canberra, A.C.T. 2600. Australia.

First published 1980.

The editors are indebted to the Australian National University for

help in the production of this series.

This publication was made possible by an initial grant from the

Hunter Douglas Fund.

National Library of Australia Card Number and ISBN 0 85883 23 1 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Foreword iv

PART I: ATCHIN GRAMMAR 1

O. INTRODUCTION 3

1. PHONOLOGY 5

1.1. Sounds and Symbols 5 1.2. Sound Changes within the Language 7 1. 3. Ac centuation 14

2. SYNTAX 16 2.1. The Principles of Atchin Syntax 16 2.2. Subject, Object and Predicate 20

2.3. Attributes 26 2.4. The Compound Sentence 30 2.5. The Complex Sentence 36

3. MORPHOLOGY 41

3.1. The Noun 41 3.2. Pronouns 48 3.3. Other Noun Phrase Morphology 62 3.4. The Verb 71

BIBLIOGRAPHY 93

PART II: ATCHIN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY 95

PART III: TEXTS 161

LANGUAGE MAP OF MALE KULA 4

111 FOREWORD

The present work consists of three parts. The fir st and second are a Grammar and Vocabulary of the Atchin language, from the island of Malekula, New Hebrides. The first two part s are the work of A. Capell, based on an analysis of the third part, Atchin Texts, collected by Dr John Layard in 1914 , during his stay on the Small Islands, off the north-east coast of Malekula. The Atchin text s were transcribed and translated by Layard, and arranged into 'verses' by him for ease of cross-reference in the Grammar and Vocabulary sections . Capell pre pared these first two sections in London in 1936-37, in consultation with Layard. More than forty years have passed since the manuscript s were orig inally prepared for publication . A word of explanation is in order . It was originally int ended that the whole work should form part of Layard 's proj ected volume s on the Vao-Atchin people, of which Stone Men 06 Male�ula (1942) was the fir st . For a number of reasons this was not carried out . As far as the Atchin work by Capell is concerned, this was held back to await the possibility of further checking of certain point s of phonology with Atchin native speakers. Such checking was planned on a number of occasions by Capell, but was never carried out . On one occasion Capell, while passing through the New Hebride s, had arranged to meet certain speakers at 2.15 p.m. - and his ship unexpectedly sailed at 2.00 p.m.! The result was that the checking has not taken place . In view of this fact and the long passage of time since the materials were prepared originally, it has been decided to publish them as they stand, as archival material . Both authors agreed to this. It is un likely that the materials could be full y checked now, and even less likely that they could be collected again nowadays. The only areas of doubt concern the phonetic value of some of the symbols used in the spelling, particularly the central vowels and the palatal consonant s

iv v

written ts, c and J. The interlabial consonants of Vao do not occur in Atchin and hence raise no difficulty . In the present volume, therefore, the text material and interpreta tion are the work of Layard, who also supplied much of the detailed interpretation given in the vocabulary . Capell is responsible for the remainder . The volume will prove a valuable source document for students of Austronesian languages and cultures, especially those of ,Malekula, for virtually nothiag has been published on them until the present .

The Editor Capell, A. and Layard, J. Materials in Atchin, Malekula: Grammar, vocabulary and texts. D-20, vi + 265 pages. Pacific Linguistics, The Australian National University, 1980. DOI:10.15144/PL-D20.cover ©1980 Pacific Linguistics and/or the author(s). Online edition licensed 2015 CC BY-SA 4.0, with permission of PL. A sealang.net/CRCL initiative. PART I

ATCHIN GRAMMAR

Capell, A. and Layard, J. Materials in Atchin, Malekula: Grammar, vocabulary and texts. D-20, vi + 265 pages. Pacific Linguistics, The Australian National University, 1980. DOI:10.15144/PL-D20.1 ©1980 Pacific Linguistics and/or the author(s). Online edition licensed 2015 CC BY-SA 4.0, with permission of PL. A sealang.net/CRCL initiative.

O. I NTRODU CTI ON

The Atchin language forms one of the group of dialect s spoken on the small islands off the north-east coast,of Malekula, New Hebrides. These islands , reckoning from the north are : Vao , Atchin , Wala, Rano , Norsup , Uripiv and Uri . The grammar here given is that of Atchin chiefly, but re ference will be made to Vao and Uripiv and occasionally to Wala . Side by side with these a general comparison will be made with the mainland dialect s of Malekula. Printed information on these languages is scarce. No thing has been published concerning the language of Atchin itself, or the othe r small islands , with the exception of Uripiv , and a short article by the l present writer . For the other languages the following references may be used:

1) Pangkumu : Grammar and Vocabulary in MacDonald 1891 .

2) Aulua, Sinesip , Meaun , Kuliviu and Uripiv :' Grammars in Ray 1926.

3) Ahamb , Orierh : Scripture Translations by the Pre sbyterian Mission .

4) Sinesip , Lumbrmbr , Laravat and Lagalag : Text s in Deacon 1934 .

Shorter vocabularies and grammatical notes will be found in various periodicals, for which reference may be made to Ray 1926 : 258. The same book contain s the first attempt to work out phonetic laws governing the taking of Indonesian words into the languages of Malekula .

l See Capell 1935. A good deal of the actual forms of words there need correcting, owing to indifferent sources of information, but the general thesis of thepaper is correct , and is worked upon in this gr ammar . 4

�orSUD I . PORT STANLEY oURIPIV o <;::)Uri I.

BANGASA

Reef Pt. WARIK

LANMBUSI

LANGUAGE MAP OF MALEKULA 5

1. PHONOLOGY

1. 1. SOUNVS ANV SYMBOLS

A modified form of the International Phonetic Script is used here for the transcription of Malekulan wo rds , and all dialects are spelt the same . The following alphabet is used:

l 1. 1. 1. Vowels

u e o , a a o [vowe l lengt h indicated V:J

Each of these vowel symbols has really to do duty for more than one sound.

represents the close tense of 'machine ', as well as the laxer sound of 'wit ';

e is normally the vowel of 'men' , but in the diphthong ei tends to be closer;

a is approximately the vowel in German Mann; .

o stands for both 0 and 0;

o is the sound of the Swedish S.

The mixed vowels u and 0 have their German values, but neither sound is perfect ly stable . They have not been written, and apparently not noticed, by the Presbyt erian and other missionaries, with the exception of the French Roman Catholics , by whom they are written in the languages of South Pentecost and other surrounding regions . There is a principle of vowel harmony between the vowel of the verbal particle and that of the verb itself, into which inquiry will be made in the course of this grammar.

l.rhroughout the text the symbols a and? also occur ; they are to be interpreted as approximate equivalents to e and 0 respectively, appearing to be used interchangeably by the author . Their true phonetic values are unknown ( see Foreword) . 6

l 1. 1. 2. Consonants

Oral Plosives Fricatives Nasal Combinations

lhvoiced Vo iced lhvoiced Vo iced Nasals lhvoiced Vo iced

Bilabial p b w,v ,5 m mp mb

t'ental t d r,l n nt nd

Palatal ts,c,f s,f y ny ns k Velar 9 x Y I) I)k I)g

Glottal I h

The bulk of these symbols are self-explanatory , if at tention be paid to the part i cular columns in which each is placed . Those that occur twice are put in both places because they have more than one point of articulation in the mouth. Ail these consonant s, it must be understood, are pronounced without the escape of breath that fo llows them in English. A dist inction between v (a bilabial as in Spanish, and as generally in Melanesian ), and w has to be made . v tends, to occur in Atchin chiefly before front vowels, and the mixed vowels: vi , ve, vu, va . It is of more general occurrence on the ma inland. The dental consonant s are pronounced with the tip of the tongue touching the top of the teeth, and are not alveolar as in English. is trilled as in French and German . The r is definite, though not so strongly trilled as in Fij ian . If previous account s are right , a distinction must also be made between the At chin sound of ts and the mainland sound of c, i.e. the unvoiced palatal plosive not heard in English, but suggestive of ch. The symbol f stands for the English sound of 'sh' in 'shoot ', though perhaps

slight ly more palatalised. By x is intended the sound of ch in Gaelic and Dutch, or the German ch after back vowels. It was written by Deacon (1934) as kh in some of the dialects, and apparent ly must be dist inguished from it s voiced counterpart y, written gh by him. There is also a hh written by Deacon, of which no explanation is forthcoming, but which seems to be a bilabial f, the unvoiced mate of v. The voiced fricat ive y, commonly called the Melanesian g , is rep laced in At chin by h, but is heard in Vao and throughout the mainland and the Maskelyne Islands (Kuliviu) .

�he present arrangement is adopted for the sake of the phonetic laws to be studied , and reference should be made to Dempwolff 1924-25:l9ff. His particular system of spelling is not , however , adopted here. 7

One peculiarity of Vao consonant s must be noticed, though as it is a regular rule of the language, no separat e symbol is needed to mark the fact . All labial and nasal consonant s are pronounced in Vao with the tongue slightly protruded between the lips, "so that pairs of con sonant s so pronounced, such as d and b, m and n, p and t are at first almo st indistinguishable without comparative philological knowledge .

One effect of this is that y and w assume a sound almost exactly cor responding to the English voiced th (Layard 1934:132,fn. ). If this is realised from the start, Vao words will not need, for practical purposes, to be specially marked . The sound written 5 for want of a better symbol in the languages of the west of Malekula is a vo iced bilabial fricative trill, like an at tempt to pronounce br with the lips alone, and wit hout the tongue . It is the sound heard in the place name variously spelt as Lambumbu or Lambrmbr, which will'here be spelt LumBmB . The labials are practically interc hangeable with each other in Atchin

and Wala, so that a word may sometimes seem to end in v, sometimes in w, or again in b, p, mb and mp, and although there is 'dialectical inter change of these sounds, yet this is not simply a matter of dialect or individual speaker, but a perfectly real instability of the labials . Thus the ritual mask called in At chin sapsap may in Wala be samsam or even sambasamba. The phenomenon is not limited to Malekula, but is found throughout the Central New Hebrides, and in the Santa Cruz Archipelago as well. At the same time, final b in Atchin tends to be unvoiced, and is generally represented by p in Ur ipiv. Mo st of the labials may also be velarised in almo st all Malekula dialects. In Atchin the resulting sounds, bw, pw, mw, have special occurrences that will be in a subsequent section of this grammar.

1.2. SOUNV CHANGES WITHIN THE LANGUAGE

1. 2.1. Vowe l Harmony

The At chin language possesses no such elaborate system of vowel harmony as the Finno-Ugrian languages, yet there is a type of harmony which needs to be understood . It consists in the change of a vowel, either medial or final, in certain words. These words are not numerou s, and the changes seem to be limited to them . They are, however, common and important words . Chief among them are :

1) the art icle,

2) a few nouns when used along with the demonstratives and possess ives,

3) the verbal particles of the 3sg. past and future. 8

1. 2 .2. The Agreement of the Article

The root form of the common art icle in Atchin is na, thus : na-mboQ 'day '. The vowel , however, harmonises with the vowel of the following noun , as in na-hlm 'house '; ill-al 'sun '; no-tsln 'penis '; nu-mbo 'song '. In the last word , in fact, we have prenasalisation of the initial con sonant also, for the phrase 'to sing a song ' is tu l-tulo po. It will be seen , however , that vowel harmony does not mean that the vowel of the artic le becomes the same as that of the noun . That is what happens in the Banks Islands (Codrington 1885:108), but the Atchin use is quite different . In all th e changes undergone by words in Atchin , sentence accentuation plays a large part , a part which still calls for further study . There is no doubt whatever that laws of sentence accent uat ion lie at the root of the changes of the art icle in At chin . The general laws of vowel harmony undergone by the art icle may be stated as fo llows:

Na is the normal form of article if the noun bears the accent : na-hut

, louse '.

N' is used before the homorganic consonant d, and it s unvoiced counter part t: n'da s ' sea '; n' ta I 'rope '.

Na is used before e, i, u, and before a if the art icle and not the noun bears the accent . Also na-sak 'my name ' (3rd person na-san 'his name ', by double umlaut ), na-tsal 'mat skirt '.

Ni before a, e, 0 in accent ed syllables : nl-al 'sun '; ni-sal 'path'; ni-tan 'ground '. This does not happen , e.g. in the Seniang dialect , where na-a l 'tree ', answer s to Atchin na-I.

No before 0, e.g. no-no sak 'my things '; no-woI 'paddle '. This form can then suffer umlaut , as in no-tsin 'penis ', where the following modifies it to o. It is also used in no- ran 'his food', without doubt by analogy with no-rak 'my fo od', though even here it is out of place.

Nu us used before back or low vowels.

Nd is used before r for ease of enunciation: n-dram 'yam '; n-dra 'blood '. Spelling n-dr in this fa shion serves to show that it is the r which takes the corresponding stop before it , and to disting uish it , e.g. from n'das 'the sea ', where the d is original. There is a secondary form also in the case of the wo rd ram 'a yam', i.e. ni-r�m, used for nl-ram under conditions to be ment ioned later. This is presumably the older usage; n-dram being a later contrac tion . Similarly nl-taQ and n-daQ 'basket '. 9

1. 2.3. The Agreement with Demonstratives and Possessives

Nouns ending in a change this into 0 when fo llowed by a demonstrative or possessive embodying the vowel a. This is really a type of backing , l or "brechung" , to use a German expression . Examples : nu-wa 'water ', but nu-wo sak 'my water '; buha 'pig ', but buho sak 'my pig '. In this instance the usage ext ends to other compounds of buha: buho pa l-pa le and buho liv -tov, special types of pig . The vowel of the possessive ' it self undergoes this change in the 2sg. , when sa-k becomes so -m. This represent s an older *sa-mu, and the backing effect of the subsequently lost vowel persist s. Combinations of backing and umlaut then give us the forms of the possessives: sa -k 'my ', so -m 'thy ', sa- n 'his '; or the possessive applied to things to drink : no-mak, no-mom , no-mwan . Sometimes the same effect is obtained when a suffix which contained the back vowel u at an earlier stage of the. language, but has now lost it , is added to a noun : miro-m 'thy mother ', for *m ira-m u;- tuo-m 'thy elder brother ', for *tua-mu, in just the .same way as som above . A more complicated example is seen in the expression no-no som 'thy thing '. The root is na-na 'the thing '. This word has first become na no under the influence of the possessive , and then the art icle has been harmonised with it according to the laws stated above . Rat her different and not very clear is the grading in mwere 'man ', mwar'ok 'that man ', mwer'a 'this man '. That the original root vowel was e one gathers from comparisons out side the language, but it is not clear why the modification to a takes place before the demonstrative ok.

1. 2.4. The Agreement of the Verbal Particle

The statement of the laws by which the vowel of the verbal particle , in the 3sg. past and future, harmonises with that of the verb following , is a very difficult matter, complicated by the fact that the initial consonant �ay also undergo ve larisation . The simplest forms of the part icles are mi past , and pi future ; they may become mw i, mu and m' for the past , and pwi , pu and p' for the future respectively. Under what conditions does this happen? The normal forms are the velarised mw i and pw i, and these only change when the use of a velar consonant is phonetically different . As lan guage in general tends to work for ease of enunciation, so he re Atchin is aiming at euphonic pronunciat ion .

lThis word is not really an exception to the laws just stated regarding the article. It answers to n-wa ; the u being merely a fuller enunciation of the initial semivowel, and it is conceivable that it might be written n-uwa. It answers to Indonesian wa yar. 10

1) H i is used before such consonant s as the nat ive finds it difficult to pronounce w in comb inat ion with: these are initial m, initial t fol lowed by a back vowel, and initial w fo llowed by a front vowel . Examples of mi are seen in mi ma�a� 'he gaped'; mi mats 'he di ed'; mi ma ra 'he was hungry '; ml rna 'he aame '; ml rna 'he went '; ml wa-wan 'he kept on going '; mi wiel 'he went away '. We also have a rather unex-' pected mi uroi for m'urol 'he ate '.

2) Hu is used when the first vowel of the word is a rounded vowel or consonant , i.e. has the element s of the velar consonant w. These vowels are u, 0, 0 and frequent ly wa and we . Examples of this form are : mu luha 'he returned' ; mu ro�e 'he heard' ; mu rubatsi 'he untied'; mu II 'it shone '; mu tor i 'he Zed '; mu tsov 'he fe ZZ'; mu tur 'he stood '; mu wa la 'he ran '; mu wl-tsov 'he made to Ja ZZ'; mu womu 'he preceded' ; mu wurei 'he said (to him) '.

3) H' is used normally before labial consonant s other than w, and before initial u: m'pep 'she bore a ahiZd'; m'betse lehl 'he sought '; m'bo� 'it grew dark'; m'pa l 'he saarifiaed'; m'un 'he dived'; m'uI 'it rained'.

The particle of the future is very similarly used. Pi is used for pwl before all labials, including w: pi rna 'he wiZZ aome '; pi mara 'he wiZZ hunger'; pi ma ts 'he wi ZZ die '; pi p'ok 'it wi ZZ be thus '; pi wan 'he wiZZ aome '; pi wa 'he wiZZ go '. One verb - tigei 'marry ' - takes both the velarised and the plain forms . Pu is used under exactly the same conditions as mu: pu luha 'he wi ZZ aome baak '; pu ma-Iakel 'he wi ZZ beaome a young man '; pu po� 'it wiZZ be dark '. The particle ar which indicates repetition, take s either pwl or pu. In the texts p' is used before uroi 'eat ', and its frequentative ururoi. Many verbs transgress these rules, however, being used with more than one form of the particle, apparently at the speaker 's will. This serve s to show that the whole system - which in its de limitat ion of uses is peculiar to the Small Islands - is still more or less in a stat e of flux. In other languages in the northern New Hebrides and Banks Islands the harmony is a simp le agreement of vowel between particle and verb . In Atchin, however , the vowel of mw l cannot become e, for if it 1 did the form would be the same as that of the lsg. 'of the same particle. Amongst the verbs which are variously used in At c hin may be mentioned the following : hltsl 'aopuZa te ' (mwi and mu) ; kete 'make ' (mwi and mu) ; klla 'know ' (mwi and mu); Ilhe 'drag ' (mwl and mu); Ilwe 'shoot ' (mwi and mil; rewtsl 'kiZZ ' (mwi and ml); te i 'fashion, fo rm ' (mwl , mi, mu); rna 'aome ' (mi, mu) . l See Codrington 1885:174 for Banks Islands and New Hebrides, and Ray 1926:339 for Ambrym (Fanting dialect ). 11

1. 2. 5. Uml aut

The vowel change known as umlaut consists in the raising of a vowel (and incidentally the front ing of it also ) under the influence of a neighbouring high front vowel , generally I. This i may precede or fol low the vowel it affect s, but in Atchin it normally follows . There are some cases in which a similar change takes place with no trace of an i in the word; sometimes it is the effect of an i which formerly existed , but has now been lost , in others the reason for the change is not known . The vowels affected by umlaut and their resultant s are as follows :

a followed by becomes a, which has the same sound as e.

o followed by becomes o. This is not a regular change.

u fo llowed by becomes u. This also is not a regular change.

The same changes take place when u is the vowel of the fo llowing syl lable, but not so regularly. Many words can be used with or without umlaut when u is the following vowel . It is possible to say either wanu or wanu for 'viLLage '. This occasionally happens also before i: n'das or n'das 'sea '. In the following examp les the original IN root is given first , then the commonest Melanesian form , which can be re garded as that which first was brought to Atchin, and lastly the At chin word as actual ly used, with its meaning :

IN MN Atchin taOis 'weep ' taoi tao 'weep '; tao 5 i 'weep fo r ' hutan 'forest ' uta hut 'forest ', through *hut i ma+hu�ip 'riving ' maurl maur 'Live ', for *m aur na-jal�n 'the way ' sa la ni-sal for *n i-sali na-(o) aran 'name ' (s) asa na-san for *na-sani

Some umlaut effects occur within the Atchin language itself; thus the word for 'right, properLy ' may be either (w)uJoni or (w) uJon . In other cases there are modified vowels where no comparison with IN root s is possible, e.g. in tsUnob 'man ', and as it so happen s that this word ha s no relatives on the mainland of Malekula, it is impossible to say how the modificat ions arose in such a case. The only other language , apart from Malekula, in which wholesale umlaut takes place is that of Rotuma, but in this case the umlaut modi fications serve a grammatical purpose which they do not serve in Atchin. In the case of At chin, the notes on comparat ive phonet ics will show that an intermediate stage between the original IN (or nearest MN ) form must often be understood in order to account for the umlaut . Many final vowels, found in ot her dialect s (e.g. Malo) are lost in At chin. It 12

would seem that these vowels first weakened to i, then disappeared al together . This explains the um laut in the possessives:

Atchin Pronoun

sak = *sa-ku 'my ' l-na so-m *sa-mu 'thy ' i -n i -k i sa-n *sa-n i *sa-na 'his' i -n i sa-r i' *sa-r * 5 a -t i .. 5* a - t a ' 0 ur ( inc 1. ) , i -k i r

sa-mam = *sa -mam i 'our(excl.)' kiam

sa -m i does not modify , = 'your ' kam i

sa-r = *sa-r i = *sa-ra 'their ' i -n i -r I

Whether the pronouns have determined the forms of the possessives, or the actual stages have in all case s been passed through, cannot now be proved. If the pronouns are , as in some cases they must be, suffixed to the noun , the modification takes place in the final vowel of the noun : mira-k 'my mother '; miro-m 'thy mother '; mira-n 'his mother '. In the Text s the letter a has been introduced to indicate an e-sound that ha s arisen by umlaut . It is thus a letter used for historical, not for phonetic purposes. Umlaut modifications arise also in some cases either wit hin the body of the word or in the last vowel when it is comp ounded wit h anot her word containing i or e: reoa 'in', but reoan 'in it, therein '; tan 'earth ', but oa- tan 'on the ground ', apparently for oa+e+tan; oa 'at ', but oa-ln 'here '. It must be stated, however, that umlaut is not invariably the result of a meet ing between i and another vowel. It doe s not take place when the transit ive ending ni is added to a word . Thus waoan i 'feed'. This is perhaps the effect of the accent falling on the vowel that under other circumstances would be modified. Similarly, 1awi 'take '; tsa1 i1 'out '. It doe s, however, occur in some reduplicated words, e.g. 1aoa 'mad ', reduplicates as 1aoa1ao.

1. 2.6. Reduplication

This brings us to discuss the general phenomena of reduplicat ion . There are six types of change in Atchin .

1) Umlaut may take place, as already mentioned: 1a�a - 1a�a1ao 'mad', see N. 39.

2) The final vowel may be omitted in each syllable : 11we 'shoot ' _ 11w11w, A.20.

3) The final consonant may be omitted in the first syllable of the re duplicated word: wan 'go ' - wa-wan 'keep on going '; ka 1 'hoZd' - ka-ka1 'hang oneseZf ', B.12. 13

4) The first syllable only of the word may be reduplicated: wa-waroQ 'keep "looking for she"l"l-fi sh ', from root waroQ ; rawi 'extraat ' - ra-rawi .

5) A word ending in a consonant may be reduplicated in full, in whic h case a slight sound of a is heard between the two halves of the word, due to full enunciat ion of the final consonant of the first syllable : lek 'stay ' - lek(a) lek 'stay a "long time '; rep(a) rep 'preparatory move ment in a danae '. A similar effect sometimes accompanies the partial reduplication ment ioned above: mots(a)motsou l 'keep nibb "ling '. This connecting vowel is not wr itten in the Texts, but a hyphen serves to show where the reduplicat ion takes place. A similar linking vowel is developed in other languages , e.g. Eromangan dalaya u 'with me ', from dal 'with ', and ya u 'I', and in the Micronesian language of Ponape, where lap-a-lap = At chin lep(a) lep 'very big '. In Ponape the connec ting vowel is more clearly pronounced, and harmonise s with the stem vowel of the original word.

6) In some cases the entire word is redup licated with no change or other addit ion , if it ends in a vowel: wa 'go ' - wa-wa; and again a word may be used in this form wit hout any simple form exist ing: pwer e-pwere 'a sow , .

The Vao language ha s a type of reduplication in nouns which does seem to have grammat ical value: nat un 'a ahi"ld ' - na-nat un tahik 'my younger brother's wife (not ahi"ld) ' . There is nothing like this in Atchin.

1.2.7. Velarisati on of Consonants

By velarisation of consonant s is meant the addition of a w-sound immediately after the consonant . This is not such a close union as in the Banks Islands or Nguna . The Atchin mw is not quite the same as Mot a m, which seems really to be w, i.e. a nasalised w, and the Atchin pw is not the Mota q, which seems best described as a velarised p with sim ultaneous glottal closure, in the Int ernat ional Phonetic Script p� . It is worth noticing in passing that this Mo ta sound answers to p or b in Atchin and mb in the Seniang of South We st Bay, Malekula. Thus:

Mota Atchin Seniang qOI) pOI) , bOI) mbon 'darkness ' qa tiu bat(u) (ni)mbatu 'head '

In Atchin any labial consonant may be velarised, which of course at the same time means that the consonant is also rounded when the lips are protruded to pronounce w. Examples can be given of words existing 14

both with and without velarisation : the possessive for drinks is no mak 'my drink ', which in the 3sg. becomes no-mwan. In the same way a word may be velarised in one dialect and not in another : Vao bara� 'aave ', is Atchin pwara� .

1.2.8. Nasalisation of Consonants

In some languages, such as Fij ian, all the voiced plosives are hab itually combined with the homorganic nasal , and cannot be pronounced wit hout it . This is not so in At chin, where , e.g. b and mb both exist independently of each other . Nasalisation of the root occurs, and seems to have definite grammatical function to perform in only one case, namely the plosive p. In some instances this is voiced and becomes b, in others it is nasalised and becomes mb . Following a verbal particle beginning with m the p is voiced, fol lowing the art ic le it is nasalised. The latter phenomenon may have a historical explanation, for in some of the languages of central Celebes the article (which is really �) com bines with the following noun to form the homorganic nasal . The fol lowing examples from Atchin will make the rules clear :

1) unvoiced form : e po� 'it i8 dark ' voiced form : mu bo� or m'bo� 'it was dark ' nasal form : na mbo� 'the day or night (24 hour period) '

2) unvoiced form : tul-tulo po 'render a 80ng ' nasal form : nu-mbo 'a 80ng '

3) unvoiced form: e pe 'it i8 Uke' nasal form : ne-mbe 'the p1.aae where '

4) unvoiced form : ar pal 'they 8aarifiaed' voiced form : m' ba I 'he hit ' nasal form: na-mbal 'aon8ideration-pig '

5) voiced form : ra 'b1.ood' nasal form : n'dra 'the b1.ood'

1.3. ACCENTUATION

The importance of accent in Atchin ha s already been illustrated in the rules governing the form of the common article. To state definite rules for the place of the accent really involves knowing the older form or forms of the word, the form which it possessed when it entered the Atchin language . This, of course, is no t always possible. When a noun has been truncated of an original syllable, at any rate a final syllable, then it tends to bear the accent on the new final syllable if 1 5

it is disyllabic, or the last but one if it has more than two syllables . This is not always the case, however, and it is in this regard that the empirical element comes in . The ac cent, however, tends to recede : so muc h can be definitely stated . Thus 'noreman 'maLe '; 'n a-mwe r 'parrot '; but against this, where a syllable is lost, 'ni-a l 'sun', in spite of the fact that the IN original is a(�) raw 'day '. This tendency, contrary to what has already been said, to draw the accent back to the beginning of the word, sometimes, at least, overcomes the accent which results from the shortening of the word . In a similar way, IN yumah gives Atc hin 'na-him 'house ': The tendency to penultimate ac cent is generally stronger than the tendency to keep the accent where it was in the orig inal word.

1.3. 1. Accent of Doubled Words

The phonet ic aspect of reduplication was studied in the preceding paragraphs. The general tendency is to throw the accent back: 'wa-wan 'keeping on going '; 'ka-kal 'hang oneseLf' ; 're-rei 'keep puLLing '. If the ent ire word is reduplicated, the compound takes the accent on the first syllable: 'pwere-pwere 'a sow '. The same thing hold s good if the original word ends in a consonant : 'lep-lep 'great ', and that is why the neutral vowel a tends to creep in.

1.3. 2. Effect of Procl itics on Accent

A proclitic is a syllable or word that is added in front of the main word, and whi ch may, in different languages, either at tract or fail to attract the accent to it self. Thus the verbal part icles in At chin are proclitics. As a rule they do not cause any shift of accent ; one says, mwi 'rala 'he saiLed'. In specific inst ances, however, the ac cent shift s from the verb to the verbal part icles. These instances may be grouped as fo llows :

1) The accent falls on the verbal part icle e (a) before adj ectives : 'e lap 'it is great '; 'tsUnob 'e lap 'a great man '. As against this , e 'wa la 'he runs '. (b) before negat ives : 'e tsig a 'it is not '; but this rule is limited to the actual negat ive adverb tsiga or tsa .

2) In compounds of the locative preposit ion e with a place name , a similar change of accent takes place: 'e Ra 'at Raga '; 'e Tsan 'on Atchin ' .

3) The verbal part icles mwi, et c . of the 3sg. past, and pwi, et c. of , , . the 3sg. future, exercise the same effect on the accent as does e: mWI tsa 'he was not '; e ro 'pwi tsa 'he di d not want '; 'mwi wise ? 'How was 16

it?' It should be noted, in connection with (1 ) above , that the fact of the assimilat ion of the e to agree with the fol lowing vowel , the ' n attract ion of accent still occurs: o - o 'six '.

4) The reference particle Qa also draws the accent to itself, whether it have its strict ligat ive force or be used , as it sometime s is, as a locat ive preposit ion : 'Qa Tsan 'at Atahin '; 'Qa la 'on shore '. This is seen even in a word that wa s compounded long before it reached ' Atchin: e sa'QawUI 'ten ' � This particular type of attract ion, then, is historica lly pre-Atchin .

5) The preposition ta is proclitic : 'ta Sa 'the peop Le of aba '; 'ta 11m 'in five da ys '.

1. 3. 3. Enclitic Accent

An enclitic is a syllable appended to a wo rd, usually without accent of its own, but liable to affect the accent of the word to which it is added. Some syllables in Atchin draw the accent forward, so that the penultimate accentuation is still maintained. Such a syllable is the transitive suffix -ni with verbs : wa'Qani 'to fee d' (IN 'paQan); tu'loni 'to Zead'. Another is the syllable te, the second element of the neg ative se .,. te: e se 'sa te 'there is no-one '. When te ha s it s other, depreciat ory or diffident meaning, the same change of accent take s ' ' u pwi 'tsa te place : A.52 E. b ho ' k 'Eh, not that pig, pLease !' This is direct ly parallel to C.12 Ini e ro pwi 'tsa ni 'he di d not want it ', and exact ly count erbalances the normal accentua tion, 'pwi tsa 'it shaLL not be '. It is neces sary to add that although, as shown , tonic accent -is a definite factor in Atchin, this refers only to prose speech. Songs do not have the same strong accentuation; but as they are wr itten in a special "song language" the problem does not meet us direct ly here .

2. SYNTAX

2.1. THE PRINCIPLES OF ATCHIN SYNTAX

It is just becoming recognised that the grammar of a Melanesian lan guage cannot be written in the same cat egories and order as that of a European language . The first real attempt to construct grammar in which 1 European cat egories are set aside is that of Tagalog by Bloomfield (1917). lThis work did not come to the writer 's knowledge until after the writing of the article aforementioned and the preparation of the maj or part of the grammar . A study of volume two of Bloomfield' s work, however, has led to the rearrangement of the work along lines rather similar to his, especially in the placing first of the most import ant and characteristic part of the grammar, 1. e. the syntax. This now follows the section on phonetics, and morphology comes last . 17

In Atchin it is particularly necessary to set aside European categories, though it is convenient here for pract ical purposes to retain the division int o the usual 'part s of speech' . The se groups, however , must be rearranged int o two larger group s, which are called 'time words' and 'obj ect words' respect ively. By 'object words' are meant such as are not subj ect to dist inction of tense , and by 'time words' those that are . This di stinct ion between obj ect and time is the fundament al gram mat ical principle of the Atchin language , and indeed of the languages of Malekula in general , and is found to a slightly less extent in Ambrym and Paama also . This is the distinct ion that Bloomfield made for the first time in Tagalog, and he thus defines what he calls "transient words" : "Transient words expre ss an element of experience viewed as impermanent , i.e. belonging to some limited portion of time " (Bloomfield 191 7) . His term for 'object words ' is "static words" . This development of time-asp ect ha s not , however , been carrie¢ through to the complete neglect of the place or obj ect principle; dem- \ onstrat ive s and directives are still well in evidence , but it is important to observe that they are demonstratives not only of obj ect s but also of times. The words that give empha sis to nouns may also give a similar emphasis to verbs. Thus Ie may be a demonstrative with all 'part s of speech' . It may be profitable to quite again from the eariler paper on the subj ect of Atchin syntax (Capell 1935:200-02) . Certainly here as elsewhere the unit of speech is not the word but the sentence. We express in a sentence a thought that is already complete in our minds. Emphasis is laid on various parts of the thought in different languages. In English we have simplified our statement s to a very large extent ; in the languages of the Far East, such as Tibetan and Chinese, they are simplified still further . Whe n we come to Melanesia we find that although a consider able amount of simplification has taken plac e (and one need only refer to the "Papuan" languages and many of the tongue s of western Indonesia in contrast ), still a good deal of defin ition is made that is not made in English. That definition in most places tends to be definition of concrete things and acts. In the sentence "The man chased the boy round the tree", the Melanesian would tend to say "man that he chase him boy round tree" - i.e. the emphasis is not on the time of the action, but on the per sons concerned . The act could be seen and the actor noted: when it happened was of le ss importance. 'Now in Ac hin and Ur ipiv we find the rever se tendency at work. True, there is still the definition of the agent and the obj ect - the verbal pronouns and demonstrat ives are still well in evidence - but the time of the action becomes almost a ruling concept . That; of course, is where the difficulty for the foreigner comes in. He has not only to learn nat ive words and idioms, but ha s to reorientate his methods of thought along the lines of nat ive methods. He ha s to throw 18

the em phasis where the native would throw it. In the lan guage we have been studying this emphasis is on the time element.

What is the effect of this emphasis on time , and what guides its application? In the first place , the only things inde pendent of time relations are those that persist unchanged throughout all experience . The man who acts is the same before as after ; so his hame "man" is independent of time. The boy who is chased is still a boy after wards , so his name "boy" is unchanged . If , now , we extend the sentence by adding the words "till he caught him" , we add elements that can be affected by the time emphasis . "Till" is not the same in the given sen tence as in the sentence "The man will chase the boy round the tree till he catches him" - to us , perhaps , it is , for all practical purposes , the same , but not to the native . In one case he says , "What happened?" - why , he chased him , "and it came he caught him" ; in the other , "What will happen?" - why , he will chase him , "and it will come he will catch him" .

Take now as further examples two complex examples of future sequence from the Texts: K.44 Ko mo lasi na-mwer pwl sa pu row pwi tsovha, ko po Ilhi po mats 'When you see a parrot fZying by, hang yourseZf so that you die '; K. 52 Pe un pe kete pi-pe nl-se? 'What shaZZ I do when I dive?' The lit eral translation of the first is: '�nd you have seen parrot i� shaZZ be one it shaZZ fZy it shaZl be past, then you shall hang-yourself you shaZl die", of the second : "I shaZl dive/ I shall dol it shall be like what?" Neither of these two make sense so expressed in English, "but in the native mind it must point to a definit e analysis of the whole idea, made before that idea ha s been expressed" . The idea is the connect ion between the sight of a bird and suicide, the bird being the speaker 's spirit , a sign to the girl that he himself is then dead. Let us then analyse the stage s of the suicide . First , before she carries it out , she has seen the bird: mo lasi, past tense, 'you have seen it first '. The bird, nat urally, is not affected by the time relationships, it is simply na-mwer; but at the time of speaking it has not yet ap peared, it is pwl sa "future -one" bird. Its flight also is future : pu row, and if that is so , then it s passing is also future - pwi tsovha 'it shalZ pass by '. Then, in the event of all those future possibil ities being realised, and you have seen it - the complete past of mo

last - you are to hang yourself - po lihi - and if you do that you will die - po mats. The second example is really simpler : the main idea is that I have something to do . Before that , however , I shall dive - pe un. When I have done that I shall do somet hing else - pe kete. What sort of action will that be that I am to do : it shall be like what - pi-pe ni-se? This is the logical splitting up of the ideas that English prefers to subordinate to the main thought , I shall do something. English takes 19

first that root idea - I have something to do ; and subordinat es the condition that I have to dive before I do it ; At chin take s the ideas in their strict time sequence: first I shall dive , then I shall do something , then what will that something be like ? To quote again (Capell 1935:202): If it remains true that the unit of speech is the sentence , it seems true al so that the sentence itself is not the same in every language (the Latin "periodic c�nstruction" and the English, say, of Macaulay is a case in point), and it would seem that to the Atchin nat ive each section of the idea be comes a separate sentence.

taking the second examp le above : Pe un - pe kete - pi-pe ni-se?, and similarly in the first example , or �n U.44, another long example . The words and phrases hang together (and this may be the psYChologic�l ground for the changeable vowel of the verbal particles), but all that connects the whole idea is the futurity of the matter . In fact , we have not really an elab orate logic carrying the idea of futurity to its utmost possi bility, so much as a very element ary thinking in diSjointed ideas, each expressed separately, and only bound together by the future particle.

A passage in Jesper sen 1924 :26-7 so aptly describes the principle s of Atchin syntax - though a propos of something else , and quite uninten tionally that the length of the quotat ion may be forgiven : Apart from fixed formulas a sentence does not spring into a speaker 's mind all at once, but is framed gradually as he goes on speaking. This is not always so conspicuous as in the following instance. I want to tell someone whom I met on a certai� occasion, and I start by saying : "There I saw Tom Brown and Mrs. Hart and Miss Johnstone and Colonel Dutton ..." When I begin my enumerat ion I have not yet made up my mind how many I am going to mention or in what order , so I have to use and in each case. If, on the other hand , before beginning my story I know exac tly whom I am going to mention, I leave out the ands exc ept before the last name .... It is clear that the latter construction, which requires a comprehensive conception of the sentence as a whole , is more appropriate in the wr itten language, and the former in ordinary speech.

This is exactly what Atchin does, each idea is treated as separate sentence, and this account s not only for the paratactical arrangement of clauses, but also for the long series of ko 's which may begin them, like English 'and '. The only difference is that English ha s reached the stage of reflection and rejects such a series of 'ands ' as ungrace ful , while Atchin is content with the natural order of things . l And it might be added, for the fact that the future sequence is very definite, while that of the past is not so strict ; the indefinite may supervene; see below, section 2.4.3. 20

We now go on to co nsider each aspect of Atchin syntax separately, beginning wit h the element s of the simp le sent ence . Then we take com pound sentences, i.e. those that consist of more than one principle clause, connect ed or disjoined by 'and ' or 'but ', and thirdly the com plex sentence, in which subordinate clauses are found .

2.2. SUBJECT, OBJECT ANV PREVICATE

2.2. 1. The Su bject

{al Its Nature The subj ect of a sentence is normally a noun or a noun-substitute . The latter may be a pronoun or a phrase equivalent to a noun . It is not necessary to give examples of nouns serving as subj ect s. There is no special �article to indicate that the given noun is a subj ect or an obj ect . Pronouns are of two sort s, card inal or verbal . The cardinal pronoun need not be expressed unless there is a certain degree of emphasis thrown upon it . When the cardinal is thus used, the verbal pronoun is also used after it . Noun-equivalent s require more detailed considerat ion. These are phrases consisting of more than one word, the who le of which together is treated grammat ically as a noun and so becomes the subj ect of a sentence . Thus in C.ll Ko mw i sa ko e wure l e re i-sen 'Then one (of them) said he wanted it for himself'. Here the past tense sign mwi gives the time of the whole sentence ; as sa, being a numeral , is a true time-word, needs such a tense-part icle with it (at least when it def initely refers to 'one ' in a numerical , not an indefinite sense) . The subj ect of the main clause is then it self a clause , (ko) mw i sa '(and) one (sc. of them) ', in the past tense . Similar in nature is K.46 Pw i sa pu un wa 'Let one (of you) dive ' - except that here the sequence is future . Again in K. 78 Ra kete nl-se pwi sa, Qa ikir pw i sa pwi tigei lit . 'we shatl do something it win be one, that we it shan be one wi ll marry (sc. her) ', i.e. 'Let us do something so that one of us may marry her '. The subj ect of pwi tigel is ikir pwi sa 'we it shall be one ', or in English idiom, 'one of us '.

(b) Its Position The subj ect precedes the verb , the only intervening words allowed being any attribut e of the subj ect that may be added to it . An explan atory or emphat ic subj ect may· follow, however , for empha sis: G.ll Noreman ma r matur no-ut e pOQ , Inlr wlJln san 'the man slept that night, he and his wife '. A.20 Win a mu tsubul kele Nor iJere, Inir tasin 21

wats in 'The girt came down again to Norishere, she and her younger brother this time '. The inversion is normal after the verb we [or eJ in the sense of 'to be ', just as in English we say 'there is ' with a noun following. Thus : A.17 Pi we r�m n'ehi ok 'That fi sh shatt be your food'. C.14 Pi e sale sak 'This wi tt be my tanding ptace '. cf . also JJ .21, where the subj ect is sa 'one (day) ': Pi we sa po ar seken i 'It wi tt come about someday, that you wi tt find " or 'A day witt come when ... '

(e) Expression of Number As there is no inflect ion of the noun it self to indicat e number , the fact of duality or plurality must be expressed by the verbal particle , which varies for person and number . As a general thing this suffices, and in the case of inanimate obj ects, even that may not be strictly adhered to , at any rate apart from the subject-words . Atchin has, however, a means of making clear the dist inct ion of number when nece s sary , but does not employ this means when the context is sufficient to the speaker 's mind. So in L.21, the speaker las, greets his two younger brother s with the words, We re-wereko taslk were-werek! Ko kom m'ok wiel Qa-mbe Ie? 'My de ar, dear tittte brothers ! Whence have you- two come here again?' A personal plural, that is generally definite in nature , can be expressed by the addit ion of the cardinal pronoun after the noun . The use of a dual pronoun is impossible, as the only dual forms are the verbal pronouns. In this case, to express a dual , the plural cardinal is used, but the fo llowing verbal part icle is in the dual. So we say tsunob inir 'the men ' (note that this does no t generally mean just 'men '; the plural , as stated, is definite, and the indefinit e is given simply in the verbal pronoun) . The pronoun may precede the noun and give anot her sense : A. 20 inir tas in 'she and her brothers '. This is the normal way of expressing 'and ' with two personal nouns . The verbal pronoun is that of the implied person and number . So JJ .26 Ko kami Tahar ko wlel 'you and Ta har go away ', the implicat ion is 'you two ', hence ko 2du . CC .l Tsunob sa niri wlfen san or wan or pale ni-ar 'A certain man and his wife go and buitd a fence '. The conj unct ive pro noun is that of the 3pl. , but the resultant phrase is equivalent to 'they two ', hence verbal pronoun or, 3du. inde finit e. These are the general rules, which are further illustrated in the following examples: A.25 Win a iniri tas in or mul 'Th e gir t and her sister departed'. 22

F. 6 Inir tewen san mor wa e-hut 'She and her hU8band went to the mainLand ' . G.ll Noreman ma r matur no-ut e POI) , Inir wifen san 'The man, he and hi8 wife 8Lept in the night '. Q.14 Ko inir wlfen san e wa Wala 'He and hi8 wife go to Wa La '. This example looks grammat ically wrong , seeing that the verbal part icle (e) is in the singular . The explanat ion is probably that -the attention is concentrated on the person of the husband, although only the wife is ment ioned, as though it read "He went with her (hi8 wife ) to Wa La". A trial number is shown in K.95 Inir buan ko win a ko inir e-tol mar wan 'He and the grandmother and the girL went aLL three '. It is possible also to join two nouns with the conj unct ion e 'and ', as in G.23 Hiram e timan e wa na wan nam e S I u . . . 'Mother and fa ther toLd me that, when we went to MaLo ... '. The singular here treat s the two parent s as one combined idea , 'the fa miLy toLd me ... ' . There is a remarkable examp le of what seems to be bad grammar in Q.79 Ko po wan ko mir�m p�r kete rin buha pu-rOI) , which appears to mean 'You go (with) your mother and the two of you 8haLL (or are to) jU8t prepare food for the pig8 '. The first verbal pronoun is of the 2sg. future , po 'you are to ... '; then comes the noun mir�m 'your mother ', thrown in as a sort of after-t hought ; finally the idea become s less directly expressed; instead of the expect ed ko 'you tWQ 8haLL . .. ', one get s por 'they two 8haH ... ' .

2.2.2. The Obj ect

(a) Its Nature The obj ect may be of the same nature as the subject , i.e. a noun , a pronoun, or some noun-equivalent ot her than a pronoun . The first group does not call for illustration, the second will be fully illustra ted below, in the discus sion of suffixed pronouns . What has been said in the previous sect ion about transit ive verb s must also be borne in mind. The 3sg. pronoun obj ect is frequently - indeed regularly - under stood. So in A.2 Nu-a e ko le 'the river carried (him) away '. In other persons and numbers , however , clarity generally requires the obj ect to be expressed: A.7 HI wal)anl-ri 'he fe d them ', as contrasted with A. 6 HI wal)ani 'he fed her '. The difficulty often is to decide whether the final i is the transit ive ending or the pronoun of the 3sg. Much must depend on etymo logies, which require excursions out side the bounds of the Atchin language , and it is probably safer to say that the third person obj ect is really expressed, but in mo st cases coalesces with the transitive ending, both being i. 23

Somet imes obj ect s of other persons can also be understood, but only if the cont ext is perfectly clear . Thus in p.1 4, as Tahar distributes the fates of men, he says Inik po ron . N'das pu uroi 'You - you wi �� be drowned. The sea wi �� devour (you) '. In the preceding sent ence the obj ect is expressed, when Tahar says Ko bahi p'uroi 'm 'and a shark wi�� eat you'. In the former examp le the person is decided by the pre vious sentence ; in the latter not so .

(b) Its posit ion The natural position of the obj ect is immediately after it s verb , and many examples in the preceding pages show it . There are two other pos sibilit ies , however . The obj ect may in certain cases precede the verb , or it may be attached, if a pronoun , to something that is not a ve rb . The obj ect may be placed before the verb for added emphasis. An examp le of this pract ice is found in B.B Mwar ' a, ni-wat e wa la roni 'As for that man, the ro ak is sai�ing away with him '; K.73 Masal re-re wuJonen ko ar �oJ-moJ ni 'Fish at that time they refused her '. A sim ilar inversion is possible in many ot her languages, including Lat in, for the same purpose . If the verb is fo llowed by an at tribut e, the pronoun obj ect is attached to the attribute rather than to the verb . In a specifically transitive verb , thus in K. 65 Ko e re pi ma pwi las ke le ia 'He intends aoming to see me again ', the adverb kele intervene s between verb and pronoun object (ia), where the transitive ending also is transferred to the adverb . So in N.6 Rets mi weh i luha-ni ni- ma l 'Rets pu��ed the kite ba ak '; A.67 Me las woJe-ni 'I knew it rightly '. An exception to this is provided by the negative of which the second element , te, come s at the end of it s phrase : L.22 Me se las kami te tua ok 'I have not seen you this �ong time '; K.92 No wa po se tsire'r te 'I say you are not to fo �Zow them '. In fact it is really only adverbs of manner - themselves largely (though not exclusively ) time-wrods , that admit of this transference of the obj ect ive pronoun . In some languages - as in the southern Solomons - such a limitation is not so fully made .

2.2.3. Predi cate

(a) Verbless Sentences The absence of the substantive and possessive ve rbs from the At chin language brings about verbless sent ences, as happens in other Me lane sian languages as well . JJ .17 Ni-se Ie? 'What is this? ' is a clear examp le. So is JJ . 20 N�-n�' k nasan na-n i 'the name of this thing is "aoaonut"'. Others are : 24

A.l Na-sup sa, na-tun e-ru 'A certain man had two 80n8 '. A.4l Timak klsen Ie, niri pu rOQ 'My fa ther8 are here, jU8t they '. C.l Tsunob sa, mwara MeJuware 'There was a man, a native of Me8huware ' . H.l Tsunob sa mw i rewtsl Maki, ko wlJewln san 'A cer tain man kit ted a Ma ki; now he had a wife ... '. H.12 I-si ma l il)en7 'Wh08e bed i8 it?' Lit . 'who hi8 bed? ' BB .6 Iki Ie rik7 'You here indeed? ' HH.24 Na-wun na-na rak sa ni-ok " There i8 a 8me tt of 80me food for me t here '. Many of these are naturally the beginnings of stories. The verb to 'remain ', at times approaches the sub stant ive verb in meaning, and the 'same is true of we 'go ', which weakens to e. The fo l lowing are examples of the latter verb : A.12 I-se pi we r�m n'ehl ok 'Here 8hatt be your fo od - that fi 8h'. A .17 Pi we r�m n'eh i ok "That fi 8h 8ha tz. be your fo o d'. A.23 Pi we rami n'ehi ok 'Thi8 fi 8h 8hatt be your food '. C.14 Pi e sale sak 'Thi8 wi tt be my tanding ptace '. U. 5 7 Ro lihe buha I)a inik, pi wa hi :m 'Let U8 two tead your pig; it 8hatt go to the vi t tage '. JJ .21 Pi we sa po ar sekeni hanan a mwi-res re-I)an 'It witt come about that 80meday you wi tt find good fo od in it '. An int eresting case is A.28: Ko pi we tewen ko pin we 'If he wi tt be come her hU8band, then te t it be 80 '. To, however , definit ely refers to remaining in a pla ce, not simply to exist i ng. No lop 'I am 8mart '; no to e-hut 'I am (8taying) on 8hore '.

(b) The Predicative Article The predicat ive art icle in Atchin is ko . Sometimes it hovers between a personal art icle and a predicative art icle in meaning, exact ly as in some Polynesian languages . In a sentence such as Nasan ko Mal 'Hi8 name i8 Ma t', the combined use is evident . More clearly predicative is R.15: Ko 1)90 ko buh� nen ko 'That, then, i8 the pig! ' The final ko appears to add emphasis. So also is s.14 Mar wa , "Mwar' a ko 1)90" 'They 8aid, "That '8 the fe ttow there!"'. cf. JJ .15 Ko n'asan i-se7 'What'8 hi8 name? '

(c) Expression of Time The accidenc e of tense will be studied below . Here we are concerned with the use of the tense signs in simp le sentences; the laws of the sequence of tense in sent ences containing more than one clause will be dealt with in Section 2.4.3. In the previous section it was seen that in spite of apparent paucity of tense signs, Atchin has really quite an 25

efficient mechanism of tense . It remains for us to discuss now how this mechanism of tense is used. The main thing to observe is that the part icles compounded with rna can sometimes be indefinite in themselves if used with another verb sign that shows the past tense , such as tsi le or ko . Even there there is often a slight difference of emphasis which can be expressed by an English perfect as against the past . Mu fu ko would mean 'it was finished' ; e fu ko 'it is fi nishe d', 'that 's the end'. In L. 34 as an int errogat ive e fu k07 'Is it over? ' The one case in which this int erchange does not appear to happen is when ko is strengthened by wa tsin: DD .9-10 Mwi te ni-al san ko watsin. Mu fin ko watsin '(Tahar) made his sun (and) it shone '. DD.21 Mar tsel i pu rOQ ko wa ts in 'Now they just wandered about '. The omi ssion of ko ma kes no difference ; it is the watsin that calls for the rna particle: DD .22 Wanu rnwi res watsin 'The ptace (became ) good '. The case in which rna can have a future reference will be ment ioned in the treatment of conditional clauses below (Sect ion 2.5.1.(e )). The future can never be expressed, however , by the indefinite part icles, but always requires the pa forms . The only instance in which these forms lose their future force is in the still une xplained phrase pu rOQ, which has already been illustrated. There have been a large number of examples already of combinations of two part icles apparent ly incompatible with each other . A special case is seen for instance in L.19: Po e rna po wa la pwi ser-ser 'Come here and run quick ty '. The future particle , 2sg. , is comb ined with the indefinite part icle, 3sg. , before the one verb . The same phrase recurs in A.49. The indefinite particle is fairly often retained with numerals, e.g. in the same A.49: Po e rna , ikir pwi e-ru 'Come , and we shall be two '; as though the phrase e-ru were regarded as a single unit . Again in A.51 Inik, po e wan 'go, you! ' Perhaps in these cases also the frequent use of e rna and e wan in ordinary language has tended to reduce the phrases to a ment al unity, to which another particle can be preposed. The following are the uses of the indefinit e particles, of which e is the 3sg. :

(a) It marks a real present tense, of indefinite duration : No rnata 'J am afraid '; ko se wuretun te 'you are no t te l ling the truth '; no wuretun 'I am tel ling the truth '; no tsualeni na-ak sa e wiel Oba ko rnu WD t ko 'J am cheering a canoe which is coming fr om Oba and has appeared (on the horizon) ' (part of a magic text). If a past tense sign is ad ded after the verb the result is a complete present , i.e. perfect tense : Or tabu tsi le watsin 'They-two have fi nished cooking now '. 26

(b) It serves as a historical or narrat ive past . It ma� be preceded by a clause containing the ma-particle , but not necessarily. The first tale in the appended collect ion begins with a long series of sentences whose only verbal part icle is e, which must be rendered by an English past . "There was an 0 td man, who (e) had two sons. The younger (e) had sores, and his father (e) did not tike him. He (e) sme tted badty .

He (e) threw him away . . . " Under this heading, too, comes the use of the phrase e Ju as the ending of a story . See e.g. K.1 42. About ma there is one thing to be said, and that is that under cer tain conditions it can be indefinite even without a past tense sign . �his is easier to understand when it is realised that in the neighbour ing Vao and Wala, on each side of Atchin, as we ll as in Oba, Raga and Maewo , farther away, ma is normally an indefinite particle . In a magic text come the words : Me were-were-ni nu-w� sak Ie 'I pray over this water of mine '. To translate 'I prayed' or 'have prayed' is clearly out of place . The text goes on: M. pi min i . 'Let M. dr ink it. Ta-mats ok mwi sa we. There is some spirit he re. Mumun ni-wat, mumun na i, It is the sp irit of a stone, of a tree, na-won ok mwi sa �a. tet it be nothing tha t is here. '

There can be no que st ion of a past here; the man on whom the incantation is being said is still sick ! In the text previously quoted about cheering a canoe, the last clause mu wot ko is past : 'it has just appeared' .

2.3. ATTRI BUTES

2.3. 1. Attributes of Object and Time Words

(a) Attribute of Subject and Object An attribute is a qualifying word, or word-equivalent , and the des cr iptive attribute of the obj ect-word is called in European languages an adj ective . We have already seen above that Atchin has no real ad ject ives. Hence the term "attribute of the noun" or obj ect -word . At the same time a purely adj ect ival construction is possible , and that has been illustrated. The second construction of the descriptive noun-attribute is a purely verbal one , in which it agrees with the verb of the main sentence in tense and with its own subject in number and person . The following examples will show how the adj ect ival at tribute may thus be used in the indefinite, past , and future tenses . 27

1. Indefinite : Wowon vanu e lep 'a big mountain '; no worsurlm e pe ko res 'I be Zieve (you) that you are good', i.e. 'I be Zieve you are good '. In the texts: B.28 E tei na-ak sa e lap 'He fashions a Zarge canoe '. E. l Tsunob sa e ma-homb 'A (certain) man was hungry '. H.32 Se re na-mboQ e lap wor 'Not many days yet '. Q.27 Na-mboQ e nats kele 'Another day again '.

2. Past: A.70 Mar lasi buh� san mwi lap 'They saw his many pigs '. H.9 Mu kete na-na mwi tsats pitew wiJewin 'He di d a bad thing to the woman '. L. 40 Na-tum ror ln mwi tsats 'Your son 's mind was bad '.

3. Future : K.122 Po tsiri wa ni puloh nats pwi sa 'Let out another bamboo (fuZZ) of ants '. L.7 Ra re-roQ ikir ni-wa pwi lap 'We think we a great crowd ', i.e. 'we think there wiZZ be a great crowd of us '. From the Mi ssion translations : Par lasi matsiQan sami pu res 'they shaZZ see your good works '; po kete lolomam pi ran 'make thou our hearts good'. In these future examples the construction is part icularly clear ; the thing ha s not yet come to pass, hence the quality cannot be ascribed by an attributive word. 'They shaZZ see your good works ', lit . 'works your (shaZZ be) good - "shaZZ be " - because you have not yet done them '. 'Make our hearts (shaZZ be) cZean - but they are not yet so! ' "We see how the futurity of the main action is transferred to the action also : the quality cannot be present unt il the act which is to produce it is done . All this is perfectly logical; but Atchin ha s carried out the logic thoroughly; the maj ority of languages do not ." (Capell 1935 : 196) . We have also seen that this attribute may stand by itself and form a subj ect in its own right (Section 2.2.1.) . The treatment of the numeral at tribute is exactly similar to that of the adj ective .

(b) Attributes of the Time-word Thi s expression is used here in place of the European name 'adverbial modifier of the verb '. It should, first , be observed that an interrog ative adverb comes last in its clause . Thus : A.18 Po wa-waroQ ke le swe l iQ7 'When wiZZ you be gathering sheZZ fish again ?' The at tribut es of the time word agree in Atchin with the word they modify as far as tense is concerned, but they are always in the 3sg. 28

Bearing in mind that just as there is a purely attribut ive use of the adj ective , so there is also of the adverb , we may now illustrate the cases where the adverbial expression agrees in tense with the main verb . Thus : K. 106 Kam i kab ral pwl-res 'As for you, go about your business decentLy ' . L.19 Po wa la pwl ser-serl Pe wise? 'Run quickLy! Why shouLd I? ' L. 40 Ram ral mw i res 'We waLked peaceabLy ' (lit. 'weH ') L.44. Ra ral pwl res wat sln 'We shaLZ waLk peaceab Ly now '. M. 3 Na-vu l ok mwi sa a e re p'ok kisen 'Another month has passed and it is the same again '. P.ll Po tara pu we l e-wele, ko po mats 'You wi LL grow oLd a LittLe and you wiLL die '. R. 2 Po lai buha pw i sa pwl ser-ser 'Get a pig ready '. R. 3 Inik mwi tslga ko maki mu to m'parav 'You were not there and the Maki has been put off ti LL Zater '. R.43 Mwi ran mwi res 'It dawned fu LLy '. U.19 Inik po wa la pu womu 'You set sai L first! ' DD .3 No-uJ m'u J mw i lap 'the rain rained greatLy '.

2.3. 2. Prepositions and Case Relationship s

For the actual forms and lists of the prepositions , see Section 3.3.1. The first point to not ice in the syntax is the entire absence of the preposition with name s of places, either 'to' or 'at ', and this is contrary to the usage of many of the surrounding Me lanes ian languages. A. 1 2 E tsubul wa la NoriJere 'She goes down to the shore at Norishere ' . A.15 E tsubul kele Tiwi l 'She goes down to Tiwi L again '. C.15 Ko ma r tewn i MeJuwa re 'and they buried him at Me s huware '. F.10 WiJewin mi wlel �a-ok Malunbek 'The woman waLked there, to MiiZunbek ' . G.24 Timan e mlran or tur Onema 'The fa ther and mother stood at Onema ' . The rule ha s occasional exceptions, as in C.14 Ko ina pe h�J te watsln re na-amp hon, 5 I Orema I 'And perhaps I shaLL go ashore at the sacred fire, at OremaZ'. Here the preposit ion indicat es 'situated at ', 'belonging to ' a place , rather than simple location in it , and 51 is in any case the possessive preposit ion. With other nouns, however, a preposit ion must be used. For mot ion towards, this preposition is tsl (hi), which is really a noun, as it takes the suffixed pronouns of the possessive forms . At the same time it must not be confused with the actual possessive si. Both the long and the short forms of tsl are in use. The suffixed forms are : 29

Singular Plural lsg. ts i k lpl . incl. tsir 2sg. tsim lpl. excl . tsimemam 3sg. tsin 2pl. tsimam(i) 3pl . t sir( i)

The irregular form of the lpl .excl . is to be noted. Thi s is the form given by Layard, but no examples are to hand . The use of the prepo sition can now be shown: H.29 E wa tsi matuak 'He goes to my mo ther 's bro ther '. K.20 Pe tuloni tsihim 'I will bring her to you '. P.9 Po luha ma tsihik 'Come back to me ! ' u.16 Ko e wan tsi ta-Ba nat un 'He came to the Oba man 's son '. The preposition is omitted in some temporal phrases, such as A.60 ta lim weral 'in fi ve days (from) today '. The occasional use of double preposit ions calls for mention next . Two types of doubling are found : (i) combination with Qa, and (ii) com binat ion of preposit ions of similar meaning . In one inst ance both types are combined.

(�) Qa. The root meaning of this word, when it is a preposition, seems to be motion towards a place , very much like tsi. In compounds , how ever , that meaning is not retained. Re ha s general locative signifi cance, and re-Qa seems to be merely a little more definite. The com pound re-Qa takes the personal suffixes, though neither element of the compound does so when used separately . Similarly ne 1s locative , but the compound ne-Qa indicates mot ion towards and take s suffixes. B.26 Ko tala ne Qa-hi :m7 'Have you an adze at home?' B.30 Na-mban ne Qa-hi:m 'I have a sai l at home '. H.23 Ko .e hili mel iQen. e lek re-Qan 'He di gs a place and gets inside it '. K. 54 Lebon Sa e mats; e matur re-Qan 'Lebon the First is dead; he lies in it (sc. a certain clam shell) '. K. 85 Ko pwere re n'ai e-lap ne-Qa la 'But there are plenty of ho les in the trees along the shore '.

(ii) Two preposit ions of similar meaning may be juxtaposed . Thus wa has already been treated as an adverbial directive of mo tion away from the speaker. It is also preposit ional in, e.g. : D.4 E tabe na-ak wa la 'He carried his canoe to the shore '. K.121 Mwi re pwi sam wa Lebon Sa 'He wanted to strike at Lebon the First '. It is compounded with re and the re sultant compound occurs , e.g. in : A.38 E sa we re mwerek sa 'He climbed into a mwerek tre e '. B.ll Wawa sa mu wo lo we re nu-a 'A wawa tree spread its roots into the water '. 30

B.12 Mwar' a mw i ka-kal wa re wawa 'The man heZd on to the wawa tree ' . H.26 Ko mi tama r we-re nu-wal 'He bent down into the water '. H.27 Ko mu nu we-re nu-wa 1 'He pushed him into the water '. Q.19 E te ne-wls we-re na-ak 'He puts his bow into the aanoe '. It is perhaps possible to connect the we in some of the se cases to the verb and still treat it as a directive , independent of the preposition, but not in all . An interesting example of the combination of (i) and (ii) is seen in K. 85, where the double preposition is again compounded with Qa as above , and then the 3sg. is added: Ra how we reQan 'We aan take she Zter in it '. Anot her compound is e re, and there is also an examp le of re it self reduplicate:Ci in K. 73 Masal re-re wufonen ko ar mof-mof ni 'Fish at the former time they refused her '. The other compound is seen in : A.62 Mu wala e re maki si timan 'He danaed in his fa ther 's Ma ki '. K. 75 Mor rets e re ne-hi:m 51 Lebon Sa 'They aonversed in Lebon the First 's house '. The form Qa-tan for 'a·t this pZaae ' appear s to be similarly comp ounded of Qa-e- and the word tan, originally a noun meaning 'earth, Zand'. Atchin and English do not always agree in their methods of expressing case relat ionships. Thus in na-ak sa e wiel Oba 'a aanoe aoming fr om Omba '. there is no preposition at all , because the place-name Omb a is

used . In other connections ron l = 'from '. It seems as though Oba it self is already compounded wit h a preposit ion not nat ive to Atchin (or possible an article?}, as we ha ve ta-Ba 'men of aba '. The transit ive ending often takes the place of an English preposition, e.g. Pe were-were-ni n'tasak 'I wiZZ speak to (or pray over) my saZt water ' (magic text) ; Ko weral pi ma tur porei-a 'And tonight Zet her dream of me ' (magic text) ; Pe wofe 1 iwon 'I wiZZ knoak (out) his tooth'

(magic text) , wo fe usually = 'fuZZy, rightZy, proper Zy '.

2.4. THE COMPOUNV SENTENCE

By compound sentence is meant one which consist s of a number of parallel principle clauses, not subordinated one to another . Sentenc es containing subordinate clauses are dealt with in Section 2.5.

2.4.1. Methods of JOining Clauses

There are two methods of combining clauses into more complex unit s, viz . parataxis and subordinat ion . Some languages prefer to subordinate all ideas to one main thought . This is the method of Lat in , Greek, Sanskrit , Japanese and ot her languages. Ot hers join ideas in a series 31

of successive statement s, all on the same grammatical footing, and rather like links in a chain. English tends to favour this analytic , or disj unctive met hod, which is most ful ly developed in Chinese, Siamese and kindred languages. At chin also follows the analytic method, even more definitely than many Melanesian languages . This 'much will be apparent from the Texts. To join it s sentences - or ideas, fqr we have seen at the beginning of this section that idea and sentence tend to be one and the same in Atchin - Atchin make s liberal use of conj unctions, of which the chief is ko . Ko is the equivalent of English 'and ' in joining clauses, while e more properly joins individual words : miran e timan 'his mother and I father '. Apparent exceptions to the proper use of ko are found, e.g.

A. 37 Iniri tsunob e-sal)awul ko wiJewin e-sal)awul ma r wan . . . 'The ten

men and ten women aame .. . " but here it must be remembered that the occurrences of the verbal part ic le e turns the two phrases into two clauses in At chin though they are not so in English. There is a real exception in Q.64 Mar lasi Jowul, Mal-weawel) ko Wala 'they saw ShowuL, Mar-weweang and WaLa ', where the third place-name is joined to the others by ko . Examples of ko joining clauses are very frequent , and we take only a couple: A.3 E tor-toni wawa s� ko e wa e-hut 'He aatahes hoLd of a wawa tree and goe8 a8hore '. AA .9 Tuan mu wa la I)a-ok ko tuan mu wala I)a-e l 'One ran that way and another this '. Ko is also used �t the beginning of a sent ence where no conj unction at all is required in English , and in this it is sometimes difficult to distinguish between the predicat ive art icle ko and the conjunction ko . The following cases, however , are clear : H.l Tsunob sa mwi rewtsi maki . Ko wiJewin san 'There was a aertain man who ki LLed a Ma ki. Now he ha d a wife '. P.l Ko na-mbol) sa ke le ko e tel wen-wa-sal)awU I 'Another day again he make8 a thou8and '. BB . 10-ll Wa-i-e! ko po Ju e-pe ko7 'HeLLo! Where are you paddLing then? ' HH.10 Na-riv, ko pe e-be7 'Rat, how did you get here? ' The P.l example shows that ko can also be used inside a sentence before a verb has been expressed. The preceding phrase in P.l is of a similar const ruction : Mew i ko e te i wen-wa-sal)awU I 'One day he make8 a thou8and'. This usage is only to be by recalling the fact that expression of time , even though they may not vary for tense , and so have been treated in this grammar as obj ect-words, are still by nature time words , and in essence verbs; therefore they can practically form a clause in their 32

own right , and hence be followed by a co-ordinating conj unction . The construction is given a little more explicit ly in P.2: Ko na-mbo� sa

kele ko e tei 'And one day again he makes , ... There being no verb 'to be ', one cannot say "there was another day when he made . . . " Atchin does not stand alone in Melanesia in this respect; Omba also makes frequent use of ko at the beginning of sentences, Raga uses ke, and a similar usage is found in Indonesia, where Malay and some other languages have maka or it s local equivalent . Other co-ordinat ing conj unctions are dealt with elsewhere . Treatment of conditions is reserved for Section 2.5.l.(e}. One that ha s not elsewhere been noticed is an adversat ive use of �a, to disj oin clauses like English 'but '. For example : B. 18-l9 Pwere-pwere Ie me wa�ani, �a e-wise re-�an7 'I have fed this sow, but wha t is there in it? ' The same word can also mean 'because ', as in K.104 Ko mwi res ko Ini mu tur tser, ko �a mwi kete �a ka maur ko 'It was good that he re mained fixed, for because he did so you are aLive now '. The first �a here means 'because ', the second 'so'. The same word somet ime s answers to English 'whiLe ': K.86 Mar wan �a la �a no-uJ m'uJ 'They went to the

shore whiLe the rain was fa LLing ' (second �a = 'whi Le '). Another conj unction that ha s co-ordinating force is a, as shown in the examples that follow : A.74 PI wan a pwi sa pwi lasi na-rahin re lamBJ 'If it shouLd happen tha t a man sees the track in the bush '. K.76 Win a e mats, ani i-si mo r rets ne �a-in7 'That girL is dead, so who are the two taLking in there?' It may be adversat ive : L. 7 Ra re-ro� iklr ni-wa pwi lap re no-ur el, a mu ror mw i tsats 'We thought we shouLd be a great crowd on this isLand, but his mind was bad'. One examp le is rather doubtful in meaning : N.29 A ko e-wise mo hatsi tsu�on pitewi 7 'And why did you bite your Lip at him? ' In very many cases Atchin dispenses with the conj unction altogether , as we shall see in the following paragraphs . The whole method of the language is one of parallel arrangement of principle clauses; even such subordinating conjunctions as 'when ', 'in order that' are not represented. Thus, where English would say , "When I ha ve finished I shaLL come ", Atchin will say "I win finish and I wi n come "; the conjunctions in use are co-ordinating and not subordinat ing, with very few exceptions.

2.4.2. Om i ssion of Conjunctions

Side by side with this tendency to express conj unctions more than - to English ways of thought - is necessary, Atchin frequently employs a 33

series of parallel clauses without conj unct ion at all. The clauses thus ranged side by side may stand in any one of three relations to each other . They may be (a) simp le co-ordinated clauses, (b) noun" clauses, (e) temporal clauses, (d) causat ive clauses.

(a) Simple Co-ordinations Simple co-ordinat ion is made without co-ordinating conj unctions when the subj ect of both clauses is the same . Thus : A.69 Ina pe to tsir e furi natuk 'I shaLL wait (and) fo LLow after my son '. B.6 Mwi ka l i pe pu luha, mw i kila wa-tan 'He turned as though to come back, (and) Looked down '. B.8 Mu wa la mi wa hi :m mo wurei timan miran 'He ran (and) went home (and) toLd his fa ther (and) mother '. As the last examp le shows , another subj ect may intervene without requiring a conj unction, providing this subj ect refer to the same person or persons as the first . This naturally leads to the treatment of noun clauses.

(b) Noun Clauses Noun clauses are clauses which take the place of a noun , i.e. are expansions of a noun, and therefore subject or obj ect , themselves, of a verb . In the fol lowing examples the clauses shown are subj ects or objects of a verb , but they follow it immediately without expressed conj unction. F.16 TsUnob mar re par rewtsi re-I)a mu kete no-uf m'uJ 'The men wanted (that) they shouLd kill him because he had made it rain ' . Here what they wanted is the natural obj ect of the verb re 'want ', but it happens to be a clause , viz . pa r rewtsi 'they should ki n (him) '; the reason is given next by a clause introduced by re-I)a 'because ' (lit . 'in-that '). ' G.4 Ko se lasi te mw i I iw-l iw ehi Ie? 'Don 't y ou see she has been shooting fish here? ' The obj ect of lasi 'see ', is the clause following, mwi liw-liw ehi Ie. A slight ly different examp le follows, one of the rare cases in the texts in which the noun clause is subj ect of the other verb : Q.5 Ko e wan tutufan mi wl-wiel 'And it came (to pass that) his eLder brother was wa lking about '. The subj ect of wan - what came to pass - is given in the following clause, which, however , is in no way joined to the verb . A complex case is seen in Q.25 Ko mar re pa r mul par tabu 'They wanted to go home and cook '. Two things are the obj ect of their, wish (i) going home , and (ii) cooking . Both follow each other without con junction. The first comes under the heading we are discussing at l

present , the second under that which we have already discussed. A curious example is that of A.38 Mw i lasiri iniri e lap 'He saw that they were numerous '. Literally it is 'He saw them, they are many ', and with its ant icipatory obj ect it is exactly the idiom commonly known in Greek.

(c) Temporal Clauses There will be more to be said about the methods emp loyed in At chin to express time relat ions. Suffice it to say here that the method of parataxis is followed here also , and very frequently without any con junction at all. It is the latter point that is illustrated in the following examples: A.59 Mo r la-lap watsin, mwar' a timan mw i kete maki 'When the two were grown up, the man 's fa ther made a maki '. K.7 Na-m'bUk pwi lap ko po ar tigei 'When my granddaughter is grown up, you shall marry her ', lit . 'sha ll grow up and you shall ... ' . K. 52 Pe un pe kete pi-pe ni-se 'When I dive, what shall I do ?' lit . 'I shall di ve (and) I shalZ do it shall be like what ?'

(d) Causative Clauses The reason for an act may sometime s be indicated without a conj unc tion , in spite of the example given above involving re-Qa 'because '. ' A.l Timan e ro pw itsa ni , na-wun e tsats 'His father di dn't like him be cause his smell was bad'.

2.4.3. The Sequence of Tenses

One result of the fondness of Atchin for expressing time relations in preference to spatial relat ions is that the verb occupies the centre of attention . Hence the necessity arises to decide , when there is more than one verb in a sentence, what scheme of tense construction shall be followed. As a general princ iple a past tense will be followed by a past , a future by a future , but it is not necessary to insert the various signs of tense that follow the verb , such as ko, etc. The main tense is first defined, then only the verbal particles need follow the sequence. We have already seen this scheme in operation in the com pound and complex sentences which have formal examples of other point s of grammar . We now proceed to group them .

(a) Future Sequence The first examples we shall take will be those of future sequence, because the future particles are the most clearly defined, and hence illustrate the princ iples most clearly. We begin with K. 44, which we have already analysed from another point of view at the beginning of this section (see 2.1. ): 35

Ko mo lasi na-mwer 'And you wi LL see a parrot

+ pwi sa + it wi LL be one

+ pu row + it wi n fLy

+ pwi tsovha , + it wi n pass

+ ko po lihi + and you wi LL hang yourseLf

+ po mats + and you wi LL di e '.

Schemat ised in this way , it is clear that the main verb - po 1 ihi - sets the tense for all that follow . Everything depend s on the flying by of a parrot , and that is in it self future ; the only thing that is not contemplated as future in relation to the main verb is the seeing the parrot ; that must be past (mo) before anyt hing else take s place. Now K. 52-53: Po un wa 'You wiLL dive ko po se tsibari te, + + and you wi LL no t touch it,

+ ko po luwa mam we-re�an + but you wi LL put your tongue into it '.

This examp le is simpler in every way - though the ultimate English translat ion of it will remain to be considered below (2 .5.l.(a) ) - and it is obvious that one action depends on the action preceding it . Each is future in re lation to the preceding . This is the principle behind the syntax of the adj ective and adverb , treated as time words .

P.12 Po wor wan 'You shaLL be born (hi ther) ,

+ bo� pwi sa + da y it shaLL be one, ko po ma ts: + + and you shaLL di e:

+ ko pw i sa, + And it shaLL be one, bo�in pwi e-l im, + + his days shaLL be five,

• + ko pi ma t 5 + and he shaLL di e '.

The logical dependence of each clause is here perfect ly clear .

(b) Past Sequence Although one doe s come across passage s of equally consecutive past tenses, yet the rule in the past is not so strict ; providing the time is definitely set by the ma in verb , the others may be in the indefin it e tense. A passage in the past tense is DD.1-2 , describing a famine that once occurred on Atchin . Here we have : Mar lasi ni-mara, 'They saw the famine,

+ ni-mara mw i lap; + the famine was great, ma r ok JObwe klam ni; + + they aLso re Lated it to us,

+ nam ok ro�e �a ma r wur ei , + we he ard how they spoke, they heard the wind, + mar ro�e ni-la� + it is great, it is great � + e sar e-lap .,. + 36

Here the past sequence set by the main verb ma r lasi is held unt il th e last clause, which describes the wind, and is not of such paramount importance to the story : one can presume the wind was a hurricane ! That is how the past sequence is regulated: that which must logically be described as past is so described; that which can be presumed to agree in time with the preceding goes int o the inde finite. So in A.3: Nu-a mu ko le. 'The water carried him off. Hi ma , � � It came to pass, e tor-toni wawa sa � � he catc hes hoZd of a wawa

� ko e wa e-hut. � and he gets ashore '. Logic tells us that if the one first event is past , then the others are so. But at the same time the narrator is at liberty to ch ange back into the past when he wishes, and in this tale he proceeds : Ko e 1 ek. 'And he stays . mwi lek -lek � � He stayed and stayed ... Ko e h iIi e -hi : m s a � � And he chooses a house and so forth with apparently indiscriminate mixture of tenses. How much of this mixture is due to the fact already pointed out that- the ma-forms are originally themselves also indefinite in meaning cannot be sa id, but the result is the same .

(c) Indefinite Sequence In the same way it is possible to have a long sequence of indefinite tenses, and these may not all ne cessarily be pre sent in meaning ; they may be "historic" tenses, i.e. pasts. The use of the indefinite adds vividne ss to the telling , and that has been felt so widely that many European languages also permit the use of a historical pre sent . French goes so far as to use a historic infinitive for vividness's sake . An Atchin example may be drawn from B.32-42, which need not be quoted in full here. It is int erest ing that after that long passage in the indefinite tense, we get a sudden shift ing back into the past : in B.4l we read : Timan miran ar wa la, mar lasi buha 'his fa ther and mother run, they sa w the pigs '. Perhaps the fact that the indefinit e sequence is in B.40 interrupted by a short passage of direct sp eech account s for the breach of sequenc e almost immediately aft erwards.

2. 5. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

It is co nceivable that a language might verbalise it s adj ectives and adverbs and yet have a full set of subordinating conj unctions for such ideas as time , reason, condit ion and re sult . At chin, however , is defective in this re spect also , and all these types of clause - adverbial 37

clauses in English and therefore subordinate - and rendered in Atchin by clauses arranged in parallel. In the section on the omission of conj unct ions we saw that it wa s possible to render many of our English ideas of adverbial clauses in Atchin without a use of conj unctions at all . We go on now to consider the various met hod s , employed, within the bounds of parataxis, to express the fivefold relat ions of time , place, result , purpose and condition .

2. 5.1. Types of Clauses

(a) Temporal Clauses Temporal clauses state the time an act ion takes place . In the Mission translat ions we find an .occasional examp le of swe l i� (there spelled sive l ig) introduc ing a temporal clause. This, however , is in correct . The word is an interrogat ive , not a relat ive . The relative 'when ' is usually expressed by a circumlocut ion built on the verb 'to come ', very much in the manner of the Biblical English "i t came to pass". Some of the preceding examples will be recalled in which a literal translation in those terms has been offered. The literal

English rendering is thus 'it came and . . . ', or in the future 'it wiLL come and . . . '. Sometimes the 'and ' is omitted, as we have already seen. In the following examples , the trans lat ion 'when ' is given to save space, but a mental rendering int o the literal English will always make any given case clear . First an examp le where the literal translat ion is also the final tran slat ion :

F.8 Hi wan ko tewen san mw i karasi wifen, e wa ••• 'It came to pass that the husband deceived his wife, and said (or saying) , H.ll Hi wan ko tutufan mwi lasi tev-tev re wi ewin, ko e se wurei te ••• 'When the eLder brother saw the scarification on the woman, he said ... ' Examples in the future : F.7 Pi wan tewen san pi wa e-hut samen , ko no-uf e uf 'Whenever the husband went to the bush aLone, it rained'. From the Mission translat ions, with spelling changed to suit the system used here : Hi wan e ro-rom 10m tone nono 'k 'Whi Le he was thinking about these things ' . Pi wan ko pi pep natun noreman pwi sa 'When she (shaLL) bring forth a ma Le chiLd'. Kab wan kab betselehi pu res tipwis I}.a mi ar wo r, pi wan ka sesewe i 'Go and seek di LigentLy for the chi Ld that has been born, and when you fi nd him ... ' . Sometime s the word wan is used without verbal particles , and then the meaning is somewhat different . Thus: 38

P.9-l0 Ko inik, po tur, po tur wan na-vul s�m pu we le-wele pu-roQ ko po mats 'You wiZZ remain, you wi ZZ remain unti Z your months are a few, onZy, and you wi ZZ die '. P.12 Po wor wan bOQ pwi sa, ko po mats 'You shaZZ be born untiZ one day, and you wi ZZ di e '. Q.48 E lai lai wan e lai buha e-saQawul 'He brought and brought ti ZZ he had brought ten pigs '. In other cases again, the time relat ionships are resolved into re lat ions of cause and effect , and the two clauses are joined by 'and '. They are expressed then in order of their occurrence, not in the English order : "When I come I wi ZZ buy " become s 'I wi ZZ come and I wi ZZ buy': Pe ma pe wul i; 'We wi ZZ see when I have finished do ing it ': Pe kete tsi le ko ra ni s i; 'I wi H fetch it when I have fi nished eating ': Pe han tsile, pe wan pe lai; these are the simplest possible terms in which temporal sequence can be expressed.

(b) Local Clauses Place where is expressed in Atchin by means of the ligative art icle comb ined with a preposit ion. E.l Mwi lasi ne-Qa mu te re-Qan 'He found a pZace wh- he pZanted it ', i.e. 'he found a pZace where he pZanted'. The wh- expresses the relative part of the English 'wh-ere ', as con trasted with the demonstrative 'th' of 'th-ere '. K.85 Ra how we re-Qan 'We can take sheZter therein '. This example already quot ed, shows a similar use of the ligat ive .

(c) Consecutive Clauses Consecutive clauses express the result of a prior action. There is only one clear example in all the texts, viz. : 0.29 Mar re-rake pini, ml mats 'They embraced him aZtogether, so that he died'. In this there is no equivalent for the English 'so that ', simp ly the cause and the result side by side.

(d) Final Clauses A final clause indicat es purpose. In Atchin it may be expressed by the conj unction Qa followed by a future, or by a future without Qa. In the second case it is hardly distinguishable from two main clauses. Q.85 Po wan po Ju te na-amp si tim�m 'Just go and Zight your fa ther 's fire ' (or : 'just go to tight ... ') 3.38 E so rOQ woJe ni te Qa pi rna 'He did not think that ought to come ' • U.32 Ko e se wehi te na-ha Qa pi we talin na-mban 'But he did not puZZ out a creeper to be a rope for the saiZ '. 39

(el Conditional Clauses The expression of conditions is rendered difficult in At chin by the fact that the equivalent for 'if ' is a time word, and so can itself vary for tense. This word, or rat her phrase , is mwi re, pwi re o It ha s already been suggested that this phrase may be a functional passive , and that the construc tion therefore may mean 'it being wished' or 'in tended', or better perhaps the French 'etant que', 'given that '. The past tense of this is employed when a ' condition must be completely ful , filled before the result follows ; the fut,ure tense is used in other cases. There is one inst anc e in the text s in which the equivalent of 'if' is omitted, viz . 0.14 Mar re par wurei na-na pw i sa '(if) they wished to say anything '. It might perhap s be better to regard such an examp le as a sort of telescoped form , standing for mw i re mar re par •••

'it being given tha t they wi shed . . . '. Other cases in which a similar telescoping best explains the construction are the following : G.B Pwi re pu wure i ni-se, ... pi ma pu wu reim ni 'If it wants to teZZ you anything Zet it come and teZZ you '.

G.ID Pwi re po wurei ni-se, .•• ko po ma 'If you want to say anyt hing, then come ... '

0. 9 Mwi-re ka wurei ni-se, ko kab ar ma ••• 'If you wish to say anything, then come back ' In all these examp les the verb of the first clause is 'wish ', which is also the verb that goes to make the At chin equivalent for 'if'; henc e the telescoping. Where the ideas all have their full expression , the following types of conditions are found :

1) Conditions that can be fulfilled, i.e. that lie in the future .

(a) Mwer a mwi re mi ma ko po wure i ni pe wa tsi Ma l-t abe 'If that man comes te Z Z him I have gone to Ma L-tabe '. Lit . 'that man, it shaZZ have been given that he has come, then say to him I shaZZ have gone to Ma Z-tabe '. The going must be completed before it can be told of; hence

mwi re followed by the past tense, mi ma . ' The method of making up for the lack of a real fut ure-perfect tense is interesting . In the Texts: R. 6 Ko mw i re-I)a mw i-res, ko no lai sa 'If aZZ (shaLZ have) gone we ZZ, I shaLZ bring one '. R.7 Ko mw l re-I)a mar rewtsi a, ko e Ju 'If they shaZZ ha ve ki ZZed me, then that 's aZZ about it '. Notice the strengthening of mwi re with I)a. This is optional . This type of condition is the one known in Latin grammar as the nearer future .

(b) G.8 Pwi re pu wurei ni-se , .,. pi ma pu wureim ni 'If it wants to say anything, Let it come and te LL you '. 40

We have already had this under considerat ion abo ve . The tense seems to be decided by the fact that the creature in question is at liberty to come if it shall (in the future ) make up it s mind to say something . (Future sequence, answering to the incomplete form of the nearer future condition in Lat in. )

(c) Futures in all the clauses. Examples : P.IO Pwi-re pwi sa. pi we ma-Iakel pu-roQ . ko pi mats 'If there be another, he shaLL become just a young man and (then) di e '. T.9-10 No kete hore. pwi-re Qa mirak wU-Qa tsotsik ... pwl namp . ko pe hitsi re-Qan 'I tabooed it, so that if my mother or sister ... rested, then I wouLd copuLate with her '. The essential difference in these clauses is the mere possibility of the condition's being fulfilled; it is a "remoter future" condition . If they were to rest at the given stone , then the result would follow. It is possible, but may no t happen .

2) Conditions that cannot be fulfilled, i.e. that lie in the present or past .

(a) Conditions lying in the present begin in English wit h "if it were ... ", then something else would be the result . Thi s is the Latin incomplete impossible. In At c hin the 'if ' is future , and the main verb present (ind efinite) , but unfortunately neither ex ample shows what happens to the verb of the 'if' clause . The examples are: S.30 Pwi-re Qa ina. ko no mwair 'If it were I (who am the cuLprit), I shouLd be Left-handed'. S.36 Pwi -re Qa ina. ko no woIi pwere-pwere nen 'If it were I, I shouLd be bringing the sow '. Both these are obviously impossible conditions , as they depend on what is happening at the present moment , and that is something quite differ ent .

(b) Condit ions that are completely past and can never be fulfilled. K.I04 Mwl tsa ko kab ma ts nov-nov Qa-ok 'If it had not been so you wouLd aLL have died there '. s.28 Pwi re Qa ina. ko kab lasi pe mot-mot 'If it had been I, you wouLd have seen that I was bLackened'. The better translat ion would probably be, 'If it is I, then you wi LL see that I am bZackened (but I am not, so it is not I) '. This makes it a cross between an incomplete impossible (first clause} and a nearer future (second clause), and such crosses are quite possible .

2. 5.2. Spee ch , Di rect and Indirect

In the Mission translat ions indirect speech is always introduced by the words e pe Qa 'so that ', e.g. mar rOQe e pe Qa ma r taQ e lep 'They 41

heard that they were arying greatly ', i.e. 'that there was muah lament ation '. This is clearly a misunderstanding of a construction , and in the Text s speech is never introduced in that way at all . In fact the nat ive always prefers the vividne ss of direct quotation , and generally avoids indirect report of a speech. In telling a story , he will switch across from the third person in which the narrative is told, into the first or second person of the speaker, simply putting in e wa 'he says ', or whatever form of the verb is called for . It is to be noticed that as in Mota this wa is the quotational verb ; the ordinary verb 'to say ' or 'speak " is wurei, which may also be transitive (incidentally trans itive verb), meaning 'to say to a per8on '. Take a passage such as JJ . 4: Ko mu wurei, mu wa, "Inik, sa-mem le-ro7" 'He spoke 8aying, "A�e you all by your8elf here ?'" In the same story, JJ .7 Lebon Sa e wurei e wa , "Tsunob sa mwi ma mw i Hi s i a" 'Lebon the Fir8t said: "a man aame and 8aw me "'. There is no real English equivalent for e wa . Examples will be found on almost every page of the Texts. Should it become ' absolutely necessary to report another person 's speech in the indirect form, then this is done in a sim'ilar way . Take G.20: Tasin e wa , "Timar e wurei-ri ra se uroi te" 'The younger brother said, "Our fa ther 8aid we were no t to eat it"', or G.22-23 Tasin e wurei n i, "M iran e timan e wa na wan nam e S i u . .. 'The younger brot her 8aid, "Mo ther and fat her 8aid we 8hould go to Ma lo II ' Here there is no connect ing word at all except the formula words e wa, and then the first person expressing the instructions as required .

3. MORPHOLOGY

3. 1. THE NOUN

3.1.1. Noun Formation

In most cases noun and verb are alike in form. UJ 'to rain '; no-uJ 'the rain '. In other cases , verbal nouns may be formed by the addit ion of -en to the corresponding verb : rets 'to talk '; retsen 'talking '. These take the sa- possessive : retsen san 'hi8 talking '. Amongst un derived nouns, there are some special vocative relat ionship terms which are worthy of note: te 'father! '; pe 'mother '; tu-tu 'elder brother ' . An instructive example is R.45: Te, po mao Timak e re-roQ ra hani na- 10k 'Father, aome . My (other) fa ther want8 U8 to eat the pig '. See al so : K.21 Tutu, ko kam lasi Ie-tar a7 'Brother8, did you 8ee that old woman? ' L. ll Pe, po lek Qa-ok 'Mo ther, you stay there '. 42

Q. 37 Te , re-roQ kob tuloni a Ie 'Father, you intend to bring me here (to be married) '. R. 39 Timak buha san sa ne lolo'm 'There i8 one of my fa ther '8 pig8 in the hoit8e '. LL .14 Te, n�-n� Qa mui tsats 'Father, that �a8 a bad thing '.

3. 1.2. Ki nds of Nouns

Atchin does not readily form compounds; nouns of instrument and agent are expressed by circumlocutions . The ligative Qa is used in a number of ways. Thus a mur derer is tsunob Qa e rewtsi 'a man who kiZZ8 '. The most interesting format ion is that of nouns expressing time , some of which are compounded with no-ut 'the pZace '. Thus : no-ut e pOQ , no-ut m'boQ 'night '; or somet imes a mere imper sonal phrase suffices as in mu ror pOQ '(when it was) morning '. These phrases really come under the heading of time words, since they vary for tense , but they can for con venience be recorded here. Examples of them are : 0.9 Mwi re ka wure i ni-se, ko kab ar ma no-ut pu pOQ we ral, ko kab wurel a ni 'If you want to 8ay 80mething, come Za ter, thi8 evening (lit . 'when the pZace 8haZZ be dark today ') and teZZ me it '. 0.15 No-ut m'boQ mor matur ko mar ma 'At night they-two were 8Zeeping and they (the other8) came '. C.l Mi wan-wan no-ut pwi raY-raY 'He continued ti ZZ nightfaZZ ' (lit . 'the pZace it evening-ed'). C.2 Ko mu to mori no-ut pu pOQ 'It was nearZy night '. The inhabitant s of a place may be expressed in various ways. (i) By a preposition that in the original IN is taw, and become s in At chin variously to, ta or ti . Thus : To-Vao 'the peop Ze of Vao '; to-Wala 'the men of Wa Za '; to-Rano 'the men of Rano '; to-Tsan 'the men of Atchin '. These forms seem to be restricted to the inhabitant s of the Small Islands . Ta is used before accented a: Ta-Ba 'men of aba ' (also Ta-Mbai in D.7). Before other vowels ti is the form : Ti-Era 'the peop Ze of Raga '. (ii) By the word mwere before the noun : mwere Pinalum ' the man of PinaZum '. (iii) By nor before name s of village s: nor-$enhar 'the peopZe of Senhar '. This is really the word noreman 'ma Ze '.

3.1. 3. Number

The number of a noun is not expressed at all unless absolutely necessary for clearness of meaning . In the same way the singular may be emphasised if needful by the use of a demonstrat ive or pronoun . Thus : A.29 Ko ta-ru nen ko ini noreman e tsubul Tiwi I 'And on the 8econd day that man goe8 down to TiwiZ'. The normal method of forming the plural is by the addit ion of the plura l pronoun inir eit her before or after the noun. Examples: 43

K.21 Pe wure i ni tutufak iniri 'I shaH te ZZ it to my eZder bro thers ' . K.90 Kia nam wa la, tutuf ak inir 'We went to the shore, my eZder bro thers they ', 1.e. 'I and my eZder bro thers went to the shore ' . The verbal pronoun can be used before the noun in a similar way : 0.18 N�-n� �a me lasir, ar ma 'The things whiah I saw (them) , aame '. The dual may be simi larly expressed by the dual pronoun : Natun or we 'the two ahi Zdren went '. At the same time , a pronoun of another person can be used if nece s sary : L.41 Ikir tsunob Ie pu ro we 'We are mereZy human beings '. The cases in which the separate expression of the plural is not necessary are (i) when the noun is at tended by a word which is naturally plural itself: tala e lep 'many adzes '; (ii) when t.he idea is plural in itself : matar tsunob 'men 's eyes ' (lit . 'their-eyes man'). In 0.22 we have natur, no t 'their ahiZd', but 'her ahi Zdren '. G.13 Natum noreman e-sa�awul 'Your ten boys '. The complete plural can be expressed in several ways by words meaning 'aZZ': row or ro.we , tsile, nov-nov . Thus : B.34 Or tsa l i rowe buha 'They-two tie ropes to aZZ their pigs '. p.28 Mi wife ni rowe na-na tsile 'He foreteZZs aZZ things ' (Note both wo rds together .) P.24 Na-mbo� som tsile ko po mats '(Those are ) aZZ your da ys and you wi ZZ di e '. K.19 No wufoi n'amben �a mar wof ar ruts row 'I pouZtiaed aZZ the sore parts of her body and they are aZZ heaZed'. K.I04 Mw i tsa, ko kab mats nov-nov �a-ok 'If it were not for him, you wouZd aZZ have di ed there '. A part ial plural is expressed by the noun fopon 'a pieae, some ': G.7 Po lasi na-na f opon mar re- rake re 'Look at some things em braaing eaah other '. S.lS Ko fopon ar wurei 'Some of them sp oke '.

3 . 1 • 4 • G e nd e r

There is no grammat ical gender in Atchin . In some cases separate words are used for male and female beings, such as man or woman . The use of the feminine prefix Ie has already been ment ioned. This can be compounded in some instances: le-ter 'oZd woman '. Usually, however, th e words noreman 'ma Ze ', and wifew in 'femaZe ' are placed after the noun to be qualified : natun noreman 'a son '; to wifew in 'a hen '. No te, however: Q. 2 S Mw i lasi wifen tipwis sa 'He saw one femaZe ahi Zd '. AA. 3 M'pep, pe-pe ' noreman e-ru 'She brought forth two ma Ze babies '. 44

3.1.5. Expression of the Genitive

The possessive relat ionship is expressed in several ways : (i) by simple juxtaposition of the two nou ns . In this case the governing noun precedes the noun governed: H.27 Ne-kal na-wits e-l im 'Bunches bananas five ', 1.e. 'five bunches of bananas '; H.42 Ni-as na-amp sa 'Ashes of a fi re '; wanu masal 'a place of fish '. These are de scriptive rather than possessive genitives; (ii) a really possessive genitive , expressing ownership by a person, admits of three ways of arrangement : (a) if the noun possessed is capable of taking suffixed pronouns then these will be used; (b) if the noun is constructed with a separate possessive then this will be employed; (c) the possessive preposit ion a will be used, or the commoner si. Examples of each subdivision are :

(a) U. 3 Ta-Ba natun 'The man of aba-'s son ' (lit. 'man Oba his son'). Q.10 TutuJ an lolon 'The brother 's inside ' (1.e. 'emotion ') . L . 4 0 Na-tum ror in 'Your son 's mind ' (lit. 'your-son his-mind'). L. 39 Mal-mal -mar i Mal -mal -oba mirar 'The mother of Mal-ma l -mari and Ma l-mal-oba '. B.33 Tal in buha. tal in na-mban 'Rope for the pig, rope for the sail'.

K.58 Win a buan 'That girl 's grandmother ' (a = demonstrative , not possessive).

(b) P.20 Noreman pipi san 'The man 's sexual organs '.

(c) H.14 Mal iQ a tas in 'The younger bro ther 's bed '. L.13 Nas-up a Qa-tan 'The old man of this place ' (perhaps locative) . C.10 Mar lasi n�-n� Qa si mwar'a 'They saw the thing belonging to th at man '. H.3 Lolo'm si wiJewin 'The woman 's house '. H.3 (wi Jewin) si tutuJan 'His elder brother 's wife '. Q.78 Po J u te na-amp si tim�m 'Please light your fa ther 's fire '. Si may express a purposive genitive : AA .4 Mu ho i n'ai si natun e-ru 'She fa shioned clubs for her two sons ' . AA .8 Mor rOQe nu-mbo a las 'They -two heard Ia s' song '.

If the nature of the idea to be expressed requires another possessive than sa-, then they may be similar ly used: ta-hit rin tamats 'the octopus the fo od of ghosts ', 1.e. 'the starfish'; ar lop-lop rin buha 'they gi ve-food-scrapings to the pigs '; n�-�a ri wiJewin 'the woman 's food '. Some phrases are elliptical , A . 59 re isen 'at his (village) '. 45

3.1.6. The Article

(a) Indefinite Artic le The numeral sa 'one ', is used without connective particle in the indefinite sense: B.l ni-wat sa 'a stone ' H.42 Po lasi nias na-amp sa? 'Do you see the Light of a fire ?' B.IO Mu wala f url nu-a sa e Ra 'It sai Led up a river on Raga '. It is similarly used with pronouns : B.5 Inir sa e tur tser 'One of them stands fa st '.

(b) Personal Article The common MN personal articles a and I do not occur in the free state, but i is found in combination in the nominat ive forms of pronouns : i-na 'I'; i-nik 'thou ', etc . There is a feminine article Ie as in le-ter 'oLd woman ' (K.4), all female name s of Rets and le-rets in N, and also wit 9 the name s of certain male culture heroes. This seems to connect wit h the Ponape Ii but is not so widely used .

Examples of (i) : Q.29 Ko mar wa . "Ko n'ehi I)a inlk?" 'And they said, "W hat of your fi sh?'''. K.18 Ko win a ni-Ier. mo lai masal a pitewi? 'And this girL here you gave her that fish? ' K.24 Tutu. ko Ie-tar ok e re pe tigel ... 'Brother, that oLd woman wants me to marry , K.42 Ko win ok pwi lek ok 'Let that girZ stay so ' (lit . 'as for that girL ... ' ). N.23 Ko Le-rets a mw l lek ne lolo'm 'as for that (woman ) Le-rets, she was sitting in the house '. R.IO Ko mu f u-f un lr. e wa . "Ko timami?" 'And he asked them, "What about your fa ther?"'. 0. 16 Ar wa. "Ko natum pwi sal)awiil" 'They said, "Your ahiZdren shaZZ be ten"'. (disjunctive ) N.1 5 Ko tasin inir. tasin ar liw-I iwe na-riv 'As for her younger brothers, her brothers were shooting rats '. Q.43 Ko olowam mu hulowi win el 'Your sister 's son beakone d this girL' . . L.IO Ko mlrar e sisen na-hases pltewir 'And (as for) their mother, she twines rope for them '. U.IO Ko sa pu rOI)? 'OnLy one? ' 46

In some cases it seems to be almo st a personal art icle in it s own right : K. 64 Ko Lebon sa, mar ka rasi 'As for Lebon One, they triaked him '. This ko is used with pronouns and demonstratives: R.15 Ko �go ko buh� nen ko 'That, then, i8 the pig '. S.14 Mar wa , "Mwar' a ko �go" 'They 8aid, "(it i8) that fe llow there " , . This pronoun may combine with a noun for emphasis: K.37 Ko ini tipwis ko-ro� ko e-wise �a pwi tigei? 'A8 for him, (he i8) only a ahi ld, why should he marry her? ' S.17 Ini ko Qgo mw i I iw-l iw eh i mw i ka ra-karas 'The one who was shooting fi 8h there played a triak on U8 '. Again it seems to be predicat ive in: R. 55 Tas ik, inik ko wel e-wele, inik ta-mats wor wieta 'Brothel', you are indeed the younge8t, you are the "ghost born la8t"'. A doubtful instance is: 0.23 Kab wa Siu, ko wanu masa l ko Qa-Siu 'You are going to Ma lo; now Ma lo i8 a plaae where there are many fi 8h '.

Examples of (ii) : A.22 E wa , "H a i f Kami tas in kof" , He 8aid, "Hi ! You (brought your) sister thi8 time! ' H.17 E wa , "Ko i-se me l iQen ni-le?" Ar wa , "Tas lm ko" . 'He 8aid, "Wh08e i8 thi8 bed here ?" They 8aid, "Your brothel" 8"'. 0.20 E ar wa , "10 . Tahar ko ." 'She 8aid: "Ye8; then it mU8t be Ta har ' 8 do ing " '. A.50 Timak kisen ko , niri pu-roQ 'There wi ll be no-one but only my fa ther8 '. A.43 E wa , "Na-amp ko . Kab J ure". 'He 8aid, "Well then, the fi rewood . You make fire "'. There is an undetermined use in U.26 Ko re-Qa ta-Ba ko natun ko ar ka latsi 'And fo r that of the Oba man '8 80n they give in e:r:ahange ... '

(d) The Ligative Article Qa There is a particle Qa of wide use, and it must be thoroughly under stood. It is also of fairly widespread occurrence in Melanesia, and derive s from an Indonesian Q or Qa. The primary meaning of Qa in Atchin is 'that ', and as such it fo llows the noun immediately, s.8: To Vao Qa 'th08e Vao men '. It also refers back to people already ment ioned: G.26 Ar uroi hoJ i n�-n� Qa 'They eat up the thing '.

N.26 E wa, "Tutu, pe wurei na-na· . �a?" 'He 8aid, "Brother, 8hall I te ZZ him that thing?"' The use of Qa after a noun in a demonstrative sense is closely allied to its use as a relative , and some examples are on the borderline between both. So a clause may follow immediately: Tahar Qa pw i maur ta tser 'Tahar who will live for ever '; n�-n� Qa na-wun nen e res 'the thing whiah its saent good ', i.e. 'the sweet sme lling thing '. 47

Q.29 N'ehi I)a inik 'The fi sh which (of) you ' (i.e. 'the fi sh which be longs to you'). Q. 84 Natun I)a ti:i-mats wo r wieta 'The son, name ly, "ghost born last'" i.e. 'the son called "ghost born last"'. G.3l Timar I)ami mats, nasan Winbweris 'Their fa ther, who die d, was called Wi nbweris '. Further examples of the relat ive �se of I)a: Q.75 Natun b?tiram (I)a mu wor womu) 'The elde st son (he who born first) '. R.4 E mo-rol) ni I)ama r rets 'He listens to that whi ch (what) they say ' . S.9 Ko mwi lek-l ek mu rOI) ni I)a-mbe I)a pa r luha ma 'He stayed on (till) he thought it was time they should come back '. H.18 Mwi ke te n?-n? I)a me lasi na I)a-hi :m re wiJew in 'He di d the thing which I saw at home on the woman '. 0.24 Kab ro-romi na-na I)a mi rami mu wurei 'You remember the thing which your mot her said'.

So I)a is also used with pronoun s as well as nouns . Ini I)a mi te ni al 'he who made the sun '. An Ur ipiv example is de l ul) I)a ma ra mas i 'the peop le who are sick '. The real English equivalent of I)a in all the se examples is really the wh- of 'who, which, what, where, when '. It is the relative element in the expression, the appropriate noun , pronoun or adverb being superadded. Similar phenomena are found both in Rotuman and elsewhere . With adverbs we find I)a used in K.47: Ko e-wis e I)a pwi tigei? 'And so why should he marry her?' (lit . 'how that ... ') . The word I)a is also used with the preposition re to form a compound, re I)a, which appears often indist inguishable in use from the simp le preposit ion . E.l Mwi lasi ne-I)a mu te re-I)an 'He found a place wh- he planted in it ', i.e. 'he fo und a place in which he planted '. Sometimes the compound conveys something of a relat ive sense as well : Q.3 Kab kete bonon re-I)a mwar' ok 'You shall make the "cap " on that-of that man '. K.85 Ra how We-rel)an 'We can take she lter therein '. The translation in the last instanc e shows that a relative-demonstrat ive force is still to be found in the compound. Occasionally it is used merely to add emphasis : L.26 Ar-ru I)a or wa 'Those two said ... ' I)a becomes a simp le conj unction: R.9 E wan ko mu to mor i I)a ni-al pu nun 'It came to pass that it was nearly that the sun should set ', i.e. 'when it was nearly time for the sun to set '. There is a preposit ional use of I)awh ich seems not to derive directly from the preceding , though preceding , though probably the two are ul timately the same . Thus I)a-hi: m 'at home '; I)a-eI 'here, hither '; I)a-o!< 48

'there, thither '; Da-in 'there, thither '; Da-mbe 'whence, time when ' (S.9 Mwi lek-lek mu rOD ni Da-mbe Da par luha ma 'He stayed till he thought it was time for them to re t urn '); ne-Da 'in at '; Da-hut 'inland '. Thus Da finally be comes a simp le preposition : K. 9 Mar we-we Qa e-siu 'They counted up to nine '. As such it is limited almost entirely to certain phrases of common use both in time and space : Da-hi :m 'at home '; Da-hut 'in the bush '; Da-tan or Da-tan 'on the ground, down, later '. So weak, however , is it, that ne may be placed before it . Thus : B.27 Ko no-un ne Da-hi:m 'And sinnet at home ', i.e. 'have you sin net at home ?' A.39 Mar se lasi te Da-hi:m san 'They did no t fi nd him at his house ' . K.85 Pwere re n'ai e-lap ne-Da la 'There are plenty of holes in the trees on the seashore '. u. 63 Ko e woJ i balak a mw i lai Da e-Ra sa 'And he carries an ex change pig which he had got at Raga '. Q.77 Ko tutuJan me wiel Da-hut 'The elder brother went away fr om the main land ' . A. 2l Miran timan mor J ilei , mor Jok Da-hut 'The mother and fa ther watched, hidden in the bush '. N.10 Or te Da- hut ko or wiel 'They two put it on shore and went away ' . B.26 Ko tala ne Da-hi:m7 'Have you an adze at home ?' D.13 Ko wiel Da-mbe7 'Where do you come from ?' A.7l Ra lek tser Da-tan watsin 'Now we wi ll always stay here '. 1.3 E wa Emil Lap , e rewtsi tsunob Da- in 'He goes to Em il Lep and ki lts men there '. Q.76 Ko tasin e tori natun ta-mats wor wieta (Da mu wo r Da-tan) 'The younger brother adopts a son "ghost born afterwards ", who was born later '. Q.15 E wa la e tsubul Da-la 'He runs and comes down to the shore '.

3.2. PRONOUNS

3 . 2. 1 • Card i na 1

The cardinal pronouns in Atchin are:

Singular Plural l.incl . i k i r 1. exc1 . ina kiam

2. in i k ( i ) , i k i kam i 3. in i ini r ( i)

There are no separate forms for the dual and trial except in the verbal pronouns . Examples of the cardinals: 49

(al Unsupported lsg. A.69 Ina pe to tsire f uri natuk 'I sha�� wait and fo ��ow after my son ' . A.49 Ina no ma ta 'I am afraid'. H.40 Ina pe wiel 'I shan go away '. K. 33 Ina pu-rol) pe tigei 'I a�one shou�d marry her '. K.46 Lebon Sal)awul e wa, "Ina" 'Lebon Ten says "I (wi�� go) "'. G.12 Kab se uroi a teo Pi we fopami ina 'Don 't eat me . I sha�� be as one of you '. L.43 Ina me tara 'As for me, I have grown o�d '. N.25 Se-re ina tipwis pwl ka ra-karas 'I am not a chi�d that I shou�d foo� (you) '.

2sg. K.B6 Ko po wi wieta po-ro inik 'You go �ast, you a�one '. K.1B Ho lai masal a pitewi? E wa , "Inik, 0" 'You gave fi sh to her ? He said, "You (are right) "'. E.12 In ik we le ne-wu , e-res mo lai ia ma I)a-hut 'You dear turtle, it is good that you brought me here to the shore '. F.B Inik, po le-Iek, ko ina, pe wi e-hut 'You stay he re; as for me, I am going ashore '. H. 4l In i k po I uha we 'You co me back indeed', 1. e. 'be sure you do come back! ' Ikl is found in BB . 6: Iki Ie rlk 'You here indeed'.

3sg. H.1B 10; ini le- rol) mwi kete n�-n� I)a me lasi ne I)a-hi:m re wiJew in 'Yes, he was the only per son I saw who di d anything to the woman at home '. N.7 Ini e wi la 'He goes to the shore '. C.12 Ini e ro pwi-tsa ni 'He doesn 't want it '. lpl. incl . N.33 Ikir"ram wurei I)a e mats 'We have been saying that she is dead' . K.23 Iki r pwi sa pwi tlgel 'Let one of us marry her '. K.37 Ikir a ram Ii-lap el 'We who are grown up here '. U.76 Ko buha tsi len mwi lav rowa we tsi tsunob tslle, to-Rano , to Wa la, Ikir I)a-Tsan 'As for all the pigs, he gave them all away to everybody, to the peop le of Rano and Wa la, and to us on Atchin

Ipl.excl. Note the occasional omission of the final consonant . S.3 Kia namb-wan Lol -na rol) 'We are going to Lo l -narong. K.Bo Klam ko 'Just we (two) '. 50

K.90 Kia wa la 'We went to the shore '. K.96 Kia nam mats 'We are dying '. L.12 Kia nob te lasi las 'Please let us two see Ias '.

2pl . K.80 Kami , si kom rets? 'Who are you two ta lking?' K.I06 Kami kab ral 'You go about your business '. 0.8 Ai ! kami Ie pu-rol) 'Hi, you here! ' Q.82-83 Kaml , ko watsi kab le-lek, kab wiwsi na-ak 'You stay now and lash together the canoe '. 8.37 Kam i kam l�si hoJ i tslinob mwi nats 'You look out for another man ' .

3pl. A.30 Ko wlnl Inlri tasin or tsubul Nor i Jere 'She and her sister went down to Norishere '. F.6 lnir tewen san mor wa e-hlit 'They went into the bush, she and her husband '.

All these are more or less emphatic; when there is no special emphasis on the pronoun the verbal form only is used, and this is treated under "Verbs" below (3.4.). The longer forms are still more emphat ic and are frequently used in conj unction with the emphat ic part icle ko. The final i of iniki and iniri is historically wrong. It is an examp le of false analogy . K.73 Ko iniki , mo lai masal pite na-mblik 'As for you, you gave fi sh to my grand-daughter'. The only examples of iniri show it either in the obj ective or else simp ly as a plural sign (for which latter see under "Nouns") . K.21 Pe te wan pe wurei ni tutuJ ak Iniri 'Please let me go and tell it to my elder brothers '. T.24 Me kete ni-wat mu hor-hor, ko me wurei iniri ma rOl)e 'I made the stone taboo, and I to ld them and they heard me '.

(b) Supported The pronouns may be all supported by the demonstrat ive ko either before or after . Thus: T.20 Ko Ina me kete ni-wat mu hor-hor 'I made the stone taboo '. R.5-6 Ko ina pe wiel, pe wa ok, pe betselehi buha pwi sa 'I, for my part, wi ll go away somewhere, and look for a pig '. K.91 Ko ina no tur tser 'As for me, I remain standing stilZ'. K.70 Ko ina watsln, me un 'As for me, then I dived'. F. 8 lnlk, po le-lek; ko ina, pe wa e-hut 'You stay here; as for me, I am going ashore '. c.14 Ko Ina pe h�J te watsin re na-amp hon 'As for me , let me go ashore now at the men 's cooking place '. 51

K.34 Ko ina me lai buha mu womu 'It was I who brought the largest pig ' . K.25 Ko in i k tsi.inob res ko sa ! ' Aren 't you a fi ne fe llow! ' B.40 Ai ! ko inik, mo rna 'Hi, you, so you 've aome! ' P.5 Ko inik �go, ko po pa l ko 'As for you there, you wi ll be ki ned then '. N.20 Ai ! ko inik, ko lek ni-el pu-ro� 'Hi, you just stay here !' C.S Ko inik Ie wi.i-�a e tsiga7 'Is it really you or no t you?' ' N.50 Ko inik po uroi , ko pi we sa. m rowe wanu ok 'You eat, and all that land shall be yours ' . P.5 Ko inik, ko na-mbo� s�m e plok, po mats ni 'And as for you, your day wi ll be suah and suah, you wi ll di e on it '. F.6 Ko ini, mw i le-lek mi wat-wa t 'As for her, she stayed and plaited' . K.104 Ko mw i res ko ini mu tur tser 'It was good that he, for his part, remained fixed'. N.24 E wa , liEs! Ko ini". 'He says, "No ! It is indeed she ' ''. K.3S Ko ikir pwi sa pwi tigei 'Then one of us wi n marry her '. K.25 Ko kiam a, nam re- res Ie wo r ko 'But how about us? We are fi ne fe llows too '.

H.33 Ko kami kab lek, ko i-si pw i lai na-na. . rami? '(If) you an stay, who wi ll fe tah your fo od? ' H.34 Ko kami pw i sa pw i lek 'One of you shall stay '. 1.16 Ko kia no re nob lasi 'But we want to see her '. 1.43 Ko kami kom rewtsi 'You two ki Hed him '. K.36 Ko inir mar wan, ar wa re ne-hi:m sar 'The others went off to their houses '. K.71 Ko inir mar S u ma r rna �a-el �a-hi.it 'They paddled and aame to land ' . 1.20 Ko inir ne-mbe? 'But where are they?' R.25 Ko inir mar wan, mar kete na-mbwe 'But they went and gave the gong-signa l ' .

In some cases the ko follows the pronoun , and occasionally both pre cedes and follows it . Examples : Q.90 Kami ko kam han? 'Have you eaten? ' R. 32 Ere nam wa la, nam taw-tawn i, kiam ko nam hitsits 'He wants us to danae and lie down and then to aopulate '. T.23 Inik ko e-wise? 'Wha t do you mean by it? ' S.32 Ini ko ro� �go 'It is he all right! ' Inik ko po 1010S 'You bathe! '

The double use is shown in 1.34: E wa, liE S u kO?" Mal -mal-mari e wa , "10. Ko ikir kO". 'He said, "Is it ready?" Ma l-maZ-mari rep Zied, "Yes; now it 's our turn ". ' 52

The pronoun is sometimes used in conj unc tion with a noun , and is then of course pleonastic . Thus 1. 33 Ko las Inl matan e fu 'As for Ias, his eyes were atosed'. Others: Q. 34-35 Ko mlran Inl re ba tun na-ak, ko timan Inl re fow un 'His mother was in the stern of the boat and his fa ther in the bow ' . Q. 39 Ko mwar' a Inl mu wala 'As for that man, he ran away '. Q.78 Ko ml ma, ko timan Inl mu kete na-lok 'He aame, and behotd, his fa ther was making a pudding '. R.17 Buha, Inl e tsel ko watsln 'As for the pig, it is tost now '. R.19 Mwar' a Inl mu llhe buha ml wlel ron l 'The man dragged the pig away and went off with it '.

As objects also the cardinal pronouns are occasionally used. Thus : R. 26 Po lasl Ina me wala I)a-el ko Inlk re tawtsen 'When you see me danaing on this side and yourse tf on the other'. K.112 Tutu, pw l sam pin-pin Iklr 'Etder brother, he wi tt atub us to death '. T.26 Me hltsl Inlr a e-ru 'I aoputated with those two '. R.23 Mar nisi ko Inl 'They saw him '. P.17 Tahar mw l tel Iklr 'Tahar made us '.

In many instances the objective pronoun can be understood: P.14 lnlk po ron ; n'das pu urol 'As for you, you wi tt be drowned; the sea wi tt eat you up '. p.16 Ko Inl ko-rol) mwl tel 'He atone made us '.

This is the general rule in the 3sg. , for which no suffixed form (see below ) exist s. A.1-2 E wlren l re nu-a; nu-a e kole 'He throws him into a river; the river sweeps him away '.

In the first and second persons of both numbers, and in the 3pl. , there are suffixed pronouns which indicate the obj ect of the verb . These forms are : Singular Plural 1. incl . ( I ) k I r 1. exc1. (I)a kla(m) 2. ( I ) m kaml 3. - r( I ) These forms are direct objects. The use of the preceding I depends upon whether the verb ends in a vowel or in a consonant . They are al so used reciprocally, and the plural forms may be used also as duals, with or wit hout supporting numerals. Thus : E. 12 E-res mo lal a ma I)a-hut 'It is good that you brought me here to shore '. K.26 E wure l a nl 'She totd me it '. 53

L.16 Kom lasi a e J u, ko ka m' , kob luha 'You have seen me enough, so now go back '. Q. 37 Te, ko re-ro� kob tuloni a Ie 'Father, you intend you two should take me here '. R.7 Ko mw i re-�a ma r rewtsi a, ko e J u 'But if they kill me, then it is finished'. u.48 Ina me h�J womu ko e Jowuri a 'I landed first and he is swearing at me '. P.13 Ko bahi p'uroim 'And a shark will eat you'. P.25 Par I iwom 'They shall shoot you'. K.IO Ko n'ehi Ie woJ -woJ ikir 'There is one fish here for each of us ' . M. 7 E se Jowur ikir te 'He does not swear at us '. P.l Mor te i kir 'They-two made us '. R.27 Ko e wa-wan ram taw-tawn ikir 'When the time come s, let us lie down together '. (R.32 Nam taw-tawn i '(He wants) us to tie down together '). 0.16 Ko po se uroi kia te 'But you are not to eat us '. K.132 Leboriweriv e wa : lOPe rewtsi kami niauk wor" 'Leboriweriv said, "I wi ll ki ll you there ye t"'. J L.15 Ko no lasi kami e u, ko po luha 'Now I have seen. you, go back ' . N.29 Sa e Jowuri kami 'Someone speaks di s"f'espectfully to you '. s.6 Ko pe ar tsal i pwere-pwere nen ko pu tur taravi kami 'I wi ll later tie up that sow and she wi ll be waiting for you '. N. 3 9 Natuk mpepe na-won i kami 'My daughter bore you-two in vain '. K.94 Ko ko ro-ro�, rar tol lasiri 'If you wish, let us three go and see them '. 0.26 Timan mw i lek tara vir Onema 'The fa ther waited for them at Onema ' . R.ll Ko ini e karasir 'He de ceived them '. R. 28 Ar we taw-tawn ir te 'They two did not cover one another ' (i.e. 'copulate '). The same set of suffixes is added to some preposit ions also that are by nature verbs. The following are examples : R. 56-57 Inik, pwi-re po rewtsi, ko tsovi a 'If you were to ki ll it, you would be (putting yourse lf) before me '. 0.12 Tsunob sa e re ts pitewim 'A certain man speaks to you '. R.52 Pe uroi , pe lai ni-se pitewim7 'If I eat it, what must I give you? ' Q.28 Ini e wiren i n'ehi �a ini pitew wiJewin 'He throws his fi sh to the woman '. This preposition shows a variation in the 3sg. , where the form belonging to noun-prepositions is frequently used: s.8 Ko to Vao �a ar lai ne-hlr ne-se e-ru pitewin 'So those Vao men gave him two parcels of nese leaves '. 54

Noun-prepositions take the ordinary noun suffixes : H.9 Po tiwe i te na-na pwi sa , tev-tev pw i sa re-I)ak 'Pl.ease saarify something, a de sign on me '. H.10 Mwi tiwe i tev-tev ke le re-I)an 'He saarified a de sign on her again ' . P.9 Po ma ts, po luha ma tsihik 'If you die you wi ll aome baak here to me '. A.13 E wa tsi timan 'She goes to her father '. K.20 Ko pe mak, pe tuloni tsihim 'I wi ll go fi rst and bring her to you '. The subject will be dealt with more fu lly at a later stage .

3.2.2. Possessives

Possession may be indicated in Atchin in three ways :

1) The cardinal pronoun may be coupled with I)a. In this case a posses sive preposition a ha s really coalesced with the ligative. Is this usage legitimate? A possessive a is not Melanesian . One example shows the a plainly, however : U.21 Ko Bat-pila natun e wehl na-ak a Ini 'Bat-pila 's son drags his aanoe '. Examples of I)a: U. 9 Ro ril)eni buh� I)a timar 'We-two take aboard the pig be longing to our fa ther '. Similarly in U. 12. The usage becomes clearer when the possessive is pronominal , i.e. when the noun is not expressed: U.53 Ro woI toni re-I)a inik 'Let us-two take out that be longing to you '. U.54 Or wan , or woI ton i I)ata-Ba natun 'They-two go and take out that belonging to the Oba man '. U.55 Ro woIi kele I)a inik 'Let us aarry yours again '. R.58 Mw i rewtsi ne-I)a tutuIan e wieta 'He ki lled his elder brother 's afterwards '. The constructions in the first and last examples in this sect ion are difficult . It is possible to construe ne I)a as rea lly na I)a, i.e. art icle and ligative, with a vanished a coalesced with the latter . On the ot her hand, ne itself is a preposition meaning 'of' both in At chin and in ot her neighbouring languages. Thus A.4 Or silel na-mbun nen 'They sewed together sails for them (aanoes) '. An extension of this is found in R.47 Timak e re pe ar lai nen pi wan 'My fa ther wants me to take baak his (pudding) '. Another pronominal possessive is a combination of the normal posses sive sa with a prefix i which is probably instrumental in origin . Thus : 55

L.9 Mal -mal-mari i-san ne-sar e-ru, n'ai sa 'For Ma l-mal-mari two 8pear8 and one club '. C.ll Ko mw i sa ko e wurei e re i-san. E wa "Ina i-sak ni-mben si tuar 'Then one 8qid he wanted it for him8elf. He 8aY8, "Our friend ' 8 foreign body i8 mine ". '

2) Possession may be indicated by suffixed pronouns . The suffixes are : Singular Plural 1. incl . -r l.excl . -k -mam 2. -m -mi 3. -n -r These suffixes cause certain vowel changes in the final vowels of words to which they are added. These changes are of the nature of um laut , and point to a time when the consonant was followed by a final i, or in the case of the second singular , a final u. Thus timak !my fa ther ', but timan 'hi8 father', show an original tima-ni from a still earl ier tlma-na. Thus we have the stage s tama-nya :: tama-na :: tima-na :: tima-ni :: tima-ni :: timan. The 2sg. suffix change s or iginal a to 0: timom 'your fa ther '. The lpl .excl. also undergoes umlaut , although there is no lost i, but this is probably merely due to weakening of accent . The retention of a in the 2pl . even before i is probably to be explained as due to a stronger accent . The suffixed pronouns are used with most kinship terms , part s of a body or of any obj ect . The following are some examples:

'father ' 'mother ' , bro t her ' , grandchi ld' 'mother '8 brother ' timak ml rak tuak nambuk matuak timom m i rom tuom nambum mat uom timan miran tuan nambun matuan timar m i rar tuar nambur matuar timamam m i dimam tuamam nambumam mat uamam timami mi ram i tuami nambum i matuami timar m i rar tuar numbur rna tua r

The following examples will ill ustrate the use of suffixed pronouns in the Texts: K. 70 Ko mwi hats to-toni mamak 'So it bit off my tongue '. T.9-l0 No kete hore, pwi-re �a mirak, wU-Qa tsotsik, wU-Qa buak, wU-Qa pwi sa pw i namp '" 'I tabooed it, whether it were

my mother 01' my 8i8ter, 01' my grandmother, 01' any woman who took a re8t ... ' K.2l Pe te wan pe wu rei nl tutuIak iniri 'Plea8e le t me go and tell my elder brother8 '. 56

N.II Or wa Bwat-na rer tsi matuan 'They-two went to Bwat-narer to their mother '8 brother '. Q.78 Po wan, po f u te na-amp si tlm�m 'P�ea8e go and �ight your fa ther ' 8 fire '. G. 13 Natum noreman e-saQawUI 'You (8ha�� have) ten ma�e chi �dren '. K. 52-53 Po un wa, ko po se tsibari te, ko po luwa mam we-reQan 'Go and dive; don 't touch it, but put out your tongue into it '. (Note that this word is slight ly irregular: memak - mem - meman). H.21 Po numbwe-numbwe po wan po tei tsi matuar 'Wrap it in �eave8, and go and give i � to our mother '8 brother '. D.II Tas ir wele Qa mul ma 'Our dear �ounger brother who has arrived' . � 0.24 Kab ro-roml na-na· . Qa mirami mu w rei 'Remember what your mother 8aid'. R.IO Ko mu f u-f un ir, e wa, "Ko timaml7" 'He a8ked them 8aying, "What of your fa ther?'" M. 5 Ka m-ok wlel salar ka wan ka re kab lasir 'You are a�way8 going their road to 8ee them '. T.5 Ko inir wifewln mar se tsu toni te re salar 'The women di d not remove the 8trap from their neck8 '. Q.13 Hatuar Emi l Harur 'Their mother '8 brother (was a man of) Emi r Marur ' . Another word which takes the suffixes is seen in : Q.19 Olowak, po luha 'My 8i8ter '8 80n, go back '. Q.43 Ko olowam mu hulowi win el ko nam Ju luha 'Your 8i8ter '8 80n beckoned the woman and we padd�ed back '. Q.18 Olow�n e tor-toni fowun na-ak 'Hi8 8i8ter '8 80n caught ho�d of the bow of hi8 canoe '.

3} Independent possessive nouns . Words that are not relationship terms nor part s of a whole take a number of possessive nouns aft er them. Of these there are four varieties: sa- for ordinary objects; na- for cooked food , or food for cooking; ra - for foods eaten raw; and ma- for drinks . The following are the fprms : Sa Na Ra Ha lsg. sak naik rak mak 2sg. som nam rom mom 3sg. san nan ran, rln mwan lpl. incl. sar nar rar mwar lpl .excl. samam namam ramam mwamam 2pl. saml nami rami mwam i 3pl. sar nar rar mwar

The phonetics of the na-forms are difficult , for the umlaut effect is lacking. The velarisation seen in the ma-forms reminds one of the fact that in Mota the drink-po ssessive is always mwa-. The sa-forms admit 5 7

of an apparent ly emphat ic suffix -QO: saQo 'his ', and samiQo 'your '. In some cases vowel changes t�ke place in the noun which precedes the possessive : buha 'pig ', becomes buho san 'his pig '; ni ram 'yam ', be comes ni rom nak 'my yam (to ea t) '. This seems to be a variety of umlaut , and one suspect s that it ought not to take place before all persons , but only does so by false analogy . The possessives can be used predicat ively , as in A.12 Pi we r�m n'ehi ok 'That fi sh shaZZ be your (raw food) '; A.23 Pi we ram i n'ehi ok (plural of A.12). Pronominal forms can be made by placing before the possessive s (except sa-) the prefix no, which is undoubtedly the word na-na, n�-n� 'thing, property ', cf. nono hanen 'food '. B.14 Wilewin ti-e-Ra mw i lai no-ran pwer-pwer 'a 'The Raga woman took fo od fo r that sow '. B.16 E lai no-ran ko e uroi 'He takes its food and eats it '. The noun-prefix can be omitted : B.16 Mewl nen ko win a e kete ran pwere-pwere san 'Next day the girZ makes food for her sow '.

Examples of the possessives 1) Sa- is used for ordinary obj ects, such as na-tuw 'beZt '; buha 'pig ' (treated as property) ; na-to 'fowZ ' (treated as property) ; relu na-to 'hen 's egg ' (for hatching , not eating); na-him 'house '; na-amp 'fire wood' ; sal 'dog '; ni-sal 'path '; nai 'tree '; ni-ram 'yam ' (in garden); etc. Thus : D.12 Ar wol to-toni buh� san 'They carry his p�g away '.

E.9 Ne-wu, po lai a wa e-hut; pe lemak sa. m 'TurtZe, bring me to shore and I shaZZ reward you '. N.48 Pi e sam batun tamauw ru. Pi e sam e row wanu ok 'Your food shaZZ be the head of the ge Zded c urved tusker; aZZ this Zand shaZ Z be yours '. P.5 Ko inik, ko na-mboQ sam e p'ok, po mats 'As for you, your day wi ZZ be thus (and) you wiZZ di e '. R. 56 Pe rewtsi buh� �a mu tur re ne-hi:m s�m tI wi ZZ ki ZZ the pig that is in your house '. L.8 Po ho n'ai samam, ne-sar samam 'You trim cZubs and spears for us ' . S.21 I-si e lai ne-se sami? 'Who took your nese Zeaves?' U.63 Pi e sami ni 'It shaH be yours '. L.12 Mor ma mor wol i ne-sar sar 'The two of them came carrying their spears '. p.4 E wurei ko e te na-mboQ sar 'He speaks and appoints their days ' . Predicative uses: F.17 Mi we sar watsin 'It is theirs now '. Q.59 Ra tuwe sak p1 pe taw i 'Let us pi Ze up mine Zike a mound '. Relationship terms used with sa- are: tewen 'husband '; wilewin 'wife '. 58

2) Na- is used for foods cooked or to be cooked, suc h as : nl-ram 'yam'; ron tarik 'wi ld yam'; na-Iok 'pudding '; na-wlts 'banana ' (picked unripe for cooking) ; biok 'taro '. Examples from A.12 and A.23 have already been quoted . Others are : B.24 Ko pe m'ok tabu na:m 'I will first cook food for you '. N.14 Mar kete matsan na:n 'They performed the death fe ast for her '. Q.72 Mar J ure na-amp sar, ar kete na-Iok na:r 'They lit fire (in their ovens) and cooked their puddings '.

3) Ra- is used for foods eaten unc ooked : na-nl 'coconut '; na-wits 'ripe banana '; relu na-to 'fowl 's eggs ' (for eating in native fashion ); 'fruit s such as ni-ra, tapol, tawor , etc .; masal 'fish '. K.12 lnlk no-ram. pwi tsa te pu-roQ 'Then you just shan 't have any food'. N.48 Pi e s�m batun tamauw ru 'Your food shall be the he ad of the gelded curved tusker '. MI wan mw l lai na-na no-ran ne-wu 'It went and brought food E.10 ' . for the turt le '. Q.73 Ko ini ar lal na-to ran sa ko n'dram na:n 'And for him. they brought a fowl for his (raw) food and yam for his (cooked) food' . L.20· Po ma, po lasl na-na rar sa e-ru 'You come and see to one or two things for our (raw) food '. H.33 Ko kaml kab lek, ko I-sl pwl lal n�-n� rami ? 'If you all stay. who will fe tch your food? '

4) Ma- is used for all drinks : nu-wa 'water '; tlpaQ 'coconut mi lk '; na su 'coconut cream '; na-tov 'sugarcane '.

3.2.3. Demonstratives

The use of Qa as a demonstrat ive ha s already been pointed out . There are also a number of other demonstratives, both simp le and compound . These are a, ok, el, Ie, ne, ni, Qgo. The line of demarcation between adj ective and adverb is in some of the examples very hard to draw . Thus Ie has three uses of which only one is adj ectival . In some cases , again, a cardinal pronoun is used to emphasise a noun : L.3 las ini 'that fe llow las '.

1) a is an enclitic , following the noun or pronoun immediately : mwer'a 'that man '; win a 'that girl '; las a 'that man las '; inlr a 'they '.

2) ok is similarly inclitic, and if the vowel of the noun can vary , then it suffers umlaut : H.21 Po hill n'dr�m ok 'Dig up that yam '. H.1 3 Mwar' ok 'That man '. 59

It may also be preceded by the ko artic le: K.24 Ko Ie-tar ok e re pe tigei 'That woman wants me to marry her '. K.7l Mar re-roQ par tigei win ok 'They thought they shouZd marry that girZ '. It follows the adj ect ive , as in : A.55 Mo la-lai buh� lap ok 'You have brought that Zarge pig '. The word easily assumes adverbial uses, as in: B.lO Mi wa ok Qa- in e-re masav 'It saiZed right out into the open sea ' . K.42 Ko win ok pwi lek ok 'That girZ wiZZ stay so '.

3) e 1 L.45 Ko mi ma ts woJe ni no-ur el 'He die d just so on this isZand '. Q.43 Ko olowam. mu huli:iwi win -e l 'Your sister 's son beckoned this girZ' . K. lO Ko e-wise ni n'ehi el7 'What is the matter wi th these fi s h? ' A.34 Lol om e wure i win el ko ro po tigei 'Your inside says it is this woman you want to marry '. A. 47 Tewen , ko lai mel ker ni-le buha el 'Son-in-Zaw, you have brought too many (of) these pigs here '. L.28 Ra lek re mali.in ni-mbek el 'Let us stay in the shade of this banyan tree '. Pronominally in K.63 Ko e wise' 17 'Then why this? '

4) Ie lends itself more readi ly to adverbal uses, but the fo llowing are wort h no ting: A.54 Mw i kila lasi win a mwi 1 ihe na-ru Ie pa 'He Zooked and saw that girt dragging that curved- tusker !' B.23 10 , inik Ie pu-rol) mo m'ok ururo i ran pwere-pwere sak 'Indeed, it is you who keep on eating my sow 's food'. A good examp le of the pronominal use of the word, even with suffixed pronoun is: K.8 Hi-le'r nir, ar se las woJen te 'Those peop Ze fai Zed to recognise (us) '.

The remaining demonstratives are less frequent and not so well defined : 5) ne G. 2l He re wanu J uhovile 'It is in a different 'pZace '. In A.2 we have a partial reduplication: A.2 E uroi na-n1 nen tawtsen 'He ate haZf that '. Again in : A.14 Mewi nen ke le 'On the next day again '. (This is a regular phrase) . A.74 Pwi lasi lumweik nen, ... ko pu luha 'ShouZd he see that sea snake, ... then he wou Zd draw back '. 60

Q.57 E wurei na-mboQ nen pa r tuwe i-san 'He announced the day when they were to pi �e up his (yams) '. R.31 E rOQ woJe ni n�-n� nen 'He understands that thing a�� right '.

6) Qgo: this is mo stly used with pronouns or other demonstratives : P.5 Ko inik Qgo, ko po pal ko 'As for you there, you wi�� be ki ��ed then ' . Adverbially in: P.23 Po matslQ Qgo ko 'You wi ��, work in that way '. N.49 Pi we s�m ts ile ko Qgo'k 'Then a�� that wi �� be yours '.

3.21 4. Interrogatives and Indefini tes

The same words fulfil the funct ions 0' both interrogatives and in

definites in Atchin as in other Melanesian languages. The word i-si =

'who ' or 'someone '; ni-se = 'what ' or 'something '. The lat ter can also

be used adverbially, = 'in what way, in some way '. Other indefinite pronouns and adj ectives are : nats 'some, another '; row(e) , tsile 'a�� '; Jopon 'some '; sa 'one '. Examples:

1) i-si 'who? ' A.26 I-si e lai? 'Who brought it? ' K.76 Po te lasl i-sl mor rets re ne-hl:m si Lebon Sa 'P�ease see who are ta�king in Lebon the First 's house '. S.21 Ko kam lasi i-sl e lai ne-se saml? 'Did you see who took your nese �eaves? ' A variant is seen in: 0.3 I-se mu wi-tsov? 'Who threw it? ' H.14 I-se Ie maliQen? 'Who se bed (is) this ?' 'Oblique cases are shown in two examples: F.13 Ram m'ok re i-51, Inik pu-roQ 'We have been wondering who it is, and it 's on�y you '. H.12 I-51 maIIQe�? 'Who se bed? '

2) ni-se 'what ' H.6 Ko betselehl ni-se? 'What are you �oo king for? ' K.52 Pe un pe kete pl-pe nl-se? 'When I dive, I am to do �ike wha t? ' K.113 Tasik, ko ra kete pi pe ni-se? 'Brother, how are we to act? ' N.9 Ko lasi nl-se? 'What did you see ?' N.22 E wa , "Tutu, pe wurel na-na sa ." Ar wa, "Ni-se?" 'He said, "Bro ther, �et me te�� you something. " They said, "What ?"'. N.28 Mwar' ok e re pu wurei nl-se? 'What does that fe ��ow want to say ? ' R.52 Pe uroi, pe lal nl-se pltewlm? 'If I ea t it, what do I have to give you? ' U.9 Ro rlQenl nl-se? 'What are we two to take aboard? ' 61

3) ni-se 'something ' G.8 Pw i re pu wure i n i -se, we ral no-ut e pOI) pi ma pu wureim n i 'If it wants to say anything. tet it come tonight and say it ' . 1.44 Ka re kab kete ni-se watsin, kab kete watsin 'If you intend doing anything (at att) • then do it now ' . An example of the noun use of ni-se is seen in : K.78 Ra karas ir, ra kete ni-se pwi sa I)a ikir pwi sa tigei 'Let us deceive them by acting in some way that one of us may marry her ' (ni-se is lit . 'a something ').

4) Other words ( a ) row ( e) , a tt ' See further on the plural of nouns , and the following : K.19 Ko no wan no wuJoi n'amben I)a mar woJ ar ruts row 'For I went and poutticed (the sores on) her body and they are heated now '. 1.4 Mi wahal row, we-re wanu ok tsile 'Be fo ught att. (made war on) att those ptaces '.

( b ) tsile 'att ' P.24 Na-mbol) sam tsi le ko po mats 'Att your days (wi tt be done) and you shat t di e '.

( c ) Jopon 'some ' This word takes the suffixed pronouns . G.7 Ko lasi na-na Jopon mar re-rakere 'Look at some things embracing each other'. S.14 Ko to-Vao I)a, Jopon ma r lasi woJe, mar wa 'Of those Vao men, some recognised him and said ... ' G.12 Ka b se uroi a te; pi we Jopami ina 'Don 't eat me; I shatt be as one of you '. The following example shows that Jopon really means 'a piece ': H.24 Ko Jopon wele e mambur 'But a smatt piece broke off'. This account s for the use of the suffixed pronouns.

3.2.5. The Relati ve

On e method of expressing the relat ive ha s already been dealt with, viz. the use of I) a. This need not be repeated. Others are :

1) Relat ive understood but unexpressed: G.7 Po lasi na-na Jopon mar re-rakere 'Look at some things (which) are embracing '.

2) The word a: N.36 Mo pepe tsunob sa lal) a mu ror mwt tsa ts 'You have borne a demented man who thinks att wrongty'. U.63 Ko e woJi balak a mw i lal I) a e-Ra sa 'And he carried the exchange pig he had received at Raga . This is the demonstrat ive a already treat ed. ------l

In K.86 we have an interesting example of Qa in an adverbial-relative sense : K.86 Mar wan Qa la Qa no-uJ m'uJ 'They went to the shore while the rain was fa lling '.

3.3. OTHER NOUN PHRAS E MORPHOLOGY

Certain other words that would be classed in English as prepositions and conj unctions belong in Atchin partly to the class of obj ect-words and partly to that of time-words . It ha s already been pointed out , for instance, that some prepositions take the pronouns suffixed to verbs , others take the set suffixed to nouns instead . Those that take the noun-suffixes are invariable for tense, and are by nature themselves nouns, and therefore call for treatment as object words . Similarly there are some wo rds that , though they would be classed in English gram mar as conj unctions, yet in Atchin vary for tense, and therefore must be classed as time words . It means splitting up in this grammar a group that would be one in English, but the splitting up is necessary . Regarding prepositions it is sufficient to quote a paragraph from Capell 1935:194 , in which it was said : Mo st prepositions can be classed as object-words, because they are invariable for tense - and indeed it is hard for us to see how a "preposition" vary for tense . The preposi tion shows a per sistent relacantions hip between things and is therefore independent of time . Thus , ar we ts lhin 'they went to him': their movement towards him was permanent , ·not de pendent on the moment , at any rate, as long as it lasted. Similarly in the expression rewanu sar 'in country their ', there is obviously no temporal change going on. The one exception to this is the preposition pitevl 'for '. Here pi is certainly the particle of the future tense . In Uripiv the preposition is tevi, and the same word seems to be seen in Eromangan tovun i. The reason for prefixing pi seems to be that until a person has a thing actually in his hands it is only "for" him, the possession is still future, and logic bids one indi cat e that future by the use of pi . This is perfect ly clear when the entire sentence is future, but the feeling for a relative future can be noticed even when the main idea of the sent ence is past , e.g. ar lav nawon no-no Qa mu res pltewl 'they took fr eely thing wh- it good (to be) for him ', i.e. 'they took a liberal supply of good things for him '. He had not received them yet ; they were still only "for" him . The preposit ion is then a sort of relat ive future even tho ugh the verb is past. On the other hand the particle mu with res shows concomitance: the things were already good when they took them. Other examples are: Mare e tapar watsln pltewl 'the heaven was opened for him'; reQan taronen ml mok rets pltewl 'during the time he was still speaking to them ' (these show a slight change in the meaning of pltewi , but only similar to that of the classical dative). In all these examples Ur ipiv lacks the future pr efix. So does English, and so do mo st languages; yet it cannot be denied that an event which has not yet occurred is still future! It remains therefore to treat the prepositions that come under the heading of obj ect-words , along with the few conj unctions, and , of course, the interj ections.

3.3. 1. Prepositions

In the first place, the simp le locat ive with a place name is not generally indicated. Ar mul NoriIere 'They returned to Norishere '; mwi tsubul Tiwil 'He went down to TiwiL'. A.16 E ma e lasi win a Nor iIere 'He came (and) saw that girL at Norishere '. If the noun is not a place name , however , a preposition must be used: A. 17 E wa hi:m ts i timan 'She goes home to her father '. In a few cases it seems possible to doubt whether the locat ive prepo sition has not become permanently attached to a place name . The chief instance is e-Ra 'Raga '. The island of At chin derives its name from A-Tsan, which is really a locat ive , given , as oft en in Melanesia, in an swer to a geographical question. The following is the list of the prepos itions invariable for tense :

a 'at, of ' e 'at, in, of' (often compounded with re) hasa 'across, away from ' hore 'round about '

'at, to, for '; in = 'for him ' (G.29; see below) la- 'in', as lamaI 'in the bush '; also pleonastically re lamaI ; lo-ut 'in the pl.ace ' 1 e 'at, in ' 101 (0) 'inside, among '; mare 'upwards, above '. N.S and Q.ll have we ma re marur 'through ' ne 'in, at '. Often compounded as ne Qa Qa see under ligat ives for prepositional use ra 1 i 'around' re 'at, on, onto, under '. We re 'into, to, up to '; re-Qan 'with it, inside it, at it' rieni 'in front of ' roni 'away from, out of' Iuri 'into ' t�ni 'away '; reduplicated as t�-t�ni tsi 'to, towards, for ' wa 'to'; compounded as we re or we re Qa-n woI i 'up, overhead' 64

None of these preposit ions take the pronoun suffixes proper to verbs; those that take the suffixes proper to nouns are : hore; i; ra i l; re �a ; rieni; tsi. The following examples will illustrate both the variable and the invariable prepositions on the above list : A Tsan 'A t Atahin '; also e Tsan 'at Atahin ' K.75 Mor rets e-re ne-hi:m si Lebo n Sa 'They-two aonversed in Lebon the First 's house '. K.53 Mu luwa mem we-re�an 'He poked his tongue into it '. K.53 Tel e-pur-pur e hatsibut horen maman 'The aZam sheZZ snapped around his tongue '. N.18 TutuJar mw i sere hore ne-h i:m san 'Our eZder brother has shut up his house '. G.30 Mar hil i nu-al in 'They digged a hoZe for him '. K.89 Ar ta� e-Iap lolon bahur 'They wept muah inside the bahur tree ' . N.13 Mwl lek 1?lo'm a 'She stayed in that house '. K.15 Ar hor-hor ke le rali e-Tsan 'They drove fi sh again round Atahin '.

H.9 Po tiwei •.• tev-tev pwi sa re-�ak 'Saarify a de sign on me '. U.42 Po wala rieni natuk 'You wi ZZ run in front of my son '. K.20 Pe tulon i ts lhim 'I 8haZZ bring her to you '. K.85 Ra how we-re�an 'We shaZZ take sheZter in it '. S.l Mu tsubul �a-Ia 'He went down to the shore '. 0. 30 Kab wan, kab te lasi timami lo-ut 'PZea8e go and see your fa ther in the inner aourt '. N. 5 Mwi ror we mare 'He turned upward8 '. B. 27 Ko no-un ne �a-hi :m1 '(Have you) sinnet at home ?' L. 29 E tsali nl na-hases e re batun 'He ties that rope to his head ' . L. 31 E bub toni re nl-mbek 'He make8 it fa 8t to the banyan tree '. L. 45 Or I a i s iw-s iw nen e-sa�awiil 'They- two pZaae ten stone8 for him ' . A.3 9 Mar se lasi te �a-hi:m san 'They didn 't see him in his hou8e '. Q.77 TutuJan mi wlel �a-hiit 'The eZder brother went away from the ma inZand' . 0.4 E wa e-hiit 'He goes to the mainZand '. l A.71 Ra lek tser �a-tan watsin 'We shaZZ aZways stay here now ,. U. 62 Ina pe wa tan 'I must go down (the aoast) '. N.l Rets e wal' toni na-to 'Rets runs after a fowL '. In A.60 we have again the complete omission of a preposition : ta-li m weral 'in five day8 from today '. l Presuming that �a-tan s �a+e+tan, to account for the umlaut . 65

3.3.2. Conjunctions

It is not always necessary to insert conj unctions in At chin , where we feel it needful in English. Thus in 8. 33: Tal in buha , tal in na-mban 'Rope for the pig and rope for the saiL'. Similarly between clauses : A. 3 8 Mwi lisiri, iniri e-lip 'He saw them (that) they were ma�y '. The normal conj unction for 'and' between clause s, and sometimes between nouns, is ko, but clauses are often juxtaposed with no conj unction , as in the above example. Other conj unctions are :

a 'for, if' N.29 A ko e-wise mo hatsl tsu�on pitewi? 'For why di d you bite your Lip at him? ' A.74 Pi wan a pwi sa pwi lisi ne-rahin re lameJ 'If it shouLd happen that someone shouLd see a track in the bush '. K.76 Win a e mats, a ni i-si mor rets ne �i-in? 'That girL is de ad, so who are the two ta Lking in there ?' L.7 Ra re-ro� ikir ni-wa pwi lip ra no-ur el, a mu ror mw i tsats 'We think there shouLd be a big popuLation of us on this Land, but he had a bad mind '. K.116 Mi wa-wan a mu J u 'It continue d (thus) untiL the end'. e 'and' G. 23 Mirin e timan 'Mother and fa ther '. Similarly G.27.

�a . This is really the ligative again, but one or two special uses may be conveniently listed here : 8.18-19 Pwere-pwere Ie me wa�ani, �a e-wise re-�in7 'This sow I have fed, but what (has it) in it? ' K.86 Mar wan �a la �a no-u J m'uJ 'They went to the shore whiLe the rain rained'. K.124 Pe sim kami niaok wor. Ka e be �a sami? 'I wi H cLub you here ye t. Where are you that (I may ) cLua you? '

�go 'so, thus ' K.103 �go ko kam lasi bahuru ok 'So you see this bahuru tree '.

pe 'in order that '. This is really the pe 'Like ' that will have to be treated under time-words, but it can also be used without tense to indicate purpose : B. 6 Mw i ka l i pe pu luha 'He turned to go back '.

re �a •. As a preposit ion this means 'in'; as a conj unction it means 'in that, because ': E.ll Mwi lemak ni, re-Qa mu J�kele wa e-hut 'He rewarded it, because it had carried him on its back to Land '. 66

The methods of expressing 'and ' are of interest . Besides e and ko, the pronouns can also be used to connect two nouns, as in some other Melanes ian languages . Thus : matuan inir wiJen 'mother 's brother and his wife'; win a iniri tasin 'that woman and her younger brother '. Hore clearly dual in A.20: infr tas in 'she and her younger brother '. This could not mean 'they and their younger brothers ', which would re quire tasir, so that the absence of a well defined dual is not serious. An interesting case is Q. 79 mir�m por kete rin buha 'your mo ther and [a ther shal.l. make food for the pigs ' (por is the dual 3pl . pronoun in the future tense) . Similar is G.ll inir wiJen san 'He and his wife '.

3.3.3 . Adverbs

Although it might seem that only adverbs of time can be time-words , yet in point of fact some adverbs of manner take the verbal particles, and so corne under the same heading. The adverbs of place, however , do not vary for tense , and so can be listed here.

el 'here ' I)a- in 'here. there ' i-se 'here ' 1) 90 'there ' kele 'again ' ok 'here. somewhere ' Ie 'here ' par-par 'el.sewhere ' lolo'm 'indoors ' tan 'down. l.ow. north-we st. past ' mare 'above ' tawtsen 'on the other side ' ne I)a 'thither ' t sa I i I 'outside ' niaok 'there ' wieta 'down. behind. l.ast. ne:z:t ' nil e 'here. hither ' womu 'in fr ont. first' I)a-el 'here '

The Texts show, amongst others, the following examples: U. 62 Po rna , po h�J el 'Come and l.and here '. K.I08 Ham m'ok ral el 'We keep wa l.king here '. L.l Mw i ral el 'He used to wa l.k about here '. A.12 I-se pi we r�m n'ehi ok 'Here is a fi sh for your food'. A.15 E wa la ke le 'He goes to the shore agai..n '. R.34 Ar wa la kele 'They danae again '. G.4 Ko se lasi te mw i liw-l iw ehi Ie? 'Don 't you see he is shooting fish here? ' Q. 37 Te, ko re-rol) kob tuloni a Ie 'Father. you (and my mother) intend to bring me here (to be married) '. K.I09 Kab Jure na-amp lolo'm 'They l.ight the fire in his house '. L.22 Kom ma ra le-lek te I)a-el lolo'm 'You two pl.ease aome and l.et us sit here indoors '. K.129 Ar sa wa mare 'They al.l. al.imb up higher '. N.2 E wa-wan mare 'He goes on to the top '. 67

K.124 Pe sam kami ni-aok wor 'I shaZZ cZub you here yet'. Q.3 8 Ko tsunob sa mu hulowi a ni-aok 'One man has beckoned me there ' . R. 12 Buha sa e tur ni-aok ne lolo'm 'One pig stands there in the house ' .

A.47 Tewen, ko lai me lker ni-le buha· el 'Son-in-Zaw, these are too many pigs you have brought here '. B.IO Mi wa ok Qa- in e-re masav 'It went there again into the open sea ' . H.5 E ha rna Qa-el ko pin. Mlterik e ha e-pe Qa- in 'It curved over just here . Perhaps it curved over thus in here . Q.43 E wa la e-pe Qa- in7 'In what direction is he running? ' D.l Ko mwi lek Qa-in watsin 'And he stayed there then '. S.15 Ini mwair ko sa mw i 1 iw-l iw ehi Qgo 'The person shooting fi sh there is a Zeft -handed fe ZZow '. R.5-6 Ko ina pe wiel, pe wa ok 'I shaZZ go away, I shaZZ go some where ' . U.14 Po tur ok! , Stay here !' U.62 Ina pe wa tan 'I must go down '. R.26 Me wa la Qa-el , ko inik re tawtsen 'I dance here and you on the other side '. N.35 E wa tsalil 'He goes to the other court '. Q.84 Natun Qa ta-mats wor wieta 'His son who (was caZZed) "Ghost born Zast"'. K.69 Mar m'ok I iI par-par pu-roQ 'They just kep t swimming eZse where ' .

Amongst adverbs of quality and degree that are time-words we find the following , though naturally any word that is used to describe an obj ect may also describe an action. mo l-toni 'graduaZZy' DD.32 Nam lasl mo l-toni wanu mu res Ie watsin ko 'We saw how gradua ZZy the Zand be came good again now (after a famine)'. mon i 'fuZZy' K.34 Ra wul moni 'We have paid in fu Z Z'. mo ri 'nearZy ' 0.1 Mu to mori pwi tara 'He was near oZd age '. 0.4 E to mori pi rna ko ni-ok we 'AZas! it is nearZy (time) for him to come back!' R.9 E wan ko mu to morl Qa ni-al pu nun 'When it was nearZ� sunset'. n tek 'perhaps ' S.29 Ko n'tek tsunob a mwi nats kam lai pltewin ne-se saml 'Perhaps that was another man to whom you gave your ne-se Zeaves '. 68

1)90 'thus ' P.23 Po matsil)1)90 ko 'And you wi ll ask thus ... ' nawon 'in vain, too muah' A.52 E lap -lap na-won ' It is far too muah '. U.41 lnik na-tun n�-wit na-won 'You are only the sun of a stone ' (too-muah in derogatory sense ).

Jopon 'somewhat ' Q.ll Ko ina pi we mare Jopon 'r will go a little higher '. woJ e 'properly, right ' L.35 las mw i re pi mara ma woJ 'Ias wanted him to rise altogether'. L.45 Ko mi mats woJe ni no-ur el 'He di ed just so in that island '. A.64 Ram se las woJ e ni 'We di d not see him proper ly '. wure-tun 'truly ', lit . 'speak-true ' A.62 lkir wi wure-tun 'We are really going '.

Some or these words are already known to us in other usages; they serve to emphasise the uselessness or European divisions int o "part s or speech" ror Melanesian languages. It may seem a paradox that adverbs or time are themselve s obj ect words, but mo st or them are single words, indicat ing an event , the time or wh ich is already marked in the verb . Hence they come under this heading. The rol lowing is the list , which still leaves a rew compound phrases to be treated in the next section or the grammar . kele 'again ' D. 9 Kab te rOl)e kele? 'Did you hear it again?'

luha 'again, baak ' G. 14 Mu J u. ko e tsian luha 'Afterwards she aonaeived again '.

I)a ta 'Zast ' Lebon e-Ru e tsire. Lebon Sa I)a-ta 'Lebon the Se aond next, Lebon the First last '. paral) 'earlier in the da y ' S.23 Kam lasi paral) ko mwar' nen e pe ni-se? 'Did you see this morning what the fe l low was like?' pin 'yet ' Ko Rets e ma I)a-hut pin? 'Has Rets aome from the mainland yet ?' See under "tenses or veres" ror a ruller treatment or a somewhat dirrerent use or this word. 69

J uri 'Zast ' U.77 Ko ini mw i ril)en i J uri 'But (that which) he had taken on board Zast '. swe I i I) 'when ' taron 'ok 'now, nowadays ' DD .30 Pi kete ke le ta ron 'ok 'It may happen again nowadays '. A variant of this is tarone Ie wats ln. te 'then ' Inik no-rom pwi tsa te pu rOI) 'Your food wi ZZ be nothing then '. telep 'immediateZy ' Q. 9 Kab kete wan te lep bonon ne-I)a mwar' ok 'You make that fe ZZow 's cap (on his yam mound) immediate Zy '. tser 'aZways ' B.7 Tas in mw i tal) tser 'His younger brothel' kept on weeping '. R.37 Mor lek tser I)a-hi:m 'They-two stayed aZZ the time in the viZZage ' . A variant of this is seen in: T.6 Na-mbol) ta-ta-tsar mar wa lamaJ 'Every day they went into the bush '. ts ire ' next ' . 0.21 Mu wo r tsire 'She was born next '. tua 'a Zong time, of oZd' L.22 Me se lasi kami te tua ok 'I've not seen you for this Zong time ' . wats i n 'now ' Full examples of this will be given when dealing with the tenses of the verb . wera l 'today ' A. 36 Ra wan weral 'Let us go today '. R. 15 Mwi re mi ma weral 'When he has come today '. wa-sa 'once ' S.l Wa-sa mw i karasi to-Vao 'Once he tricked the men of Vao '. wa-ta, wleta 'Zast ' Q.84 Ta-mats wor wieta 'Ghost born Zast ' (a name } R.57 Ko tsavi a; ina, no wa-ta 'You go before me, I am Zast '. 70

wo r 'yet ' H. 3 2 Se-re na-mbo� e- lap wor 'Not many days yet '. Also K.14 . Q. 4 E tsiga wor 'Not yet '. See also a compound in DD. l. wuJonen 'Zast time ' K.73 Masal re-re wuJonen ko ar moJ-moJ nl 'Laat time they refused her fish'. DD. 49 Pwi te-rik pi kete kele taron'ok pwi-re pe �a wuJ�nen 'Perhaps it wiZZ happen again nowadays as it used to before '.

3.3.4. Emphatic Parti cle

The emphatic part icle Ie may be classed with the invariable adverbs. It may follow any word to give added emphasis to it , as seen in the following cases from the Text s: K.63 No I I Ie 'I just hanged myse Zf '. N.35 Mwar' a e la�a Ie 'That fe ZZow is just demented'. N.3 6 Ko pepe nl-se Ie? 'What have you given birth to ?' N.8 Ina Ie me ma 'I indeed have come '. N.1 0 No lasi na-to Ie sa 'I saw one fowZ '. N.23 Le-rets a mw i lek no lolo'm Ie pu-ro� 'That Le-reta is just aitting in the houae (and that 's aZZ) '. 0.17 Ko me tara Ie watsin 'But now I have grown oZd'. A combination of this part icle with ro� is seen in: H.18 Ini le-ro� mw i kete n{l-n{l �a me I asI na �a-hi:m re wlJewin 'He onZy, he di d the thing I saw at the home of the woman ' .

3.3.5. Interroga tive Ad verb of Place

The word be or mbe means 'where ?', but is used with a number of prepositional adj uncts that must be noted. It may become e-mbe, �a-mbe, ne-mbe, he-mbe, all of which, except the last , that is so far explained, will be recogni sed as prepositions of place. The distinctions in the use of these, if there are any , remain still to be discovered, but the following examples will show the compounds in use :

be or mbe K. 67 Ko wiel be? 'Where have you come from? ' A.3 9 Ko betselehi e be 'You Zook where he ia '. A.63 Mwar' e-be ko? 'Where have the men come from? '

e be H.29 Ko taslm e be? 'Where ia your brother?' K.41 Ra e-be? 'Where shaZZ we go ?' S.2 Kab e-be? 'Where are you going?' 71 ne-mbe H.25 Ne-mbe 1 e? 'Where is it, then? ' K. II Ko sa ne-mbe? 'But where is the one?' he-mbe N.14 E he-mbe? 'Where is she? '

I)a-mbe A.13 Ko lai I)a-mbe n'ehi ok? 'Whence di d you get this fi sh?' D. 13 Ko wiel I)a-mbe? 'Whence did you come ?' L.21 Ko kom m'ok wiel I)a-mbe le? 'Whence have you two been coming fr om? '

3. 4. THE VERB

3. 4. 1. Forma ti on of Verbs

As a general princ iple , verb and noun are alike in Atchin : no-uJ m'uJ 'the rain rained'. Verbs may be divided into two groups: stative and active . No confusion result s from this use of the word active , as tnere is no passive voice in the language , so that 'active ' may be used to indicate a type of verb rather than a voice. By a stative verb is meant one which expresses a state or condit ion , such as ka ra 'to have sores' - obviously not an action . Active verbs express an act ion , and are again divisible into intransitive and transitive verbs. To tabulate:

Verb I I staIt ive active I I I intransit ive transitive

The transitive verb is often recognisable by the terminat ion ni, e.g. no ma ta 'I am afraid '; no matani 'm 'I am afraid of you '. Many , however , have no transitive terminat ion. Taking the following Atchin text (the beginning of Tale A) , the verbs may be classified as indi cated above : Tas in e kara. Timan e ro pwi tsa ni . Na-wun e-tsats. E wire ni. E wireni re nu-a. Nu-a e kole. 'The younger brother had sores. His fa ther di dn 't want him (to be). His smell was bad. He threw him. He threw him into the wa ter . The water carried him away. '

In the above passage the stat ive verb s are ka ra 'to have sores '; tsats 'to be bad'; the active verbs are ro 'to like '; wire 'to throw ', kole 'to sweep away '. All three are transitive , but the last carries 72

no sign . Verbs that do not carry a transit ive sign may be called by the name used in Churchward 1926, "incidentally transitive", and tho se that do carry a transit ive sign may be called "specifically transit ive". It will be noticed immediately that the inclusion of tsats '(be ) bad ' as a stative verb eliminates the cat egory of adj ectives from parts of speech. In a fo llowing section it will be shown that this is a legit imate procedure for this particular language . Amongst incidentally transit ive verbs are found the following :

kete 'to do ' pepe 'to bear chi Ld ' k I -k I 'to step out (distances) , ni si 'to see ' kole 'to carry off' sere 'to close ' uro l 'to eat ' rOl)e 'to hear '

It is interest ing to observe that in other Me lane s ian languages some of these verbs become specifically transitive by means of a suffix, as for instance in Fij i rOl)o-a 'to hear ', sere-ka 'to un loose '. Even in the neighbouring Malo this occurs. Amongst specifically transitive verbs formed by adding -nl to the intransitive we have :

wurel 'to say ' trans. wure-nl 'to say it ' mata 'be afraid ' mata-nl 'to fe ar ' JuJu 'to ask ' JuJu-nl 'to question ' wul 'to buy ' wu II-n I 'to pay for ' t I ge I 'take (in marriage) , tigei-sl 'to remove '

Wo rt hy of special note is tal) 'to weep ', trans. di l) -si 'to bewail', which involves a different suffix , and umlaut of the root vowel. His torically it can be shown , in such languages as Fij ian and Samoan , where considerable variety of transitive endings exist , that the consonant preceding the -I is frequent ly themat ic , i.e. it was originally the final consonant of the word, and though normally lost , it is resuscitated in the transitive form . Only tal)si 'bewai l', from IN tal)is 'weep ', is here thematically constructed. As a general rule Atchin ha s made -ni do duty all round . It is so for instance in mata-ni, although this represent s IN matakut, and usually becomes mataus i in Melanesia. In some cases the use of a transitive ending is optional . Thus ro ''Like ', trans . ro-nl, but : A.l Mu ro pwl tsa nl 'He wanted-him not-to-be '. N. 50 Ko ar ro pwl tsa 'But they didn 't want (it) (to-be) '. How loose is the connection of -ni with its verb is shown by the fact that another pronoun or adverb can intervene between the verb and the suffix : no wu re ml nl 'I tell you it'; me karasi ml ni 'I tricked you 73

about it '; R.3l E rOf) woJe ni n�-n� nen 'She knew rightty that thing '; Q.90 Ko po lav luha ni na-lok ni tim�m 'You just take baak the pudding to your fa ther ' (the second ni is a preposit ion meaning 'to').

3. 4.2. Voice and Tense System

(a) Voice There is no distinct ion of voice in Atchin. A passive form in European languages must here be rendered into the 3pl. active . While, however , this is true , it is possible to have what may be called 'functional ' passives and reflexives, the verb remains 'active ' in form and is constructed with the usual person and tense signs, but its mean ing is passive or reflexive , as the case may be . Thus : A. 68 Maki timan mw i rewtsi tsile "Hi8 fa ther 's maki was kiHed entirety ' . M. 2 Ka wan ko ka re maki e pa l ne f)a-Tsan 'You go and watah the maki 8aarifiaed at Atahin '. M.7 Ko maki m'pal mwi ser-ser 'And the maki was 8aarifiaed fre quentty ' . P.14 In ik, po ron 'A8 for you, you wi tt be drowned'. A functional reflexive is seen in : p.26 Pwi -re f) a pw i Ii, ko e Ii 'If he is to hang him8etf, then he hang8 him8e tf '.

(b) Tense Tense may be indicated by the regular tense signs, which are verbal pronouns , and which will be defined lat er; or it may be indicated also by adverbs placed after the verb ; or thirdly , by the process of redu plication. The verbal pronouns serve by themselves to indicate both person and tense , in the past and future , and there is also a group which is indefinit e in meaning and may be either present , past or future according to context . In such cases, and where emphasis is needed , adverbs or an adverbial phrase can be used to indicate complete ness. Such are pin(i), tsile, mu Ju, ko . Examples :

1) pin(i) E. 5 M'bale, m'bale plnl 'He hit it and badty wounded it', lit . 'he hit it, he hit it fini8h '. H.26 Ko tutuJan mwi rewts i, mwi rewtsi pin 'Hi8 etder brother 8truak and be taboured him 80 that he di ed ', lit . ki tted him, kitted him finish '. Both examples show by their repetition of the verb that the use of these adverb s is always emphatic .

2) tsile H.20 Mu tei tsile nu-as 'He aomp te te ty fa 8hioned a digging 8tiak '. 74

A.44 Or tabu ts lle watsln 'They-two now finished aooking '. A.68 Maki timan mwi rewtsi tsile 'His fa ther's Ma ki was kiLLed entire Ly , . K.13 E mases ; ar urol tslle 'It aooked and they ate it up '.

3) mu I u K.lOl E wala, e wa la mu Iu 'He aira Led round and round it ', lit. 'he runs, he runs, it finished' .

4) ko . The particle ko stands on a different footing . It indicates a perfect , pluperfect or fut ure perfect according to the verbal particle preceding the verb . It is often combined with wa ts in 'done, ao mpLeted' to form a compound ko watsin. Thus : 0.3 3 E Iu ko 'That 's the end ' (conclusion of a story) . N.49 Pi we s�m tslle ko Qgo'k 'Then aLL that wi LL be yours '. R.23 Mar lasl ko ini, ko e wol i Qa ini 'They saw him, how he aarried (one ) for him8eLf'. 1. 34 E Iu ko? 'Is it over?' N.51 Ko mwi lek tser Olep ko watsln 'And he 8tayed at OLep for good ' . K. 45 Mar Iu, mar Iu, mar wan ko watsin 'They pad dLed and paddLed and got there at La8t '.

Another rather difficult phrase that seems to indicate completion is pu rOQ '8impLy ' or 'onLy '. N.20 Ko inik ko lek ni-el pu-roQ 'You 8imp Ly stay here!' N.18 Ko pe ar sere kele ko pu rOQ 'I wi LL 8imp Ly shut it again '. K.44 Pe lasim ko pu-roQ 'I'LL 8ee you, aLL right !' In N.18, for inst an ce, the idea is of co mplet ion , 'shut it and that wiH be that! '. A.41 Tirnak klsen Ie 'niri pu-roQ 'It i8 onLy my father8 who are here, they aLone ', i.e. 'onLy they aompri8e the audienae '. Notice that the particle used is generally that of the fut ure, (pu) , no matter what be the tense of the main verb , and the phrase always has the decisive tone of the English colloquialism used above , 'and that '8 that!' .

3. 4.3. Directive Parti cles

Many Melanesian language s make large use of deictic particles, in dicat ing action towards or away from the speaker . The former is usually mal or rna, really the verb 'to aome ', while the latter has no fixed form. At chin possesses two such particles, ma and wa or luha. Ma in dicates movement towards the speaker, wa and luha movement away or back (they are not quite synonymous) . To quote Ray (1926:290 ), speaking of 75

the Uripiv dialect., "These are apparently verbs used eit her separately or combined with ot her verbs" . Examples : A.24 Mu luha wa 'Go back! ' (shows one particle used as a verb , supported by the other) P.9 Po luha rna 'Come back ' (a similar example) Q.43 Nam Ju luha rna 'We paddled back here '. K.12l Mwi re pw i sam wa Lebon Sa 'He wanted to strike (away) at Lebon the First '. K.46 Pwi sa pu un wa 'Let one dive ' (down from speaker ) U. 14 Ina pe wala wa hi:m 'I shall run to the vi l lage '. CC.26 Natuk, po luha rna , we le 'My child, come back, my dear! ' A slight variant is provided by the verb s wan 'to come ', and wa 'to go ', as directives: u. 1 6 Miran ... e lai wan ni-war e-ru 'His mother ... brought two re-entrant tuskers'. T.4 Mar kete wa na-mbun ni-taQ 'They placed the bottom of the basket on it '.

3.4.4. Redupl ication

The phenomenon of reduplicat ion is another means of expressing time relations for the reduplicated verb generally indicates cont inuity of action. It thus supplies the part of an imperfect tense , present , past or future . The reduplic ation may be eit her entire or partial, and no difference of meaning appears to be involved .

(a) Complete Reduplication A.4 Ko e lek, miw lek-lek 'He stayed here '; 'He continue d to stay there ' . N.13 Mar lek-lek-lek 'They waited and waited and waited'.

(b) Partial Reduplication A.4 Mi wa-wa n ko e lasi na-to san sa '(Time) went on, and he saw a fow l (suitable) for him '.

3.4.5. Signs of Tense and Thei r Use

The tense particles, or signs of tense, are called verbal pronouns in most Melanesian grammars. The term is not quite exact , in that they can be used along with the cardinal pronoun as well as in place of it . Morphologically they are constructed from root-forms of pronouns used in combination with a tense sign . Of these tense signs, Atchin possesses three , of which the root s are rna, e and pa. The whole scheme of tense , however , is very vague from the European point of view. Ma is past in Atchin, though still indefinite in the neighbouring Vao and Wala. Pa is definitely future, being a form of the verb 'to go ', while e simp ly 76

marks the word following as a time-word, neither past nor fut ure . That is why it is used, e.g. with numerals. The following are the forms assumed by these three roots in combinat ion with the pronoun root s:

lsg. Past : me A. 67 Tawtsen na-ni Qa me lawi pitewi , me las woJe ni 'The half of coconut which I gave him, I recognised it '. K. ll Ko me lai pitew Ie-tar a 'I gave it to tha t old woman '. R.11-12 Ko ina me wiel , me ma , hore ni-se ni-aok lamoJ 'I went and came and chased something there in the bush '.

Indefinite: no K.113 No wuretun 'I am sp eaking the truth '. L.ll Ina no ter-ter 'As for me, I am brave '. A.4l No mata e-lap 'I am greatly afraid'. ne T.24-25 Ar re ina ne kara-karasir 'They want me to keep on tricking (him) !'

Future : pe K.lll Pe wan, pe lai n'dram 'I wi ll go and fetch yams '. Q. 83 Ina pe wa e-hut te 'Please let me go into the bush '. Q. 79 Te , pe J u na-amp? 'Father, shall I light the fire ?'

2sg. Past : mo Q. 9l Mo wan mo hani na-lok na:r 'You went and ate their pudding '. E.12 E-res mo lai a ma Qa-hut 'It is good that you brought me here to shore '. N. 29 A ko e-wise mo hatsl tsuQon pitewi? 'For why did you bite your lip at him?'

Indefinite: ko K.113 Ko wuretun? 'You are speaking the truth?' K. 67 Ko wiel be? 'Where have you come from?' L.14 Ko re pi wise? 'How do you want it to be?'

Future: po Q.79 Po J u na-amp, ko po wan ko mlr�m por kete rin buha pu- roQ 'Take a light from the fire, and go with your mother and let them two prepare food for the pigs '. Q. 20 Po han Qa-mbe? 'Where wi ll you eat?'

3sg. The indefinite tense offers no difficulty, and ha s been amp ly illus trated in the preceding pages, but the past varies between mwi, ml, mu and m', and the future het ween pwi , pi, pu and p'. There appear to be 77

phonetic reasons for the use of the various forms , but they are extremely complicated, and seem to depend not merely on what sounds follow imme di at ely, but on the who le sent ence-rhythm , and a special phonetic study of the language from this point of view will be needed to elucidate them fully. This study has not yet �een carried out , and unt il it is, the only thing possible is to set forth certain empirical rule s, which, however , are not without exceptions. These rules are as follows :

1) The root forms are m+i , p+ i, which are normally velarised and become mwi and pwi respectively.

2) The vowel is deleted before u, and for mwi also before labial con sonant s (exc luding w), giving m' , p', e.g. m'pep 'she bore (a child) '.

3) Mu and pu are used when the first vowel of the verb is a back vowel, 0, 0, u, or the first syllable of the verb is hi-, ke- , ki-, ma-, 1 i-, Ji-, ta-, wa- or we- . The reasons in this case are not obvious, but seem to rest on muscular int erplay between back and front tongue posi tions and tense and lax lip positions.

4) The unvelarised mi and pi are used as follows : ( a ) Mi, befor e m-, and sounds sufficient ly close to the lip posit ion of m and the tongue posit ion of w to make art iculat ion difficult , i.e. before le-, 1 i-, wa- , we- , wi-. The rule , however , is not ab solute, as the examp les below will show. (b) Pi before labials inc luding w. One case - tigei 'to marry ' - varies between pwi and pi. The following lists give examples actually culled from the Texts:

Mw i is used before ake, asas, aJi, ha, ha r, has, hltsi , ka le, ka ras i, kete, ki la, la, lai, lawi , lis(i), lek, lemak, lep, 1 ihe, 1 ildrore, 1 i�, 1 iwe, na, nats, ral, ral i, ran, re, rer (e) , rerake, res, retserets, rewts i, rieni, riri , sa , sal , sasale, sasawi , se, ser (e) , Jilei, Jil iwe, Jire, ta , ta�, ta lasi, tara , tarer, tatser , tawiJ, te, te i, tsa, tsal i, tsats, tsiba ri, tsiga, tsilewe re , ts ir, tsiriweni, tsuri.

Mi is used before the negative phrase se lisi te ('did not see '); mara, mat, mats, ma�a�, meremer ir, metemet, miteni , mwel , tomaru,. uroi , wahal , wahe , wan, wa�on i, wawan, we , we i, weta , wetewat , wetsi, wewe , wie, wiel, wiri, wiwiel , wiwsi. Variant constructions are : rewtsi (mwi ), te i (mwi, mu) .

Mu is used before hore, horhor, hoI. hu, kole, kon i, lo�, luha , rna , �oni, nu, nunre , ro , ron , ro�e, ror , rorak, roromi , row, ru , rubatsi, ru�Ji, Ji , so •. te ( negative) , Jok, Jokele, JoJoJera, Ju, Junl , Juroni, JuJulo, tei , to , tori, to�sa, tsov, tsubul , tuhuni , tu r, tura�, wa, wa la, we (?) , we ldra, witsov, womu , wor , wo J i, wotsanlr, wurei, wuw, wuwun . 78

H' is used before ba le, berteni, betselehl, bOIl , pal , para, parar, pep, ulowi, un, ufo

The following are examples with the fut ure particle :

Pwi is used before ar (repetitive part icle), e (numeral particle), han, has i, ke li, lasi, lep, Ii, namp, rewtsi, sa, sawe, sa!)awul , sem, serser, so ... te (negat ive ), tala, tara, te , tigei , tslba ri, tsire, tsovha; tigel also may have pi.

Pi is used before ma , mara, mats, parav, pe , p'ok, tigei , wan , we , wi e 1, wof.

Pu is used before ar (repetitive part icle) , luha , ma-Iakel , mo lemol , PO!) , rOIl, row , se, so, to , tuloni, un, urol, welewele, womu. The re petitive particle thus take s either pwi or pu.

P' is used before uro i and the frequentat ive form ururoi .

Thus far the Text s; it now remains to give some illustrat ive sen tences of the part ic les of the 3sg. :

Past A.6 Hi wa!)ani 'He fed her l. A.9 H'pep kele 'She bore again '. H.22 Hwar' a mw i hil i n'dram 'That man dug up the yam '

Future A.75 Pu se tala tilehi te ne-rahin. Pw l tala tileni ko pi mats 'He should not step over the track. Shou ld he do so he wi ll di e ' .

Idu . inc l. Past : No examples in the Text s.

Indefinite: ro A.42 Po mak, ro wan 'You lead, we two shall go '. L.34 Ro mul te 'Just let us-two go '. u. 8 E-res ro wa e-Ra 'Let us-two go to Raga '. Q.20 Ro wa Tsan 'We shall go to Atchin '.

Idu .excl. Past : nom A.25 Te, nom lai n'ehi sa Ie 'Father we two got this (one ) fish '.

Indefinit e: no, nob L.13 Ko kla no re nob last na-sup a Qa-tan 'We-two want to see the old men of this place '. 79

2du. Past : kom L.16 Kom lasi a e Iu, ko kam ' kob luha 'You-two have seen me enough, so go back !' N.40 Kom laQa laQ, kom kete na-na e tSats 'You two ape demente� you have done a bad thing '.

Indefinite: kom K.80 Kam i 51 kom rets1 'who ape you two (who ape ) taLking ?'

Future: kob, ko L.27 Ko mak, ra wan 'You-two Lead, Let 's aLL �o '. L.43 Ko kaml , kom rewtsi, ko kob ta-tal i, kob wan , kob tawni 'Since you-two kiLLed him, carpy him (?), go and bupy him! '

3du . Past : mor L.12 Mor woIi ne-sar sar 'They-two cappied their spears '. L.13 Mor lasi las a miran mwl lek 'They-two saw that (fe LLow) Ia s and his mot hep (who was) sitting '. L.2l Mw i lasi mor lek La-mare 'He saw they wepe at La-mare '. R.38 Ko inir mor wan 'The two of them went '. T.26 Mar rna ko mor namp re-Qan 'They aLL came and two of them took a rest on it '.

Indefinite: or

L. 26 Ar-ru, Qa, or wa . . . 'Those two, they say ... ' A.44 Or tabu tsile watsin 'They-two have finished cooking now '. L.17 Or se luha te ; or tur tser 'They-two do n 't go back; they stay on ' . L.38 Or par-pari na-mbwe 'They-two beat the gongs '. Q.47 Or wa hi:m 'They two go h�me '. N.lO Or tabe na-ak a wa e-hut 'They-two carry that canoe and go ashore ' .

Future: p�r Q . 18 E re-roQ por ts il-ts ile -were 'He meant them two to have a ta Lk' . Q. 79 Ko po wa n ko miram por kete rin buha pu-ro� 'You and your mothep go and th� two (of you) just ppepape food for the pigs '. lpl. incl. : ra (m) S.39 Ram se las woIe nl te tsunob nen 'We di d not pecognise that man ' . K.37 lkir a ram la-lap el , pwl sa pwi tlgei 'One of us who have grown up hepe wiLL mappy her '. M.3 Ram le-lek mu se parav te, ka re ra wan ra lasi maki 'We have wai ted a little time, and you want to have us go and see the Ma ki '. 80

G.26 Ram rets pitewi r, e-tsiga 'We kept on te Z ling them, but aZZ in vain '. L.5 Ram ra l ni-el , ko las ror in e tsats 'We wa Zk about here, but [as ' mind is bad'. A. 36 Ra wan wera1. Ra tuloni win el 'We are alZ going today; we are going to Zead this woman away '. C.4 Ko pi ma , ra loloJ 'Then Zet him come, and we shaZZ wash'. L.26 lk i r ra wa hama I 'Let us go to the dancing ground '. K.15 Ra hor-hor ke le 'Let us drive fi sh again '.

Ipl . excl .: namb, nam, hab, na namb S.3 Kia namb-wan Lol-naro� 'We are going to LoZ-narong ' (indef .) S.4 Namb-wul i pwere-pwere 'We are going to seZl the sow ' (fut.) K.68 Mar re namb un-un �a 'They wanted us to keep on diving ' (fut.) nam K.90 Kia nam wa la 'We went to the shore ' (past) K.93 Lolak e tsats inir tutuJak werek nam korta 'My heart is sad for my dear brothers whom we have accompanied' (past) G.23 E wa na wan nam e Siu 'He said we shouZd go off to Ma Zo ' (fut.) nab S.20 Na we nab wa ri eni pwere-pwer' sa mo tsal l 'We want to take on board the sow you (were to) tie up ' (fut.) This form only occurs in the fut ure , but the corresponding dual form nob is found in the indefinite as well. na G.23 See under nam, above , last example. (fut.); S.20 (indef. ), see first example under nab above . There are no examples with a past .

2pl. : kam; kab, ka kam K.21 Tutu, ko kam lasi Ie-tar a7 'EZder brothers, di d you see that woman ?' (past ) Q. 62 Kam lasl Mal -weaweQ, Jowul , wU e-tsiga wor7 'Can you see Ma Z-weaweng at ShowuZ, or not yet?' (indef .) Q.90 Kam i ko kam han? 'You then, have you eaten? ' (past ) S.19 Kam wurei e-wise Ie 'Say what you want here '. (indef. ) kab Q.4 Ka b Juhu wor 'Heap it up yet more '. (fut.) A.43 Kab Jure! 'Make fire!' (fut.) A. 61 Kab ma kab lai na-re l na :k 'Come and take up my na-re l dance '. Other examples in Q.3, Q.63, Q. 83, K.I09, A.35, H.33, T.9, K.57, 81

G.18, G.29, K.42. Ka b is the regular form before the negative se ... te. K.I05 Kab se karasi te Lebon Sa 'Don 't pl-ay triaks on Lebon the First'. See also for the posit ive : K.I06, G.12, 0.2 4, K.86, K. I04, K.1 24, S.40, L.44. It is interest ing to note that an adverb which con tains the part icle e retains it when coupled with kab: S.2 Kab e-be? 'Where are you going? ' K.124 Kab e-be �a sami? 'Where are you that (I may) al-ub you? ' ka G.19 Ko ka lav hos i tekau 'Take up the tekau she H-fish ' ( fut . ) 0.9 Mwi re ka wurei ni-se, ko kab ar ma 'If you want to say any thing, aome baa k again ' ( fut . ) S.38 Kam i ka mul 'Go away, you! ' ( fut . ) See further : K.142, K.I08 .

3pl. Pa st : ma r G.23 TutuIak ma r uroi 'My brothers have eaten '. K.16 Mar luha, mar ma 'They re turned baak, and aame '. Q.66 Mar lai wa tsin, ma r mul 'They took them and departed'. B.9 Mar tsubul Tiwil, mar lasi na-amp 'They went down to Tiwi l- and saw the fire '.

Indefinite: ar Q.50 Ko ar tei na-ak na-tor sa Em il-Parav 'They fa shion a aanoe of na-tor wood at Em il--Parav '. K.15 Ar hor-hor kele 'They drive fish again '. K.36 Ko inir ... ar wa re ne-hi:m sar 'They go into their house again ' .

Future: par K.55 Ar re par ru 1 pur-pur no-woI -'They wa nted to break off their paddl-es ' . K.71 Mar re-ro� par tigei win'ok 'They wanted to marry that girl- '. p.6 Pwi-re pwi sa, par I iwe 'If there shou l-d be one, they wi l-l shoot it '.

3. 4.6. Other Verbal Parti cles

Besides the particles of per son and tense, there are two other particles in common use, viz . ar and ok. Of the se the part ic le ar de notes repetit ion and frequency, whi le ok, which we ha ve already metas a demonstrative , serves to express continuance of the action in dicated by the verb . 82

The part icle ar follows the verbal particle of person or tense , and in the past does not affect the form of that particle , i.e. if rnwi would be used in the sentenc e, apart from ar, then rnwi is st ill used. The same applies to the future particle . The following examples will illustrate the combinat ion of this part icle with the verbal signs. ear Q. 63 E ar wa 'He again says ... ' 0.20 E ar wa , "10" 'She repZies, "Yes ". ' U.38 Ko Bat-pila nat un e ar iwei kele na-mban 'Bat-piZa 's son again Zet go his saiZ'. mu ar 0.20 Mu ar wureim ni k01 'He oame baok and toZd you, did he ?' mwi ar A.48 Mwi ar ma wa ras i ne-hi:m 'When the time oame again for you to pay a (ceremoniaZ) visit to (my) house '. mar ar 0.8 Mar ar re-rakere 'They were embracing ' ( continued and fre quent action)

pe ar K.44 Ko pe ar rna pe lasim 'I wiZZ oome again and see you '. R.47 Tirnak e re pe ar lai nen pi wan 'My father wants me toI take again his portion (to him) '. s.6 Ko pe ar tsal i pwere-pwere nen 'Later I wi ZZ tie up that sow '. po a r P.7 Ko inik, po tara , po ar mats 'As for you, you wi ZZ grow oZd and die (Zater, or, as a resuZt) '. Q. 74 Ko inik po ar wan, po tabu 'You go on again and cook! '

pwl ar A.29 Ko na-rnboQ ke le ta-ru, pwi ar ma 'After two days he wi ZZ come again ' .

pu ar Q.80 Tlm�m pu ar ma, ra hanl na-lok ni-le 'Your mother wi ZZ come again and we shaZZ (aZZ) eat this pudding '.

ro ar B.3 Ro ar lawl ko pu-roQ 'This time we two shaZZ be abZe to take it up easiZy '.

r'ar L.4l R'ar ikir pwl lap Qa-tan re no-ur el 'We shaZZ aZways be many here on this isZand '. 83 kab a r 8.7 Kam luha ma , ko kab ar ril)en i 'Come back and take her on board ' .

These examples make it clear that ar is a consecutive part icle, expres sing either the repetit ion of one act , or a second that follows as a , consequence upon the first . The part icle of cont inued action is variously ok or �'ok. The following examples from the Texts will illustrat e it : B.13 Mi wan, m'ok lek re wowon-n'wat sa 'He went and stayed on a diff'. T.l Ko m'ok wiel 'He kept on wa Lking '. T.8 Ko ini mu ok las i 'He kept on seeing (them) '. F.15 M'ok tepel re-I)an 'He continued to work magic wi th it '. B.23 Ko pe m'ok tabu na :m 'I shaLL (habituaLLy) cook your food'. c.6 Ko i-si Ie ni m'ok wits? 'But who is it here keeps on throwing ?' 0.8 Ka m'ok kete ni-wa t mu tSQV? 'Was it you who kept on casting the stone rs) that fe LL?' Q.6g Ini tipwis, ko m'ok wan mar wul-wul pitewi 'He is onLy a chi Ld, yet they keep on going and buying from him '. F.13 Inik mo m'ok kete no-uJ m'uJ 'You have kept on making it rain ' . K.108 Nam m'ok ral el ko pu-rol) 'We 've simp Ly been waLking about here ' . L.22 Ko kom m'ok wiel I)a-mbe Ie? 'Where have you two come here from? ' K.102 Ka m'ok karasi tser ni Lebon Sa 'You are aLways pLaying tricks on Lebon the First '. K.8 3 Ar mok karasim ko we! 'They keep pLaying tricks on you, aLas! ' C . 1 4 Pe m'ok h�J ni-le watsin 'I wi LL aLways Land there now '. mar ok F.17 Mar ok kete no-uJ re-I)an 'They continue to make rain with us '. Q.23-24 Ko inir nor Emil Marur mar ok hor-hor, mar ok hore n'ehi 'The men of Em iL Ma ruI' kept on driving, they kept on driving fi sh '. Q.24 Ko ma r ok ma I)a-ok Ramason 'And they aLL again come here to Ramason ' . T.2 Mwi lasi I)a mar ok Ju-Julo 'He saw how they kep t on carrying Loads ' .

3. 4.7. The Imperative and the Particle te

The imperat ive is expressed by the future tense particles: po luha ma! 'come back! '; ka J u! 'PaddLe (pl . ) !' Many of the examples given as futures in the preceding page s have been imperat ives. It remains to not ice one point , and that is the use of the part icle te with an imper at ive to modify the directness of the order , like the English 'just ' 84

or 'pLease '. This is a particle fairly wide spread in Oceania , and may precede or follow the verb : A.48 Po wof not in na-na pu rOQ pwi sa wa tsin 'PLease carry just one sucking-pig now '. A.52 Ra wof te not in na-na pu rOQ mwi sa (plural of preceding ) G. 29 Ko kab te lasi timam l 'Just Look at yOUl' fa ther!' H. 9 Po tiwei te na-na pwi sa 'PLease scal'ify something (on me) '. H.25 Po te wetsi 'PLease SCl'ape it'. H. 35 Po te lasi taslm we le Qa 'PLease Look at that dear brothel' of YOUl'S '. JJ .ll Ko ra te wan ra lasir 'Just Let us go and see them '. , JJ .6 Ko po te mak, ro wan ro lasir 'You just Lead, and we two wi LL go and see them '. K.21 Pe te wan pe wurei ni tut ufak iniri 'Let me just go and speak to my eLder bl'othel's '. L.12 Ko kia, nob te lasi las 'Let us-two aLso see Ias '. This particle te has still another use , expressing doubtful asser tion, in English represent ed by 'maybe ': C.14 Ko ina pe h�f te watsln re na-amp hon 'As fol' me, pel'haps I shaLL go ashore at the sacred co oking-p Lace '. 'pel'haps ', miterik: There is��; a:� separate�� word for D. 9 Lebon Sa we le Qa 'Perhaps that is our dear Lebon th�

H.5 Miterik e ha e-pe Qa- in 'Pe�haps it cUl'ved over this way '.

3. 4.8. The Negative

The negative in At chin is expressed by the word se before the verb and te after it , exactly like the French 'ne ... pas' . The vowel of the first element is variable, and may become 0 when preceded or fol lowed by u or 0, thus : u.47 Mo so wof toni te 'You di d not carl'y it '. JJ .18 Nam se rOQe wofe ni te n'asan 'We don 't know its name '. K.72 Po se tsirer te 'Don 't fo LLow them '. 8.38 E so rOQ wofe ni te 'He di d not think it rightLy '. 0.1 Mu so pep te 'She did no t bear chiLd'. Q.10 Ra wurei na-na mo so rOQ wofe ni te 'We'LL te LL you some thing you did not understand pl'opel'Ly'.

3.4.9. Causative and Reciprocal Forms of the Verb

In most parts of Melanesia it is possib le by means of prefixes to construct verbs indicative of causing to act and of acting upon one another. These are called causative and reciprocal verbs respectively . In Atchin, however , as in the northern Malekula area in general , such 85

prefixes are not in active use. The Indonesian causatives are pa and paka , and it is possible that a weak grade of the former may be found in Atchin, e.g. in wi-tsov 'throw ', lit . 'make-faLi ' (see 0.5 I-se mu wi- tsov? 'Who threw it? '). As a general thing, however , the verb kete 'make ' is used very much as 'make ' is used in English. Examples: 0.3 Mar kete ni-wat mu tsov 'They made the stone fa H ' (lit. 'made the stone it fe LL ', and contrast 0.5 above) R.28 E kete na-amp e mats 'She made the fire it die s' (Le. 'she extinguished the fire ') R. 29 Ko e-wise ini mw l kete na-amp ml mats? 'W,h y di d she extinguish the fire? ' As far as the reciprocal form is concerned, there are no clear ex amp les in the texts, but in those that seem to be reciprocal the re duplication of the verb appears to do duty: G.7 Po lasi na-na fopon mar re-rakere 'See some things embracing each other '. Another possibility is the use of the ordinary suffixe d obj ective pro noun in a reciprocal sense : GG.2 Mar I iw-I iwer 'They shot at each other ' (or 'they shot them ')

3. 4.10 The Adjective

In a number of Melanesian languages the adj ective is always or frequently verbalised; in nearly all it can be varied for person and tense if used predicatively. That is to say , it always partakes of the nature of a verb, or at least of a time-word . We have already seen that in At chin it will vary regularly for number , person and tense also when used attributively. We saw also how close the sentence tsunob e res is to the Mo ta 0 tanun we wia, meaning either 'the good man ' or 'the man is good', and that in the English 'everybody wiLL Like the good man ', Atchin varies the particle of both 'verbs', while Mota varies only that of the former; Mota says 0 tanun we nol te tape 0 tanun we wia; Atchin with more self-consistency will say tsunob tsi Ie pa r ' re-roQ tsunob (Qa) pwi res, lit . 'Peop Le aLL wiLL Like the man (wh-) he wiLL be good', where wh- represents the relative element of the English 'who '. The 'adj ective ' becomes future like a verb because it also is a time-word to the mind of the Atchin nat ive . The scheme is not entirely complete and self-consistent , however , as there are in Atchin two different uses of the adj ective (or descrip tive time-word) , one of which is the att ributive , wit hout verbal particles, as in English: nu-mbo top-tap 'a sacred song '; na-amp hon 'the sacred fire '; tsunob sa 'a certain man '; in the Texts: D.ll Tasir we le Qa mul ma 'Our dear (younger) brother who has come '. N.l E wa l' toni to-bati 'He runs after a dapp Led fowL'. 86

Q.75 E we natun b�tiram 'He is the eldest son '. H.2 Ko tasin sa noreman ma- Iakel 'And one younger brother, male, youthful'. Here we have a collocation of three adj ectives which are difficult to render into good English as they stand .

(a) The Formation of Ad jectives Whilst the maj orit y of adj ectives - or stative verbs, to use the classification accepted in the last section - are underived wo rds, such as lep 'great '; [opon 'some ', yet some are derived words, formed by the prefix ma-. This prefix, however, is not in active use in the lan guage . It is of Indonesian origin , and some adj ectives have come into Atchin already formed with it : ma-homb 'humgry '; ma-mbur 'broken, snapped (of twig) '; ma-Iake l 'young (of persons) ', in this instance corre sponding to a verb Jakel 'become adult '. Such examples as there are of these format ions will be found in the Atchin Vo cabulary . Nouns can also be used attributively with other nouns , i.e. na-ak na-tor 'a na-tor canoe ', i.e. one made of na-tor wood .

(b) Comparison of Adjectives The following table will show the methods adopted in At chin for comparison of adj ectives:

'big ' lep 'bigger ' e lep-Iep 'biggest ' e lep-Iep nirl; e lep-Iep na-won

'small ' wele 'smaller ' e wel e-wele 'smallest ' e wel e-wele we-sa

The correspondence of At chin and English is not exact . An example is seen in KK .5 Tas in a mu wel e-wele 'Tha t brother was the smaller '. The last phrase given above is interesting; we-sa means 'once ', and the expression e wel e-wele we-sa corresponds exactly to the Malay diki t sa-ka l ian, lit. 'small once ' = 'very small '. There is one example of the part icle a used in a superlative sense : H.44 Mu ro-romi mw i-Iap a mw i-Iap 'He grieved very greatly '. It will be remembered that a is a demonstrative fol lowing a noun in the sense of 'that'.

3. 4.11. The Adverb

Some of the adverbs - those that do not vary for tense - have already been treaded above as object-words . These were adverb s of place . We 87

still have adverbs of time , manner and degree to deal with. These do vary for tense and so are time-words . Just as there is an attributive use of the adj ective, so there is of the adverb : Lolon e har me l ker 'his invisibLe was bitter greatLy ', i.e. 'he was very angry '. u.48 Ina me h�J womu 'I Landed first '. It is far more usual , however, for the adverb to agree with the main verb in tense, and examples in Section 2. 3.1. (b) will make this clear . We have already faced the paradox that most adverbs of time are object words, and have listed them; those that remain to be considered are not numerous , and are mo stly compound phrases whose verbal nature is obvi ously the reason fo r their functioning as time-words . The first group is that of the compound s of no-ut. Compounds of no-ut: this word means 'a pLace ', but is used in Atchin, as in most languages of the central New Hebrides, in certain set phrases, of which the following are examples : No 'ut m'bor) lit . 'the pLace was dark ', i.e. 'at night ' No'ut pOr) lit . 'pZace dark, when it was dark, at night ' No-ut pu pOr) future tense of the preceding two phrases .

B.4 No-ut m'bor) , or woJ i roJer, or wiel la 'When it was night 'they-two took torc hes and waLked to the shore '. N.ll Or le-lek no-ut pOr) 'They stayed tiLZ night '. B.3 Weral no-ut pu pOr) , ko ro wa rUr)Ji 'This evening (lit . today, when it is night) we two wiLL search wi th torches '. A kindred usage is that of e di Y-raY, lit . 'it is evening ', i.e. 'in the evening '. N.25 Ar lek e raY- raY 'They stayed ti ZL evening '.

E ser-ser = 'suddenLy, often '. K.19 Ko ma-lakel e ser-ser pu-ror) 0 'Oh, she has suddenLy become a young woman '. M.7 Ko maki m'pal mwi ser-ser 'The maki was sacrificed often '. The literal meaning of this is 'suddenLy ' or 'quickLy '; 'often ' is a derived meaning. We see the original in: R.2 Inlk po lai buha pw i sa pwi ser-se r 'You take a pig quickZy '. Parav 'Later ', is also a time-word: R. 3 Ko makl mu to m'parav 'The maki bas been put Later '. Te-rik 'perhaps ', is a rat her difficult word which is treated as a time-word, although the meaning of te is not clear ; rik means 'indeed'. Examples: D.9 Mit erik Lebon sa wele r)a 'Perhaps that is our dear Lebon the First ' . DD .30 Pwi te-rik pi kete kele taron'ok 'Perhaps it wiLL be done so again nowadays '. 88

(a) Adverbs of Manner and Quantity Many of these words are also used adj ectivally, and some will there fore be familiar already . If these are used to qualify nouns, they are adj ectives; if used to modify a verb , they are adverbs; there is no difference in the nat ure or use of the word; In either case they re main time-words, and are used as in the following examples : A.4l No ma ta e-Iap 'I am greatZy afraid '. P.ll ln ik po tara pu we le-wele, ko po mats 'You wi ZZ grow oZd a ZittZe and you wi ZZ di e '. The interrogat ive adverb of manner is e-wise, and although this is here given with the indefinite particle, it doe s not seem to be used with any other, no matter what the agreements would require . The fol lowing examp les will show its use . The word itself appears to be a causat ive form from ni-se 'wha t ', lit . 'doing what? '. See the preceding section on causatives in verbs. K.59 Pe wa tan pe lasi e-wise Qa ml mats 'I wiZZ go down and see how she die d'. U.47 Ko inik, ko wise mo so wo J ton i te buha pi wa e-hut1 'Why haven 't you carried out the pig tha t is to go on shore ?' U.49 lnik ko wise mo wure i mwar' el1 'Why have you spoken to the man ? ' H. 32 E-wis e ko mo ro ro wiel1 'Where did you want us two to go ?' K.63 Ko e-wise' 11 'And why this ?' K.IO Ko e-wise ni n'ehi el1 'And what 's the matter with this fi sh? ' (N.B. the word wise become s a specifically transit ive verb with ni in this example) K.3 7 Ko e-wise Qa pwi tigei1 'Why shouZd he marry her?' L.6 E-wise mu ro rew-rewtsi tsunob1 'And why di d he wish to ki ZZ the man? ' N.29 A ko e-wise mo ha tsi tsuQon pitewi1 'For why did you bite your Zip at him? ' N.31 E wa , e-wise1 'He says "What?"' A.40 Ko ko e-wise mo Jok1 'And why di d you hide?' Another word that calls for special not ice 1s the word pe ' Zike '. This is definitely a time word, and is often combined with the ligat ive Qa; the whole combinat ion epe-Qa, etc . is used by the missionaries as equal to the English conj unction 'that ', but no such combinations are found in the Text s, and the use is prob ably illegitimate. The following examples will show the forms actual ly found in the Texts: G.16 E se re pe te Qa pi pep 'She is not such .as wi ZZ bear a chiZd'. H.5 Miterik e ha e-pe Qa- in 'Perhaps it curved over Zike this (arrow in fZight) '. K.115 Ra kete pi pe ni-se1 'How are we to do it? ' L.25 las, po se kete te pi-p'ok 'las, don 't do it Zike that '. 89

M. 3 Na-vu l ok mwi sa Qa e re p'ok kisen 'Another month has passed and it is the same again '. M.4 E-pe na-riv wanu le-Iek ko pu- roQ '(They are) �ike ra ts staying a�ways in one p�ace '. N.19 Ko pe ar sere ke le ko pu-roQ pi pe Qa mwi sere 'I wi �� shut it again just as he shut it '. P.5 Na-mboQ s�m e p'ok 'Such are your days '. R.17 Ko ina tuak e se sa te n'asan pi p'ok 'I have no fr iend wi th such a name '. ' Q.59 Ra tuwe sak pi pe taw i 'Let us pi�e up mine (the mound fo r yams) to be �ike the mound (I bui �t before) '.

(b) Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation The ordinary word for 'yes ' is io, that for 'no ' is tsiga. The former is an obj ect word, the latter a time word , as seen in these examples: G.5 Mwi tsiga 'It was in vain '. H. 7 Ko lasi wU-Qa e-tsiga7 'Did you see it or not?' H. 39 Ko e wa , "E-tsiga" 'But she says, "No". ' Similarly N. 30.

R.l Ko ini buha. e-tsiga 'But he had no pigs ' (lit. 'he pig it no t ') R. 3 Ko inik mwl-tsiga 'But you ha dn 't any (pigs ) Another form of the negative , also a time-word, is tsa: G.19 Ko mw i tsa 'But it was not (so) '. K.104 Mw i tsa, ko kab mats 'Were it no t for him, then you wou�d have di ed '. A.l Timan e ro pwi tsa nl 'His fa ther di dn 't Like him '. A.52 E, buh'ok pwi-tsa te 'Eh, not that pig, p�ease !' C.12 In i e ro pwi-tsa ni 'He did no t want it '. C.13 No ro pwi-tsa pe wa Woremet wats in 'I don 't want to go to Woremet now '. E.8 E ro pwi-tsa 'It wi �� not (do what is asked) '. K.12 Inik ko ram pwi tsa te pu-roQ 'Then there wi �� simp �y not be any food for you '. Q.89 E ro pwi-tsa e hani na-Iok 'He does not want to eat the pudding ' .

3. 4.12. The Numeral Sys tem

Numerals are very definitely time-words in Atchin, as they are al most always combined with a verbal particle, which agrees in tense with the verb of the main clause . In such an examp le as K.37 Pw i sa pwi tigei 'Let one (of us ) marry her ', the marriage has not yet taken place, so the bridegroom is to that extent also hypothetical. He is still a 1 'future-one ' . l See Capell 1935: 199 for other examples from the Mission translations. 90

The plain numerals, bereft of all accompanying particles are :

(a) Cardinal Numerals l. sa, tas 21 . sal)awul mowi 1 e-ru roman sa 2. ru 30. sal)awiil mowi 1 e-tol 3. to 1 45. sal)awul mow i 1 e-wats roman e-l i m 4. wats 100. mow sal)awu l 5. 1 im 101. mow sal)awul roman sa 6. on 110. mow sal)awul e-sal)awul 7. mbut 117. mow sal)awul bu lun e-sal)awul roman e-mbut 8. wa l 120. mow sal)awul bul un mowi 1 e-ru 9. s i u 133. mow sal)awul mowi 1 e-tol roman e-to l 10. sal)awul 200. (mow sal)awul) e we no wa-ru 1l. sal)awul roman sa 300. mow sal)aw'ul e we no wa-tol 12. sal)awu l romon e-ru 1000. mow sal)awul e we no wa-sal)awU l 20 . sal)awul mowi 1 e-ru

This system could be cont inued indefinitely as far as needed. It will be noticed that it is a fully decimal system . The meanings of the com ponent element s do not concern us here. A few examples of th ese cardinal numerals with the added verbal part ic les of the different tenses fo llow : H.15 Mu nunre re mal il)e-s iu 'He examined at nine bed8 '. K.4 Ar lai masa l e-sal)awUl 'They take ten fi8h '. K.9 Mar we-we I)ae-s iu pu-rOI) 'They counted up to nine only '. It is to be noticed that with the numeral on '8ix', the verbal part icle of the indefinite becomes a by assimilation, being fe lt as part of the word; the same applies to wa 1 'eight ', where we have o-wa 1 . JJ .30 Tahar mu hoti buha e-mow sal)awul 'Tahar brought a hundred pig8 ' . P.l Mewi ko e tei wen-wa-sal)awUl 'In one day he make8 a thou8and'. Examples of the past tense particle are seen in the following cases: C.ll Ko mw i sa ko e wure i e re i-san 'One 8aid he wanted it for him8e lf ' . L.23 Inir mw i sa mi wahe 'One of them de lou8ed him '. M.l Na-vU l ok mwi sa 'Every mo nth '. Future tense: A.48 Po wof te not in na-na pu-rOI) pwi sa watsin 'JU8t bring one 8ucking pig now '. H. 20 Ko po tel nu-as pwi sa 'Now fa 8hion a digging 8tick '. H. 34 Ko kam i pwi sa pwl lek 'Then one of you 8hall stay ', K.86 Kab wan ko kab wa re na-na pwi sa 'Go and all go into 80me thing (to protect you fr om the rain) '. 0.14 Mar re par wurei na-na pwl sa '(Tfl they wi8hed to te ll me anything ' . 91

R.2 Inik, po lai buha pwi sa pwi ser-ser 'You bring a pig quiakty '. U.31 Pe wehi tal in na-mban pwi sa 'I wi tt putt out a rope for the sait'. In many instances, however , the numeral sa is used attributively with out particle to express the indefinite 'a ', 'any '. Examples of this have already appeared . A good examp le of this is seen in : A:l Na-sup sa, natun e-ru 'Onae there was a man who has two sons ' . L. 8 Sa ne-sa r e-ru ko nei sa '(For) eaah two spears and a atub ' . K.23 Ko pe te wurei na-na sa ' Ptease tet me te H (you) 8omething ' . K. 61 Mwi I a i ke le marwiri sa 'She took a aane again ' . This usage is naturally limited to the first numeral, which alone can be indefinite in sense . If the sentence is negat ive then the numeral take s the negat ive particles exact ly as a pure verb would : R.17 Ko ina tuak e se sa te nla san pi plok 'But I have no friend whose name woutd be tike that '. The only noteworthy point is the use of the particle e in addition to the negat ive , as though the who le complex 'not-one ' were regarded as a single verbal idea. As already shown , the verbal particle can occasional ly be replaced by the emphatic particle Ie. The part ic le ko can also take this place, though what the exact force of it is does not seem clear . An example is seen in : JJ .17 Ko na-na ko sa me lai pitewim 'Just something I have given you ' . In the missionaries' work I find : Ni-sal Qa mu nats ko sa 'some other way '; mar rna re moral Qa mi lep ko sa 'They aame to a big ptaae '. Also : N.28 E re pu wurei na-na ko sa 'He wants to say something '.

(b) Ordinal Numerals 'First ' is womu; above that number the ori.dinals are formed by the addition of -en to the cardinal, the verbal particles of cour se remaining just as before. So we get :

1st womu, tas-en 6th won-en 2nd ru-en 7th mbut-en 3rd tol -en 8th wal -en 4th wats-en 9th siu-en 5th lim-en 10th saQawul-en

Above tenth, the method of expression, according to Layard 's notes, is different , but unfortunately he did not collect examples, nor do any occur in the Text s. He gives :

11th e saQawu l romon sa , or e saQawul e-tas kele, 1.e. '10th and 1 again ' 12th e saQawul romon e-ru kele ' 10th and 2 again ' 92

(c) Multiplicative and Other Numerals So many times a thing is usually expressed by the preposed particle wa , in some cases varied to wa . So we have as multiplicat ives :

, 'once ' wa-sa , six times ' wo-won 'twice ' wa-ru , seven times ' wa-mbut 'three times ' wa-tol , eight times ' wo-wa l 'four times ' wa-wa ts 'nine times ' wa -s iu 'five times' wa-l i m 'ten times ' wa-sal)awu l

The following are Text examples : K. 62 E sup wa-sa 'She moves it once '. R.39 Liwon e tal wa-ru 'Its tusks curve round twice '. This wa is really the Indone sian- causat ive prefix pa-, pa-ka-, used in the Banks Islands and northern New Hebrides not only wit h verbs but with numerals as in Atchin. In Atchin, as we have seen it is prac tically not used with verbs at all .

(d) Other Particles with Numerals In some instances part icles other than those of a normal verb are used with numerals in specific senses. Thus ta is used before numerals expressing a number of days: A.19 E wa , "Ta-ru" 'She 8ays "In two days time '''. A.35 Ta-I im weral kab ma ka b tuloni 'In fi ve da y8 (from) today come and take her away '. B.31 Maki sa e-Ra we notout, ta-l im Ie wera l '(There is) a Ma ki at Raga among the bushmen, five days (even) fr om today '. JJ .28 Tahar e wa , "Mwi-tsa, ko ta-ru" 'Tahar says, "Never mind, then in two days!'" The part icle may also be used with the numeral when the noun is expres sed : A.29 Ko na-mbol) kele ta-ru, pw i ar ma NoriJere 'In two days ' time, then they wi ZZ come again to Norishere '. In this case, however, it is not obligat ory : A.19 Mwi lek na-mbol) e-ru 'He stayed two days '. BIBLIOGRAPHY

BLOOMF IELD, L. 1917 T�galog Tex� wi� h G��mm�ic�l An�lY4� . Chicago : Univer sity of Illinois.

BRANDSTETTER, R.

1916 An In��oduc�ion �o Indone4i�n Lingui4�c4 : Being Fou� E44�Y4 ... translated by C.O.- Blagden . London : Royal Asiat ic Soc iety.

CAPELL, A. 1935 'Grammat ical Categories in the New Hebrides' . Bulle�in 06 �he School 06 O�ien��l �nd A6�can S�udie4 8/1 : 189-202.

CHURCHWARD, S. 1926 New S�mo�n G��mma4 . Melbourne: Methodist Church of Australasia.

CODRINGTON , R.H. 1885 The Mel�ne4ian L�ngu�g e4. Oxford : Clarendon Press .

DEACON , A.B. 1934 M�le�ula: A V�ni4 hing People in �he New Heb�ide4 . Ed. by C.H. Wedgwood, with a preface by A.C. Haddon . London : Routledge .

DEMPWOLFF , o. 1924-25 'Die L- , R- und D-Laute in austronesischen Sprachen '. Zei�4 ch�i6� 6U� Eing ebo�enen-Sp��chen 15:19-50, 116-38 , 223-38, 273-319.

93 94

IVENS , W.G.

1937 'A Grammar of the Florida Language '. Bulie��n 06 �he School 06 O��e�al and A6��can S�ud�e4 8/4 :1075-110.

JESPERSEN, O. 1924 The Ph�l04 0phy 06 G�amma4 . London: Allen and Unwin .

LAYARD, J.W.

1934 'The Journey of the Dead from the Small Islands of North eastern Malekula '. In E.E. Evans-Pritchard et al, eds E44aY4 P�e4 en�ed �o C.G. Sei�gman, 113-42. London : Kegan Paul , Trench, Trubner.

1942 S�o ne Men 06 Malekula, Vao . London : Chatto and Windus.

MACDONALD, D.

1891 Sou�h Sea Languag e4 : A Se��e4 06 S�ud�e4 on �he Languag e4 06 �he New Heb��de4, and O�he� Sou�h Sea 14iand4 , vol .2. Melbourne : Public Library .

MALINOWSKI , B. 1935 Co�al Ga�den4 and The�� Mag�c. 2 vo ls . London : Allen and Unwin .

RAY , S.H.

1926 A Compa�a��ve S�udy 06 �he Melane4�an 14land Lang uag e4 . Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.

TATTEVIN , E.F. 1929-31 'Mythes et l�gendes du sud de l'11e Pentecdte . (Nouvelles Hebrides )'. An�h�op04 24 : 983-1004 ; 26:489-512, 863-81 . PART II

ATCH IN AND ENGL ISH VOCABULAR Y

INTRODUCT ION

The chief abbreviat ions are the fo llowing :

S.L. denotes the song language of At chin .

Comparat ives from Malekula dialect s: MidN = Middle Nambas; BN = Big

Nambas; Sin = Sinesip, Sout h West Bay ; Boi = BoinelaQ , near Aulua;

Lolng = LolQaroQ, Port Stanley; ot her dialect s generally not abbrevi at ed.

Omba dialects: Lg = Lo logaro; Lm = LolmaQgwe ; Dui = Duindui; Wl =

Walurigi; Raga dialects: NR = North Raga (terms supplied by Rev . Dr

W.G. Ivens ); CR = Central Raga (MSS . vocabulary with Mota equivalent s by Rev. L. Levuhi ); SR = South Raga (from Pere Tattevin 's text s in

Anth�opo� 1929, 1931). Maewo = Maewo or Aurora I. ; Mta = Mota of

Sugarloaf I. , Banks Group ; Erom = Eromanga , southern New Hebrides.

A few words of interest are given also from Lb = Lembel, New Irel�nd .

The letters IN = Indonesian , PN = Polynesian , MC = Micronesian, and

MN = Melanesian , i.e. forms fairly common throughout Melanesia. In some cases referenc es to the Text s are given by letter and figure . 98

a1 That. Mwar ' a 'that man' ; amal The dancing ground of a win a 'that woman ', etc . See village (n' ama 1). See also A.13,14 ; K.18; H.4, inter alia . hamal. Vao and Lalep (main There are two extension s of the land ) yamal; Wala n'ama l for meaning: (i) general emphasis: n'amal l; also ami 1. Q.87; N.13, etc .; Iii) a rela tive meaning , 'who, which': F.3; ambol A sacred jar (na-amboi ). N.36; R.48,55,58; S.29. ampl Fire; firewood ; light of a2 Belonging to. H.16; U.5 et torch (na-amp). IN apuy. seq. Na-amp hon 'the sacred fire', Q.78 ; na-aJTlp fUI-ful 'white a3 Conjunction , if. A.74 ; K.7. band with markings pro- duced by fire '; ni-as na-amp a4 Interjection. B.4o; K.25, 'smoke, ash' ; par fur i na-amp indicat ing anger. 'the cooking (and eating?) of puddings '; ratse na-amp 'em as Suffixed pronoun , objective , bers'; no ki-ki na-amp mw i han lsg. , sometime s euphonically 'I have kindled the firesticks i a. and the fire has caught '. a6 Suffixed pronoun , 3sg. , e amp2 A fruit whose juice is used wureia tuan 'he told it an for stunning or poisoning fish. other ' . See also tuw. Wulu nu-amp 'mushroom type club' . (nu-amp ). a7 Water (nu-a). MidN no-wi; BN na-va; SR wa; NR wa l, not aQa Not yet . S.L. for tsiga CR. wor. ai Interjection of surprise; see aQke Atchin pronunc iation of also ha i. English 'anchor ', used as per sonal name of a pig. aim House; used only in the phrase 101 'aim 'indoors'. The ar1 Verbal pronoun , 3pl . indef. general word is hi:m. IN yumah. See also rar; ar-ru Qa 'those two' , L. 26. ak Canoe (na-ak). U.5 et seq.; Also a toy canoe ; na-ak wala ar2 Particle between verbal pro 'long distance canoe '; no-wof noun and verb , indicating re na-ak wala 'steering paddle of iterat ion. E wok Qa-in pwi ar this canoe '. MidN n'�k; BN ma �a-tan ko ro 'he went there na-w�k; Lg aQge; Vao nu-wak; and is going to come back again '; IN waQka. pe wa ko po ar luha ma ko ro 'I am going but will come bac k ake To draw (a bow) . again' . al The sun (ni-al ). P.l; R.9; ar3 The casuarina, used for pur U. 56, etc . Ni-al rur hore 'to lin in lodge construction; "thatch out" the sun' , 'exten ridge pole of lodge ; also arrow sion of thatch on gable end of used for removing upper canines a lodge' . Times of day: of tusker; also for making ni-al e wa tsalll 'sunrise '; spear s and clubs. Mta aru nl-al mu wa tan 'sunset ', which 'casuarina' . is also ni-al e nun, or ni-al e Ju-Juwoni 'the sun dives ', are In buf are 'index finger , 'the sun paddles away' . second toe'. alai In n'ai alai 'sticks for aru Interjection of astoni sh making fire'. ment . K.22; N.39. alo On the shore. S.L. for as1 Pig's jaw . Name of a cere Qa-la . mony (ni-a s). Na-ni ni-as 99

'coc onut thrown to the women '; n'asan). cf. nl-en. N'asan na-mbu ni-as 'the bamboo of the bahi "shark's jaw", type of ni-a s'. IN ajay 'jaw' . See entrance reserved for lodges also as. and dance enclosures of older men; n'asan man "bird's beak", as2 Luck. Ni-as e-res 'good term for pattern on dancing luck' ; ni-as e-tsats 'bad luck' . dress. cf . tsuQ b�t l-r am. asar Name of a gong signal . Asaran 'giving the asar'. Vao and Wala ditto. �l�wan Sister 's son . Fiji lawana 'helper '; Bwaidoga asas To blacken the face. (Papua ) lawana 'relationship term ' . asten Name of a plant employed in magic (n'asten). a s i For haS i , q.v. Ba The iSland of �ba . Mta Opa . at Thatching palm, thatch (ni ba-ba In e ba-ba ra rlv 'jum a t). Vao ditto; IN atop. Nam ping movement in a dance'. See pelasi ni-at 'we remove the rlv 'rat'. fronds of the that ch palm' . bag In bag e ran 'cloud'. See awawan Name of a ceremony . ran ..• MidN pak-ne-ran; BN ba na-ran 'sky' . cf. Kuanua, New Br itain bak-ut 'cloud'. ai Tree, wood, club (n'ai). IN bahl Shark . Bahl e ha tsl "a kayu 'tree'. N'ai alaI 'sticks shark bites him", operat ion of for making fire'; n'ai na-mbwe incision; maman bahi "shark's 'gong st ick' (cont rast na-mbwe tongue", instrument of hard n'ai 'a gong rhythm'); n'ai. res wood used in incision; n'a san "good club"; batn'ai oreman bahi "shark 's jaw", type of 'small green shoots'; no-on entrance reserved for lodges n'ai "face of the club", the and danc ing enclosures of older square end of it ; talin n'ai men; mew laQ bahl 'headdress 'club rope or shoulder strap '; of fowl's feather s worn in wenen n'ai "flower of the dance '; na-vii l bahl e pari club", pointed projections on "shark attacks", name of a it . month. Vao baye; MidN bagl; BN nl-mbay, contrast Mota payoa , ar A fenc e of reeds (ni-ar). but both from IN pa-Iwak 'giant Vao ni-ar. Ar pa le ni-ar 'they fish' . build a fence' ; ar pa l i ni-ar 'the fence is shaken down' ; baho Incision. Baho tureput ni-ar merer 'fence built round 'the older use of incision' ; a clearing'; na-mbu re-re nl-ar baho nosos 'the newer use of 'bamboo poles for fence '; ar incision' ; pat I baho "chief can buri ni-ar 'bamboos are brought didate" or " �ead" of incision ; for the fence '; ni-ar t a Qov no-ut baho 'incision garden'; 'fence built after a special ser baho 'initiation fooler '; pattern' . Lg ar. no hur I baho 'I kill pigs at incision'. Vao bayo. as Pig's jaw (ni-as). See also a s . NI-as sam e-tsiga 'have bahur{e) Species of tree . K.87, you no pigs J aws?' SR bwe l-ase etc . A kind of nut . Vao 'jawbone '; �ba ba l -ahe 'jaw' ; bayure. IN ajay. ba l Voiced form of pal, q.v. asan His jaw, hi s chin (n'asan). Po ma pe ballm 'come here that IN ajay . Al so used for bear d I may give your your consider or moustache (n'asak, n'as�m at ion pig'. SR bal . cf. Mota ma-la I. 100

bala-n Leg , shin, foot , peg. batu-n The head of a person. Ts in ba lan 'ankle bone , medial IN batuk. Ro in batun 'hair (of and lateral malleolus '; n'otsin the head)'; batun is also used ba lan 'heel-bo ne ', lit . 'penis to mean "origin": batun wanu of the foot '; lolon ba lan 'in 'places of or igin'; batun bahur step', lit . 'inside of the foot'; 'the trunk of a bahur tree " ' owon ba lan 'upper surface of the batun na-ak 'the stern of a foot '; ba lan wu lu 'the leg of boat '; batun na-to 'base of a the tree-fern image '; e riQ to-creeper '; ra raQ uton i batun riQen i balan 'to shake the n'al 'we pull out (?) the stump patient 's leg after massage '. of a tree '; ne-lup re-res batun Uripiv balan; MidN bulon. maiwet 'thatching batte�s pro jecting beyond the thatch, re ba lak A number of small pigs taining their root s which make received in exchange for a large a fringe '; batu ram "head of a one . cf. palak. yam", the name of a constella tion. MidN batun; SR butun; BN ban-ban Kind of armlet . Ban-ban b�ton; Lg Qgwatun . taQov 'shell arm ladle '. cf. Mt a pane2 • ban-ban In ro-wa re ban-ban 'spec ies of leaves '. cf. ban bari-n Calf of the leg . Tsln ban. bar in 'bones of the calf; tibia and fibula'. b�Q�-n The orifice of the penis . IN baQa 'opening , mouth '. In bas In bat in bas 'coc onut leaf'. the other Malekula dialects it Ne-rum bas 'principal solo is generally 'mouth' , e.g. Aul dancer ' . b�Q�n. bat Used in a number of personal b�t Source, origin, end . Re and plac e names, may be the tracted form of batu-n, q.v. same as bat , pat, b�t, and ul Kl la b�t 'to see that the gongs timately ni-vat 'stone'. IN are finished'; b�t rofer 'stump batu. On the other hand it of a tor ch' , 'seventeenth day may also connect with the Qat , of month'; bat na-tan 'buttocks" ' Ambat mythology . One of the b�t rul-rulo� nan 'his adam's compound s is To-bat , the name apple, thyroid cartilege '; bat given to those who have been to mar l 'verticle bamboo support s Wanu si tahar. Bat-pi la is an for front wall of house '; bat Atchin proper name. mew 'type of dance'; bat-me� e habwe reQwe 'a charm t � bind people of pr esent pigs'; bat-mau batav The breadfruit. Tauwtsen ' batav 'halves of a breadfruit ', 'earth, dust '; bate -mow 'a used to describe the two halves mortuary gong signal'; bat i-r am of the paint ed body in initi "head of the yam" , eldest child at ions. Mota patau. Common on (with possessive nan). Bat-rum the Malekula mainland also. proper name , wh ich seems to mean "the earliest woman heard batenar In ar ta-ta l batenar 'a of" ; b�te-rum 'a giant clam triangle of stars re presenting shell , in the myt h of the a clump of yams slung over a Brothers Ears; a shell , Hippopus� pole' . See ta-ta 11. ro-b�t tawe 'leaf by means of which ro-ka ri leaf is tied round bati-n The upper canine teeth a stick at the death-feast at ot: a, tusker. Ra bat i buha Emil Lap ; b�t-n'ai araman 'small 'they extract pig's upper ca green shoot s' , lit . 'the male nines '; ar batl tamaw 'they beginnings of a tree' . extract the upper canines from a castrated pig'. Wala batin b�ti-n The commencement . B�t in ditto . See also mbat . teren e sor 'swelling at the base of the intestine '. See preceding wor d. 101

be Place where; see also pe, of 'night'. In Atchin the word which it is the voiced form, covers the whole 24-hour per becoming mbe before the article iod, and so may often have to na, ne. 'Where? whither?' be translated 'day' : bOQ hoal Mwar' e be ko? 'Whence is this we le 'days of little food man? ' Mwar ' e be ko Jopon 'a (?rain)'; bOQ hoal lap 'days man from somewhere'; ko e wiel of muc h food (?rain)', 'names be? 'Where have you come from?' of months '. SR bi; Mota vea; Fiji i-vei . bOQ in By-form of preced ing , be ik In reQan be ik 'a kind of with crystallised possessive shell ' . suffix. BOQ in ta-mbut weral e tar-tar 'exactly seven days beka rkar A swe et scented shrub from today' ; bOQ in sa 'fir st whose leaves are used in a day of the new moon '. bouquet called segur, q.v. bel Hawk. Bel-JulJulan "Commun boro-n Ear (bora-k, bora-m , ion feast of the hawk". boro-n). Proj ections at bottom of knife blade. Le-bori-weren belet In ro-belet 'banana leaves', "Rat 's Ears", proper name , also the danc e of the "banana K.107 et seq. leaves"; 'dress of banana leaves'; ar tamwe ro-belet borot (o)won Sleeping mats. 'they dance Banana Leaves in turn ' . borsUs In met borsUs 'young coconut s' (about as big as a beQ In matan beQ nan 'patella , man's thumb ). knee-cap ' . bos i To cover with leaves . beQgenum Name of a fish with curved lines on it . No-ul sin bouru A per son. Spec ial wo rd beQgenum 'a curved design pain used on the Oba Pilgrimage . ted (ul) on the cheeks '. bu A bamboo pipe . Bu pal-pal berte-ni To turn one's back to. 'pan pipes'. cf. mbu , wu . betselehi To look for. Fre bua - Grandparent (buak, bU'll m, quentat ive, bets-bets-betselehi . buan , etc.). Perhaps Mota taloi 'to seek' . Buaror The name of a month. biok Taro. Pweren biok "taro stem" , a kind of club ; mawun bub To fasten, tighten. E bub biok 'small taro'. MidN and toni pwe-pwe e-re batun 'he BN boak. fastened the rope round his head. LL. b i ton Umbilic al cord. Vao ditto; Wala bUton; MidN bi ton; BN buha Generic term for pigs. buton; IN (m)pusar 'navel'. See also poho , mbo. Ne-hi:m sia bu ha 'pig-sty'; not in buha biwat A bamboo . Wala bUwat, 'newly weaned pig' ; I ihwen pUwat . buha 'teething pig'; tal in buha 'pig rope '; rabat i buha bonon Small heap on top of yam 'to extract the upper canines mound surrounding base of no of a pig' (see bati); liwon usur vow-vow . Triangular pro buha 'boar 's tusk bracelet ', jection in middle of sail. 'spiral shells '; weren buha "Forehead"? 'pig's legs '; lilin buha '?pork cutlets'; ar tiwe l buha 'they bOQ Voiced form of pOQ 'dark cut (the cheeks ) of the pigs'; (ness) ', the articular form neke l buha 'soft yam'; e tsibo being mboQ. SR bUQ; Mota qOQ; buha na-mbwe 'he gives back the common MN mboQ i; IN mbaQ i 102

gong-pig '; Qur-Quran buha 'pi g's butsun The brow. Butsun matan snout '. Mt a qoe; Lg boe; Neva :r, 'eyebrow' ; butsun tapa 'where Winiv, BN bua; Wuli bwas; MidN the leaves of the tapa turn bugas; Tobah boba; Boturuma over ' . vavembi; Lar avat bu:as; Lolng buis; Boinelag bo i buwo To hide. Frequentat i ve bu-buwo . buh� Retracted form of preceding. Buh� Qur-Qur 'pig's grunting', buJ Finger or toe. Bu J e-Iap 'the bullroarer'; buha liv -tov 'thumb , big toe'; buJ are 'index 'young pig with tusk j ust erup finger , second toe' ; bUJ Ii ted' ; buha pa l-pale 'young tus 'middle finger , third toe'; ker with �pper canine '. b u J I i we-ere mats-mats 'ring finger, fourth toe'; buJ we le bulun Word used in counting be 'little finger , fifth toe' . yond a hundred. Mow saQawul SR bisin ran 'finger -nail'; buI un e-saQawu I romon e-mbut bisin I ina 'toe-nail '; Mota pisiu. 'a hundred and sevent een'. buJ -bUJo Slow. bumbu Term of address to grand bwat nl-man "Source of power ", par ent s. Rel and Lalep use person in possession of import bua-k; SR bibi; MidN bubu; BN ant magic . bumbu. bwaQ-hwaQ in In bwaQ -bwaQin balan bunon The end of a thing , e.g. 'calf of leg'; bwaQ-bwaQ in weren a taro. 'radius and ulna , forearm'. See also baQ. BwaQ-bwaQ 'garter '. bunun In R.8 possibly a mis Sinesip binbe. hearing of pu nun "it will sink", i.e. the horizon. bwas Penis wr apper . LeQ bwas 'a type of square-dance'. buobu A laminate arrow tip with oval sect ion. bwerew In kan bwerew 'a gong buok Name of a ceremonial object. slit ' . buri ?To bend. Ar buri is a bwe tegatlk Baby 's rattle . term used in thatching: Ar buri nl-ar 'they bring bamboos for bweteges Lone , alone. N-dram the fence'; ar tai buri 'they bweteges "lone yam" , unattached fell a tree'. Frequent at ive yam for presentation. Vao bet. transitive bur-burenl: na-mbwe bur-buren i 'a gong rhythm in bwetelak Plain stout stick about which the dancer s take a ser six feet long . Pegs driven pent ine course'; ar burenl 'to into outrigger float of canoe advance in serpent ine course'; for at tachment of outrigger bur-burenl nosos 'a gong rhyt hm', booms. on the feast of J ur-hamben. bwetemaQ Hard yams. bur-tan Tail, fork projection on canoe figurehead ; tail of bird. Takes suffixed pronouns. d- Many words in the At chin text but In win but 'dumb lip of beginning with d- or n-d- should gong'. Vao mbut, possibly IN be looked for under t, as d- is buta 'blind'. merely the voiced or articular form of this initial . The few �ut-but Ram but-but 'ceremony given here do not exist in the of taking off the headdress'. unvoiced form or else are used in special phrases. buto The rear . Na-mbUr buto ne hi:m 'back centre post of lodge '. daQ In win daQ 'the thin lip of 103

the gong' . Also 'crying of es An exc lamation of disapproval woman ': IN ta�is 'weep' ; Atchin or incredulity. ta�. ewiu� The name of a flower. das Voiced form of tas 'sea'. IN tasik. Mwara n-das 'sea folk'; ar tsere owow das 'they remove the salt-water from the gunsun The nose . Takes suffixed gong ' . pronouns. SR gususu-. da� From ta� 'basket '. hal To curve over (of an arrow an 'holder '. in flight). H.3,5. dri�i From li�i 'companion'. ha2 Species of creeper used for Mar we i dri�i 'they danced to making rope. U.32. welcome him' . ha 3 Coil of hardwood used as dro�we Para� dro�we 'beginning bracelet . to hollow out '; ar ri� dronwe . ha4 Fishtrap , used by adult s for salt-wat er fish . Made from vine ha2 , also na-ha mbuts-mbuts e 1 Verbal particle, 3sg. indef. from plant called mbuts-mbuts; na-ha tiroro 'a liana used for fishtraps'; na-ha tapar 'a spec ial trap still used on Vao'. e3 At , in. e-Tsan 'at Atchin'. IN ka�tun 'a basket '. It makes a compound with re, as e-re 'onto, into '. habwe In bat-mew e habwe rOQwe 'a charm t o bind people to e4 Interjection of impatience pr esent pigs '. or of excitement . hada The out side end of the out ehi A fish (generic), before it rigger boom of a canoe . has been caught ; after it is caught it is called masal. E ha-ha Reduplication of ha4, 'a I iw-I iw ehi 'to shoot fish' , trap for freshwater fish' ; but after the long phrase I iwe, also from ha 3 'bracelets made the art icle (n'ehi ) is used; of strips of cane'. batun n'ehi 'fish' s head' ; n'ehi 'fish' , is also used for hail Exclamation calling a the diamond pattern on a woman 's person's attent ion. skirt ; n'eh ian ' eh i 'plenty of fish' . ha l2 To take out of the fire , applied to a pudding. el Dempostrat ive particle : this. Wi n el 'this girl'; buh{l el hale To turn something . E riri 'the pigs here' ; here, usually hal-hale 'to danc e with arms compounded as �a-el or ni-el . bent ' . It indicates closeness of posi tion rather than demonstrat ive hama l Public square, dancing ness. ground . half-village . Lo 1-hama I 'initiation lodge '; also amal . elel A sweet scented shrub used SR ma l; Ambrym ma l; CR kamal . in the bouquet called segur, q.v. ham ben In fur hamben "cooking the feast of commemorat ion" , embe-n The body (n'emben). a rite. Probably from fur i and amb 'fire ', with gerundial e-ra An exclamation : e-ra M ..., ending. po matsi� sak 'Hello, M ... , will you work for me?' han (i) To eat . A ritual word, 104

the common word being uroi . here In the name of a dance, Mt a y ana; BN hani, etc .; IN here mohewa l. See al so hlri: ka ( a)n-i. ar hiri mohewa l. hanan Eating , food. hial A kind of bu sh, used in 'food in general '. making fish traps. hap A pig grade, re-entrant tus hil i To dig, to build a house. ker plus (e hap). A.4; G.30; H.21, etc .; to erect (a stone), Q. 23, or har To burn (intr.). Lolak e rafters; reduplicat ed hi I-hi 1 har 'my inside burns', i.e. 'I 'dig in large numb er s', e.g. am angry' ; me ral-dral ha r Jopon yams , or pile up stones for ko me ar rna 'I came somewhat dolmen; hil-hilan 'name of a early and here I am '; cf. feast ', lit . "digging up", and Or ierh i har ran 'he rebuked name of a month. IN kal i 'dig'. him' ; Vao har 'to shine '. hi:m House (ne-hi :m). Ne-hi:m hasa To climb over . cf. sa won mwi -lap 'bac helors' house '; 'climb'; sa-sa 'keep climbing '. ne-hi:m wiJahan 'schooling Frequentat ive hasasa; row has house '; ne-hi :m homberoQ ni 'jump away from him' ; row 'women 's house '; ne-hi :m won hasa 'jump across. 'men 's house , "sacred house"' ; ne-hi:m tabawer i 'type of hases String . Na hases wUlu house , possibly cooking house'; wawa 'plaited string from wawa na-mbur buto ne-hi:m 'back tree ' . centre post (of lodge)'; ne hi :m tar-taran 'strengthening haJi To enter into . B.ll; H.8; eaves of thatch with pins'; ne K.88, etc . Has tsalil 'come hi :m tar-taran la-tap 'lodge out , emerge ', K.98,102; See or bachelors ' house with such al so asasi, wa rasi, asi, Q.41, strengthened eaves '; pitse ne asi wa 'go into '; haJ-haJi 'go hi :m 'fill in the ridge with in one after the other ', K.8T . loose thatch' ; no waras i ne hi : m "I enter the house", es ha ts i To bite. N i - tal e hat s I pec ially of a husband's return ni-wa t 'the tether eats into ing to his wife 's parent s house the stone ', a rite , tying the on the tenth day of marriage; pig rope to stones. Wala n'tal ne-hi : m tsibon 'the stone plat mwi ha tsi; Vao yati; IN ka t i. form, with house over it ' (Wala See al so hats. ditto); ne-hi:m saQawul 'ten houses, Maki shrines '. Vao ne hatUnsi A cure for fever is hi :m; IN, SR hi :m; MidN n' ima; called hatiinsi tsUnob in the BN nim�x; IN yumah. magic texts. hi:r A bundl e (ne-hi :r). IN hawe In ra haw-haw 'they take bl lit 'to twist '. off (the head covering)', the name of a rite. hlsi In hisl na-tuQ 'to bail' . Q.35 · hawoJ A coc onut shoot . hit The oct opus (na-hit). A term hats The umlaut form of ha tsl for a mushroom club with four 'to bite': hatsi totoni 'to rounded projections; na-hit rin bite off', K.TO; hatsibut 'to ta-mats 'star-fish' , lit. 'octo close round' , K.53 etc. pus food for ghosts'. SR hit; CR kit; Duindui kwita; Walur igi he Exclamation of disapproval . wlta; MidN wita; IN uy ita. Q.19. hitsl To copulate. Reduplicated hel ema To yawn. hits-its. cf. tsitsi 'glans penis'. hepe To cut off. Q.88. Al so written hibe. hm Interjection of disapproval . 105

h6 h6 h6 Cry used for rounding hor 'thick hurdle , a method of up pigs, and when chasing in catching freshwater fish by itiates on Obe . means of it '. The root seems really to be horo, connecting ho To scrape ; tr . ho- i 'to wi th Mta yoro 'action against fashion clu bs', L.8; 'to grate a person or thing'. SR goro . coconuts', R.50. horots i To count . K .115? hoal In bo� hoal we le 'days of little food (?rain)', the name hoJ To land from a canoe , prop of a month, and bo� hoa l lap ably really h�J, from haJl, 'days of much food (?rain)', q.v. a mont h. hoJi Completely . IN ha(n)ti? holo In mwara ho lo 'a black Ar uro l hoJi n�-n� �a 'they ate wading bird' . up completely that thing'. holol Sweet . hoses In e siken hOses 'a young tusker with tusk occasionally hon Taboo, holy - kon . Na-amp visible' . hon 'men's sacred fire ', c.14. hoti To tie up, attach (pigs hoperuJ Name of a leaf used to stakes). medicinally in initiat ion (roin hoperuJ). hotev i In ar Juro hotov i 'a cry used in danc ing'. hor To scrape coconuts for a pudding . hotsin In p'ul hotsin 'nape of neck' . hore To chase , but the root idea seems ra ther to be simply ac hOWl To take shelter. K.85 . tion or movement against . E Howe? hore ton i 'he seizes', B.15,17 , 22; 'chase', K.11 8 ; Q.24. how2 A crab ; ar hor-hor how, Li I its hore, N.12, sere hore, see ho re. N.18. E hore 'name for dancers' ; ram hore pila 'chasing howan In pu-pu howan 'cleaning rails, a game'; ser hore 'front the dancing ground ' and rear walls of house , closing the ends of the lodge'; ar taw hep An exclamat ion. tawu hore 'gong signal sealing the transaction of the exchange hU (w) To conceive a child, be of present s after the Oba pil pregnant . A.58; P. 3. grimage is completed' ; nl-al rur hore "the sun is thatched hu-hu To borrow? Pe hu-hu ts in out", extension of thatch on 'I borrow (a pig) '. gable end of lodge; e te-te hore 'unofficial agreement made hulo� Ar hulo� 'a swimming by man with a girl 's father to stroke, initiated in dance'. marry his daughter'; no hun Lo� = 'swim'. Hul -hulo�e 'to natse hore pin 'I have already heat in the fire (?waive over tied the slip-knot '. Frequen it ), of green canoes for magic '. tative ho r-hor 'to chase (fish) '; kete mu hor-hor 'to hulowi To beckon. Q.17. make taboo '; ar hor-hor how "catching crabS", an undulating humba-ni To clear the ground in step in dance; hor-hor 'catching the direction in whic h a tree eels, a character dance'; ar is to be felled; cf. humbwan; hor-hor 'beat the sides of a humbwanen = 'mouth '. lodge '; 'to be chased (of in itiates on Oba)'; ar su hor-hor humbwan Atonement , "clearing" . 'they paddle and surround '; ser 106

hun To tie. Hun-hun na-tsen ikl Abbreviation of iniki (i) 'attach the slip-knot ', in 'you (sg.)'. ceremony of reserving pigs for the Maki . ikir Cardinal pronoun , Ipl .incl . 'we'. IN kita. hupwanen The name of a month. il To put a taboo on. i I hore hu r To cheer . =?hili, q.v. huru Name of a leaf with medici i:m House , used only in certain nal properties used in init i cont exts: lola' i:m 'indoors' . at ion (na-huru). ina Cardinal pronoun , Isg. 'I'. huf A by-form for uf-ufi 'to IN root aku. ask' . R.43. inil Cardinal pronoun , 3sg. 'he, hutl In na-vUI pu hut 'next she , it '. IN root iva. month' . ?IN batu 'appear '. ini2 In pulok ini weren 'my hu t2 Louse (na-hu t). MidN gut; humerus '. See pelek, pulok. BN kut; Mta wut (u) ; IN kutu. inik Cardinal pronoun, 2sg. huw To push a canoe ashore. 'you'. The full form, iniko D.13. is very occasionally used in address, more usually iniki, a hUl To seize, grab . false lengthening. hU2 A cry in dancing , 0 hute, inir(i) Cardinal pronoun, 3pl . ehu ... teo 'they'; also used after per son al nouns to indicate a plural : hub To be satisfied, replete tutufak ini r i 'my elder after eating. HUb-hub; no hUb brothers'. Note the phrase 'I am full '. I)a iniri 'to their homes'. huri To kill pigs (at Maki) no io Adverb of affirmation, 'yes '. hurl Maki. Fijian io. Atchin 10 rik 'yes, indeed'. hut The mainland. Doublet with no-ut from IN. (h)utan 'bush' ; ira To go o natria l t rip; as wa e-hUt 'go by hand' (as a transitive verb , 'to launch '. opposed to river ), A.3; B.37; u.4. E.6; 'go ashore' , E.9; B.38; e-hut 'in the bush, ashore'. iri Suffixed pronoun , 3pl . objective , 'them' . See iniri. I-san His ; pronominal root isa, Suffixed pronoun, 3sg. , gen to which suffixed pronouns are erally coalesces with the vowel added, and the resultant pos of the transitive suffix. sessives are predicative , 'mine ', etc. See sa3• ial Exclamat ion expressing in terest . In A.63 it indicates lsi Who , anyone ; also ise. ignorance, 'I don't know' . iwlwe In ar iwiwe ni-mbwen ia2 An occasional formal ending 'giving mat s in payment '. to a speech. ihi Part of an exclamation: u u i h i Ihi 'a cry de ka Verbal pronoun , 2pl .indef . noting that something has and imperat ive . finished' . kab Verbal pronoun, 2pl . future. 107

ka I A bunc h (of bananas ) (ne kar-kara A purlin. kal l. H.27 . kaw-kaw In wa luJ kaw-kaw kalat The nettle plant , used 'steering paddle for long dis also as a symbol of dangerous tance canoes', a special wo rd strength. Mt a kalato. used on the Oba pilgr image. ka latsi To give in exchange . ke To attach yams to a pole. u.26 et seq. Wala ditto. Q. 56 . ka le To hold. Reduplicated ka kei In ar kei, term for stripes ka l. B.12; K.57; U.35,73. on the ne-tuw. kam Verbal pronoun , 2pl . past , kela Term used in magic ; roro sometime s indefinite. kela keleo 'they open their eyes'; oro pwi Ie kelao. kamb Verbal pronoun , 2pl. future; see also kab. kel bwet The youngest of a family . K.3; N.47. kami Cardinal pronoun, 2pl. Note: kami tasin 'you and your kele1 To stick fast . B.2. brother '; kami pw i sa 'one of you' ; kam' i - se 'who are you? '; kele2 Again, another, also , next , kami o! 'You , ready, go!' back. A.6; R.35; A.e,9, etc . Po lai nu-a pu Jopon kele kan bwerew A gong slit . 'fetch some more water '; pi sa kele ko pe ar lai pw isa 'I kar A comb (ne-kar). Ne-kar na will get one some other time'. rOQ 'comb of mangrove wood '; Mta kel(u) ; Rotuma kele. In ne-kar pat-pat 'comb of separate Atchin the short phrase , kel is wooden prongs lashed together '. used in kel-bwet (q.v.) and were-were-ke l. kara1 Flying fox. N'asan ka ra 'flying fox beard', term for kel inin See under segur . spaces at end of na-mbwas. Mta qaratu. kel-kel Small yam table , erected in house enclosure. Vao ka l kara2 Covered with sores. A.l. kal. According to Pere Jammond , Kar in K. 5. kal = kel 'dig up yams '. karasi To deceive, play tricks ker-ker Scented herbs worn at on . Ka rasi buha 'catch a pig the back of the belt , part of by enticing it to eat and then the insignia of having under seizing it '; ka ra-karas intr . taken the Oba pilgr image . 'to lie, dec eive , play the fool '. N.25; Q.30; S.13. kete Do , make , prepare (food), put , put ... on .... Ina no ka re In mow kare 'to open out se kete te, Tahar e tei 'I did (of bahuru tree)'. K.10l. not make it , Tahar put it there'; kete Maki 'to make ka ri Dracaena shrub , mostly used Maki '; ar kete ne-s is na-mbwer as ro-kari 'the leaf of the 'They erect a fence round the shrub' , which is carried when gongs' . a tusker that is not home-bred is killed. The leaf is used ketete To spill. L.41. in inc ision medicine; the name is applied to a sweet scented kiam Cardinal pronoun , lpl .excl. herb used in the bouquet called 'we' . segur (q.v. ), and in making an armlet na-wol ; Maki ro-ka ri kikil To mark out (ground) . 'pre-penetrat ion degree taking N.49. To light a fire (by rite'; ro-ro-kari 'child's plough method), i.e. to rub . rattle '. Lg na-karia; Mta karia. No kiki na-amp mw i han 'I have 108

rubbed fire (sticks and the away . Ko l-ko l 'to leak , sweep fire) hus eaten, i.e. lit'. away ' . kik(i)2 A wooden knife for cut kom Verbal pronoun , 2du. past ting pudding, and the action and indefinite. of cutting with it (ne-kik). No kiki na-lok 'I cut a pudding'. komtsi To rub , polish, make Contrast tiwe i 'to cut with a shine. sharp thing , a bamboo or knife' . kon Sacred. See also hon. Vao ki la To look round , down . Ki la yoyon; SR kon. No-ul kon 'holy luha 'look back'. Dr Ivens paint ' . cfs. Mta ki lau 'look' ; but perhaps better Mt a va- ylala kon i To send. Q.44;77. Kon 'look' ; Hog Harbour ku l-sa ton i 'send away' , N. 44; e kon 'look for' ; SR kele; Paama , ma "she sends news" (girl to Fiji ki la 'know' ; Duindui man , that she wishes to elope kiki lai; Walurigi yiyilayi 'a with him); e kon wan "he sends sign' ; and in IN, Tagalog news", the reciprocal of the k i k i 1 � 'know' . pr eceding . kintsi To gather (a magic term). korl Dry. In na-ni kor 'dry SR kin ti ' ga t her ' . coconut '; 'coconut thrown by Maki men to the women '. cf. ki rit In n'ai kirit 'carved Mta yoryor 'coconut with meat shaft on arrow' . scooped out after drinking ; Mta kor 'dry' . cf. kul , kur. kir-ki riel Small bird resembling a swallow , inhabiting the main kor2 To pick up , select , choose land. out . Ko r toni, E.l; ar kor ton i na- l eng 'they choose out na klsen Only, alone. Timak klsen leng dancers'. 'only my father'. A.41,50; M.3 ; T.6. SR kehkes; Mta vesel koroQaI To do without a thing? cf. Mukawa (Papua ) ekesina. K.13. kOI Copulative particle beginning korta To go about together. a clause, 'and'. kotsi To carry, drag a half ko2 Demonstrative particle be finished canoe to the beach. fore nouns, indic ating that the emphasis rests on the following kots-kots To trim the inside noun. Pi ar ma ta-ru, ko mewi of the dug-out . Ie '(he said) he would come again in two days , which is now tomorrow ' . kul In na-ni kul 'a dry coc onut'. See korl . ko3 Verbal pronoun, 2sg.indef. kulan The name of a cycle of ko� At end of sentence expresses songs. impat ience or interrogat ion or command. Probably identical kul -kul Chief man. cf. Vao mara with ko3• kur 'canoe magician'. koke To carry, take (of bow and kumala The sweet potato. Appar arrow only). A.IO; R.7; S.13. ently an introduced term from Polynesia . ko-ko rov Coconut full of milk. of which a little of the kernel kur l Dry. cf. korl , kul . Na-ak is formed. e kur 'the canoe is left to dry' . kole To carry away , of wat er carrying objects. A.2. Br ing kur2 Seagull . 109

kur3 In na-vii l e kur mon i "the (i.e. take away the testicles); moon goes down in the east", 'to bring'; 'to take up (a name of a month. dance) , to carry' ; 'to cat-c h (fish) '; 'to give in payment kur-kur In ma r tei kur-kur atse (for a girl)'; e lai womu ni 'they cut 7 7' 'he take s it first'; ar lai e tsire 'they take it next' , etc . IN alap. lal To be married (of a girl). lal2 To marry . IN laki 'male '. N.3. Apparently the intrans Vao lay. itive of lai (q.v. ), from IN laki 'male'; in which case the lak Species of plant (nl-lak). analogy is false, as the final Roh� ni-lak 'spray of ni-lak -i is original , not a transitive leaves' . suffix. lakel To become a young man or la2 Locat ive prefix, occurring woman . Adj ectival form ma in lodge names, e.g. la-tap 'in lakel. SR ma lgel 'young man' ; the lodge ', etc. Also in a few Vao ma-lal)gel . non-sacred names , e.g. la-maf 'in bush' , for which Vao ha s lalam Species of bird . na -moh 'bush' . lall In ni-man e row lal i 'the 1 a 3 The shore. Used in the bird flies about '; I a 1 (i) also following combinations: wa la = 'flap , wriggle, of eels in 'go from inland to shore' , A.12; wat er'. B.l,35,41; D.ll; K. 39,42,84; N.7; I)a-la; pie la, A.73; wiel la-maf In the bush , as opposed la, B.4; 0.1. The IN root is to on shore. See la2 • Tawan lawad 'the sea' , but in Atchin san la-maf (see tewen) 'male it means the shore as seen illicit lov er '; wifen san la from farther inland. maf 'female illicit lover '; pe wa lamaf 'I am goi�& into the la� Rattles (nl-lal, ankle bush' ; to, rum la-moJ 'wild rattles, of hollow seeds . fowls '. See rum 'wild' . Vao na-moh 'bush' . Mt a mwot. lab To roast . cf. telab 'to roast , cook' . lamweri Name of Maki house , from na-mwer 'species of parrot '. labwen Root . Labwen mew 'pan danus root'; labwen mari 'a A fly (ni-lal)). IN lal)aw. kind of bow and arrow' , lit. 'root of the mar i tree from lall2 Wind (ni-lal)). IN lal)it which the bow is made - a 'sky ' . Na-tan ni-lal) 'cloud' fighting bow' ; labwe ni-mbek ( lit . 'buttocks of the wind' ); "banyan root", bow-string; lab ni-lal) e m'l' l 'soft wind' ; nl-lal) wen-bek 'tree used for main e sere 'strong wind'; nl-lal) e wooden purlins of lodge '. awits 'hurricane '; ni-lal) e ser e-lap 'the wind blew a gale '. lahan Marriage ; used in wifen Mta, SR , ditto; BN lan, lin; lahan 'all women married into MidN lag, lal) ; Hog Harbour Ian. a village ', i.e. all the wives of member s of that village . lall3 A herb inserted into arm Vao layan. See lai; lahan is badge (ni-lal)). phonet ically older than lai 'marry' , and better represents lal)a Mad , dement ed. Also lal), IN lakl 'male'. I a I) a I a I) . N . 3 5 36, , 4 0; o. 27 . Batun e lal)alal) 'he has a head lahen The base of a club . ache'. See also na-lel). New Britain , Duke of York I., Lambel lall To take. cf. lawi , lav. lal)lal); Oilbertese ral). Also 'to give '; 'to castrate' llO

laQawul In Mew laQawul name of 'the main body of na-leQ dan a degree , = 'ten feathers' , cers'; murun na-leQ 'char acter laQawul being 'ten' in some of dance '; ar sesere re na-leQ the southern dialects, such as 'they rehearse the dance' ; na Sinesip and Mewun. leQ pwi sew ta-l im weral 'the dance will be danced from days lapa A root used for making red from today' ; no-on na-leQ "face dye . of the dance", i.e. 'leader of a line of dancers'; leQ bwas larum A kind of dance. cf. Wala 'square dance. cf. Vao na-leQ melarum. 'comedy' . las-las Elephant iasis of the lap Large , big, great , much, testicles. very. IN labu ; SR lap; MidN lap; Fij i lavu. La-lap 'to grow laso-n The testicles (laso-k, up '. Lap-lap reduplicated form. laso-m, laso-n). A.8. SR wa lson 'the testes'; 1050 las Half coconut shell , us�d as "c ochon entier" (Tattevin); bailer . Mt a lasa . Perhap s also Mt a lasoi; IN lasu. Lg rasu. la-tap See tap. lasi To see. A.4,12,29,38,39 ; B.34, etc . Pe te matsiQan lasi lat-lat To quarrel. 'please let me try to work at it ', lasi as a sort of suppor latsin The vulva. ting auxiliary meaning "see whether I can" ; no se matsiQan lauso The formal response to the lasi te 'I did not try to work speaker 's speech. at it '; pe te kete lasi 'please let me try to do it '. Al so : lawi To take or give . See lail, 'to experience': ma r lasi ni with which it is int erchange mara 'they experienced a famine '; able. E lawi , e lai pitewia e lasi na-mboQ 'small pigs' 'he gives me '. SR rabe, la (lit . 'he views the rite' ); 'give'. IN alap 'take'. intr . reduplicated lasi-lasi 'to meet , see each other '. MidN See laQa. 1 is; BN 1 a; SR 1 a h, 1 as i; Paama las; Sa'a la:si. l aQ2 A square character dance (na -leQ). See laQa; SR leQ 'a lav To take . Short phase of dance in honour of tusked pigs'. la(w) i (q.v.). G.19; H.24. LeQ naw- ir 'a dance in which Lav-Lav tsor magical term, the mid-ribs of coconut frond s 'taking small things'; ar lav are worn'; na-leQ na-t� ' ''fowl'' lav na-na 'the stealing of I dance, a kind of square charac things (puddings , in a ritual)'. ter dance' ; leQ-sor 'formal square dance'; leQ 'to play the I�Q To swim . IN laQuy. K.66. fool; pretence, fooling '; ta mats leQ 'fool , madman '; leQ lei Prefix to feminine names, ta-ma ts pal 'madness of the e.g. Le-wol J u the personal name sacrificial ghost '; na-leQ ta of a sow from WolJu district mats 'square danc e ghost '; leQ on Wala. Vao ditto; Efate lei sorow 'yellow dance, danced in commonly ; Gilbertese nei . connection with initiation '; mew leQ bahi 'headdress of le2 Demonstrat ive particle, feathers worn in dance'; na-mbwe 'this, here', or merely empha na-leQ 'small portable slit sising the action of a verb , gong'; na-leQ wiJewin 'women 's as in B.4o; G.4; K.63; Q. 37. square dance '; ar tow-tow ni Ta-l im Ie weral 'exactly five na-leQ 'they learn the na-leQ'; days from today' B.31; ne-mbe ar kortoni na-leQ 'they select Ie? 'just where?' H.25. Le the na-leQ dancers '; wi tt na-leQ wo r, see wo r; 1 e pa, see p a . Inik Ie ro 'you yourself only' . 111

I e3 To catch fish. with sup 'old man' , Suqe , etc . Perhaps IN samba 'worship, le4 Locative part icle , parallel honour '. Le- is, of course, to I a - , 10-: I e 10'm 'at home' . the feminine prefix, lei. SR ra, and the prepositional form ra common, e.g. in Eromanga. Ie-tal) Prefix to name of a daughter who take s her father 's Ie-at Prefix taken by a wife name as the daught er of a man assuming her father 's brother 's who has taken rank in the Maki . or brother 's son 's name . Vao Vao , Wala, ditto. See lei. ditto. The meaning there seems to be 'Lady Stay' . Ie-tar Old woman . K.4 ; Q.39 ('wife'). Le-tar ok 'term of lek To remain, stay, abide , address for wife 's mother and dwell, be present , stand, stay husband's mother '; Ie-tar nl at home . Ar lek mat-mat ni man 'woman magician, attending 'they stay and guard him' , the at birth' ; Ie-tar sakel "the name given to the expert 's women settle down to it", name assistant s at init iation. Lek of month. Vao le-ytar; Wala lek 'remain for some time', le-gtar; Atchin tara 'ol d' . A.4; 0.6; lek-Iek-Iek 'remain a long time', N.13; le-Iekan , lets-lets A giant species of red le-Iek kon 'mortuary rite, yam. Ar tsel lets-lets 'they "stopping at home" '. split the yam with a stick' . leI Bracelet of turbo shell. lew Exc lamation, 'alas !' K.130 Vao ditto. et seq.

lele To wake up (intr.). Me I II To hang oneself. H.45; K.44 ma tur me se lele te pwi slre et seq. ; p.16. IN lavlav. sire, po un ia 'if I sleep and don't wake up soon, awaken me '. I 12 In bUJ I I 'middle fin � er , thir d toe' (see b·uJ); bUJ I I lelele A running step . cf. we-ra mats-mats 'ring finger sineal)k. and fourth toe'. lemak To pay for services. Takes I las In nl-mbel e lias 'dance the sa possessive after it : pe movement representing a hawk lemak sam 'I shall pay for your flying from place to place; e service�'; pe I emak san 'I 1 I-I las 'a danc e movement of shall repay him' ; e lemak 'it a similar nature '. The root is as payment '. See Tale E. meaning seems to be 'fly to Ra lemak sar 'we pay them back', and fro'. i.e. for having helped us make a canoe . llhe To drag, lead (of pigs only) . A.51,53; B.34; U.12, leI) Wooden coc onut skinner (ne etc . leI)). Ilhl Strengthened form of I II. I ep (i) A section of bamboo, be cf. tsl and tslhl-k 'to me '. tween two nodes. K.115. Ne lepin weren 'finger joints'. llhwen The middle. Llhwe-ram 'the body of the yam , a con lerowoJel In mas ll) lerowoJel 'a stellation' ; I I hwen n I -wat sweet scented herb used in the 'mi ddle stones'; ne-mbUr Ilhwen bouquet called segur' (q.v.). 'middle centre post of lodge '; watsa Ilhwen 'middle part of lesar Thin coral blade , apt to a bow' ; 1 Ihwen al "middle of cut a man's hand when searching the sun", about 10. 30 to 11 a.m. in the reef for fish. I III Species of shell fish. Le-saw-saw Name of the Guardian Vao na-I II. Ghost of the dead . Connects 112

li12 To turn. Li l -hore 'to turn it straight)'; liw-l iw 'to be one 's bac k' , B. 20 ; M.8; Li 1 - shooting', A.ll,20,31, usually lits hore 'to shut the door of shooting fish . Reciprocal panel of a house'. ?Mta 1 i 1 ar 1 iw-l iwe'r 'they shoot each 'spread as a bird its wings' , other ' . and Sa'a 1 iIi 'change, move about ' . 1 iwet In e rere 1 iwet 'midnight '; no-ut re 1 iwet is another form 1 i 1 ieti To stir up , mix. of the phrase. lili-n A rib . Li1 in buha 'pork liwo-n Tooth (human), tusk (pig) . cutlet '? L i wa k, 1 i wom , 1 i wo n . L i wo tsere nan 'his molar tooth' ; 1 im Five . IN 1 i ma . E-l im 1 iw' no-on 'inc i sor tooth' , lit. 'five' ; wa-l im 'five times' ; 'face tooth' . Liwon buha e 1 iman 'fifth' ; ta-l im weral 'boar's tusk bracelets'; liwon 'five days from today' ; maki buha sak 'my pig's tusks '; 1 iwon na wa-l im 'the five times grea buh� also = 'teething pig' . ter Maki '; sekol na wa-l im Liw feren 'young tusker with 'badge worn in the hair by a upper canine just appearing, man who participates in the "circle tusker minus"'; 1 iw aforesaid Maki '. ts ip "tusk touc hing" , curved tusker; 1 iw-wat-wa t "four tusks" ini The second largest in a (Vao 1 iv-vat-vat). Mt a 1 iwoi litter of pigs. 'tooth ', liwo 'tusk , brac elet '; SR lu 'tooth' ; NR and CR 1 iwo-; lil)i1 To conduct , ferry . Lil) MidN 1 ifun; BN lu:n all = toni 'to leave off' . NR lil)i 'tooth' ; IN I)-ipan. 'to free, dismiss'. 10hwor In na-ru si mwara 10hwor 1 il)i2 Companion . 'curved tusker of the men of Lohwor ' . lit Reed fence (ne-l it). Vao lut; Wala lut. 10k A pudding (na-lok) . B.24; K.8; Q.72, etc. Lok -ma lats litowi-n Spittle . 'remains of the pudding' , i.e. the 22nd day of the month; 10k 1 its Door-panel . N .12. mulats melmel 'remains of the pudding gone sour', the 23rd 1 its i To bind together (canes day ; 10k mot 'yam scrapings' for a torch). R.22. ("black pudding"); 10k wo ts-wots 'small puddings cooked in honour 1 ivtov Derived from liwo , and of ancestors' , used also for used in certain compounds: buh� puddings eat en during initia 1 ivtov 'young pig with tusk tion ceremonies (made of red just erupted' ; tamauw 1 ivtov . yams ); ar fu 10k wits 'they Apparently liwo 'tooth' , tsovha cook banana puddings' ; 10k pul0 'fall' . 'small puddings cooked inside a kind of bamboo' . liw Arrow (ne-liw). Ne-liw narol) or wu lu 'ceremonial ar 10k-10k Flower inserted into arm rows '; ne-llw tsi 'arrow with badge , or attached to hawk ban tip of human bone '; ne-l iw sl ner ; a red flower worn by can niwa 'poisoned arrow with broad didates as symbol of incision haft '. Wala ne-l iwa; north wound; amaranthus flower , worn Malekula , but Wul i nu-lu, in dance at feast of fur hamben Neva:r nu-lu, Lol-narong ne-lew. by men of high rank .

1 iw(e) To shoot an arrow. Ar 101 Short form of 1010, in: 101 ' liwe matan na-mbwe 'they shoot aim 'indoors '; 101 na-rol) the eyes of the gong ' 'among the mangroves', nat ive liw wof ni 'to hit a mark (shoot name for Po rt Stanley. See 1010. 113

lola A sail, spec ial word used lull To make run about (trans .). on Oba pilgr image . lul2 The night hawk . lol-hamal Initiation lodges on the beach of Oba . In Rel , lu-Iu Type of semi-c ircular Rarav , Pweter-wo , the word house seen on Malo and built means 'lodge ', Lelep lol -yamal; on At chin by Romromon. Ur lol-nami l 'club houses' . See ama l and 101 = 'inside' . I�mweik The sea-snake . lola The inside. IN dalam, with luI A man's disease caused by assimilat ion of consonant in menstruat ion pollut ion (na -IuI). first syllable to that of the E lu-IuI luha, see above under second . H.3,8; K.109 ; L.22; I uha . N. 13, et c . c f. Lg 1010 i a I) 9e 'inside of the canoe ', and see luwe To pr otrude , stick out . next word. K. 53. lolo-n The inside of a per son luwi To pour out . Luwl-Iuwi or thing: lolak e wurei 'I 'water a yam hole '. want', lit . 'my belly speaks '; lolak e tsats 'I am sorry' , LuwuI A former Maki title, lit . 'my belly is bad'; lolak I ivusi in certain other islands. e ha r 'I am angry' , lit . 'my belly is hot'. lup Cane batten used in thatch ing (ne -Iup). Varieties: ne loni To hang up. CC .l. lup put; ne-Iup re-res ; ne-Iup re-res batun ma iwet. cf. lop. lop Smart , adorned for a cere mony . luwu Vertical series of panels in house. lop-lop Scrapings. Ar lop-lop rin buha 'they give food scra pings to the pigs'. 'm1 Abbreviation of I:m 'house ', 10-loI To bathe (intr.). Also in the phrase 1010 'm 'indoors '. 10-loI. In DD . 'become fat , after famine'. _m2 Suffixed pronoun, 2sg. possessive or obj ective . lo-ut Inner court of house en closure. Spec ialised locat ive ma l To come . IN ma (y ) I. Also form of no-ut. See also I a 1. directive particle of mot ion Wala I a-ut. towar ds the speaker : Po me , ro wan 'come , let us be going' . 10m Carefully. Po kete 10m ton i Al so used in phrases indicating 'you look out!' ordinal number s: e ma e-tesan '(it comes) first '; e ma e-ruan lu In e rahe ne-Iu "call the 'second' , etc . In one case people", a gong signal . the meaning is 'become ', which is usually we . luha To return, come or go back. A.24; P.9; Q.43; R.42 etc ., ma2 Prefix of state or condi also adver bially, 'back', B.38; tion: ma-Iakel 'young '. IN ma� Q.35,36 . E lu-Iu-IuI luha but not any longer in active "menstruating again" (?) sow use in Atchin. whose body has resumed normal size after giving birth to ma 3 Possessive root for things litter; e to marl pu luha 'he to drink. I -s i ko nu-a no-mwan? will soon be back'; ar luh�n l 'Whose drinking water i s this?' 'gifts of pigs, fowls, mats' ; Nu-a no-mwa Tawas 'Tawas drink lu-Iuha ma 'home , to their ing' water' . homes' : 114

ma- h�mb Hungry, to be hungry. ma las Cold (adj .). Mta ma l aso E.l; CC . 2 . 'cold' , ma lasiu 'cold food' ; MidN ne-mal igos 'cold' ; BN ma la. rna-hut In net rna-hut 'late yams '. ma lats See 10k. Lok ma lats ma iwet Var iety of cane used as 'remains of the pudd ing '. batten. See ne-Iup. Ne-Iup re-res batun ma iwet 'thatching ma-Iekal A young man . See battens projecting beyond the I a ke I. thatch, retaining their roots, which make a fringe' . ma le-ni To forget . cf. rna Ii 'late' . mak To precede, go first . A.42; K.20 ,42; L.27; N.38. mal i Late. No lek ma l i 'I came late' (lit . 'I staye d away too maka The name of a thorny bush, long ' ). which has uses in magic . ma llQ Bed. H.12,16 ; Door-panel , mak I The name of the ceremonies N.38; R.14. Mii laQ, ma l iQ which at which degrees are taken. take the noun-suffix -an, are A. 59,62 ; B.31; H.32. Makl other forms of the wor d. rokari 'pre-penetration rite for taking degree'; maki ni mal um Soft . N-dram ma l um 'soft mbek "banyan" maki; maki ne-mer yam' ; n-daQ malu� 'a kind of mow saQawu l 'the doubly one basket '. See mal. cf. Fiji hundred maki '; the maki which mal umul umu 'SlO�lY' ; Mta follows the maki ni-mbek; makl rna I urn I urn ' soft'. Qa mw i-Iap 'the big maki '; maki na wa- lim 'the five times maman Hot . greater maki '; maki ni-ware 'the re-ent rant tusker maki '; ma-mbur Broken, to break (intr. ). maki pekes 'crescent-tusker IN putuQ 'break a piece off'? maki '; maki merer-pekes 'circle Vao has rna-vel. Mar rOQe n'ai tusker maki '; maki pu pa l 'the ma-mbur 'they heard a twig maki will be sacrificed ', cf. snap' ; ne-wis ma -mbur 'long red buha pu pal 'the pig will be obj ect close to the liver (pan sac�ificed'; mwara n'maki 'men creas?)'. of the maki , Maki-men'; kete maki 'making maki '; segur maki mame la Species of tree (may be 'bundle of plants worn by wives the same as memel ). ? Mt a of maki-men' ; maki e Ju 'the mwamwa lan. maki is finished, ready' ; maki e ma-wun 'the maki is complete'; manl Bird (generic ) (ni-man). nu-mbo 51 maki 'the high Maki Vao ditto; IN manuk; Mta manu. song'; ne-ra ts makl 'maki raf Forms retaining the final -k ters' . of the IN are found in north Malekula. mall The kite ( bird) (nl-ma l ). Na-mbu ni-mal, in Ruruar applied man2 Magic . PN mana ; IN ma naQ to flag-staff erected while in 'power '. Vao ditto. Sorcery , itiates are on Oba Pilgr image ; charms , poison, magical pro e rewtsi ni-mal san 'they strike cedure (ni-man). Le-tar ni-man (or kill) hi s kite ', used in 'woman practitioner ', woman reference to Oba Pilgrimage. attending at childbirth; tsunob NR, Mt a, Lg mala 'hawk' . nl-man 'person exercising magic '; bwa t ni-man 'source of magic, mal2 A maki title . pe�ple in possession of im portant magic '; e tsereni ni ma la A tree, and its bark , on man 'magic cure for a swollen which beads are threaded. limb ' . mala-hi ts A pig or sow , special man3 A cricket (ni-man). Ni-man word used on Oba Pilgr image. e 515 'twilight ', lit . 'when the cricket chirps '. 115

man� Sweat , to sweat . Labwen mari 'a bow' (lit . 'root of the mari tree'). man-masaQk Small Oba mat used

as penis-wrapper by Ni-mbel . ma rur Hollow , worn through (of hole) . E ruhu maru r 'pig manun A hat. grade , curved-circle-tusker plus-plus '; Le-beroQ marur Man-wowa The per sonal name of a 'place name and lodge on canoe . EE .I. At chin'; Emi I Marur 'village on Atchin'. maQ Bound bam boos or sticks, used for water. marwiri Wild cane . K.60 et seq . Vao marwure 'variety of cane marl Verbal pronoun, 3pl . past . used as a batten', see lup; wenen ma rwiri "cane flower ", To starve . Reduplicated women 's bracelets of twisted mar-mar; as noun ni-mar-mar grass or leaf . 'starvat ion'. Mta mara 'fam ine ' . ma s Provisions for a voyage , D.4. Food (special word used . See preceding ma ra I Famine on Oba pilgrimage ). Also the (ni-mara). provision basket . Vao mah. mara2 To get up from a lying or masa Sick , be sick. p.26. sitting position. K.62; L.35; Masaan 'sickness' . IN ma-sakit N.3. Mara rur-poQ 'get up in 'sick' . the morning'. masal Fish, not cooked, G.18; ma ra3 An eel. Hor-hor mare K.3, etc . Also name given to 'catching eels ', name of a treatment after incision. Mta character dance, and na me of masa. the twent ieth day of the month. Words for eel are : Mta ma rea, mas amp In mutso masamp 'fire Lg marai, SR marit, and in New red star'. cf. Vao masoamp . Ireland , Lembel milo. masaw The open sea. Fij i maraQ In n-daQ maraQ 'basket masawa ; Gilbertese marawa . coloured with a red colouring matter ' . mases To be cooked. Na-ni mases 'sweet-smelling mixture made mare Above , up, upwards , high of coconut rind and chopped up up , upright . Wa mare 'blow leaves' . upwards (of wind blowing from the north-west )'; tauwtsen wa mas l-IeQ Offal , remains of fo od, mare 'the upper side of the etc . dancing ground '. B{lt mare 'vertical bamboo supports for mas iQ In mas iQ lerowofel 'sweet front walling of house '; nl-al scented herb used in bouquet e ma ma re 'the sun comes higher ' called segur' (q.v.); 'love (time of day , about 8 to 9 a.m. ); magic'; 'sc ented leaves'; wa ma re 'grow tall (of plants)'; pwereQ masiQ 'worn on any part pe wa mare 'I will go (sail or of the head'. Wala ditto. paddle) up (the coast ). mat Low tide . Ni-ma t m , i mat, ma rha North-wind , "close up G.l9; ni-mat in H.41 , 'edge of tola". reef at low tide' mari Tree used for centre post s ma t a To be a fr aid. Mata - n i of lodge , side wall studs of trans., 'to fear'. IN ma-takut lodge , wooden punch for extrac found in the simple form only ting upper canines of pig , and in MidN tagot; BN matagot for making bows and arrows. 'fear'; Ln ma-toktok; Pgk mator, et c • SR m tatn e . 116

matal i The name of a women 's maliQ (an) Bed . See ma liQ. Wala dance. ditto. Also means 'time', 'place ': me rOQe mu wure i matap In na-ni matap 'a coconut mal iQan ok 'I heard you say it which is red inside' . today'; por ma l iQan 'a wooden strut supporting a purlin of a ma taru Maki title used since house ' . na-mer mow saQawul . Mal -nator A lodge of Emil-Lap . ma t-mat Special kind of banana. Also amat: netin amat 'small Mal -n'ami l A lodge of Emil-Marur . puddings made from it '. Mal-ni-ar A lodge of Olep . matowar A large species of hawk that sometimes kills fowl s and Mal-nof A lodge of Senhar . rats.

malo Wild kava , kava . Re - Qa n ma ts To die, to go out (of fire ). ma lo "in the kava" , name given Ta-ma ts, ta-mats 'ghost '; na to two p� gs sent as message , hit rin ta-mats 'starfish' (lit. and to magical stones . Lg 'octopus food of the ghosts' ). ma lok; MidN mal ix. IN m-atay; CR , SR mat; MidN mis; BN rna ; Mta mate. �al-uap A lodge of Emil Parav , al so name of an ext inct lodge . mats iQ To work. C.l; P.23, etc . Po matsiQ sak? 'will you work malun Shade . Malun-bek 'lodge for me? '; e matsiQan san 'he of Olep , "Shade of the Banyan" '; does hi s work '; ar lemak si Malun-nahur 'ext inct lo dge of tsuneb mar ma tsiQan 'they pay Olep '; Malun-tawQ 'lodge of the workers (with mat s )'. Olep' . Mta ma lumalu; MidN ma lok. matu Right hand, right-handed. mama-n Tongue (mamak, mamam, Mta matua . maman). A contracted se;ond person mam in K. 53. Ar rere matur To sleep , spend the night . maman part of a giving cere In G.29, 'lie dead' . Ta-mats mony , "they ... its tongue"; matur 'a prostrate ghost '. maman pwere-pwere "sow's tongue", Matur also = 'to dream' , or a club ; maman bah i 'instrument 'to lay a course in sailing'. of hardwood used at incision' Matur-por-por 'to dream' . Mta (lit . 'shark's tongue'). East matur; SR mour; CR mou ; MidN ern IN root maya ; Mt a yara -mwes . matu 'sleep' , matu-por-por 'dream' ; BN ma ter 'sleep' , To laugh . mater-por-por 'to dream'. See al so por-por. man2 A bird ( �eneric) (ni-man). See also man . ma-wun Complete, finished, enough . E ma-wun 'it is man3 Magic (ni-man). See also enough'. IN panuh 'full '. See man2 • Ni-man wire-wire 'charm also wun. for catching flying-foxes '; ni-man san e-res 'he is wise mawut Bunch of leaves tied to in medicine ' (used in Le-swa-saw upper extremity of sail. in myth ). ma-wun To smell , a smell , a manov Yesterday . In most other stink . Mawun biok 'smell of dialects compounded with the the t�ro'. cf. na-wun. article instead of rna. MidN

ni-nap; BN na-nup; Boturuma ne ma-wus To hurt , to ache (intr.). n if, et c. Batun e ma-wus 'his head aches '; n'emben ar ma-wus 'his limbs maQaQ To ga pe , yawn , of mouth; are sore' . Mt a vus 'strike'. to be open. IN baQa 'opening '. Prenasalised to produce verb. 117

mar l Yellow. Na -vu l e mar mats -pa 1 A killed pig . cf. "yellow moon" , calendar name . ta-mats -pal. Also mats-e-pal . See next word. Mats 'die' . ma r2 Ripe ; ripe coconut just before it falls from the tree. matuan Mother 's brother (m. and See mi r, mpar, mwela. w.s.). Notin matuan 'mother 's brother 's child '. SR mo ian; mar3 That fellow . See mwa ra , Mewun mi tuana; IN ma-tuha the more usual form . 'elder ' . mar-marin To cool oneself . cf. ma un To be ashamed. Mta mamarir 'cold' . L.18;27 . maur To be alive , live , grow. mas i-le� What remains over from Ta-ma ts pal e maur 'pig that a pudding after eating, the has been "sacrificed" but is leaves it was wrapped in, the not dead' . Mta ma ur; SR mur, dry coconut scrapings from which not NR or CR; Rotuma maUr. the cream has been expressed, IN ma-hu9 ip 'living' .

etc . B. 26. Wala di tt 0, a kind of leaf. m'i' l Soft . Ni-la� e m'i' l 'soft breeze '; ni-al pu ma l-ma. l 'when mat Abbreviat ion of mata ieye', the sun declines' . ' used in certain phrases: mat borsus 'a young coconut ' (as mba Future particle , lsg. , S.L. big as a man 's thumb) . See Prose usage , pe. also full form. mba 1 1 A hawk (ne-mba 1). Face mata- The eye . IN mata. Matan of a hawk , pattern on arm-badge . sal "eye of the road" , entrance to a house enclosure; matan mbal2 A considerat ion pig , a metsal 'eyes of the danc ing lower grade tusker given in dress, pattern on dress'; mat considerat ion of a future gift . sa�awUl "ten (i.e. many) eyes", Vao ditto. See ba l, pa l (e) . dress pattern; matan JUrop "star fish" pattern on coc onut mbal3 Fore and aft plat forms of used in maki degree taking a canoe (ne-mbal). ceremony ; circular projections on club; matan tavu "eye of a mbal (e) To strike , to fight , conch" , pattern on arm-badge ; sometimes with n i-mba 1 'sticks butsun matan 'eyebrow' ; matan used for hitting or using in be� nan 'his knee-cap' , (lit . dance '. ? Mt a va lu; NR qalo 'eye of his leg' ); matan na 'strike' . tan 'anus ', "eye of the but tocks"; wo run matan 'pupil of mbalot Club ending in plain oval the eye'; matan e-wia 'white flattened disc (ne-mbalot). of the eye'; na-mbwe matan n'a/ "wood's eye" gong-signal; matan mbanl Kind of armlet . cf. e Juo 'he is sleepy , nodding '; mban2 , ban-ban, etc . e mat rav "eye of the evening", about 7 . 30; ma ta wets i 'the mban2 Sail of a canoe (na-mban). tip or top of a thing ' Ar sihlle na-mban 'they sew strips of sail together '; na mat-mat-ni To watch, keep watch mbu na-mban 'bamboo spars to on, look after . which the sail is laced'; da�an na-mban 'body of the sail' ; matsan Death feast , mortuary weren na-mban 'wings of the rites. Wala ditto, takes sail'; batun na-mban 'head or possessive . Vao matean. See base of the sail '; metewetsi ma ts 'die'. na-mban 'upper edge of the sail'; tal in (or ni-tal ) na mats-mats In bur 1 i we-re mats mban 'sail ropes '; tauw tsen mats 'ring finger , fourth toe'. 118

na-mban 'the owner s of the Oba Pilgrimage , who turns him fore-stone � (? the two wings ). self into a shark; al so the Mta panei 'hand', yapane 'sail'; name of a maki shrine , a solo Lg ka-mbani 'sail'; IN panir dancer , and a hawk banner . 'wing' . mblu!) Monoliths . cf. na-mbu!) mbarl To walk about (of a man 'coral' . (na-mbiu!)). seen at a distance). See par. mbo Form of buha 'pig' , used in mbar2 Name of fine mat made by mat -mbo "pig's eyes", holes in Oba women, and used as clothing wash-strakes of canoe . Vao (ni-mbar). mbo 'pig' . mbar3 Breadfruit beater of bam mbo A song (nu-mbo). See also boo (ne-mbar). po . Nu-mbo ta-Ba 'Oba songs '; nu-mbo tamar 'love songs con mbar � Coconuts which are almost nected with the Oba pilgrimage '; dry, "ripe" or "hard" coconut , nu-mbo si maki 'high Maki song'. of which the husk is turning black. mbo!) l Nasalised form of bOIl 'dark, night', used also to mbars In ne-sar ni-mbar 'name of embrace a whole period or "day" spear with single tip and of 24 hours, e.g. the days of curved haft'. a man 's life, in Tale P. In A.29,60; Q.57, the appointed mbatl Wo oden punch for extrac day . Wewe na-mbo!) 'to count ting the upper canines of a the days ', A.35 , see wewe ; na tusker. cf. bati. mbo!) san 'his day , day of celebration, culminat ing night mbat2 In ni-al e wo fe n'mbat of any rite '; na-mbo!) mowil e 'the sun is overhead , noonday' . tol '30th day after the maki '; cf. batun. e lisi na-mbo!) "he sees the day", name applied to small mbak Banyan tree. L.27,28, etc. pigs in a rite. We len ni-mbik 'name of song and dance cycle'; labwen ni-mbak mbo!)2 Black mixture made with 'bow-string' (lit . 'banyan ashes. Vao ditto . =mbo!)l . root'). Mt a paka . mbor Mushroom (na-mbor). mban Wing , sail of ship . See also mban (na-mban). Na-mbin mbots A leaf used medicinally rasi 'fish-tail cl ub' ; na-mban in initiation (baho tureput); ni-mbal 'hawks wings (on comb) '; the phrase is ro:n mbots. na-mban gunsun 'alae of nose '; na-mban is also a kind of arm mbu Bamboo (na-mbu) . Pan-p ipes, let . bamboo tubes or receptacles, H.13; K.114 ; 0.32; na-mbu mbe Place where. Nasalised form weawe!) 'bamboo that cannot be of be . See be, pe . Ne-mbe broken by the wind' , used as 'where?'; !)a-mbe 'whence?'. symbol of defiance , and also "strong bamboo" to encase mbell Sticks used in the Sak purlin in lodge ; na-mbu na-sil sakelean dance (ne-mbel ). 'kind of bamboo used in shoot ing test during initiation , mbel2 The hawk (ni-mbel ). Ni cf. puwat. In Em il Parav the mbel e lias 'dance movement name is given to the flagstaff representing a hawk flying from erected while initiates are on place to place' ; ni-mbel e Oba Pilgrimage ; in Ruruar the warasl 'dance movement rep same is called na-mbu nl-mal ; resenting a hawk pouncing on na-mbu is used for the ridge it s prey' ; as a proper name , pole of a small house; na-mbu Ni-mbel is the founder of the puwat 'bamboos used for rafters 119

of lodge '; na-mbu nuar (?flag mbwa s Penis-wrapper (na -mbwas ). staff ) on the Senhar beach Na-mbwas e-res 'special vari called Patar , from which a ety' ; na-mbwas ro-ware 'sheath path leads to Emil WaQgala; of ro-wa re leaf' ; tauwtsen na na-mbu na-mbara 'bamboo spars mbwas "half" wrapper , worn by onto which the sail is laced, initiated youths . Vao nu-mbwa; a set of musical pipes'; na BN na-mbas; Wala mbwas-mbwas . mbu ni-mbak 'fence built ar ound dis solyt h' ; n a -m bu r e - r e n i-a r mbwe Gong ; gong-signal (na 'bamboos used for fence' ; na mbwe) . E tuhu na-mbwe wenen mbu \marur 'open musical pipe s '; 'he sounds the wenen gong na-mbu 'conch shell trumpet ', signal' ; na-mbwe nosos , na-mbwe in Myth of the Brothers Ears . e bure-buren i 'gong-rhyt hm dancers taking a serpent ine mbuere We st-by-north wind, from course '; na-mbwe n'ai 'gong Bw�t-nu-amp (na-mbuere). rhyt hm' ; ma-mbwe e wa la 'gong signal , visiting signal '; e re mbuQ Large piece of coral. par-pa r i na-mbwe 'gong signal' ; na-mbwe ril-dralan 'gong sig mbur See ma-mbur 'broken' . In nal' ; na-mbwe na-l aQ 'small proper name N'Otsin na-mbur, portable slit gong' ; na-mbwe apparently meaning "broken b�t-e mow 'gong signal' ; na penis". mbwe mata n'ai 'wood's eye signal'; e pari na-mbwe 'to mbu ts A plant resembling a wild beat a gong (wi thout a special yam. Na-ha mbuts-mbuts 'vine signal) '; na-mbwe tuhaan 'gong for making fish-trap , and the signal'; na-mbwe nuar 'naut ilus trap made of it '. sbell pattern on woman 's dress'. mbu Deep, of water only . N'das I mbwe-bwe r S.L. for pwe-pwere mbu 'the deep sea' ; ne-mbU 'the 'species of parrot '. deep ' . Eromangan no-mpou (?). mbwen A ceremonial mat (ni mbun1 The bottom (of a basket ), mbwen). Mat worn on head by T.4. widows ; rolled mat s used as currency; ar ton i ni-mbwen mbun2 Grandc hild (na-mbU-n) . 'they arrive bringing mats'; Rel and Wala ne-mbun; SR mabin. e peke ni-mbwen 'she wear s the head-covering' ; ar wiwiwe ni mbur The name of a tree; a post mbwen 'mat s are given as pay or centre-post made from it ment'. ? IN hampay 'spread (na-mbur). Na-mbur no-on 'front out ' . centre post (of lodge)'. mbwe re A false purlin carved to mbut 1 Decorated yams, message represent the he ad and wings yams . Na-mbut ar raQ re n'ambal of a hawk . 'they send round message yams to each danc ing ground on the mbwi l Special kind of hat worn island' . in the na-laQ danc e. mbut2 Seven (e-mbut) . Wa-mbut mbwiri Small knobbed fusus trum 'seven times '; e-mbut-an pet used in Maki ceremony . 'seventh', also e ma e-mbut-an. Vao ya-mbut; Rel ya-mbut; IN mbwirivemp Wing s of butterfly pi tu. (ni-mbwirivemp). mb�atala Wooden masturbat ing me- Alone , only; used of people, instrument (ni-mbwatala). with suffixed pronouns , and compounded with sa 'one' : ina mbwara The north-west wind (na sa-mek 'I alone '; inik sa-mem mbwara) . IN (m) bayat. 'you alone '; ini sa-men 'he 120

alone '. Inik sa-mem Ie ro? mi Verbal particle , 3sg. past . 'Are you quite alone? ' See also mw i . mel ker Very, much, too much. miel Red. Ta-mats miel 'small E-lap me l ker 'it is too big' ; wooden image '; wul miel 'month ne-mori me l ker 'too soon'. of the hurricanes '. mel -me l Sour . Lok ma lats me l Mi lela A lodge of Emil Parav . me I 'remains of the pudding gone sour'. mini To drink. SR min; CR mani. IN inum, with trans . suffix . me lolop A stout wooden purlin. mir Ripe . See mar. Tawo mi r me l putUI) Foot prints. Per haps 'stone platform' (lit . meaning ma l for ma lun = 'shade ', and not given ). bifin, wifin 'toe' . mlra- Mother (mirak, mi�,m, meme To urinate. Mt a ditto. miran, etc.); also father 's IN miy-miy 'spurt out '. brother 's wife; father 's sister , mother 's sister; mother 's mens iviribo Starless patch near brother 's wife . Miran pwe�pwere the celestial south pole. 'mother sow' ; na-mbwe miran 'mother gong , the largest gong' . mer I The sea (na-mer ); special word used on the Oba pilgrim mirolo Species of sea-bird with age . long black neck. mer2 Twice? Mak i -na-mer mow mif-maf Tree used for centre sal)awul 'the twice one hundred posts of lodge , also for later al Maki '; in Wala na-mer is a struts, for hull of canoe , and Maki title. for making the mother-gong. Vao mas-mas . mere Ii A species of yam. mitani To watch. See ma ta- , me rer-pekes Circle-tusker; mat-mat-ni. "twice a crescent tusker" . Merer-pekes not in pwere-pwere mi-terik A wor d of uncertain 'home-bred circle-tusker '; analysis, indicating a question , maki merer-pekes 'circle-tusker "perhaps": mi-terik no-uf P'uJ Maki '; no-on merer-pekes 'the po-ut pu pOI) 'do you think it face of the circle-tusker '. will rain today? ' mesek In ker-ker mesek 'scented Mitewu A lodge of Emil Parav . herbs worn at the back of the belt ', part of the insignia of mo To go (S.L.). having undert aken the Oba pil grimage; mutso mesek 'a star ma Exclamation, 'hello!' SR mo (Spica?)'. 'yes' . meut White. Ta-me ut 'white man' . mohewa l Candidate for initiation , and candidates in initiation mew Fowl 's feather. Mew leI) ceremony itself, the word used bahi 'headdress of fowls' fea for those who have not yet thers wo rn in dance '; ul mew undertaken the Oba Pilgrimage. 'var iety of palolo , long, with Ar hiri mohewal 'a dance per white belly' . See ull• formed during all operations connected with the placing of mewi The next day ; tomorrow. the thatch in lodge construction. mew i nen 'on the next day' ; Aulua movoyal; BN mwe l-mwe l mewi ke le 'the following day 'naked', seems to be the orig again'; mewi nen mw i ran 'the inal. next day dawned' , R.41. 121

m'ok Verbal particle indicating mow saQawu l A hundred. Ne-tsor repeated action. mow saQawu l 'a hundred little things'. Rel mow-saQawu 1. molta Slow. Molt�ni 'by degrees' . mpa r R�pe. See mar , mi r, par. mol (d)ron A half. Vao bar. mon i Altogether , entirely , H.22; mu Verbal pronoun , 3sg. past . all , K.34. Na-vul e kur mon i See mwi , etc . 'the moon'. mul The wild orange . Vao ditto. mor Verbal particle, 3du. past . SR wa-mul ; IN limaw, with meta thesis. mo ral House-enclosure. Mora l sin pwere-pwere 'small enclosure mule To go or come back. Mule where piglets take exercise'. ma 'come back '; e mul wor ma 'he goes home ', A.19,25; L.34, mori Close, nearly, soon. A.59; etc . Mt a mule; BN mul 'again '; C.2; 0.1,4; R.9; U.21. E to Bugotu (Solomon Is) mulai mori pu luha ma 'he will soon 'again' . come back' ; Rei nepmori wU-Qa ne-Qovana 'is Rel nea� or far mulon A former Maki title, still away? '; ne-mori mel-ker 'much used as Wala mulun, Vao mw ile un. too soon' . mum To make a nasal sound with mo-roQ Listen! D.7; Q.86. lips closed. moti To have connection with. mumbut To swell (of bruised Matuak o! tipwis rar-tol el ar limb) . re par moti'm, o! 'Uncle , these three children want to have mumu-n Spirit , shadow, double , connection with you ! '; par rak soul , of human being or animal . par moti e wifewin s�m 'they Mumun e wiel 'the double has want to have connection with gone away' , said at death; ra your wife (on the feast of fur tulani mumur 'we are taking hamben ) , . back our spirits '; mumun ne-wu 'reflection of outrigger boom , motsi To nibble. pattern on woman 's dress'. MidN mumun ; BN ni-mun. mots-motsoul ? To be accomplished. In A.35 , word used of the ar mur Species of small fish. rival of an appoint ed day . murol Ready-made length of thatch, mow kare To open out (used in a short length or panel of myth of bahur-tree). thatch. As adj . 'short '. mot Black. Lok-mot ' yam scra murun In murun na-laQ 'character pings with which pudding s are dancers in the na-laQ'. made ', or '?left over after pudding is made' . SR met; CR mut Snails used as bait for merme:; NR me:to; IN ma-hi tam. rishing. Reduplicated as mot-mot 'black ened' or 'rotten' ; in S.28 of mutso A star . Vao ditto. cr. face blackened; sum-mot 'black Vao ne-mutso na-terin 'morning beads made of coconut shell'. star'. Mutso Qa J ufuQoni Urari Lambel mut-mut 'black' ; Mta "stars which set over Urari", maeto 'black volcanic stone'. being four stars of which two are and S Centuri; mutso si mowll Term used in enumerat ion, Le-mata -weaweQ "star or Red-eye", indicating multiples of ten: Altair ; mutso e wa tsal il "the e saQawul mowl l e-ru 'twenty', (morning) star riese , comes etc. Rel mowll e-ru '20'; Vao out"; mutso Qo-teran 'the eye movul ya-ru '20'. or dawn, Venus '; mutso masak 122

" sick star", S pic a (7); m u t so mwe t A snare for catching wild ma-samp 'fire-red star'. Wala pigs and birds (ni-mwet ). mutso na-terln 'morning star'. mutua Hat (7) -n Suffix of 3sg. possessive . mwa ra Man, fellow, person. See also mwara. Vao ma ra, and cf. nal The common article, varying name of the island of Mwala, phonetically under certain con Solomon Groups. MidN mara. ditions . mwalr The left (hand) , left na2 Verbal particle, lpl .excl. handed, on the left. Eromangan indefinite. moul; IN ma-wira. S.15,25. na 3 A thing (na-na). mwara Same as mwara, q.v. A man . Mwar 'a 'that man' , A.14 na4 To be high tide. and commonly also the inhabi tants of a village : mwa ra na:5 Possessive cooked food, pinalum 'the men of Pinalum' ; na :k, etc. It has also some mwara NeJuware 'the men of special uses, with names of parts Neshuware '; mwara n-das 'sea part s of the body, and a gen folk' ; mwara n'maki 'Maki men'; eral referenc e to things inten na-ru si mwara Lohwor 'the ded for a person. Na-rel na:k curved tusker of the men of 'my na-re l dance'; pe tabu na:m Lohwor ' . 'I shall cook food for you'; I-se ni-ram na:m 'to whom do mwat Snake. Mta mwata. See you belong , work for?' (lit . also ni-mwek, numek. Common 'who is your yam? '); e hani MN term. tsi Ie na:n 'he ate all his (pudding) , . mwek Sea-snake (na -mwek ). See numek. nakln Species of sea shell. mwell The cycas; "cycas Maki"; nale Language , speech. Po rets humming tops of cycas fruit ; ni tatseni nale Qa inik 'speak cycas leaf. Wenen na-mwe l your own language all the time'. "cycas flower " pr ojections on This is possibly na-le, com club. As verb , to make "cycas parable with Oba etc . leo 'the Maki ". Wala ne-mwel; SR mw il; voice' . Mta mwele. nal -nal A variety of club . mwe l2 In ar mwe l tsi otot "they make a mark round" , used for a naml Mosquito . MidN , BN namok; pattern of girdle . IN namuk. mwe la To become yellow. Mwel nam2 Verbal part icle, Ipl .excl. mwe laQ 'turmeric root used for past . yellow dye '. namb Verbal particle , Ipl .excl. mwer Species of parrot . See future. lamweri . namp To rest . mwere Name of a brown bird, supposed to know everything. NaQiu Personal name of a magi Mwere holo 'a blac k wading cian. bird' . nar Species of fruit tree (ni mwerek Species of tree used for nar) . Vao na ra. ridge pole and main purlins of lodge ; a wood used in the narom In ram-na rom 'kind of plough method of making fire . leafy twi g , used in magic '. A.38. 123

naro-Jiu South-east wind . Siu naven The armpit . = 'malo' , i.e. South wind that blows towards Malo . cf. Ur . nawen E wa nawen, is said of the naru 'west wind' . next to largest pig, if a cres cent tusker or smaller. nar-pwiri Kind of shell, used in magic . nawi Banana tree. Vao naviho; Wala nay i . Naru Name of lodge of Pweter tsiits. nawon In vain. 'nothing' . Mt a nawono, nasil Kind of parrot ; also name yanawono. of a Maki house. n� Retracted form of na3, q.v. nasi2 To insert (trans .). K.1l6. N�-n� nawon 'nothing'; n?-n? rin 'his food'; -na-na hanan natsl A black, venemous species 'food for dinner ' ; n � -na el of ant . K.116, etc . 'this thing' , euphemi sm· for communion food; n?-n? san 'his nats2 Another . E nats kele sexual organs '; n�-n� nen 'the 'still another '; 'different ', reason for it'; n�-n? rar e-ru S. 29. 'two things for us to eat'. natsen A slip knot . Hun-hun nel In, at . Compounded as ne nat sen 'to attach the slip Qa, ne-re. Ini ne-Qa hi:m san knot'; no hun natsen hore pin 'h� is in his house-enclosure, 'I have attached the slip knot at home ', et c. to it alrea dy '; the ceremony of reserving pigs for the Maki; ne2 Occasionally for no, verbal natsen guns un 'nasal septum' . particle of lsg. indefinit e. natu Crab of the hermit variety. nekel buha Soft yam (myt h of Tahar ) . natu-n Child, mother 's brother's child, brother 's child, hus ne:m Abbreviat ion of ne-hi:m band's sister's child, sister's 'house '. child (w.s.); wife's sister's child. Pwelen natun 'son' s nen That . Mewi nen 'next day' wife 's father and mother '. (see mew i); mwi te na-mbon nen Lg ditto; Lm nitu; Mt a natu, 'appointed the day for it '. and very commonly in MN; IN Hog Harbour nan; Sa'a nena. natu 'offspring'. neQau Spear with four tips and naur In na-mbu naur '?flagst aff, plain haft (ne-sar neQau). on the Senhar beac h called The name �s suggest ive of Patur , from which a path leads Eromangan naQesau 'a reed' . to Emil WaQgala. cf. na-hur. neram Magical stones. nauru In ro:n nauru 'leaves used in making an S-shaped netere Palolo net s. bow' . cf. hur. net mahut Late yams . nauwi Species of tree. netsera Yam scraper made of ni navl Outrigger (special word at. used on Oba Pilgrimage ); "stay", rope on spar of canoe . n II Coconut (na-n i). Na-n i mbar dr y cocon u t '; r 0 J er n a - n i nav2 Crab . Llhwen nay 'crab's 'c, oconut leaf pattern on woman's pincers' . Crab , name of a dress' (lit . coc onut torch' ); constellation, and of the 19th na-ni wa rln 'decorat ed coconut day of the month. that is used in sacrifice of 124

tusker '; e hoi na-ni 'pig no1 Verbal pr onoun , lsg. indef. expert ' (lit. 'the man who scrapes coconuts', Wala m'oi n02 Verbal pronoun , ldu.excl. n a - n i ); a - n i k u r 'dr y coco indef. nuts'; na(1 -ni ni-as 'coconut s thrown by Maki men to women' ; nob Verbal pronoun , ldu.excl. na-ni matap 'coconut s which future. are red inside'; na-ni mases sweet-smelling mixture, made nol Name of a carved image. of coconut rind and chopped up leaves '. Wala na-ni. Stages nom Verbal pronoun, ldu.excl. of growth in coconuts are : past . ha -woJ 'coconut shoot '; watseni 'to unfold' ; mat borsus 'young nomb Verbal pronoun , ldu.excl. coconut (as big as a man's future . thumb)'; na-ret 'young coco nut , big as a man's fist , nor Inhabitant s of a village . containing milk only' ; Juen Nor Senha r 'the Senhar people'. 'coconut full of milk only'; The village must be on Atchin. ko-korov 'coconut full of milk , cf. noreman. of which a little of the kernel is formed'; t i pal) 'coconut con noreman Male; man as opposed to taining equal proportions of woman . A.29,58; B.l; F.l; G.l, milk and kernel'; t i pal) tar- 13. The second element , man, tar 'hard tipal), of which the is IN manay 'male '; cf. SR kernel is quite formed' ; na-ni arman = at+man. kur 'dry coconut '; na-ni mbar 'ripe or hard coconut , of which nomb Crevices in the reef (na the husk is just turning black'; nomb) . e mar 'it is ripe, just before the coc onut falls from the noror In noror parav 'women's tree'; na-n I 'co conut that ha s stones ' (parav = 'long'). ripened and fallen to the ground '; na-wop 'sprouting notin For natun 'young of' , in coconut ' . certain phrases: not i n pwere pwere 'young of home-bred sow' ; ni2 A common transitive suffix not in na-na 'sucking pig' ; to verbs. not ln buha 'newly weaned pig'; merer-pekes not in pwere-pwere niab The Milky Way . 'home-bred circle tusker '; siw siw not in pwere-pwere 'feather nias Name of a tree used in fillet used in sac rifice of magic. tusker '; not in ma tuan 'mother 's brother 's child' ; notin na-mat niauk There. 'small pudd ing from ma t-mat'. cf. Wala nati -mbo = At not in nina Invisible magic (cloak). buha; Vao natun; Mt a nat-, used similarly. n i n i Plain wood tipped spear . nov-nov All . K.104 ; AA .l. ni-ok Here . ntek Same as mi-terik, q.v. nir(i) Suffixed pronoun , 3pl. , used also as plural sign after nu To push down . H.27 . personal nouns, for inirti} 'they' : tsunob sa 'nirl wifen nu-al A hole. F.3; 0.32; GG.5. san 'a mand and his wife ' (lit . 'a man they ( = he and) his nu-amp In ulu nu-amp 'driftwood '. wife' }. CC .l. A ritual word, but seems to have some connection with na niwar la Species of banana , and amp 'fire'. name of a pattern of a woman's dress. nu-a r In na-mbwe nu-ar 'naut ilus 125

shell pattern on woman's dress '; Qerl-Qeri Fillet or garland made nu-ar is al so the representa of creeper . tion of a fish in pantomime , a large shark-like fish, and a Qgo There , here. tl i-sal sa Qgo rope used for fish traps. 'thi s one road here'. nu-as Digging stick. H.20. Qgok That . N.49. nu-aten Muscle or tendon of arm, QiQis To smile. SR nsl; IN Qis leg, etc . ? IN uyat 'root'. 'show the teeth' . numbwe To wrap up , fold, envelop Qol In The top end of a bow. (in leaves, of yams for cook See Qui in. ing) . H.21. cf. Mta luqe 'to fold' . Qoni To ask for . Metathe sis for nOQi, common in PN and some nu-mek Sea-snake . parts of MN . nun To go down, set (of sun). Qoteran In mutso Qoteran 'Morn Ni- al e nun 'sunset '. cf. ing Star', perhaps rightly Tubetube (New Guinea) nunu mutso Qgo te ran 'that star 'dive', and Fiji nunu 'dive'. which (?) shines at dawn' . nunre To examine carefully , look Qui in The shoots of a creeper. all over . H.14. U.35,73. Mt a Qoliu. nutsi To fill (used of a pipe). Qur-Qur To grunt , of a pig. Buh� Qur-Qur 'bul l-roarer , pig nuve Long yellow variety of gruntin g' . Contrast Qur-Quran palolo (nu-nuv e). buha 'pi g's grunt er (i.e. snout ) , .

Qa 1 Canar ium nut . Vao Qa, Qa; Qa i in Mta, Duindui, Wal , not o An interj ection, A.69; K.lB, CR, but SR li-Qi; ne-Qa in 19,41. 0, ye, interjections; large part of Malekula main o hu te, 0, 0, o! land; Eromanga ne-Qai, and PN root Qai. ok1 Thi s, A.13; H.2l; K.125 ; U.ll, etc .; there , see!, B.lO ; Qa2 Reference particle, 'that , hence?, R.6. Mwar ' ok 'this which, at , in'. man'; na-vul ok 'this month' ; mw i ki la wa ok 'he looked this Qa 3 In na-Qa wurewiri 'centre way and that'. post s'. Perhaps Qa 1. ok2 Verbal particle indicat ing Qambu In Qambu sin ta-ma ts ' ghost continuity or recurrent action. plac e' . Mar' ok fobwe kiam ni 'they oft en tell us of it '; a use QaQeras To hurt (of medicine ). with nouns (wanu ok 'every where' ) shows that it is really Qari To make a superfic ial gash Okl . for blood-letting . 01 To stick out , of branches . Qa Form of Qa with umlaut ; see examples below. 01 To bend over , of a magician's wand. Qa- in Here; Qa2 and Ini, 3sg. pronoun . Olep The name of a month. Qere-Qere The crying of babies. 0101 Sweet . Pepe Qere-Qere 'babies crying'. Mta Qere, and cf. Atchin Qur olsi A wind (word of the Oba Qur 'to grunt '. Pilgrimage ) (nu-olsi). 126 om House. Derivat ive of hi :m pa Interjection expressing sur in certain phrases: no-on om prise and excitement . See 'front of the house'; ser n'om examples in A. 54; G.7; 'gable end of house '. 0.7; U.56. Le pa , K.46. onl The face of a person or front pahav A mat worn by women. of a thing (no-on, with posses sive , no-ak, no-om , no-on). pa l (e) To be killed, a ritual No-on n'ii "face of the club", Maki term. A. 59; H. 32; the square end of it ; I iw no-on P.5. Also used for beat ing "face teeth" , incisor teeth; initiation candidates. Ti-mits no-on ni-wa t "face of the stone� e pa l 'ghost of one killed in fore-stone ; no-on mere-pekes battle, or who dies a violent 'face of the circle tusker '; death (becoming a wandering no-on na-liQ 'leader of a line ghost)'; ti-mats pal 'a pig of dancers'; no-on na-vul killed during the Maki '; 'bones "face of the moon" , name of a of victims'; Maki pu pa l "Maki planet ; e we no-on "it is the will be killed" , cf. baho pu face", said of biggest pig pal; Pal u-ulen "offering of sacrificed or given with palolo", name of a month. Re others; no-on om 'face of front duplicated as pa l-pale in buha. of the house'; na-mbur no-on pal-pale 'young tusker with 'front centre post of lodge '. upper canines ', and tamauw BN n'aku-n; Mta nayoi ; IN hadap. pa l-pale; e pal-pale 'circle tusker minus'; pa l-pal 'post , on2 Six (o-won ). Wo-on 'six sacrificial post ' (Wala and times'; e ma owonin 'sixth' . Vao ditto); pa l -palin 'attach IN anam. ment of outrigger booms and floats of canoe '; bu pal-pa l operuJ In ro:n operuJ 'name of 'pan-pipes' (cf. SR bau leQru). a plant used in magic '. Probably also pa-pal 'front rafter on house projecting up or Verbal particle, 3du. indef ward and beyond the gable '. inite. Wala pili; IN mpalu. oreman In bat n'il oreman 'small pal ahot Hori zontal bamboo lim green shoots'. See noreman, iting thatch on gable end of which is the same word with the lodge (na-mbu pa l ahot ). article prefixed. SR arman. pa lak Collective name for smaller Orsel Name of the lodge of Emil- pigs paid for a large one. cf. Marur . balak. Or-tama t Name of the beach pa lel To build a fence, to fence belonging to Emil Parav, and a garden. Pa le no-ut 'build a its lodge , and name also of an fence'; pa le ni-ar in CC .l. extinct lodge . cf. PN pare 'protect '. Sa'a pa ra 'fence' . 0505 In baho n'osos, the newer use of incision. Na-mbwe pale2 To give. E pa le nl 'he n'osos 'a gong signal' . Vao gave him (a consideration pig)'; ditto. isl e pa lim 'who gave it to you? ' cf. ne-mba I. owa Interjection, Ho !, Stop! pali To shake down . Er pa ll oWQw in Husk of canarium nut . nl-ir 'the fence is shaken down ' . palu-ulen Name of a mont h (see p' Abbreviat ion for (1) pwl, pa l). New Year s Feast of the etc., as sign of 3sg. future, returning dead. or (2) for pe 'like', as in e re p'ok 'like this'; e p'ok panas Volcano dust. This is 'thus ', etc. actually the IN root for "hot ". 127

par Green (of canes), unripe , pe2 To be like, resemble. E uncooked, new. K.60, etc . p'ok 'thus '; e re p'ok 'in this way' ; e pe �a 'like (conjunc Paral In N'ama l Para 'danc ing tion) , . ground of Olep' . pe3 Mother, as term of address, para2 Flesh? cf. mbar. used also to father 's brother 's wife , and father 's sister. cf. para� This morning, before, pe-pe. Rel and Lalep have pepe . earlier in the day . S.23. Ko tur �a-el para� Ie wor ? 'Have pek (e) To carry on the head. you been standing here long? '; Pek-pek 'a small fine occurring pa ra� dro�we 'beginning to in initiation ceremony' ; e peke hollow out (a canoe)'. ni-mbwen 'she wear s the head covering '. See ni-mbek. Vao parav Long, tall , high. M.3; mbek, pak-pakean. Q. 59; R.3. Pekes parav 'cres cent tusker '; noror parav pekes Crescent tusker . Eromanga 'women 's stones '. Vao and nom-pekas i; Lenakel pakasi; Rerav ditto; BN mbar i; MidN Aneit pigao, all meaning 'pig'; parav; Mta parau; SR bra . tamauw p e ke s 'gelding cresc ent tusker '; Maki-pekes 'crescent paraw Plaited mat worn round tusker Maki '; no-on mere-pekes the thighs by Oba women. 'face of the crescent �usker '. pari To strike, sound, beat (the peke-were A bracer , a stay . .11. gongs). E pari na-mbwe 'with S P e k e -we r e s i ta -Ba 'Oba out giving a special signal '; man's bracer , bracelet '. Also na-vul bahi e pari 'the month used for the corona or rim of a shark attacks (name of a the glans penis. Wala ditto . month)'. Pari also 'to turn over and scrape a log' . See pelasi To remove ? Nam pe lasi al so par-pari. ni-at 'the process of removing fronds of thatch palms '. Wala par-par Elsewhere, in different perats i . directions. K.47,50. Perhaps cf. Hog Harbour per-par 'assist, pelok The human thigh bone . cf. support ', and Sa'a parapara pulok. 'side , loins'. pel -pol Big black bird that parum Nostril . Takes the pos- catches fish; also name of a sessive na:n. Maki house . pat-pat Comb made of prongs of Pel uJal Name of a mythical stone wood tied together . woman . pawulala Panache of feathers penow A kind of sea-weed used worn during a dance. in incision. par-pari To beat the fight ing To bear a child. signal on the gongs. In Vao par-parean 'turning over and pepe2 A child. Pepe �ere-�ere beating the log'. 'bab ies crying' . This seems to be an archaic word imported pa I In ne-w Is pa I "killing the from Wala. ' crayfish" , nam� of a month. P'l' 1 = pa I 'kill'? pere�e sis The side wall of a lodge. K.llO . p�ti baho "Head of incision" , the chief candidate for the pere-pwere In maman pere-pwere rite. 'sow's tongue ', obviously for pwere-pwere. pel Verbal pronoun , lsg. future. 128

pila A bird, the rail, and name stones of an oven; used trans of a dance cycle. Wala pila itively as poi, and reduplica and Vao pilay. Tavu sin pila ted as po-po 'to cover '. "the rail's conch", trumpet of cassis shell; ram hore pi la poho Dialectic form of buha "chasing rails", a game , played 'pig'. Poho wu lu 'the pig by men after the Maki. Mt a which is tied to a tree-fern pilaye; perhaps SR bwi la. image '. Bugotu bODO, etc. pil-pile To beckon . pol-pol Species of fish pro hibited to uninc ised boys. pin (i) A particle indicating completion of an act . Ko pin pOQ To be dark; darkness, night . 'in truth, indeed' , A.28,33; See also bOQ , mboQ . No-ut pOQ B.23 ( = 'just') ,32. MidN pi; 'night , tonight ', often with a Mt a vun 'be last , at the end', verbal part icle between the vunvun 'finally'. two words; rur-poQ 'in the morning'; mi-terik no-uJ P'uJ pinalum A thin kind of bamboo, weral no-ut pu pOQ? 'Do you probably from the promontory think it will rain all day of that name , and used for (until night)?'; no-ut mu rur holding thatch. Vao banal urn . pOQ 'about 9a .m. '. pi pi The sexual organs, male in porI Verbal particle , 3du. p.18,20, but apparently also future. female, since pip'el 'that vagina' is used = 'that woman por2 In por meliQe 'a wooden to copulate with' in JJ ; also strut supporting a wooden pur as a pun on the word, the name lin' . Poro-tundas 'a tree of a fish. IN (m)bi(m)biy 'a used for lateral struts of lip' , cf. Fiji mbembe 'vulva'. lodge ' . pirauwe Species of fish, pro poras Species of fish, aft er hibit ed to unincised boys . which a Maki house is named . plri-piri A species of nut . por-por To dr eam. Matur por-por 'lie dreaming '; matur por-por piser A species of fish, pro e-res 'to dream true '. Mt a

hibited before incision; also q 0 r e ( q 0 r e ) , t 0 dr e am ' . ceremony of applying stinging leaf. pulo Species of bamboo, a bamboo receptacle. Pulo nats 'a pulo pi tew( i) To or for; apparently full of ants'; 10k pulo 'pud a future form of tewi , with ding baked inside a pu 10' . IN which cf. Uripiv tevi, and buluh, and cf. At chin mbu. Eromanga tovu-ni 'for'. A.12, , etc. pulok Thigh bone, femur . Pulok pito-n The navel (pitak, pitom , In i we ren 'humerus '. cf. pel ok. piton , etc.). Mta putoi; IN (m)pusar. pupu howan Cleaning the dancing ground. pitse To cover , to fill in. Ar pitse wobat 'to cover the puri To break off. D.10; K.6o; ridge-pole with loose that ch' ; N.6. See also u I pur-pur. ar pitse ne-hi:m 'they fill in Pur = 'bruised', also voiced the ridge'. and nasalised with the condi tion prefix rna into ma-mbur pOl A song . See al so mbo . BB.l. (q.v. ). Pur ro :r 'break off Tul-tulo po 'to render a song'. twigs (to attract a person) '. p02 To place leaves over the hot puruk The gizzard of a fowl (tsin-tsin puruk na-to). 129

put In ne- Iup put 'thatching rahapol Species of tree, used battens out flush with the for cent re posts of lodge and thatch' . See I up. for the side wall struts. cf. rapo! . pu I hots in Nape of the neck. rahe To summon? E rahe ne-Iu putun In ma l putun 'footprint '. "call the people", a gong signal . Vao rave . puwat Spec ies of bamboo . Ne mbu puwa t 'bamboos used for rahin A track through the bush lodge rafters' . cf. buwa t, (ne-rahin). Layard suggests a biwat. connection with rahe . pwaraQ A cave or hole in a rock, rake To embrac e. Reciprocally overhanging rock . B.l; F.10; re-rake. G.6; 0.3,8,29; T.21. G.l. Pwar iQen may refer to a woman 's vulva . PwaraQ ta-ma ts raIl To live , pass one's life , 'cave of the dead' ; pwaraQ behave , walk away . K.15 ,108; ma siQ 'worn on head by the men' . L.l,5,40,44; N.7. cf. na-r el , Vao ditto; Wala baraQ. ral-dra!. pwe Exclamation, K.19. SR bwe ral2 Spine shell placed above 'come now! ' (French, tiens!). the ground as a trap; a pitfall with bamboo sticks . pwela-k Term of reference to wife's father or mother , rala-n Voice , sound of any daughter 's husband . Pwe lan description. Wala arlan. natun 'so n' s wife's father and mother '. Vocative ma :ku? Wala pwelak; Vao pel eyak; Lg gwe lega ra l-(d) r al To walk about , non na; Kuanua (New Britain) pel ika chalantly or for pleasure . na , term used by relat ions-in Me ral -dral har Jopon ko me ar law amongst themselves ; Lalep rna 'I walked about and here I pwelegak. am , i.e. I came early' . Wala ral-dral 'to zig-zag' (Atchin pwepwe Rope of a kind used in bure-burine), and bwe ra l hauling gongs. cf. na-mbwe . dralan 'a gong rhythm' . Mta tat ale 'walk' , Sa'a tale 'walk on beach' , Bwaidoga (Papua) tal i-a 'a bay' . The -d- is of ral Verbal particle, ldu.incl. course purely euphonic , to indefinite. separate I and r. See next word. ra2 Blood (ni-ra, n-dra). Tia ra 'dysentery '. Mta na-ra; ral i To run or sail around , to MidN ra; BN (n-)di; IN dayah. "round" a cape . B.7; K.100; Q.33. ra3 Curved-tusker-plus , lit. "it bleeds" . Merer-pekes ko ral iQ Tortoise-shell bracelet . mw i ra kele 'circle-plus-re entrant-tusker'. ramI Verbal particle, lpl .incl. past . ra4 A kind of young leaf used in incision. Ni-ra wunewun 'a ram2 A yam (ni-r am, n-dram); kind of tree whose bark is used also used for 'year'. I-se to make bull-roarers'. ni-ram sam? 'Who is your yam? i.e. for ' whom do you work'; ra-5 Possessive indicating raw Ni-r am pwi sa wU-Qa pwi e-ru foods . Also no-ra-n, etc . cf. 'a year or two' ; n-dram MidN noran 'food' . See also bweteges 'a single yam for r i - n. pr esentation' ; b�t-ram 'eldest 130

child (male or female )', lit . ra t i To open. "head of the yam" , takes na:n 5 posse s sive, also batu-ram ratsin Hermaphrodite pig, and "head of the yam" , and liwe tusk of same used for bracelet. ram "body of the yam" are names of constellations . cf. Vao ravl Species of tree commonly bat i-r am 'eldest son' , Wala used for canoes, a deciduous b?t-ru :m. tree, bare in October , but flowers later (see Tale AA ). ran To dawn, break (of day) . no-ut mwi ran 'day broke'; e rav2 Lower wash strakes of canoe. ran 'it dawns '; e to mor i pu See ravl , and Uripiv n-drav, ran 'it is about to dawn' ; e Wala n-rav 'canoe '. ran e-res 'it is full dawn' ; bag-e-ran 'a cloud'; ar weI e rawi To take off, remove . c.4, ran 'they dance till dawn' . 5,9. Rawi tani 'take off'. In MidN ran 'to burn'; Hog Harbour magic, e ra: rawi 'curing a ne-ran 'day'; and ultimately swelling at the base of the I N I a I) it ' sky' . intestines , and the man who performs this cure'. Redupli ral)(e) To pull out a plant or cates as rav-ray 'dig up '. any object , extract . E ral)e Mta ravrav 'draw out', rave ne�l iw 'he pulls out the arrow' ; 'pull'; Lg ra:kwe. See also ra ral) uton i batun n'al 'we lawl, of which it seems to be pull out the stump of the tree'; a doublet. na-mbut ar ral) re n'amal 'they send round messages to each rawik In rowow rawik 'brain'. danc ing ground on the island' ; e-ral) e-ral) n'ama l 'yams plan rawits Violent . Ni-lal) e rawits ted in alignment for the twelve 'hurricane ', "the wind blew a amal '; ra ron i pwi ral)-ral)Om hurricane", DD . 'they work on a separate day'. cf. Vao ral)on 'a branch'. ral-dral Coronet of solarium formosum shell. cf. ril-dral ral)ot A canoe, special wor d used on the Oba Pilgr image. raY The lower wash strakes of canoe. Vao ditto . See ray. rapol Species of tree. See rahapo I. Vao r?mbo I. raY-raY Evening. No-ut pwi rav ray 'about 5p.m. '; e mat raY rap-rap In wiJ rap-rap 'auricles 'about 7.30p.m. '. Mt a ravrav; of the heart '. MidN ro:paru:p 'evening '; IN yab i . rar-tol Verbal particle , 3tr . raY-raY Pull out . See rawi . ra-rul Personal pronoun, 3du. 'they two' . A.32. rawa-k Husband's sister or brother 's wife (w.s.). Wala raru2 A kidney. rawak 'husband's brother's wife'; Vao rava-k 'husband's ras i In na-mben ras i 'fish-tail sister , brother 's wife' . club' . Perhaps na-mban 'wing' , IN (m) pan lr 'wing', and cf. SR rel To want , wish; often com rasi 'sharpen'. pounded with rOl)e = 'feel' , as re-rol)e, C.3; E.5; F.13, etc.; rat In bOI) rat 'a tree-fern also 'to think' , as G.3; N.15; image representing a human 'to say ' (German meinen) M.2. face, attached to under-side of ridge-pole'. re2 As an element of the con junctional phrase mw l-re, pwi ratse Ember s (ratse na-amp). re 'if', probably a functional The word ratse is now used for passive use of rel , "it being 'mat ches' . wished that". 131

re3 At , in, on, to, from. Com 'the time of the erythrina' ; pounds with Qa as reQa, and ne-rere weaweQ 'the erythr ina with e as e-re. is in colour (blossom)'. Vao na-rar; Mt a rara 'the eryth re4 The second element of the rina' . negat ive se ... re, sere. See se and sere. rere2 E rere liwet 'midnight '; e re-rere "it reddens"?, when reS To pull. Transitive re- i, the clouds are tinged with the reduplicated re-rei, B.2. SR approac hing dawn . The cock is rei 'to drag , launch a canoe '. now said to crow for the fourth time ; also called e to mori pu reI Song and dance (na-rel), r an . E rere is al so applied danc e at sacrifice of a tusker . as a name to the planet Mercury. Takes na:n as possessive. Vao na-r el; Wala na-rel . A.6l. rere 3 To work loose, lever up a cf. ral , ral i, riil-dral, r.ll yam with a stick; part of name dral, which suggest that the giving ceremony is called ar spelling should really be na rere mimin 'they lever up the ri l 'a "round" dance '. tongue ' . relu An egg. Relu na-to 'fowl's Shallow. egg' . Se e r u I u . Mi dN r iIin; IN ta luy. rerei To plac e the hand in a hole. Apparently a transitive reni To seek, look for . Perhaps form of rere3• a transit ive form of rei . res Good . The accent is thrown reQ Species of plant . Ne-reQ on the preceding particle: e-res e-res 'pterocera bryonia, 'it is good'. Na-mbwis e-res Chemn . '; ne-reQ I ihwon boa 'a kind of penis-sheath'; ne 'pterocera ciragra, Linn'. IUp re-res 'thatching battens (Australian Museum information). projecting beyond the thatch' ; ne-lup e-res batun ma iwet 'sim reQa In at . C mpounded of re3 1 � ilar battens, but retaining and Qa Re-Qan is used ad- their roots to make a fringe '; verbially: 'within, thereat ', peke s e-res 'crescent-tusker '; etc . na-ru e-res 'curved tusker '; ni-as e-res "good luck" . Re reQi-n The "within" , the belly. duplicates as re-res . Makes reQak, reQ�m, reQin . See reQa . retl Young coconut (na-ret). Al so a mortuary rite. Wala reQen A branch of a tree. ReQen na-ret. ma lo 'name given to two pigs sent as message '; reQen be i I'<. ret2 The heart . Does not seem 'a species of shell '. Vao to be Wala in this sense. raQon 'branch', suggests raQin as a more exact spelling . retsl To talk, speak; of birds, to sing . Noun retsin 'speech '. rep In merer-rep 'circle-tusker Reduplicates as rets-rets. re-entrant -tusker-plus' . Vao res . Rets is a proper name in N.l, 0.21, etc . rerel Spec ies of tree (n-drere) . N-drere pwi lip 'let the ne rets2 Bamboo rafters. Ar tii rere tree grow' , the name of a ne-rets 'they cut the rafters'; Maki ceremony; ni-rere sakel Ar to (?te) ro we ne-rets 'name of a month' , lit . "the 'they essay the rafters'; ne nerere settles down to it"; rets Maki 'Maki rafters'. rere tsar 'name of a month' , lit. "the leaves of the eryth rets-rets Platform of a canoe. rina are falling"; rere wo-woI Rets2 • 132

rev Rope . Special word of the rioe-ni To take on board, carry Oba Pilgr image . Really ropes on canoe. B.35; S.20. attached to fore and aft of a canoe . riri To have a look. Rir mare 'look up '; e riri hal-hale 'to rewts i Ti kill or be killed; to dance with arms bent'. strike; to swear at . A.68; E.ll; F.16; H.l; T.22; U.78, Ririn-paie Name of a lodge of etc . E rewtsi ni-mal san 'they Senhar , now extinct . strike (or kill ) his kite ', used in reference to the Oba ritse-ni To grind on a stone . Pilgrimage. Rewtsi pin "kill S.lO. finish", in DD said of a pig that is really killed. Re riv A rat (na-riv). Ar te-te duplicates as rew-rewtsi . cf. riv 'a method of catching rats '; Vao song language rumbe; the Lebori-we-riv "Rat 's Ears", -tsi is clearly a transitive name of an ogre. M.4; N.15 , endi ng , for -si , and the root etc. Perhaps here also belongs is rewe. e ba-ba ha riv 'to jump about (in a dance)'. MidN arif 'rat'. -ri Suffixed pronoun , lpl.incl., with verbs, e.g. e wurei-ri ni riv-riven The shoulder-blade . 'he says it to us ". See ikir. rol Short form of roha 'a leaf', rian To burn (intr. ). Na-amp used before the name of a mi rian 'the fire burned' . plant , e.g. ro-kalat 'nettle leaf'. Vao ditto; Mta no, rienil In front of . Po wa la from naui 'plant ', which is rieni natuk 'you will sail in IN dawan, but the change of front of my son' . con�onant , as well as the longer form in Atchin, make the rieni2 To hold up one 's torch. identification more than doubt B.7. Probably derived meaning ful . of rienil. r02 To want , desire, wish. A.l, rik Yes , indeed, truly . Ma r 34; H.32, etc . "Backed" form tsemwe ni-mbat ko rik 'they of reI . No ro pw i-tsa pe wu l i actually gnawed roots', DD; 'I don 't want to buy it '; no mar we Tawal e, Tawa l rik 'they ro e-tsats 'I feel tired' . went to Tawal , actually as far as Tawal ', DD . Reduplicates r03 = ro o , only, just, simply , as ri-rik 'even, finally, in short ly , soon. E w'ok oa-in, the end' ; tia-ra mu kete ri pwi ar ma oa-tan ko ro 'he rik 'finally they got dysen went there and will come back tery' , DD . here soon '. ril-(d)r al Circle of shells rob Leaves in which puddings painted red. See ra I. Ar r i 1- are wrap ped for cooking , after dral is the name of a game which they ar e thrown to the played when the novices have pigs as offal . Na-rob wowo n returned from the Oba Pilgr im 'only offal' . age; while it is played the gong signal na-mbwe ril-dralan robon nanas Kind of seaweed used (Wala ditto) is sounded cease in incision. Robon tsats lessly. cf. also na-ral, ral 'species of croton'; robon dral. Vao has na-mbe ril silala 'species of tree, used dralan. in magic '. ri-n Possessive part icle for roha Leaf of a tree or bush. foods eaten uncooked. See ras. Enter s into compounds as ro or In S.L. raom is 'food', BB . ro :n. Roha ko e-tsiga re-oan 'there were no leaves on them' , 133

DD . Toto e uroi roha 'the native name for Port Stanley toto-caterpillar eat ing holes is Lol -na-rol), meaning "In the in a leaf' , name for pattern on mangroves". woman 's grass skirt ; earth used after removing upper tuskers of rOl)we To try, essay? e koke pig; medicine, leaf used after rOl)we; bat-mew e habwe rOl)we; the castration of pigs; roh� ar to (?te) rOl)we ne-rets ni-lak, roha n'tawo 'a spray 'they essay the raft ers' . of leaves '.' Vao roya. See also rol ; ro:n. ropun A strip of umbrella palm used as symbol of home-bred ro 1 i The north-east wind, blow- tusker when attached to taro ing from Oba . branch; a sweet scented herb used in segur bouquet . Ropun romon Term used in count ing tsats 'a species of umbrella units over ten : mow il e-ru palm' . Wala ropun ; Vao romb un . romon sa '21' . A typic al Probably compound ro-pun. Malekula form , said by Pere Douc ere to be the yet undevel r;o:rl An island (na-ro:r). See oped shoot of a plant , used as also no-ur . a tally. ror2 Clouds , represented by ro:n Used in some compounds for four series of concentric ro ha : ro : n operu, ro : n wuw, circles on the sap-sap; also ro:n na-mbots 'leaves used the sky . medicinally in initiation '; ro:n na-uru 'leaves used in rorak To sweep (a court ). N.4. making an S-shaped bow' ; ro :n ba tun 'hair' , lit . 'leaf of rori To turn. Ni-al e rori the head' . 'the sun turns (circa 1.30- 2p .m. )'; na-vii e rori 'the ron To sink , get drowned. B.12; moon turns '; 1 i 1 ror i 'to turn H . 43 ; P.14; HH . one's back ', B.20; M.8; pur ror 'to break off twigs to roni Away from, out of. N.2,4. attract a person's attention', G.3; ror-ror 'to twinkle '; e rOI)l Only, just , merely. Po ror-ror 'he keeps appearing'. womu, pe mak ko rO I) 'you lead and I'll just follow' . rorin Forehead , frontal bone , mind (rorak, roram , rorin). rOI)(e)2 To hear , to feel, to Rorin e-tsa "his'mind is bad" , perceive by one of the senses, he has a fearful temper , L.l. to know how to. Ko rOl)e ar wurei swe l il)? 'When did you roro In na-ha t i ro ro 'liana hear them talking? '; no se rOI) used in making fish-traps '. ufon te wor 'I don 't know how to ...'; in a further derived meaning and short phase, rOI) ro-rom i To think, remember, 'to divine ', and ne-rol) 'a sorrow for . H.44; 0.24; Q.18. metho d of divining'. Mta rOl)o; Ko ro-rom i na-na sa? 'Are you MidN rOl)i; BN rini; CR rOl)o; thinking about something? ' SR ral)o; IN dal)ay . Redupli� MidN ru:m; Maewo ndondomi; Mta cates as ro-rol)e 'to bethink nonom 'think' . oneself of, to remember ': e ro rOl)e ini mumun 'he remembered rorora Spec ies of tree used for that he was a spirit '. Wiihul bark. rOl)3 Mangrove (na-rol) . Ne-wis rorowaen Play . Wanu rorowaan na-rol) 'ceremonial bows'; ne- 'playground' 1 iw na-rOI) or wulu are cere monial arrows ; ne-kar na-rol) rofer Torch. B�t-rofer "�tump 'mangrove wood comb' . The of a torch", 17th day of the 134

month; ro J er to-na ts "a whole ruhu To pull. E ruhu marur torch", 18th day of the month. 'curved-tusker-plus-plus ' . Possibly the original meaning of rofer is "midrib of a coco ruh-wa-ru Maki title used after nut leaf" , or "a young coconut Na-mer mow-sa8aw u1 . See ru3 • leaf" . Rofer na-ni 'coconut leaf pattern on woman 's dre ss'; ru l1 A ceremonial bundle shot tsin rofer na:n 'backbone , at in initiation (na-rul). spinal column', lit. 'his torch bone'. Wala rofer; Vao rehere. rul2 In na-rul roni 'lopping Note that this is, so to speak , tree'. Par rul pur-pur no-wof a "secular" word; there is a 'they would break their pad ritual word ne-fUI , of IN origin,' dles ', K.55. q.v. rum Wild, to be wild. To rum roJi mbwerets To be ruined (S.L.). l a m e f 'wild fowls of the bush'; ne-rum bas 'principal solo rots i To cut , fashion (a tobon danc er' . bark belt). GG . rumu-n Breast , chest (rumak, Heavy . rum�m, rumun); lower portion of canoe figurehead. row(e)2 To fly , to jump . B.5, 22; K.IOI; L.24; N.4; T.l7 . rumuJ Species of fish ; prohib Row tsubul 'to jump dow n'; row ited before incision. tsal i I 'to fly out ' (figurative in T .11); row- row 'flying ', in run The back (ruk, ru m, run); no-uJur row-row, q.v. ridge between wings of canoe figurehead. rowe All. B.34; L.4; N.48; U.55. E lav rowe 'he removes rUl)fi To look for fish with them all '. torches. See also wa-ru8fi Ar tigei wifen sar ar ma ar rowow Brain (rowow rawi k ). rU8-rul)Ji 'they lead in their wives and come bearing torches'. row A wooden bowl shaped like a turtle (na-row) . Vao rov; Wala rur1 To turn . See rori; ni-al ne-row; BN na-rov. e rur = ni-al e rori 'the sun turns'; and with modified r u 1 Two (e- r u ) . vowel, rUr. ru2 South-west wind, blowing rur2 To thatc h. Rur hore 'to from the mainland towards Oba . thatch the gable end of a house '; Na-ru tawunaw 'south by we st n i -e I e rur hore "thatch out wind' , U.1. the sun" , extension of thatch on gable end of lodge . (Ru) ru3 A pig of which the tusk has ruran 'roofing , thatching' ; curved half way back to the jaw ru-rur 'put on clothes '. (na-ru). A.45,55; K.29. Tamauw ru 'gelded pig', A.45; N.46. ruro Half full. Sometimes pronounced ruh, cf. Wala ruk-wa-ru 'grade name of ruru1 In ro-ruru 'a mater ial used tusker ', and Vao ruy. for making white garter ', part of insignia of having under rua lo High wind, wind in general . taken the Oba Pilgr image . cf. rol i, ruwol i. ruru2 To creep (S.L. ). rubatsi To open , let loose , let go; open the door panel of a rurur Upright gong beaten with house. IN I apa s 'set free'. a single thick stick. Vao rururyen 'the smallest of the rue A branc h of sorcery (e rue). four upright gongs'; Wala ne-wat 135

si rurere 'upright s on women 's month of settling down to it"; side of dancing ground' . le- t�r sakel "the women settle down to it", name of a mo nth; rur(u)si To heave up . Ruruli ni-rere sakel, alternative 'to shoulder ', Q.15; U. 33. name , "the rere settles down Transitive of rurur? to it". ruI-ruI Coral pebble; bones of saIl To float , E.7,8; to spr ead the foot (collectively). out the arms in imitat ion of a hawk . Ar sal 'flight of hawks '. rut Mask wortr in connection with planting new yams; wooden face sa: 12 A dog . The word is used figuring in initiation rite in the double village of Ruruar (na-rut). and in ReI on the mainland. See tamai, wUl i. ruts Relaxed? In K.19, 'to be cured (of sores )'. N'embak e sala-n The neck; curved slit ruts 'I am lazy (my body is part of figurehead on canoe ; relaxed? ) , . part below circular joint s of a club . To pwe-pwere salan 'a ruwi To plant . E ruwi no-ut pattern called "man of the 'he plants a garden' ; ruwan race of the sows" '. "clearing", the name of a month; ar ruwi ni-wat 'they erect a salel A landing place. Sale stone , monolith'. ma-wol 'smooth water, creek entrance'. Wala sale ni-mbel ruwoli The north-east wind. 'name of a beach' ; sale na-to See rol i, rualo. 'a place name '. Mta sale 'flow'; masale 'a channel '. rulu Egg . See relU. B�t rul rulom na:n 'his Adam's apple sale2 To carry; take puddings or thyroid cartilege '. out of ovens . B.25. Redupli cates sa-sale. rur Modified form of rur, rori, in rur-po� 'morning , forenoon' . sal e-pornir To hear about this? M.4. sa 1 i To hang . sal One , a, an, each one; one ... another. Hog Harbour te, sam(we) To club. K.122. cf . t-, and ultimately IN (e)sa s�m, sami, sam-sam, Jam-Jam, 'one'. and for ending, cf. ro� , ro�we. sa2 To climb. Reduplicates as san i To lift (the wing)? Ar sa-sa 'keep climbing'; sa-sa san-san i 'movemenc in a dance, 'to bear fruit (of coconut)' represent ing a bird lifting its may be the same word. cf. wing ' . hasa 'to climb' . Also to climb out of a canoe, i.e. to land . sa�awul Ten. Mta and others With this, however , cf. sal. sa�awu 1. IN (e) sa 'one'; �a . Hog Harbour sa 'up' ; Vao hay ligative ; puluh 'ten' . 'up'; IN sakay 'up'. sap-sap A mask, referred to as sa3 Possessive root, of general a ghost ; a mask banner . Wala possession. Vao ditto; Hog sam-sam, sam -ba-sambo. Harbour ha; Ambrym ha. sar A spear (ne-sar). L.8, etc. sagi-n The thigh . See also Ne-sar na�au 'a spear with four tsakin. tips and plain haft '; ne-sar ni-mbar 'spear with single tip sakel To sit ; of bird, to perch. and curved haft'; ne-sar ne-wis cf. sek. Na-vul sake l "the 'spear , undefined' . Mta isar, sar4 . 136

sa ra To alight , of birds . BB. se3 To carry in the hand . Sara wan 'to stretch out one's Transitive sei. E sei masal hand towards ', G.9; U.33. Mta 'he is carrying the fish' , sara2; SR sar = 'retire? '. D.12; Q.74 .

sare To pierce with a spear . se4 What? (ni-se). SR sa; IN Transitive sare-ni. Sar-saran s-apa . 'simpl e horseplay among in itiates'. See SarI . se5 Leaves for dyeing obj ects yellow with (ne-se). S.5. sas The croton (ro-sas). Mt a and Lg sas. se6 To light (intr. , of a torch) . sawi To trim (a bow) . In D.3, segur Bouquet of sweet scented 'to carve a paddle '. herbs , a love herb , worn on return from Oba Pilgrimage . sal A path, way , road (ni;-sal ). Vao hokur i. Su-segur re ni e Matan sal "road' s eye", en tur 'right to wear scented trance to house enclosure. herbs tucked into the belt from cf. Mt a matesala 'the road one above, at the back, acquired actually treads'; ni-sal are by making pilgrimage to Raga' ; also the thwarts of a canoe . su-segur ne-re terin 'the right Mt a sala; CR hal; SR and MidN to wear scented herbs tucked sal ; NR ha la, and ultimat ely into the front of the belt , IN jalan. similarly acquired '; su-segur re kel inin 'right to wear sam To club . See sam. K.112, scented herbs on the thigh 124 . tucked into the belt from below, acquired by making the Oba sam-sam A large club . See pre- Pilgrimage '; segur wahal 'pouch ceding word. used in pig magic , filled with scented herbs', "fight ing saQa-n A branch, forked part bouquet"; segur e waha l "war attaching figurehead to c anoe . herbs", used during dances; IN saQa 'a fork' . segur maki 'bundle of plant s worn by Maki men's wive s '. sarI Stealing. Sar-saran 'simple horseplay among init iates'; sek To lie or rest upon (of sar wan or wanewana 'special obj ects, in contrast to sakel, horseplay in baho nosos '; sar of persons) . Sek-sekelean wan baho 'initiation "week of "settling down dance". SR sek stealing" '; sar baho 'initia 'remain, stay'. tion fooling'; ar sar-sare 'they indulge in horseplay'; seko 1 Hibiscus . Vao hakaul; sar wan applied to beatings, Wala sekawul . Seko l mat we- stealing and general fooling weaweQ 'worn in the hair if a connected with initiation; man has had sexual int ercourse sar haan 'gong signal', see with tsots in' ; sekol na wa l im bat-mew for successive or der 'worn by participators in of signals. Wala sar-sar-lok Maki na wa l im' ; sekol wana 'a large pudding'. 'worn at back of head by one who has killed a man and hidden Sar2 Sar hore 'closing the ends him' ; sekol notin pwere-pwere of the lodge '; sar n'om 'gable 'worn in the ears by a man of ends of house'. high degree '. sel To sing . Se nu-mbo 'sing a sel Name of a dance, a stick song' ; e se womu ni 'he sings dance. Selu is the verb 'to it first' . danc e' in parts of the central New Hebrides . se2 First element of the nega tive sere, se ... reo See sere. ser(e)l To blow, of the wind . 137

P.23; U.6,28. NI-Ia� e sere slnea�k A running step. cf. 'strong wind, gale '. Nta sere. lele le le. sere2 Not . Often split into se slQawu Presentation pig (ne re sl�awu ). ser-ser1 Quickly. BN sir-si r; 511)- 511) To go away in anger. Mt a sere 'move quickly'; see ser (e). sip Wooden ceremonial pudding ser-ser2 Sleeping mat . Ser-ser knife. A Wala word which is e tabU; ser-ser tanu 'large sea now bec oming the fashion on bird, and name of Maki house'. Atchin instead of the Atchin word ne-t si, q.v. sesaya To carry in the hand . S.L. for se2. slre-nl In ar slrenl wa-tan 'the torche s are held with the sesel To twine . lighted ends groundwards '. sesere To rehearse. si re-si re Quickly, fast . cf. ser-ser . sesuwel To find, A.6; to get one's desert s, K.IO . Hi wanal , SISI Twilight . Lit. 'chirp (of mar sesuwe l re-I)an n{l-n{l rar cricket)' . 'he stole, and they discovered him with their foodstuffs'. DD . sls2 Horizontal bamboos forming side walls of house. cf. slsen . sew-sew An adze. Ar ke te ne-si s na-mbwe r 'they erect a fence round the gongs '. 511 Possessive preposition be fore nouns. See sa3 . SR 51. slsen To twine string . 512 Wooden pig-killer (ne-sl). slu1 Nine (e-slu) . Wa-s lu 'nine SR 51 'to cut a tree', also times '; e ma e-sluan 'ninth'. tah. IN slwa. Sl3 A species of parrot lna-sl). SIu2 The island of Malo. cf. See flel. Mta slwo 'down' . si ge-nl To plac e one thing on si wos A song. cf. Eromangan another. avos 'rejoice' ; navos 'joy, singing ' . slken hosos A young tusker with tusks occasionally visible . si w-siw1 A tombstone , a small round block of thin coral , used slkl Name of a gong signal (ar as symbol of hardness of heart s I k I ) • (slw-si w ar re batun 'they place a stone at the head' ). sll Kind of bamboo used in shooting test during initia si w-si w2 A fillet. Si w-siw tion; in Emil Parav applied no tln pwere-pwere 'feather to the flagstaff erected while fillet used at sacrifices of initiates are on Oba Pilgrim tuskers; small downy feathens age . of fowl '. sllala In robon-sllala 'species so Graded form of the negative of tree'. se. slle To stay and watch. B.19. sol Club with cutlass shaped Transitive sllehl (. fllel? ). end (na - 50I ) . slle! To sew up a sail. B.31; 50 lUb Prow head of canoe, used D.- 2; u.4. as house decoration; the bird 138

figurehead on a canoe '; solub sup To move or stir (intr.). wok-wak 'figurehead with slit K.61. down the neck'; sol ub buha 'figurehead with boar 's head' swe l il) When? Interrogative . solUb war 're-entrant tusker Ko rOl)e ar wurei swel il)? 'When figurehead' . did you hear him saying it?'. BN slvalal). so:n The bow of a canoe. See soron, sor-sor2. so r To become inflated, swell Note: the sound of J is really a up . B�tin teren e sor 'swelling palatalised s, and there is some at the base of the intest ine'. confusion between the two ; dupli cate forms of words may sometimes soron Bow and stern pieces of be found in this voc abulary . canoe. See so:n, sor-sor2. Jam: Jam l Species of club. See sorow(a) Yellow. lal) sorow sam-sam. 'yellow dance', danced in con nection with initiation. Jam-Jam2 An immigrant race. so r-sorl Bamboos used in house Jelu To danc e forward wi th a building. Vao hereyor. cf. swinging step . Atchin ser-ser . Jeren In I iw-Jeren a young tus sor-sor2 Bow and stern pieces of ker with the upper canine Just canoe. Wuwun sor-sor 'fore and removed, circle-tusker-minus. aft upper wash-strakes' . See so:n, soron. Vao sor-sor. J eJ uwe i To find. See sesuwei . SUI Coconut milk. cf. Juen. Jewe To stamp . Transitive Jewe i IN juyu 'sap' . 'to stamp on'. Mar Jew-Jewe l 'they dance with swinging step', su2 In su-segur either (1) K.10l ; na-l al) pwi Jew ta-lim 'scented herbs', or (2) a re we ral 'the na-leng will be dupl ication with irregular danced five days from today'; vowel. ni-as pwi Jew 'ni-as will be danced'. In Wala the accom sua To paddle (S.L. ). Mta sua. panying songs are called sewan. Mta sawa 'dance and songs, with sum Shell-bead arm-badge ; shell shovelling step'. and coconut bead necklace; shell bead money. Sum mot 'black J i To call. A.4o; G.6. cf. se-i. coc onut bead armlet '. Vao sun; Mta sam 'nat ive money '. Jiel A kind of parrot . See na-sl. sup Old man (na-sup). Vao humbe. III To swim under water. K.47,69. Atchin old men pronounce na sumb. Na-wat sin na-sup 'old J I I e- I To hide away . H.4; K.lll; man's stone· platform'; na-sup R.2l. To watch. A.21; E.3; CC. ok 'a term of address to wife 's or husband 's father '. Perhaps Jln To shine, be fine, clear up IN samba 'respect , reverence' . (of weather ). IN slnay . Ni-al Mta Suqe; Oba hUl)we 'the secret e Jln 'the sun shines '; mu Jin society' . wataln 'then it cleared up '. DD . su-re-re-a A low cry of happiness. cf. Juwe-rere- ia. J I r I Very? T.3 et seq. sus False breasts worn during a So Interjection expressing certain dance. cf. JuJu-n thanks. cf. Vao slwa ; At chin 'breast ' . IN susu 'breast'. Juwe-rere-Ia. 139

Jobwe To relate, tell. Wala Ju3 To alight . E.4. Ju roni mar Job-Job 'a pantomimic rep 'alight nearby' . Same as Ju1? resentation by women durin& the mortuary rites'. cf. Jop . Ju� To light a brand at the fire, take some fire (Ju na Jok To hide (int r. ). A.21,40; amp). Q.78. B.21; E.4; Q.41; T.ll. Jue To erect . Mwara ok par ma Jokele To carry on the back (of tsile par Jue na-mbur 'all you turtle) . E. 9 ,11. fellows come and erect the centre post'. JoP In e JoP t�ni 'a cure for a sprained joint'. cf. Jobwe. Juen Coconut full of milk only. cf. na-su. Jopon Some , several , a short time . Po tur po Jopon 'just Juha va A year . Juhava 090 'this wait a little'; me ral-dra l har year '; Juhav e-ru 'two years'; Jopon ko me ar ma 'I came Juhava womu 'last year'; Juhav early'; banam Jopon 00 e woJ e-ru oa womu mu Ju 'two years ko 'your leg is rather sore ' ago ' . (?); mar liwe e-ru Jopon 'they shot two of our fellows'. Vao Juho vile Different , other. See hombon. also nats. Jor In e Jor mon i 'a cure for Juhu To heap up . cf. J uw (e) . soreness in the back' . Q.2 et seq .

JoJoJera To be equal , cancel J u I 0 To carry . C • 3; T. 2. To out . carry on the shoulder by means of a stick. Jowon The trac hea, wind-pipe.

\ Julu To burn. Ar Julu na-mbwe Jow-Jow Conc h shell trumpet . 'they burn the gong'. Also See also tawU. J ul i. Jowun The prow of a canoe (takes Jul-wun Soft hair or down , on na:n). See so :n. arms , etc. Jowur To swear at , presume dis J uni To stick leaves, etc . in respectfully upon. K.26; M.7; the hair. S.11,30. N. 29,35 ; u.49. Wer-Juri 'not respect , disobey' , 0.31. Trans Juo In matan e Juo 'he is nod itive , J owuri. Mt a sapur 'bad'. ding, sleepy' . Ju1 To end , to finish; pu Ju Jure To light an oven (not to 'altogether '; e Ju 'that's the light an ordinary fire above end' ; na-vul e J u ron i batun ground). A.43; K.109; Q.72; "the moon finishes off the LL. Jur hamben "cooking the head" , a whorl of the hair. feast of commemoration", the It refers to a tradit ion of 21st day of the month. the making of men by Tahar . E Ju is used at the end of Juri After. Ts ire Juri 'follow' ; speeches, incantat ions, etc . mu wa la furl nu-a 'he sailed to show that the account has into or up the river ', B.ll; come to an end. Maki e Ju wewe Juri na-mboo 'count up the 'Maki is ready' . See also days '; rioe ni Juri wiJen san Ju-Ju. 'brings home to his wife' , DD. Mta suri; Sa'a sul l. Ju2 To paddle a canoe. See sua. Ju no-woJ 'use a paddle' . Mta JurOI To boil. sua. Juro In ar Juro hotov i 'a cry used during dancing'. 140

fu-ful To ask. Also fu-fi. R.IO, fiifu-n Breasts, nipples, male 30; S.2. See ufuf i . or female. See also na-sus . Mt a sus; IN susu 'breast '. fu-fu2 To set , go down. Ni-al e fu-fu won i 'the sun sets '; so also na-vu the moon, but of stars fuful)on i. fufi won i al so ta l Particle used with numerals 'to jerk tight , of rope'; fUl)on i to indicate time durat ions . 'to plac e in a basket '. The Pi ar rna ta-ru, ko mew i Ie root idea is that of mot ion '(he said) he would come on downwards . Sa'a su: 'to set'. the second day , which is to morrow now' ; bOl) in ta-mbut fuw(e) To scrape , grate, as weral e tar-tar 'actually seven bananas for pudding. K.8 . Ar days from today' . A.19 ,27 ,29, fu-fuw 10k-wits 'they cook 35,60; B.31, etc. banana puddings'. ta2 Last , aft er . I)a-ta 'the fuware To defecate. last ', K.121 ; wa- ta 'go after , follow' , A. 43 . fuwe i To find. See sesuwei , f e f uwe i . ta3 To lay, of fowls . A.5. fuwe-rere-ia A magic word pre tab Short phase of tabu, q.v. ceding prayers. cf. fo , su Tov-tab 'condition of holiness re-re-re-a. acquired by sacrificing pigs'. In the Sevent h Day Advent ist fuwi ul) Scented herbs used in translations, this word, spelled making the armlet called na-wo l top-tap is used for 'holy' . fu l A torch (ne-ful). A torch tabakor Species of finely worked used in Maki degree taking club. ceremony, as distinct from rofer, a torch used for ordin tabatet Rope used in making fish ary purposes; tawu ne-ful 'a traps. small blackened torch', used in connection with the sacri tabe To beach or carry a canoe fic e of a tusker. Vao and Wala ashore. D.4 ; N.IO; BB . Mt a fu I, IN suI uh. tape 'set on end' . fUl i To burn. Ar fUI-fiil 'they tabul Holy, taboo . Tab-tabuan burn', 'to carry a lighted 'name of a ceremony '; tabuan torch while dancing '; fiil-ful 'consecrat ion of pigs for the 'a fire on which a yam is cooked Maki '. In Wala, tabu e-re which is to be used in commun pwe re-pwere 'put a taboo on ion with or as an offering to the sow' . Mt a tap(u) , tapua ; ancestors'. cf. fulu. Na-amp PN tapu; IN tambu 'a ban' . fUI -fiil 'white band with mark_ Connected forms are numerous ; ings produc ed by fire , a bur-tapwan , Vao. bur tambean; spec ie8 of club' . t tOY , avu· ni, tapwewe , tav-tavini, t�mbo, t�p, n-t�pa , tabwe, tav , fulfUlan Act of celebration , tambu, na-tamp, la-tap, tav-tav, rite of communion, mort uary tav-tawu. rite. fiilfulan sal)_awu l 'the first anniver sary of a death' , tabu2 To cook, make puddings in a death feast held then ; an an earth oven. cf. Ub ir (Pap ua ) cestors and offerings to them; bi-tab . scarification by burning . See ful i, to which the word belongs . tabii In ser-ser e tabu 'sleeping mat ' . furop In matan furop 'a starfish pattern on coconut used during tabwe In tav-tabwe 'wooden sacrific ing of tusker '. coping to house roof' . cf. tab, etc . 141

tae-i To split yams with a sharp 'sailing ropes '; tall n'ai stick. 'shoulder strap for club' . B.33; U.31. Mta and IN tal i tag-tak A word used on Atchin 'rope ' . instead of tak-tak, with humor ous connotation , for hitsi 'to tamai Dog. Term used in vil copulate'. lages of Senhar, Emil Parav , Emil-Lap and Emil-Marur , but taha-ni To pull up a canoe out not in Ruruar , where sal is of reach of the tide. u.60. substituted. See also wul i which is a PN term , probably Tahar The name of a culture-hero, late. Polynesian Tangaroa. Vao Tayar. Al so the name of a bird with tamar To love, copulate. Na-to markings round it s eyes. No-ul tamar 'first cock-c row' , "the sin Tahar 'Tahar 's paint ', used cock that wakes us up to cop to describe embellishment s ulate"; nu-mbo tamar 'love round the eyes; wanu si Tahar songs connected with the Oba 'Tahar 's place, the islands of Pilgrimage. Oba, Raga and Maewo' ; ni-wat si Tahar 'Tahar 's stone ', a tamaru To bend down . H.26. piece of coral used in magic . See especially Tale P. tamat Peace. Mta tamata. tahul To give pigs to relat ions ta-mats Ghost, "dead man". B.40; by marriage . c.4; N.24; etc . Ts in ta-mats 'human skelet al bone '; ni-al rin Wife's brother. cf. ta-mats "sun the food of the 'one who receives pigs'. ghost s" (calendar term) ; pwaraQ ta-mats 'cave of the dead' ; taka To sail in close to land , noror sin ta-mats 'name of a in shallow wat er . U.38. small island'; Qambu sin ta mats 'place of ghosts' ; nu-a tak-tak Copulate (?). See tag ta-mats 'ghost 's water, a c �use tak. Ar tak-tak wer 'danc e of madness' ; ta-mats e u J uri movement of young girls holding 'the "ghost enters in" method hands' . of divination' ; na-laQ ta-mats "square dance ghost", a mask. tall To cure a wound. R.39, of , pig's tusk. tamaur Species of fish, pro hibited befor e incision. tal2 A rope, for tal i, tsal i, q.v. Ni-tal e hatsi ni-wa t tamauw A gelded pig. Tamauw ru 'ceremony , tethering pigs to 'gelded tusker '; tamauwar the stones' ; na-tu ni-tal 'a 'castrated re-entrant tusker '; native red plaited girdle ; also tamauw pekes 'gelded crescent variety of palolo '. SR tal ; tusker' . Wala tamauw and tamauw . Mta ta1 (i); IN tali 'rope '. Tamba The island of Oba in S.L. talal To step over (tala tile hi, A.75); to enter a house tambol The tapol -tree (S.L.). enclosure. Vao ya-yambol. tala2 A shell adze, for hollowing tamiok An axe . Mt a ditto. out canoes. B.26. Also used in clearing dancing grounds . U.2. tamwe To salute, welcome, re Vao tala; BN tal i 'knife'; IN ceive . Ar tamwe wanu, all ta l 'cut , chop'. villages dance in rotation at intervals of a few days, begin ta I as I To untie. S.lO. ning with the home village . On those night s when no visi tali Rope . A ritual term only; ting village comes, the home ordinarily tsal i. Tal i na-mban people dance alone . This 142

danc ing in rotation always tapar Open (adj.). Na-ha tapar leads up to a big rite of some 'special trap made in Vao for kind . Vao tame . fishing' . tamwerak Fibre belt worn by men tapol Name of a tree with edible round the waist; also the soft fruit . Vao and Atchin S.L. fibre of which the belt is tambo I . made; the inner bark, also used for making shoulder straps for tara Old, grow old, strong, or clubs. ripe . A.72; G.15; 0.17. Ni wara tara 're-entrant tusker '; tan Ground, earth (ni-tan, n ar tar-tara watsin 'they are dan). See tano for full form . strong now' . cf. tar-tar. Tanwa 'kind of earth used MidN tara; BN taran; Hog Harbour medicinally '; wa-tan 'down, tal . cf. Ubir (Papua) tam-tatar low (of pr ice)'; ta-ron 'ok wa 'be grown up '. tan 'nowadays the price is low' ; na-tan 'here'; pe tan 'let me tarav-i To wait , tarry. 0.26; go there ', K.59; na-tan 'down, s.6; FF .l. No ro pwi-tsa pe to the ground' , K.13l ,134 ; ni tarav 'I don 't want to wait '; al mu wa-tan 'the sun went ar weI -weI tarav 'they dance in down' ; tauwtsen wa-tan 'the welcome (having waited) . lower or women's side'; pe wa tan 'I shall go down the coast '. tarawon Pregnant sow whose teats SR , Lg ditto; IN tanah 'earth'. begin to swell. Tan im Name of the lodge of tarer To crow, of a fowl . N. 5; Pweter-tsuts. R .42. tano The ground . Ro wowe tano tarik The wild yam (ro:n-tarik). ne-hi :m '�e clear ground for a house' . See tan. IN tanah. tarone Time. Ta ron'ok; tarone Ie wa tsin 'nowadays '. ta�l To weep. B.7; H.34; K.89, etc. cf. da�, ti�-ta�, le-ta�. tas The sea (n-das, ni-tas, n IN ta�is. Transitive form is das). SR tas; CR tah; NR tahi; ta�-s i, q.v. Mta tas; Hog Harbour 5ahi ; IN ta s i k. ta�2 Basket . cf. n-da�, ta�. Mta ta�a; IN ta�-an 'holder '. tasi To peck (S.L.). Ta�ov A form of the Maki. Ban tas i-n Younger brother (m.s.); ban ta�ov 'shell arm badge'; younger sister (w.s.); father 's ni-ar ta�ov 'a form of fence'. brother 's son, father's sister 's son; mother 's sister's son; tap Family lodge or club-house, husband 's younger brother (w.s.); lodge enclosure; generally in husband 's younger brother 's the locative, I a-tap, q.v. wife (w.s.). Uripiv, Lalep, Ne-hi:m tar-taran la-tap 'lodge ditto. Ini r e-ru we ta-tasir or bachelors' house with eaves 'they were two brothers ', GG.l. of that ch strengthened with IN t-ari . pins', C.15; H.ll. See tab. tatai To wrap up . Ar tatal 'the tapa A coconut mat . Tapa were, finishing stage of plaiting'. another variety; butsun tapa 'where the leaves of the off ta-ta Ii To carry on a pole. side turn over '.,' Vao tamba ya; L.43. Ar ta-ta l batena r 'tri- PN tapa; IN tampak 'a blow , angle of star s represent ing a beating' , hence, beaten bark clump of yams slung over a cloth. pole. tapa i-n The belly . P.2l. SR tats Toy instrument for throwing teban. canes (ne-tats). Ra ta-tats 'we play at throwing canes'. 143

tatsa-ni See tatai. E tatsani tawu1 Pile of earth. Q.I,59, 'the third and final stage in etc . Ar tew tawu hore 'name plait ing penis-wrappers'. of a gong signal '; ar tew tawu 'gongs are sounded' . Wala ta-tser(e) All, always. cf. tep-wew 'a mound'. tser. 7 = to-tser. Na-mboQ ta-tser 'all day long'; ko e Species of banana. wise mu rurur ta-tsere 'why do you always wear (a singlet)'; tawu Conch shell. Used as sym ta-ta-tser 'always, straight bol of home-b red tusker when on' , U.3 5. pierced and hung on tawo tree; conch shell trumpet , conch tauwen Husband , sister 's husband shell blown at ceremonial ex (m. and w.s.); daughter 's hus change of tuskers. Tawu sin band (m.s.); (w.s. ) take s sak. pila "rail's conch" , t rum� et Tauwen timan = ? 'daughter 's of cassis shell; tawu ne- J ul husband 's father and mother '. 'small blackened conch' , used ReI and Lalep ditto. in connection with sacrifice of tusker. Vao tavu; IN tabu� i . tauwtsen The other side ; half. A.2; R.27,35. Tauwtsen wa-tan ta Man, human being. Only in 'the lower or women 's side of compounds, e.g. ta-meut 'white the dancing ground' ; tauwtsen man'. IN taw(u) 'man' . na-mbwas 'half wrapper worn by init iated youth '; tauwtsen wahal ta-i To cut , strike . B.28; D.2; 'the other side of a war'; G.17; Q . 50 . 7 0 ; U.2.3; HH .2. tauwtsen wa-mare 'the upper Ta i na-mboQ 'to appoint a day' , side of the dancing ground'; A.6o; tai buri 'fell a tree' . tauwtsen na-mban 'corners of Vao ta; MidN ta-ts; IN taktak ; the firestones (? the two BN tari = IN ta l, a different wings )'; tauwtsen n i -wat 'sides root . of stones , i.e. social sides of a village '. tal A string belt (n-tal). See tal. Vao tal . tawe1 To pluck a banana. cf. tawu 'banana '. ta-mats By-form of ta-ma ts 'ghost '. Ta-ma ts matur 'pros tawe2 A creeper, used in making trate ghosts'; ta-mats e pal combs. The inner bark is used. 'ghost of one killed in battle'; Also for making bowman 's bracer. also ta-mats pa l; ta-mats miel Ro-tawe 'a thorny plant '. U.33. 'small wooden imag e'; na-hal ta-mats "ghost track" (the word tawil Large black bi-valve, sp. is a Vao form) ; ta-mats laQ 'a Pinna, used by women in a cer fool' ; ta-mats ni-waf 'a stingy tain dance (ne-tawi l). man' ; laQ ta-mats pal "madness of the sacrificial ghost" , name tawif To come to the surface for performance (or medium? ) after diving . c.6. of a divining rite; ta-mats pa l also 'a pig killed during Maki '; tawo Sp . of tree, whose branc hes ta-mats pa l e maur 'pig "sacri are used as a symbol for a home ficed" yet not killed'; ta-mats bred tusker (with small pierced a mwi res 'friendly ghost '; ta conch shell hung on the twigs). mats a mwi tsats 'bad ghost '. Ne-tur tawo 'a serrated pattern, IN taw(u) 'person'. and ma tay with blue triangles, towards 'die' . the apex of the sap-sap. The tawo fruit is edible. Tawo-le taQ Basket (ni-taQ). See n-daQ, tar-rum-rum 'name of a mainland ni-taQ. T.2 et seq . MidN daQ; mountain', "wild old woman 's BN tan. tawo". Mta tawan. tar-tar Strong. brave. straight tawom ir A Maki rite. ?Stone (of a course in sailing). cf. platform . Vao n-towo mer. tar-tara. Ne-hi:m tar-taran 144

'strengthening eaves of thatch te-i6 To place, take , put , with pins '; bOQin ta-mbut weral carry (ashore ), plant , pluck, e tar-tar 'actually seven days cause to appear or make magic 'from today' . MidN tur-tur ally. E.2,10; F.ll; H.22; , strong ' . Q.19; u.6. tavu-ni To cover , bury. Redupli tehel Method of divining, named cates as tav -tav-ni. R.27. from bamboos laid on the ground Also spelled taw-nl, A.72; C.15; inside a reed enclosure . Wala H.28; L.43; 0.33. Mta tavir tie1 . 'bury' , tavun 'cover'; MidN tavan. Common thr oughout tek Species of fish, prohibited Malekula; IN ta, prefix of before incision (n-te k). An condition, and bun i 'to hide'. other species is called tek mwel . See also n-dek. t�ni Particle suffixed to verbs, meaning 'away' . Po kete 10m tekau Species of shellfish, tani 'you look out!'; me witseni "that walks on the reef". G.3, t� n i 'I threw it away' . Re etc. d�plicates as ta-tan i , K.70; L.36; Q. 7; R.37 : etc. cf. telab To roast on the open fire , Fij i tan i, yan i 'away' . Ubir e.g. yams . D.4. cf. lab. The (Papua ) tani. fani 'other' . word seems to be really "put roast". See te6 • tel Term of address to father , father 's brother , mother 's te lep Immediately (?). sister's husband. Perhaps properly tat from ta-ta, used tele-pur-pur Clam shell . K.40, in other dialects. Vao ditto. etc . cf. te le; to-purpur 'the Pleiades '. Mt a ta lai . te2 Particle following the verb, with an apologetic or depre tel-tal-wa Leaf used medicinally cat ory sense, like English in initiation (Baho Tureput) . 'please' . SR te , imperat ive , as in 0 te a 'go away! ' tel-t el i Hard. te3 Second part of the native tel uw A boy's sling . se te ...; it goes to the end of the clause , e.g. n-das ten Sinnet (na-ten) . Na-ten e se wa re-Qan te 'the sea no-un 'sinnet used for serving cannot get into it '. Used rope ', in lodge and house alone after an implied nega- construction, and round the -tive in pw i-tsa te 'never na-rul . 'mind! ' The word is enclitic, moving the ac cent a syllable teQ-meQ The gall-bladder . forward. tepel To work magic (for making te-n4 The buttocks ; behind (na rain) . F.15 . te-n). p.18. Bat-na-ten 'buttocks'; rOQa� na-ten 'cleft tep-tep The jaws . of the buttocks , anal fold' (lit . 'between the buttocks '); tepwinan Sand, beach. matan na-ten 'anus ' (lit. 'eye of the buttocks; the excreta teren The mons veneris, pubes. of persons '); na-ten ni-laQ B�tin teren e sor 'the base of 'cloud' (lit. 'buttocks of the the intestine is sore'. wind'). cf. Fiji tau-ndaku 'behind' . tere-weJ in Flattened oval disc at end of club . te S In 0 hU te 'a cry in dance l, also e hUiiUu ... te . t e,-rik Perhaps . See mit erik. No te-rik na-viil pw i sa 'I think it may have been for one month ', DD .5; n-terik ni-ram pw i sa 'I 145

think perhaps for a year'; pw i tlal Table rapping method of te-rik 'perhaps it will'. See divining . See tehel . Probably n-tek, tse r ek . this is also Wala tial. terin In su-segur ne-re terin. tlgei To bring or lead in , to See segur. marry a wife , be married to a wife. A.24,34 ; H.l; K.7 ,23, etc . Al so to uncover . teruw To cook (of pigs , pre Ar tlgel wifen sar ar ma ar sumably in an oven, torowa). rUI)-rul)fi 'they lead in their "wives" and come bearing tes One . Used chiefly in the torches'. cf. tigelsl. ordinal e ma e-tesan 'first' cf. Florida kesa, Nguna tes tigeisl To undo , remove (the · one' . door panel of a house ). N.38; R.14. tetain In n ' a l m tetaln 'killing place' . t I I ehI To step over . A.75. tete A trap? Tete wuro 'tiny ti I-til Shell adze made from tot's fish-trap '; ar tete rlv clam shells. See ta la, tele 'method of catching rats' ; ra pur-pur. tete pwetar 'a game with sekol stalks'; e tete ho re 'unoffi tlma-n Father , father 's brother, cial agreement ', made by a man father 's sister's husband, with a girl's father , to marry mother 's sister's husband. his daught er . Vao tutu. Term of reference; for address, see tel tevl To sound. Ar tev tawu 'the conch is sounded' . cf. tabu. tll)i To sound or beat a drum. D.10; R.34. cf. tal), tal) , In tev-tabwe 'wooden coping tsil)-tsil). It is a graded form on roof of house '. from IN tal)ls 'cry, weep', with transitive ending. tev-tev Any sort of design, e.g. pattern on penis-wrapper . cf. tipan Coconut with milk ready teve, PN root largely for 'cut', for drinking . Tlpal) tar-tar 'circumcise ' . "hard coconut", when the kernel is quite formed and hard. tewe To pay for the use of an object . E tewe warar 'he pays tipwls A child, of either sex. for their hands'; pe tewe na G.26; K.37; N.25; P.3. ak sam 'I will pay you for the use �f your canoe '. titit To come forwar d in dancing, with a serpent ine step. tewen Husband, sister 's husband; initiator . Tewen san lamal tlv Young leaves (na-tiv). "bush husband" , i.e. illicit lover . Wala, Uripiv ditto. tlwel To cut , scarify. H.9; N.46; GG.l. To cut up . PN tewere In I iwo tewere na :n 'his root commonly teve. molar teeth'. tal To s"tay, stop , cease. A.59, tl A form of ta 'man of a place '. 69; B.19,38; F.15; L.32; P. TI e-Ra 'men of Raga' . cf. 20,21; R.l,51. To-to "stop Florida t I - no n I 'man , "real stop", baby languages refer person" ' . ring to its weight . NR to; Mta toya 'remain '; IN taka 'reach tla Excrement of man or ani a point or pla ce' . mals. Tla-ra 'dysentery'. IN tlyan 'belly' . to2 A fowl (na-to) . Tsin-tsin 146

puruk na-to 'the gizzard'; na to-purpur The Pleiades. cf. to e tuwat, na-to tamar 'second tele-purpur 'clamshell '. cock-crow' , see tamar; na-la� na-to 'square dance of the topwan In bur-topwan 'a mortuary fowls '; to rum I amef 'wild rite'. May be tapwan 'hallow fowls of the bush' ; na-to ne ing' . cf. tab, t abu. Vao bur hi: m 'house fowls '; to bati tambean. 'dappled fowls'. MidN to; BN tu; Mt a toa; PN moa . tor Species of tree, used to make canoes for the Oba Pil tol Person of an island: to Vao, grimage, and for centre posts to Rano , to Wa la, to Tsan, etc. of lodge . Vao ditto; Mt a tora. To pwere-pwere salan "man of the race of the sows", name ·of tor i To hold in the hand, take , a pattern. Vao to; IN taw(u) catch. E tori no-wof 'steers 'man' , becoming to as an agen man'; e tore e we natun 'adopt tive prefix in many languages a child' ; mor tori hanan sar of Central Celebes and S.E. 'they-two threw them their Papua . food' ; tor tsowi 'let fall, drop' . Mta tore 'to hand over tobo:n A ceremonial belt of soft with a speech (pigs, money, bark; a new string belt . GG.10 . etc.)', but could also be Mt a taur 'grasp , hold, have'. toha Sticks used for water proofing a canoe. torowa Oven. See teruw. tokoratsin mew Necklet worn when totol To leave behind . candidate issues from init ia tion. toto2 Stone , special word of the Oba Pilgrimage . tol Three (e-tol, etc.). Wa-tol 'thr ee times' ; e ma e-to l in Tsan The Island of At chin. To- 'third' ; mewil e-to l 'thirty' . Tsan 'man of Atchin'. Vao ya-tol; IN talu. tsar The erythrina. Re-re tsar to la North-we st wind . PN 'name of a month' (lit. 'the tokelau, compounde d of IN teka erithrina leaves are falling '). 'to arrive ', and lawad 'the open sea' . Clearly a PN loan tsarawi See tepwinan . word. tsatsl Bad; also holy, taboo. tol-tol Ashes, a special word Ni-as e tsats 'bad luck' ; ra used on the Oba Pilgrimage. hetsats 'let us partake '. MidN sat; Eromangan zat; BN stu; Hog tomla Bush turkey? Harbour hao ; Mt a tatas; IN j aha t . tonats In rofer tonats 'a whole torch' . cf. nats 'other '. tsats2 Croton . See also sas. Robon-tsats 'species of croton' ; ton i To catch hold of, seize. ro-pun tsats 'variety of um

A. 3; L.24; Q.18. Ar to n i ni brella palm' . (ne-tsats). cf. mbwen 'they arrive bringing na-tsats. mats' . Probably a transitive form , to-n i . ?SR to� 'under tsatsawu l To wash the hands after stand, "grasp", mentally' . cooking . to�sa To go up from the beach, tsats i e I Yellow. inland. With sa, cf. ha 'up', and IN sakay 'up'. tsawiri A mixture. Wala tsaw. to�-won i To plait , begin plait tsam The outrigger float of a ing, first side of penis-wrapper . canoe . G.24; 0.26 (ni-tsam) . 147

Tsam-e 'to tac k' . Lg. Mta sama; tsian To conceive a child. Hog IN sayaman. Harbour and Panayati (Papua) r i an ' pregnant ' . tsar Still. yet. A.23; R. 37. Hwi tal) tsar 'he stood tsib To touch. See also tsiba ri. weeping'. cf. ta-tsar. Liw-ts ib 'curved tusker (tusk touching)'. also na-ru tsib. tsats Croton. See tsats, sas Reduplicates as tsib-tsib 'to (na-tsats). Mt a sas. return. give one to touch again ': no tsib-tsib pitewin tsel(e) To be lost . R.17; S.39 . 'I return to him' (e.g. a Tsel e-wi s "end of a crayfish" . borrowed pig) . The root name of a month. cf. tsileni . appear s to have been tsiba. NR hala 'stray . dr ift'; IN of which tsiba-rl and tsi bwe sala 'err'. Therefore strictly are transitive forms. tsala. tsiba-ri To touch a thing. to tsem-tsem Veil used in pantomime. reach a place. Uripiv cubari. tsemwe To gnaw . suck. DD . tsibi To sneeze. tser(a) Yam scraper (ne-tsera). tslbo Another form of tsib(a) : Tser-tser 'scrape yams for e tslbo buha na-mbwe . Although cooking ' . not fully explained this seems to be a "backing". thus. tsib,. tsere Scrape out . remove. pick out (of bir4s with the beak). tslbon1 Oneself. Takes suffixed E tsere ni nl-man 'cure for pronouns: tsibok 'I myself' . swollen limb' . "he scrapes out etc . Ne-hi:m tslbon 'the very the magic"; e tsere na-won i house '. Vao tlmbon. Root found 'secular massage without magic'. also in S.E. Papua. "he just scrapes"; ar tsere owon das 'they remove the salt tsibon2 Stone platform. Wala water from the gong ' (after and Vao ditto. float ing the log from the main land). cf. tsiri, tsuri. tslbwe To push. poke . Possibly tsib 'touch' and wa 'movement tserik To think. intend. con away' . sider . See ter ik. Hi tserik, e-tsiga 'no. I don't think so'; tsiga No . E-tslga wo r 'not yet '. me tserlk e-res wil-na e-tsats NR siyai; Mta tayal; Futuna 'I wonder whether it is good flkai; Fiji sel)ai. dialect or bad'. s I ka i, t i ka i . tsi1 Preposition of movement tslgarlni In wolo tslgarini towards. Also tslhi (q.v. ). 'slits in middle of newtuw' . takes noun suffixes. cf. tslga. tsi-n2 A bone. Tsln-tsin puruk tslhl- Older form of tsl1 'to na-to 'fowl's gizzard' ; ts i n wards '. Pangkumu cigi-. ta-mats 'human bone '; tsln also 'backbone of leaf' ; ne-l iw tsile Complete . all finished. tsi 'arrow with human bone tip'; E lawl tsile 'he removes them tsin balan 'ankle bone '; tsln all'; tsunob tsile 'everybody' . rofer na:n 'his backbone ' Serves as a definite plural (lit. 'torch bone'); tsi barin sign. Ts i I-eni 'to lose'. cf. 'bone of calf of leg'. Wala tse 1. tsl-n; IN �uyl. tsllewere To narrate. relate. ts l3 In tsl t�nl 'let go '. recapitulate. M.l. Redupli cates as tsil- tsllewere 'have tsi� Bamboo knife. cf. na-sip. a talk' . Q.18 ; S.35. Vao sisllakuar. 148 tsim-tsim Fresh water. Special strap of club; tsoron na-mbwe word for Oba Pilgrimage use . 'small portable gong' . IN timuy 'the rain wind' . tsorta Outside end of outrigger ts inen Bones in general , skele boom (special word used on the ton ; also groove on bow. See Oba Pilgr image) . ts i-n2• tsotsin Sister (m.s.); brother tsi80n Tongue . See also tsU80n . (w.s.), father's brother 's Ts i80n Taha r 'Tahar 's Promon daught er; mother 's sister's tory' , G.24; 0.25, name of vil daughter. Uripiv ditto. Pos lage on Vap ; Ts i 80n B08-na-un sibly a variant for tasin, q.v. 'promont ory fac ing Ambrym , in a special usage . Takes jumping-dff place of gho'ts' . suffixed pronouns . Contrast with this root Uripiv ne-man 'tongue ', with IN maya, tsov(i) To fall . H.3; 0.3; which is At chin man . overtake , U.39. Tor tsovi 'let fall' . cf. tsovha. tsi8-tsi8 In ni-wat tsi8-tsi8 'small upright s or dolmens'. tsovha Pass by. K.5,17; N.43. The -ha 'up', is used much as tsip Blunt arrow (ne-tsip). Ne 'up' in English 'catch up '. ts ip ni-wat 'of stone '. cf. ne-sip 'a knife'. Uripiv liwU tsowile To wash sores, shape , tsip 'super-circle-tusker sac smooth, undercut the ends of a rificed at ta-mao miel'. MidN due;out . sip 'knife'; Mt a tive 'shell used as chisel'. tsu To remove . T.5. tsipal To burst forth, appear . tsualeni To cheer , hail. Tsual i . cf. tsub ul. is used for the grunt of pigs . tsip-tsip A kind of leaf used in tsubul To de scend. A.IO; C.3; incision medicine , carried in Q.65. Vao sumbol. cf. tsup ul , the mouth. tsipal. Mta taqe l? ts ire To follow, next . A.69; tsule To poke a hole in. G.31; K.72,120; 0.21; Q.70. Redu u.40. cf. tsere . plicates as tsir-tsire, K.82,92. In K.121, 'collect'. cf. sur i , tsum To make sucking noises with J ur i . the mouth (e wur-wur tsum) . Mta sum; Hog Harbour sum 'drink' , tsiri To blow, of wind, on some sumy i 'thirst '; Eromangan so� i thing. D.l,14; N.4. Ts iri wa 'kiss' . 'pour on' , K.122. cf. ser, tsuri. Ts ir hini 'remove the tsupul To go down from the bark' , B.33. shore. cf. tsubul , the general term. tsi-tsi The glans penis. cf. hitsi- 'to copulate'. tsuri To seize. U.33. cf. tsere , tsiri. tsiwi To sneeze. cf. tslbi. tsu-tsuin To pierce. IN suki t. tsok Red banana. tsUnob Man, human being, as tsom Name given to those who opposed to ghost ; carved figure have undertaken the Oba Pil of a man. TsUnob tsi Ie . 'every grimage (n-tsom). body' ; tsUnob ni-man 'man exercising magic '. tsor Little things (ne-tsor). Tsoromon , term for loose end tsU80n Tongue . Tsu8 b�ti ram in plaiting; tassel on shoulder "tongue of the eldest son" , term 149

for triangles on women's skirts; bamboo erected on the return of tsUQon na-riv "rat 's tongue", the initiates from Oba. E tu pattern on mourning cap; tsUQon tu-tul{l ni e wiel "it accompan also 'back of figurehe ad on ies him as he goes", name of a canoe, beak' . Takes suffixe s gong signal; hence to sound -ak, -am , -on. MidN tsoQon. the gong signal as for a dead Looks i ike a noun from tsum, man, N.42. Vao tula-nij Mta q.v. tul 'beckon, mark time'; 7Bugotu ta laQi 'meet '. tu In ar we tu 'they make a knot at either end of the bowstring ' tulosmis Process of cutting down bushes to ensure tenure of gar tua A long time . Tua ok 'this den plot. long time', L.22. Mta tuai, and so commonly in MN . IN tuha tul-tulo To render a song (tul 'old' . tulo po), chant . K.98; BB .l = tul{l- ni7 tua-k Elder brother, usually used in reduplicated and com tun Hot , of water , sun, etc. pound form , tutuJan 'friend' ; Usually tu-tun. SR tUQ-bunune tuak werek 'dear friend' ; tuak 'burn rubbish '; Mta tun, tin, we le(Qa) 'my dear friends '. tunu 'burn'; IN tunu 'burn' . Mta tua; IN tuha 'old' . tUQ Mirror (na-tuQ). Na-tuQ is tua-nl Wife's sister's husband the name of a pool in the ground (tua-k, tu�-m, tua-n). Mt a sprinkled with ashes to make a tua 1 • mirror; as proper noun , name of a gap in the coast at Olep where tuanZ Another , one of two . E two such pools exist . Also wurei a tuan 'he told it to bilge water , Q.35. another '; tas in tuan nen 'the other brother ', KK. 3. Mta TUQu-wat The lodge of Emil Parav ; t ua n i u 'ot her' . also name of an extinct lodge . tuha To receive or present gifts turl To stand , stop, be , live . (with ma or wa ). Q.53. Ar B.5; G.16 ; 0.1; P.19; R.49, etc . tuha nl 'small pigs given to Po tur po Jopon 'just wait a i Mak men I. little'; t ur raQ i 'arrange in rows'? GG. Vao and Wala ditto. tuhu To sound. E tuhu na-mbwe IN tal)�ay . wenen 'he sounds the wenen gong signal' . Tuhunen ' song, dance' tur2 In ne-tur tawo , name given in Vao , as verb , tuhun 'to per to patterns of blue triangles form it '; and see tutuhunen. towards the apex of the sap-sap. tuhu-ni To send off ai a gift turaQ To make fast . TuraQ ne or covenant . N. 2. I iw 'fasten the head on an arrow' , H.2; P.3. tui To scoop up or draw water. tureput In baho tureput, the tula Companion. cf. tulani, older use in incision. and Vao talay = Rel tul� ka, Lalep tulay 'mortuary official' . Tur-hapen In Ni-wat Tur-hapen, Florida kula, Kuanua (New name of a stone on the Emil Britain) turan, Toba Battaq Parav beac h called Popon. (Sumatra) turan 'companion'. turul Re-entrant tusker (e turu) . tul{l-ni To bring , lead. A.35 , Merer-pekes e wa e turu kele 36 ; K.20,28; Q.3 2, only used of 'sub-gr ade of circle-tusker '. perso ns. E tUltUI Oba "it accompanies them on their way turu-n2 Body ; trunk of tree. from Oba" , name for the singing Mta tur 3. 150

tururanen A song. ul The rising tide (no-u). K.66, 81; u .60. As a verb, to rise , tutau See tahu. of the tide . tutu Elder brother, term of ad u2 In the cry u ... u ... ihi , dr ess only, see tutufan. Also denot ing that something is for father 's brother 's child, finished. mother 's sister's child, hus band's brother , father 's fat her 's ul l The palolo. Ul we le 'little father , father's father 's palolo ', the name of a month; mother , brother 's wife (m.s.). another is ul lap 'great palolo '; See tua . pal u-ulan "offering of palolo", also a month; ul-mew "feather tutuhunan A type of story. See palolo", a var iety long , with tuhunen. Vao tuyunuan 'songs'. white belly. ?Mta un. tutuo ?To know. Na-mwere mu u12 Paint ; to paint (no-ul ). tutuo 'the parrot knows' (Tahar D.10. No-ul wereQ 'red lines myth) . painted on the face'; no-ul sin Tahar "Tahar 's paint" , used to tutur Name of a certain dance. de scribe embellishment s round Ar t�tur 'they perform the the eyes; no-ul sin beQgenum dance' . 'curved design on the cheeks '; no-ul kon "holy paint". The tutufa-n Elder brother. See transit ive form of the verb , tutu for extensions. Clearly ul-i, is now used to mean tutu, with sak, et c ., posses 'write'. Vao na-ul 'paint '; sive . Mta iI, ul 'smear paint on face , draw figures on Tamate hat'. tuwl A plant used for poisoning If it connects with IN tul is fish. Na-ha tuw 'creepers cut 'write' , then it must have into strips and used as switches. lost t- before reaching Atchin. Mta ya-tuwa ; IN tube, exten sively used also in S.E. Papua u 1 3 To return. IN ul i h. and the Solomons. uloQ To swim. K.8l. cf. huloQ, tuw2 Plaited belt (ne-tuw) ; also lOQ. Mta 010. ne-tuw ne-tsal . Ne-tuw weraQ 'belt worn by middle-aged men' ; ulu nu-amp Driftwood. Apparently ne-tuw topon 'red girdle used "the head of fire", but not a by old men' ; ne-tuw weaweQ native Atchin form. 'girdle with check design' ; ne tuw ni-tal 'red p],ainted girdle, To awaken a per son. Po un ia and variety of palolo'. Vao 'wake me up !' ne-tuwej Mta tuwur 'to bind on thatch' . un2 To dive . c.6; K.47,69; LL . ?Mta unuv 'sink in, of fluid'. tuwe To build or pile up (tuwu ). Q. 52 ,53. Ar tuwe ni-wat 'they un3 Plaited string of coconut erect the stone plat fo�m' . Re fibre, used chiefly in the con duplicates as tu-tuwe , Q.64. struction of canoes (no-un). B.27; D.l. Na-ten no-un 'sin tuwo To distribute. Reduplicates net for attaching the parts of as tu-tuwo. a house '. Lg wu:nu; Mt a va-un . tuwa t In na-to e tuwat 'f-irst u�a Spirits who walk about as cock-crow' . human beings (nu-una). tuwe To catch fish from a canoe. urI To cough, a cough. Mt a vur. ur2 Specie s of lobster (no-ur). MidN ura; BN ur; Mta ura; IN u�aQ 'prawn' . 151

ur 3 Island. NR u r a; IN hutan utoJ Small bamboo knife used to 'forest ', and so a doublet ut, split cane . As verb 'to split q.v. cane ' (no-utof). ur'll i To eat , secularly, as utui To draw water. cf. tuwi . against hani 'eat ceremonially SR uti ; NR utu. or ritually' . A.2; G.12; K.13; 0.16. MidN or. utun-wuri A flea (dog-louse ). See wur i; IN kutu 'louse '. urep Gardens wh ere first soft yams are planted. ututuren A son� cycle, used at the feast of Jur hamban "fire Ur-tseren The name of a month. lighting( ?)". usur Cane planted on yam heap uwe Interjection , alas . MN (?for yam to grow on) (no-usur). commonly auwe . Usur row-row 'cane planted on yam heap , with all the leaves uw is Young breadfruit leaves, stripped from it except two , used ceremonially (ne-uwis). one on either side , resembling a bird flying (whence the uwor Scarifications on the arm, name)'; also no-usur 'a stake raised lines on club , ridge with leaves tied to it , and from whi ch teeth or comb spring. the name of a ceremony'. Mta usur 'following'. uJ Rain (noun and verb) (no-uf). Note: there is a sound of bi F.4; K.84; p.24, etc . MidN labial v, which is difficult to us; BN u; CR and SR us; NR uha, distinguish from w; here in most common MN , IN hujan. cases w ha s been standardised, except in a few words where v uJeri To enter. Ta-mats e-uJeri seems definite, but these lat ter "the ghost enters in", name of have still been entered below in the rite of divinat ion. the plac e they would occupy if spelled with w. uJoni In las uJoni 'to know, recognise'; rOI) uJon i 'under wa1 Particle used to form mult i stand' . Perhaps = woJe ni plicative numerals: wa-ru 'rightly , perfectly' , with 'twice' , wa-tol 'three times' , transitive ending . etc .; there is occasional vowel harmony: wa- , wo- . Mta va uJuJi To ask a question. H.28; shows that this is really the JJ .19, et c. SR ususi ; Mta usus . IN causat ive prefix pa-. ut The mainland, a plac e in wa2 The stingray . IN pay i . general, also used to express points of time (no-ut). No-ut wa3 To say (immediately preceding baho 'incision gar den '; e ruwi the quoted words ). cf. Mta wa , no-ut 'he is planting his gar NR and Hog Harbour ve, Mta den' ; no-ut pu pOI) 'tonight , vava 'to speak' , ult imately IN in the evening ' (lit. 'the land ba-I)a 'an opening' , hence, 'the will be dark' ); times of day: mouth' . no-ut mw i ran 'the day broke ' ; no-ut pOI) 'night-t ime '; no-ut wa4 A crowd . L.7 (nI -wa ) . e rav-rav 'evening, about 5p.m. '; no-ut re I iwet 'midnight '; no- waS To come or go. Mta va; IN �t e pOI) 'today , now' . BN (m)panaw. ut( a); MidN ot; SR ur; NR uta, ut; IN hutan 'mainland , forest ', wa6 In tan wa 'a kind of earth also existing in Atchin as hut , (tan) used medicinally'. and ur, the latter apparently through an Ambrym-South Raga wahal To fight . L.4; EE.2. medium. Tauwtsen wahal "sides" in war , 152

GG ; as noun , na-wahal 'a bat used prepositionally of motion tle', EE; ni-se, wahal ko ? away from speaker and into some 'What , is it war?'; segur waha l thing: I iwi wan nu-a 'pour wat er 'a pouc h filled with scented into (a vessel) '; wa-wan 'it herbs, used in pig magic; war happened' , i.e. after a long herbs worn during dances', also time ; mw i han mi wa-wan mwi lap segur e wahal 'smoke blackened 'he at e, and cont inued eat ing pouc h worn during dances '. Vao much' . MidN van; BN va; Efate vayal; Mta vayalo 'war '. bano ; Mt a van(o) ; IN (m)panaw 'go' . wahawun A novice, undertaking the Oba Pilgr image for the first wan2 A ceremonial hat , used in time. Maki ceremony , also called wan-pek-pek (no-wan) . wahe To search for lice in a person's hair. L.23. E wahi wan(a) To steal . Reduplicates batun 'he deloused him' , LL . as wana-wana . Ser wan 'special horseplay in baho nosos '; ser wahel Crooked. wan baho 'ritual stealing'; s e ko l wana 'worn by one who has wa-i-e Interjection, hello! killed a man and hidden him' . BB .4. Transitive wanai: ta-mats e to wanai 'there is a ghost unlaw wa ll Eight (o-wa I ) . IN wal u. fully sounding them' ; as a noun al so wana i 'harmful magic', wal2 A pitfall, used in war (nu whose practit ioners are called wa l). wana-wana. IN pa-n(t)akaw 'steal' . Possibly a PN loan . walal To run away. 0.28; T.14. In dance, to run with torch or wani To sharpen. Redupl icates for pig, A.61; R.26; to depart , as wa-wan i. N. 40, to "circle" . Vao val, walau; Mt a wa l 'to leap' . wa nu A place; sometimes with umlaut as wanu. Ar tamwe wanu wa la2 To sail . Na-ak wa la 'a 'they dance in rotation' (see big sailing canoe , for long tamwe); batun wanu 'place of distance travel '. To run before or igin' . IN banua 'land' ; Mt a the wind. Mta wa lau-a 'collect vanua ; BN vanu. things for a voyage '; walwalau 'paddle altogether '. Apparently wa�a-ni To feed, to give to eat . a loanword from PN folau 'an Reduplicates as wa-a�an i. Mta ocean voyage ', which Dempwolff va�an; IN pa�an 'food' . connects with IN parahu 'a ship', Malay prau . wa�e To pant (S.L.). Redupli cates as wa�e-wa�a , wa�e-wa�e. wa l-sal Booth, half-house. Uripiv wal-sal ?'type of roof wa r(a) A pig, the tusk of which ing over stone platform'. has re-ent ered the jaw (ni-wara). Tamauw wara 'gelded re-entrant wa l-tani To court a person. tusker ', A.44; B.34. Vao bo Wa l � l, apparently, "run away wa re; Wala no-war i, warin; Mt a from" ! war 'turn back' . wa luf A paddle , special word waras i To step over , cross a , used on the Oba Pilgr image. threshhold; to leap; a danc ing Wa luf kaw-kaw 'steering paddle ' . movement, beat ing the ground ,cf. Bugotu va l uha 'to paddle '. violently with one foot . No warasi ne-hi:m 'I ent er the wanl To go. E wan 'it house ', espec ially used of hus happened that ... '; pi wan 'by band returning to his wife 's and bye'; reduplicated, wa-wan parent s' house on the tent h day and wan-wan 'go on, cont inue' ; after marriage; ni-mbel e warasi 153

'dance movement representing a wats Four . Wa -wats 'four times' ; hawk pounc ing on its prey'; nl e ma e-watsin 'fourth'; liw mbel ware-waras '"jumping" wats-wa ts 'four tusks '; e rur hawk' ; e warasl 'a cure for wa-wats 'about 4p.m. '. IN pat. toothache '. watsa The middle part of a bow ware Leaves used in cooking, (watsa I iwen). · leaf worn before initiation, and used after incision, and watse-ni To fall down, K.126; for wrapping bananas (ro-ware). P.15 (watsen im 'fall down by Pweren ro-wa re 'young leaves yourself'); to fell trees, not yet unfolded ', to represent clear ground . Really a trans eels in hor-hor mara game; ro itive form. So, to unfold, of ware pwiapwe; na-mbwas ro-ware a coconut leaf or shoot ; ar 'sheath of ro-ware leaf'; ro wats-wats ni balav 'rhythm of ware bw i li 'red leaves used dance' . in initiation'. wats i (n) Now, this time. Used war in See wara. Na-nl war in to indicate a complete tense 'decorated coconut used in aft er a verb . sacrifice of tusker ' = 'coco nut of the re-entrant tusker '? wa-wa 1 To run away . See wa la, But Mta wara 'a coconut shoot '. wa , wa I. wa-ru�Ii To look for fish with wawa2 Species of tree, used for torches. Wa-wa ro�, intransitive lateral struts of lo dge. Wulu (-Ii being a transit ive endin g), wa la 'its bark', B.32; na-hases 'to search for fish' , A.15,18. wulu wawa 'plaited string' ; See ru�-li n-tal wulu wawa 'string belt '. waruI To shout , call out ; used wa -wa lan A rite at which a boy of a parrot in HH . makes his first sacrifice. was Species of bird that feeds wa-wula Charcoal . cf. na-ul in the creeks (ni- was ) . Mta 'paint ' . wa sia 'a merula' . wa To go; also directive of wasu-n The cheek . motion away from speaker. BN va. See wan. waf Mean, stingy . Ta-ma ts ni waf 'stingy man, miser'. wanu Place. See also wanu. Wanu rorowaen 'play-ground'; wat Stone (ni-wat ). Ni-wa t wanu si Tahar 'Place of Tahar', pwere-pwere "sow' s stones", i.e. the islands of Oba, used in pig magic ; ne-tsip ni- Pentecost and Maewo . wat 'arrow with stone point '; ni-tale-hatsi nl-wat 'tethering war See waran. to the stones' ; ni-wat e weawe� 'red-hot stones '; ar wihe ni- wara-n The arm and wrist , biceps, wat 'they drag the stones to hand. Ar wire nl waran 'they the dancing ground'; ar uwu wave the hand, name of a song'; ni-wat 'they erect the stones' ; waran 'handle of bamboo knife , ar sui ni-wat 'they erect a front legs of animal '; wifen monolith' ; no-on ni-wat 'fore waran 'finger ', "wife of hand"; stone ' (lit . 'face of the stone'); bwe�-bwe� waran 'forearm' ; , ihwen ni-wat 'middle stones' ; lolon waran 'palm of hand' ; tauwtsen ni-wat 'social sides, pulok ini waran 'humerus'; ne halves of stone' . IN batu lepin waran 'finger joints'; 'stone'. See also wat. tewe waran 'he pays for their hands '; waran na-mban 'wings wati Second stage in plaiting of the sail '; ar tak-tak war penis-wrapper; to plait , fasten 'danc e movement s of young girls shoulder strap for club . holding hands '; e wots-wots war 154

'clap hands '; ar wo tsi waran we lan A dance. See we I (e) . Ar 'they clap hands'. J ulu we lan 'they dance in a different direct ion'; we lan n ware-ware To speak, address, dram 'name of dance performed pray to; the speaker at cere by those only from lodge or monies. Vao war-war; Sa 'a bachelors' houses that possess wa I a 'word '. eaves strengthened with pins' , "yam dance"; we l an ni-mbak wat Stone (ni-wa t) ; see also "banyan dance", a song and wat. Ni- wit si Tahar "stones dance cycle. Vao weluan; of Tahar", coral used in magic ; Nogugu we lu 'to dance '. wat -wowu 'hard stone used for breaking up crab holes '; ni we le A little, only , just, often wat wen-wen 'whistling stone'; used to form terms of en dear ni-wit tsiQ-tsiQ 'small up ment : inik we le 'you dear' , rights or dolmens'; ni-wat liQ often used for 'goodnight ', laQ 'stone found on shore after 'goodbye '; tuak we le Qa 'hello , storms' . my dear fr iend! '. Reduplicates as we le-wele 'smallest ', or as wei To be , to exist ; also to noun , 'a small stone '. It may become . Pi we sam 'it shall be also be applied to oneself: po yours '. Ambrym , ' NR ve. lai ma na-Qa, ina we le 'bring the thing for me , myself'; ina we2 Interjection of excit ed im we le, pe wiel 'I myself am patience, annoyance, surprise, going' . And so used demonstra anger , or to attract attention. tively: kab wan ni-ram we I wu A. 66; H.4l; K. 4l. Qa wieta 'are you going this year or next?'. Mta wa le weaweQ Strong ; paint ed; red 'only' ; NR we lewele 'a few, coloured. N'ai weaweQ 'Maki short , little '. image representing the complete human figure' ; Ma l e-weaweQ welela Species of small bird. 'Atchin name for the island of Tolamp '; ni-wat e weaweQ 'red we I (d) ra To spring back. cf. (e) 'to dance '. hot stones'; mutso 5 i Lemiti we I weaweQ 'Red-Eye s' star, Altair '; ni-rere weaweQ "the erithrina wena Pattern with geometrical is red" , name of a month; seko I repr esentat ion of human face. ma-t-we-weaweQ 'worn in the hair by a man who has had sex wenenl Flower , fruit , or seed . ual int ercourse with tsotsin' ; Wenen n'ii "flower of the na-mbu weaweQ 'bamboo that club", pointed projections ; cannot be broken by the wind , wenen na-mwe I "cycas flower ", used as a symbol of defiance" . lesser projections on club ; wenen tabakor "flower of the weawep A small fish species. tabakor"; wenen ma rwiri "cane flower", women 's brac elet s of wehi To drag , pull, launch a twi sted grass. canoe. C.7; M.9; U.13. Wehi t�-t�ni 'to lead away' . wenen2 Cycle of dances and songs. Wenen = 'flower , verse '. wei Interjection, alas! Rel ditto. we I (e) To sing, to danc e. Ar wene wa saQawun A thousand. weI -weI tarav 'they danc e in welcome'. Vao vel; MidN na wen ini A herb , inserted into wil; BN na-wel; SR we I 'a the armbadge and used in the dance'; Atchin welan 'a song Maki. Wood is said to be or dance'; CR welan. poisonous. Used in man-traps. welas Coral stems. cf. Fiji wentapawiri The sound of the laoe, Rotuma lace, Motu (Papua) wind. D.8. lade 'coral'. 1 55

wentomala-o In Vao , the song of garter bwa�-bwa� (na -wew) . the return from Oba. Tokoratsin wew 'necklet worn by initiation candidates'. wen-wen In ni-wat wen-wen Wala ni-wew . ?Mt a vau, vav. "whistling stones". wew2 Large round block of coral we�a�eras Ankle rattles, made (n i -wew). cf. Wala ne-wew from the fruit of a tree of the 'grave-stones '. same na me. we-we To count . A.35; B.32; wep Butterfly (ni-wep ). H.30; K.9. wer Small white variety of wie To walk to a place, in con palolo. trast to wiel 'walk about '. weral Today . Sa�awul weral 'ten wiel To walk about , to depart, days from today' . return fro m , go or come , set out . B.15; D.12,14 ; E.4; F.9, In tapa were 'coconut 10; H.32,39, etc. Reduplicates mats' . as wi-w iel, DD . were-n2 Kinship term for fourth wlhe To tie up . cf. wiwsi, wue, generat ion ascending , and be wuwu, and Vao wiwlhean 'attach y?nd . Wala ditto ; Vao veri-no ment of outrigger boom to float ' . werek Term of endearment . cf. wele. Tuak werek 'dear friend' ; wil Lightning (na-wil). MidN kam werek 'goodbye '; kiam werek, vilak; BN viI i; IN bllak. nam wiel 'as for us, we ar e going' . Wala we ri�. wi le To select , gather. Mta vile; IN pilih 'to choose '. were� In no-ul were� 'red lines painted on the face' . wl l i-n The shoulder. werere A kind of grass. Wala winl Woman . The word is never ditto. used alone , like wlJewin, but always supported, e.g. win a, wes In magic , madman (na -wes). win el, etc., used referring to a woman already introduc ed wesa Hard yam. by the other term. cf. ReI, Lalep wine-lak 'son's wife ' wet Stor e-house for yams; yam (m.s.) (oblique ); younger table; large yam table erected brother 's wife (m.s.). Vao in dancing ground (ni-wet ). vane; IN binay 'woman' . weta Behind, last . Also wlta. wln2 The lip . Win da� 'the crying lip' , and win but 'dumb wet-si To scrape away earth lip' , of gong. Vao vivi , and from the oven. H.26,36; to thus doublet with At chin pipi marry, a word used by women from IN (m)bi( m)biy 'lip'. (cf. hit si); to exhume a body. AA . wirl Midrib of coc onut leaf; men's nose ornament (na-wir{i» . wetsiwets Bark-boardbelt . La� na-wiri 'dance in which midr ibs of coconut fronds are wetu To fasten. cf. wati, wet- worn' . c f. ma rwI r i . wat. wir2 Name of the highe st rank wet-wat To plait. F.6. on Oba. wewl Pandanus tree; strips of wire-ni To wave about . white material used for making 156

wire-wire Small flying fox. Ni wiJin In wiJin waran 'finger '; man wire-wi re 'charm for cat wiJin balan 'toe ' See buJ. ching them'. wiJow in Meat , flesh. Mt a wiril To twi st , twine, plait. visoyoi. Mta viI, vir, viro, etc .; IN b iIit. witi In witi na-leQ 'main body of dancers' . wi ri2 To dash out the brain s against a stone . wi ts Banana (na-wits). Also leaves worn before plaited wiri3 To sting. K.126, etc. penis-wrapper . Wala wits; Vao vete; Mi dN wits; BN was; IN To wh istle. punt i. wis2 Edible crafish; name of a witsa To cook fish. month. Na-wis pa l "kill ing the crayfish" , n�me of a month; witse To throw, cast . tsele-wis "end of a crayfish" , name of a month. cf. na-wUs wi tsiQe-ni To send , pr esent . JJ. 'crab' . witsire-ni To spread out , wr ap wis3 Bow or arrow. A.ID; G.2; up in? H.31. H.2. Ne-wi s na-roQ 'ceremonial bow' ; ne-wi s ma-mbur "broken wi-tsov To make fall . cf. tsov, bow" , the pancreas . SR Us; and wi - = IN pa-, causative . Mt a us; IN busuh. wiuQ To flower . WiS4 How many? MidN vi; BN va; IN pira. wiwa To pour . c f. I uwe . wis e How? Why? (e-wise, etc.). wiw-si To tie together ; to tie Probably doublet of preceding. the wash-strakes on the canoe ; used of Tahar 's building the WiJl In e-wiJ-wiJ 'young tusker human body . cf. wihe. with tusk occas ionally visible; circle tusker minus '; ar wi J wo - Multiplicative numeral pre pwere matan "pig for shutting fix before a following 0 or w. the old man's eye". See wal. wij2 White. MidN vus; IN putih. wobat Ridge pole . WiJ3 In wiJ rap-rap 'aur icles wobun Specie s of parrot . cf. of the heart '. wopun . wifen (i) without san , F.8, and wol A piece of liana , torn from (ii) with san , F.ID; G.ll: the midrib of thatch palm and 'wife, wife's sister'. WiJen used as lashing to tie panels tipwis 'girl child, little of thatch to rafters (na-wol); girl' , Q.25; wifen-la 'sister 's also an armlet , worn as part wife, younger brother 's wife ' of insignia of having under (ReI wine-Ian); wiJen 'woman', taken the Dba Pilgrimage . is used in initiation for "candidate" ; wiJen san lamaJ wo lo To stick out (of branches). 'illicit lover '. cf. wiJewin, Wo lo tsigarini 'slits in middle of which wiJen is a contraction. of tuw' . cf. Mt a yai wolowolo 'cross'. wiJe-ni To show, teach, examine , foretell. p.28. wolohin The tail. cf. Vao woh in 'glans penis '. wiJewin Female, woman , wife. Uripiv ne-seven; Eromangan na (w}olol Sweet . siven, with metathesis . 157

Wo lfu Name of a di strict on Wala. wof! A canoe paddle (no-wof). E tori no-wof 'steersman' . BN womak Species of bird. vas; Lg bo :asi; Mta wose; IN ba(y)say . womere Species of bird, forbidden to people of Lowuwui on Rano . wof2 Coconut shoot (na-ha wof) . Mta vusa 'green coconut '. womu First , before. Root common about Malekula-Ambrym region. wof3 To land at . Sale ma-wof 'landing place'; e ma-woI ne won! In na-won, q.v. mbe ko 'where is it steer ing for ? ' won2 In ne-hl:m won mwi-lap 'large men's house '. cf. hon, wof4 To be sore, have sores, a kon, etc. sore. wop Sprout ing coc onut (na-wop ); woIe Straight , right , correct . used in connection with flag Mw i 1 iw wof 'he shot straight '. staff which is erected while Mt a weswes 'correctly, exactly' . initiates are on Oba Pilgrimage ; a young coc onut club ; plain woIi To carry (on the shoulder?). club splaying out to a square A.48,52; u.47,53. E woI buha cut . Vao womp. 'carry off the pig'. wopun Species of bird; a bunch wot (u)! To be in sight . Na-ak of grey, green and blue feathers ta-Ba e wot 'the canoe from worn in front of head. cf. Oba is in sight'; also e wot wob un. e-res 'it is making good course'. IN batu. wor! To be born. K.l; 0.21; P.9. Wifen wo ran 'all women born in wot2 Dolmen, Q.22; pile of a given village (in a restric stones; st one plat form . Vao, ted sense, of a given lodge ) Wala, Uripiv, ditto. ?IN batu of what ever generation'; the 'appear , place of re-birth'. term woran is never used of men. Malo vota 'ceremonial stone Vao ditto. IN bu�ak 'a blos he ap ' . som, offshoot '. wo tsan Gather together . M.5,6. wor2 Yet , chiefly in negative , sere ... wor 'not yet '; yet Wo-tsere-tsere The lodge of (future), K.124 . Le wor 'all Senhar village. the same', K.25; ko wor 'simply, just', K.7 2 ; L. 4 2; nu-a e tu wots-wots To clap the hands . tun wor 'there is still some Wots-wotsahan 'ceremonial part hot water'; also po mul wor of Maki Rokari' ; ne-mbar wots 'you come home too'; ko tur �a wots 'bamboo breadfruit beater '. el para� le wor? 'Have you been See also 10k. Mt a wosa. standing here a long time?' wow Species of seaweed (ro-wow) . wor3 Stone wall (na-wor). Long Wala no-wo 'species of leaf'. stone platform, high stone tower ; a constellation goes wowe To clear ground. Ra wowe under the same name. tano ne-hi:m 'we clear ground for a house'. wor i-n The forehead. cf. bonon and bUf)orin. wowo ! Pebbles ; part of the Milky Way between the Southern Cross worun Pupil of eye , worun matan . and Sirius. wosawos Wooden studs supporting wowo-n2 The mouth. Wowon'wat side wall of house . 'cliff' . cf. Ponape po 'top , 158

surface', which has been the wu lu3 Image made of tree-fern original meaning also in At chin. (ne-wulu ). Wala ditto. wor Dry coconut meat (na-wor), wu 1 uoo-ni To br ing. Ar wul uoon i from which the juice has been na-wot 'they bring the stone s squeezed. to the dancing ground'. wu 1 Bamboo (ne-wu). Mumun ne-wu wu :n Enough (e rna wu:n). cf. "reflection of outrigger boom" , wuwun 'full up '. IN panuh a dress pattern , a zig-zag 'full ' . design on belt ; ne-wu 'a clump of yams or a yam tied to bamboo wun To rail against . R. 3. for carrying ', dialectic vari at ion of na-mbu. Wala wu wunewun A kind of wood. cf. 'attached yams '. Wu is also wuno. used for the outrigger boom of canoe; par te re wu 'attachment wuno A wood used for making of booms to canoe ' ( preliminary bull-roarers. placing pr ior to attachment ). IN buluh. wure To reef sail. wu2 In na-mbu wu 'open pipes, wure- i To speak to . If followed set of musical pipes'. cf. wuw by quoted words, they must be 'to blow' . IN put 'blow' . introduc ed by wa . There is an exc eption in c.4. Reduplicates wu3 Medicine (seclular , as as wu-wurei, Q.2l. SR war; Hog against ni-man). Harbour wor . 1 WU 1 Black ash or charcoal (na wuretun To tell the truth. See wul ), adhering to burnt stick, pr eceding , and IN tuhu 'true , i.e. before use for smear ing real' . face during mourning ; when put on the face it is called ni wurewiri In oaoa wurewiri 'centre asas, q. v. posts' . wu l (i)2 To buy , pay . Redupli wur-wur Sucking noises with the cates as wu l -wu l i. MidN wul; mouth. See tsum. BN uli; Mta ' wo l ; IN bal i. wufoi To plac e a pudding in the wu 1 ( i ) 3 To paint . cf. u 1. oven, to poultice a sore . wul 4 Creeper used in thatching wufonen Formerly. (na-wul). wut To rise ( of the moon). See Wul i Name given to image of wo t (u) . stone pig, translated as "ruffian" or "larrikin" in wutu Mushroom type club (wutu Pidgin. n-das). wulu1 Tool for piercing thatch, wuw1 To blow the pipes. H.13. made of sharpened coconut SR wi 'blow a conch'; IN put shell. Wu lu wawa 'inner bark 'blow' . of wawa tree' , used for string for bull-roar er; na-hases wulu wuw2 The bladder . cf. wuwun . wawa 'plaited string'; wu lu = Ro:n wuw 'leaf used medicinally ne-wis na-roo. The uses apart in baho tureput. from the first one seem to be differ ent , and point to IN wuwo Low tide . ku lit 'skin' . wuwu To knot and loop (wuwu wu lu2 In wulu nu-amp 'mushroom t�ni). cf. wihe. club' . 159

wuwu-n1 To fill up . K.117. IN wun A smell (na-wun ). Mta panuh 'full '. puna(i); IN baw. wuwun2 Main upper wash-strakes wun-tsi To join (ends together?); of canoe . Wuwun sor-sor 'fore to weave the ni-mbwen, to add and aft upper wash-strakes'. new strips when plaiting. wu1 Or . Generally with Qa as wUQa-n Term of reference for wU-Qa. husband 's father, husband's mother , son's wife (m. and w. wu2 Turtle (ne-wu). IN panuh; s.). PN vuQona. Mta uwa . wur Ringworm (na-wur ). wuhe To unwrap (leaves from a pudding ) (wuhe t�ni). cf. wihe. wur-s i To squeeze (e.g. coconut cream on yam pud ding ). Mta wul The moon; a mo nt h (na-wul). woros. Wul miel 'month of the hurri canes'. Wala wu l; Vao vul (a) ; wus A crab (na-wus). cf. wi s. MidN viI; SR ul; Mta vula; IN bulan. wufe In ar wuf-wufe 'r, form of horseplay in wa-waleQ. wu l-wulu-n Skin, bark, rind. Vao wu l; IN ku lit. wuf i To stir (a pudding ).

PART III

TEXTS

163

INTRODUCTION

The accuracy of vernacular texts depends on two factors (a) the care with which they are transcribed, that is to say , whether the transcriber ha s a good ear and a sound phonetic script ; and (b) on how much the transcriber actually knows of the structure and syntax of the language he is recording . With regard to (a) , the language of Atchin is an easy one in that it has no sound s that are beyond the power of the average Englishman to reproduce at least accurately enough to be readily understood. The first tales recorded were those here referred to with double letters AA to 11 . These were taken down mainly for the purely practical pur pose of obtaining material the analysis of which would enable me to talk to the nat ives in their own language, and to understand what they said. They were transcribed very shortly after my arrival on the island, at a time when I had acquired only an elementary knowledge of the gen eral structure of the language by means of word list s and short phrases translated into pidgin English, and when my vocabulary was limited to a few words in everyday use . In this way I would transcribe a tale from one informant , often without underst anding more than a quarter of what I wrote, but was gratified to find that , on reading it over to another, he could not only understand my rendering , but would then supply translat ions. Thus , though I had ha d no training in non European languages, it was evident that my met hod of transcription was acc�rate enough at least for ordinary use . In spite of this, however , some passages in these early tales remained obscure , and for this reason they are here placed after the main body of texts, lettered A to U, which were obtained after I had already obtained a fair conversat ional knowledge of the language . With regard to (b) , the question is not so simple. It is a paradox, we ll known to those who study unwritten languages, that there comes a time when "a little knowledge is a dangerous thing". The same diffi culty arises even among those who learn to speak a foreign European language , when the interlocutor ceases to. correct one 's mistakes, part ly because one's speech, though incorrect , is just int elligible enough to be understood and it is too much trouble to correct it , and partly from polit eness, which possibly inc ludes a touch of flattery . For the first reason, the white man in the Pacific , when talking to a nat ive , speaks pidgin English, though most natives are quite capable of speaking proper English, and are often annoyed at not being allowed to do so . For both reasons , when a white man tries to learn a nat ive language, the nat ives after the learner ha s reached a certain stage of 164

being able to express himself, talk back at him his own mi stakes. There thus comes about a kind of deadlock that it is extremely difficult to overcome . Mo st Mission texts are an example of this stage of half knowledge , and , to avoid it , the French Cat holic Mission in the New Hebrides, who know what they are about , refuse to allow their priest s to settle down in any one island till they have already tried their hand at several relat ed languages , so that they shall already have passed this stage by the time they come to take up a permanent station . My own posit ion , when I left the island , was half way between the first stage and the second. Whi le I could understand , and make myself under stood , in ordinary conversation, I was still unable to cat ch much of what went on in the extraordinarily .rapid conver sation which the nat ives held among themselves . It wa s thus clear that a good deal of my speech was in an idiom half my own . Being aware of this, however , I did my best to guard against it in transcribing tales by taking mo st of these down , not from my own regular informant s, but from the lips of old men with whom I was not in daily contact . At the same time , a regular informant would generally be present to translate when necessary . Such translations were sometimes given during the transcription , but gener ally the narrator was too int erested in what he wa s telling to suffer suc h interrupt ions, and I would have to wait till the transcript ion was over to consult my informant over difficult passages in private . Every precaut ion wa s thus taken to count eract the effect s of my own half knowledge . Rather than pose however , as certain ethnologist s have done where none can contradict them , that it is possible to learn a nat ive language perfectly in three , or even six months , and also in fairness to the natives, I deem it but just to warn the reader that what he ha s before him cannot under any possible circumstance represent the full flavour of At chin language as it is spoken at it s best , and that , in spite of every care, it is probable that in many cases undue simplifi cation in grammar ha s taken place . All the tales here given were transcribed in the Atchin double village of Ruruar . In the single-letter series A to U, only three tales, C, D and E were transcribed direct from regular informant s, the first from a young man named Buremin, and the two ot hers from Melteg tsung-wurei. The rest were all taken down from old men not in my immediate circle of close friends , whose names are given at the head of eac h tale. Of these, Melteg-waru and Melteg-wuomu were not very outstand ing men who , nevertheless, were of high rank in the graded society, as witnessed by the title Melt eg which they bear . Ta-maewo , on the contrary , was a very distinguished old man , in fact the oldest 165

on that side of the island, who had risen so high in the society as to dispense with titles and had adopted the name "Man of Maewo", Maewo being the revered island where the deity Ta-har is said to have lived. The reason why he was not among my close friends was that he had quarrelled with Melt eg-to , the chief man in that half of the village where I lived , and it was not till towards the end of my stay on the island that I was able to meet him wit hout being regarded as a potent ial foe . Apart from the fact that the double-lettered tales AA to LL are placed at the end , on acc ount of the fact that they were transcribed while I wa s as yet unfamiliar with the language, the tales are here given in the order in which they were transcribed, irrespective of subj ect matt er .

J. LAYARD

General Note: In the Text s, Tales I, J, and II are missing from the series . Subs equent tales have not been renumbered, so as to avoid confusion in cross-referencing . 166

TALE A: THE MAN OF TIWI L AND THE GIRL OF NORISHE RE

(From Me1teg-wuomu, through the medium of Me1teg-1ek, May 1st , 1915.)

1. Na-sup sa , natun e-ru. Tas in e kara. Timan e ro pw i tsa ni. Na-wun e-tsats. E wireni. E wiren i re nu-a. 2. N u -a e ko 1 e. E tor i tawtsen na-ni sa. E uroi na-ni nen tawtsen . 3. Nu-a mu ko le. Mi rna , e tor- toni wawa sa ko e wa e-hut. 4. Ko e lek. Mwi lek -lek. Ko e hi 1 i ne- hi :m sa. Mi wa -wan ko e lasi na-to san sa, to wiJewin. 5. Mi wa!)ani. Mi wa -wan, na-to nen mw i ta o Mwi lap watsin. 6. Mi wa-wan, e sesuwei kele pwere-pwere san sa . Mi wa!)ani. 7. Mwi lap ko m'pep. M'pepe buha e-lim. Mi wa!)ani-ri. Mwi tsal i tsile. 8. Pwere-pwere m'pep ke le. E pepe buha e-sa!)awul. E lawi . Ewe tamauw sa!)awu1 . E lai tsile lason. 9. M'pep kele. E pepe buha e-lim. E tsal i tsile kele. E we buha san e-sa!)awul, tamauw san e-sa!)awu1 . 10. E koke ne-wis san , e tsubu l wa la Tiwi 1. 11. E liw- liw eh i. E liw woJ ni n'ehi sa . 12. Wi Jewin sa e tsubul wa la NoriJere. Ko e ni s i. E lawi pitewi n'ehi !) a. "I-se pi we r'ilm n'ehi ok" . 13. Win a e tori. E wa ts i timan. Timan e wa , "Ko lai !) a-mbe n'ehi ok?" "No lai !) a-la." 14. Timan e wa . "Ia?" E wa "10.". Mewi nen kele, mwar'a e koke ne-wis san. 15. E wa la kele. E tsubul kele Tiwi 1. WiJewin e tsubu l Nor iJere. E wa-waro!). 16. Mwar ' a e liwe n'ehi kele sa. E rna e lasi win a Nor iJere. 17 . E wa "Hai! Pi we r'ilm n'ehi ok." E lawi . E wa hi: m tsi timan. 18 . "Ko lai !)a-mbe n'ehi ok?" E wa , "No lai !)a-la NoriJere." "Ia? Po wa-waro!) kele sweli!)?" 19. E wa , "Ta-ru". "E-res ." Mwar' a ernul wo r rna . Mw i lek na-mbo!) e-ru . 20. Ko e tsubul wa la kele Tiwil. E 1 iw-l iw ehi kele. E rna Norifere. Win a mu tsubu l ke le Nor i Jere, inir tasin watsin. 21 . Miran timan mor Jilei, m�r Jok !) a -hut, mor mita ni. 22. Mwar' a m" para mi rna . Mw i liw-l iwe n'ehi !) a sa kele. Mi rna , e wa , "Hai! Kam i tasin ko." 23. Win a e wa , "10." "Pi we rami n'ehi ok." E lai pitewi n'ehi !)a . Tasin e lek tser. 24 . Ko ini, e tigei win a. Or wa lameJ . Win a mu luha rna watsin. Mwar' a ernul . 25. Win a iniri tasin or mu 1. ,Mor rna . Tas in e wa , "Te, nom lai n'ehi sa Ie." 26. E wa , "I-si e lai?" "Tsuneb sa e 1 iwe NoriJere. Ko e lawi pitew kiam." 27 . E wa , "Ia", E wa "10, ko e tigei win ok or wa lamaJ ." E wa , "Ia?" E wa "10." E wa "E-res". E wa , "Ko pi rna kele swel;!)?" E wa , "Ta-ru" . 28 . E wa , "10, ko e-res . Ko pi we tewen ko pin we ." 29. "Ko na-mbo!) kele ta-ru, pwi ar rna Nor ifere pwi lasi ke le kiam". Ko ta-ru nen ko ini noreman e tsubu l Tiwi1. 30. Ko winl iniri tas in or tsubul NoriJere. 31. Mwar' a mwi liw- liw ehi mi rna . Mwi liwe ke le n'ahi sa. Miran timan mor lek !)a -hut pu-ro!). 32. Mwi lawi n'ehi !) a pitew ra-ru !)a . Timan miran mor TALE A 161

rna , mor rets pitewi , 33. "Ha i ! Ko tewen ko pin inik we." E wa , "E- res" . 34 . Lo lom e wurei win el ko ro po tige i?" E wa , "10 . Lolak e wu r ei ." 35. E wa "Ta-I im weral ka b rna tuloni ," E wa "10." Mar we-we na-mboQ a. Mi wa -wan, mots-motsouJ. 36. E wa, "Ra wan wera I. Ra tuloni win eJ ." 37 . Iniri tsunob e-saQawu l ko wiJewin e-saQawu l mar wan ma r wa re ne-hi:m san. Mwar' a e ma ta. 38. Mw i lasiri Iniri e-Iap melker. E wa -wa. E sa we re mwerek sa . E wa-wan e sakel re metuwetsin. 39. Mar se nisi te Qa-hi:m san. Ar wurei win a, ar wa , "Po betselehi e be" . 40. M'betselehi mu i mwar ' a. E - J wa , "N i 5 e?" . E wa "Ko ko e- wise mo Jok?" 41. E wa , "No ma ta e-Iap." E wa , "Po so mata teo Tlmak kisen Ie 'niri pu-roQ." 42. E wa , "Po rna", Mwar' a e tsubul. "Po mak, ro wan". Win a e womu . 43. Mwar ' a e wata. Mor wiel wan Qa-hi :m. E wa , "Na-amp ko . Kab Jure. Kab tabu." 44. Or tabu tsile watsin. E I a i buha . E lawi n i -wara no-on. E I a i tamauw wa ra ewe IiQi. 45. E lai na-ru ko tamauw ru ko pekes ko pekes ko tamauw pekes, I iwJeren , tamauw IiwJeren , buh� pal-pale, 46. tamauw pa l-pale, buh� liv -tov , tamauw liv-tov. E J u. 41. E wa , "Tewen , ko lai melker ni-Ie buh� eJ ." 48. Mwi ar rna warasi ne-hi:m, po woJ te not in na-na pu-roQ pwi sa watsin." watsin." BOQ in e-saQawuJ. 49. Mwar' a e wa , "Po wa tsi tim�m." E wa "E! Po e rna , ikir pw i e-ru." E wa , "Ina no mata." 50. "Ko matani ni-se? Timak kisen ko , niri pu-roQ. Po rna, ro wan ." 51. "No ro pwi- tsa wa . In ik, po e wan !" "Po e rna ro wan ." "10 , po I i he buh' ok , ro wan ." 52. E wa , "E, buh'ok pwi-tsa teo E nip -lap na-won. Ra woJ te not in na-na pu-roQ mwi sa." 53. "Ts iga. Po lih e buh'ok, ro wan." Win a eli he bu ha . Or wa tsi timan. 54 . E wa , "Tewen, ko ma pin." E wa, "10" . Mwi kila lasi win a mwi lih e na-ru Ie pa. 55. Na-ru mwi kale. E wa , "Ko no ro-roQ po woJ i notin na-na pu-roQ pwi sa. Mo la-Iai buh� lap ok." 56. E wa , "Ra wiJeni . E-res ." 51 . Ko timan e hil-hil. Or wan, or tuloni luha ni. Mor lek watsin re ne-hi:m sar. 58. Mor lek. Ko e pepe natun noreman sa , Ko mu hu kele ko m'pep kele, natun noreman kele sa. 59. Mor la-lap wa tsin. Mwar' a timan mwi kete maki re i-san . Mu to mori pwe pal . 60. E wa , "Ta-I im weral". Mwi tei na-mboQ nen. Mwar' a mu rOQe. 61. Mu wu'rei mwara Pinalum: "Kab ma kab lai na-rel na : k. Ra wan , pe wa la." 62. E wa , "Ikir wa wuretun ." Mar wan ko watsin mu wa la e re maki si timan. 63. Mar lai na-rel e rep-rep. Mi wan. Timan mu wa , "Mwar' e-be ko?" "Ia. 64 . Mwar' e-be ko J opon. Ram se las woJ eni te." Na-rel res mi wan wa tsin. 65. Mu wa la mi wan mw i tei ne-Jiil tsi timan . Mu tori tawtsen na-ni Qa ml uroi. 66. E wa , "We! Natuk mw l lai pitewia buha Ie. 61 . Tawtsen na-ni Qa me lawi pitewi , me las woJeni." E lal merer-pekes sa pitew timan. 68. E lai ni-wa ra pltew miran. Maki timan mw i rewtsi tsile. 69. Mu wa , "0, ina 168 TALE A pe to tsire Juri natuk." Mwi tsire natun. Miran mar rna Tiwil. 70. Mar rna , mar lasi buh� san mwi lap, na-to san mwi lap, tamauwsan mw i lap, pwere-pwere san mwi lap. 71 . Timan e wa , "E-res , natuk, ikir ra lek tser lJa-tan watsin." 72. Ma le-Iek. Timan mw i tara . Mi we na-sup wats in. Mi mats. Ko ar se tewn i teo 73. E wa , "Ko ra kete pi-pe ni-se ko?" E wa , "Ko ra lai pi wa la re n'das." Mumun watsin e we lumweik. 74 . Pi wan a pw i sa pwi lasi ne-rahin re lamaJ pu luha. Pwi lasi lumweik nen , ko pwi tsibar i. We mw i lasi ne-rahin, ko pu luha . 75. Pu se tala tilehi te ne-rahin. Pwi ta la tilehi ko pi mats. 76. We pwi lasi lumweik nen , pwi tsibari, ko e-res . Pwi se tsibari te, e mats.

SUMMARY

A man had two sons , one of whom he threw into a river because he had sores. This man held the ha lf of a coconut which his father had given him . The water carried him away , till finally he came ashore , fo und a fowl and a pig and built a house , rearing 10 boars and 10 gelded-pigs. Shot fish at Tiwil . A girl comes to Norishere. He gives her a fish and woos her , and is finally forc ed to marry her. Her parent s bring her to marriage rite but he is afraid and hides . Finally return s and pays large bride-price. Is again afraid to take her for ceremonial visit to her father 's hou se on 10th day , but goes, taking large pig instead of small one. She bear s him two sons . Then he hears that his father is making Maki in his own village . Persuades Pinalum fo lk to go and dance na-rel. He himself 'circles' for pr esentat ion-tuskers, carrying the half-coconut which his fat her ha d given him when he threw him into the wat er . Father recognises him and follows him , and find s that he is rich in pigs . Father and mot hers all go to live with him . Father grows old and dies. He is not buried, but turn s into a sea-snake , the track of which must not be crossed, though the sea-snake must be touched if seen. (Cont inued in Tale B. )

TR ANSLATION

There was a man who had two sons. But the younger had sores. His fa ther did not Like him (because) he sme Lt, so he threw him into a river, and the river swept him away . And he was ho Lding in his hand the haLf of a coconut (which his fa ther had given to him), of which he had eaten the other ha Lf. And the water swept him away, untiL at Last TALE A 169

he caught ho ld of a wawa tree and went ashore. And he stayed there, and went on staying, and bui lt himself a house. And after a time he saw a fowl (which he took) for himse lf, a hen. He fe d and fed her ti ll she laid an egg, whic h hatched. Then he found for himself a sow, which he fed till she became big and bore (a litter of) five pigs, which he fe d up and tied (to stakes). The sow bore again. (This time) she bore (a litter of) ten pigs, which he castrated, so that he now had ten ge lded pigs, from all of which he removed the testicles. She bore again, (this time again a litter of) fi ve pigs, which he also tied to stakes, so that he now had ten bores and ten ge lded pigs. And he took his bow and arrows and went down to the shore at Tiwil to shoot fi sh. He shot a fish. And (it happened that) a woman came down to the shore at Norishere. And he saw her, and gave her tha t fish, (saying) "Here is a fi sh for you to eat. " The girl took it, and went home to her fa ther. Her father said "Where did you ge t that fi sh?" (She said) "I got it on the shore ". Her fa ther said "Indeed?" and she said "Yes". Next day the man again took his bow and arrows and went down to the shore at Tiwi l. The woman (also) went down at Norishere, looking for shel l-fish. Tha t man again shot a fi sh. He came and saw that girl at Norishere, and said "Hi ! here is a fi sh for you to eat. " She took it ,and went home to her fa ther, (who said) "Where di d you get that fi sh?" She said "I got it at Norishere ". "Ok " (said he ) "When are you going to look for shell-fi sh again ?" She said "The day after tomorrow". He said "Good". Tha t man went home and stayed ti ll the second day. Then he came down to the shore again at Tiwil, and again shot fish. She came to Norishere; that girl came down again to Norishere (this time) with her younger sister. And the mother and fa ther (of the two girls) concealed themselves and hid in the bush, and wa tched. The man appeared and came and again shot a fish. Then he came (up to the girl) and said "Hi ! You have brought your sister this time ". The girl said "Yes". He said "Here is fi sh for both of you ", and he gave he r that fi sh. The younger sister stayed (on the shore), and he took that girl and together they went into the bush (and made love). Then she came back to her younger sister and the man went home . Then the two sisters went home, and when they arrived the younger said "Fa ther, we two have got this fi sh". He said "Who gave it to you?" She said "A man was shooting fi sh at Norishere, and gave it to us ". He said "R eally?", and she said "Yes, and he took that girl (her elde r sister) and they went together into the bush". He said "Really?", and she said "Yes". He said "Good ". 170 TALE A

Then he sa id "When is tha t man coming again ?" She said "In two days (the day after tomorrow) ". He said "Good. It wi ll be all right if in the end he marries her". (The younger sister said) "The day after tomorrow he will come back to Norishere and see us again ". And on the second day that same man came down to Tiwil, an d the girl and her sister went down to Norishere. That man came shooting fi sh, and again shot one. The (girls ') mother and fa ther hid in the bush again. And the man gave the fish to those two (girls). Then the fa ther and the mother came and said to him "Hi ! Now you must marry her ". The man said "Very we ll". They said "Do you wish to take this woman as yo]).r wife ?" and he said "Yes, I wish to". Then (the fa ther) said "In five days from today (you may ) come (to my house ) and take her". The man said "I wi Z Z". Time passed unti Z the day arrived. Then (the fa ther) said "We wi ZZ go today (to the man 's pZace ) and give away this girZ". Ten men and ten women accompanied her and came to his (the suitor 's) house. Then was that man afraid. He saw that they were very many, and he ran away, and cZimbed into a mwerek tree, cZimbing higher and higher tiZZ he sat on the very top . They couZd not find him in his house, and spoke to that girZ, saying "You Zook for him (and see if you can find) where (he has gone )". She searched for him and caZZed to that man, saying "Where (are you) ?", and "Why have you hidden?" He answered "I am so afraid". But she rep Zied "Do not be afraid, these are my fa thers " (in the kinship sense), and again she said "You come ". So that man cZimbed down, saying "You Zead the way, Zet us go ". The girZ went first and he fo ZZowed. And they came to his house, and he said "Make fire in the oven, and cook". When they had finished cooking he took his pigs (for the bride -price ). He took a re-entrant-tusker boar as chief (item of payment ), and a ge Zded re-entrant -tusker as companion for eat ing . He took a curved- tusker boar and a ge Zded curved tusker, and a cre sc ent-tusker boar and a ge Zded crescent-tusker, a I iw-sheren and a ge Zded liw-sheren, a buho pal-pale and a castrated pal-pale, a buho I iv-tov and a castrated I iv-tov . (The se together ) completed (the bride-price ). (The girZ ' s fa ther) said "Son-in-Zaw, you have brought too many of these pigs. (When the time) comes round (for you to) pay your ceremoniaZ visit to my house [ i.e. the tenth day after marriage , when it is the custom for the son-in-law to take his wife to her fat her 's house and to pre sent him wit h a tusker of grade liw-sheren or thereabout s ] , bring (carry ) wi th you only a singZe suckling pig. " On the tenth day, that man said, (to his wife) "You go to your father (alone)". She said "Hi ! You come £00, we wi ZZ bo th go . " He said "I TALE A 171

am afraid". (She asked) "Wha t are you afraid of? There wi n be no one bu t my fa ther (and his brothers ). Come on, te t's go ". (But he said) "I don 't wan t to. You go (atone) ". (She said) "Come on, we wi tt go together � (so at tast he said) "Very we tt, you drag that high-grade tusker, (and) we wi t t go (with tha t) ". She said "Eh! No t that pig, it is much too big, we need onty take a sing te sma n suckting-pig ". "No ", (he said), "You drag tha t high-grade tusker, (and) we wi n go (wi th that) ". The girt dragged the tuske r boar (and) they came to her father 's, and the father said "Son-in-taw, so you have come at tast". He answered "Yes". (And his father-in-taw who it is ct ear by now, is his own fa ther too, who had thrown him away because of his sore s

= incest) too ked round and saw the girZ dragging the high-grade tusker (as) it came (round the corner of the house enctosure), and said "But I wanted you to bring onZy a singZe suck Zing-pig, and (now) you have brought this Zarge pig. " (Then) he said "Le t us examine it. It is a good one". Then the fa ther dug up yams (and gave them to them), and they two took them back home, and Zived in their own house. They stayed there, and (after a time) she bore a chitd, a boy . And she conceived again, and again bore a boy. The two boys grew up . (And) that man 's fa ther performed (the rite of) Maki at hi s vittage, and when the time approached for the grea t sacrifice, he said "(It shatt be performe d) five day s fr om today ". (Thus) he appointed the day. (And) that man [i.e. hi s son, with who se throwing into the water this story opened] heard of it. He said to the men of Pina tum: "Come (to the Maki) and dance your na-re l (dance). Let us go (together), (and) I wi tt 'circZe ' (for a presentation-tusker)." (And again) he said "Let us, indeed". They went, an d then he danced at his fa ther 's Ma ki. (First) they danced the preparatory movement of the na-rel . (In the cours.e of the da nce ) he Ze ft . His fa ther asked "Where do these men come from ?" (but his companions answered) "We do not know. These men come from somewhere, (but) we do not know from where ". Then the main na-rel dance ap proached, (and) he (the son) 'circZed ', and gave his torch to his fa ther. And he was ho Zding in his hand the hatf of the coconut which he had been eating (when his fa ther threw him into the wa ter). (Then) he (the fa ther) said "Oh! (It is) my son (who ) has brought me this pig. I recognise the haZf-coconut which I gave to him. " (Then) he (the son ) presented a circZe-tusker to his father, and a re entrant-tusker to his mother . When atZ the tus kers had been sacrificed, (the fa ther) said "Oh, I wi tt wait and fo Ztow after my son '. He fo ZZowed his son. (And att the man 's) mothers came to TiwiZ. They aZZ came, and saw that he had 172 TALE A

many boars, many fowts, many ge tded pigs, an d many sows . His fa ther said "It woutd be good that we shou td an st ay here now ". (And) they att stayed there. And his fa ther grew otd, became an otd man, and ' died. But they did not bury him. (His son) said "What shan we do ?", (and ) he said "Let us take him to the shore (and put him) in the sea". Then the (otd man 's spirit) became a sea-snake . (Therefore ) if a man happens to see the track (of such a sea-snake) in the bush, he shoutd draw back, (but) shoutd he see that sea-snake, he shoutd touch it. If he happens to see the track, he shoutd draw back . He shoutd no t step over the track. If he step over it, then he wi H die. If he shou td see that sea-snake, he shoutd touc h it, (and) it wi tt be we tt (with him) . Shoutd he not touch it, he witt die. 173

TALE B: THE MAN OF TIWIL GOES TO PENTECOST

(Continuation of Tale A. )

1. Natun or wa la, or wa-waro�, natun noreman e-ru. Or lasi ne-l i 1 re pwara� re ni-wat sa. 2. Ko or rei , or re-rei, e tsiga, ne-lil e kele e terter. 3. "Weral no-ut pu po� , ko ro wa ru�fi . Pwi ar rna tsal ii, ko ro ar lawi ko pu-ro�." 4. "10". No-ut m'bo�, or wof i rofer, or wiel la, or ru�fi. 5. Inir sa e tur tser, sa e row hasa e-re ni-wa t nen. Mu ru�fi, mwi lawi ne-l il a. 6. Mwi re-ro�e pu luha. Mw i ka 1 i pe pu luha, mwi kila wa-tan. N'das ne-mbu . 7. Mwi rieni. Mwi ral i ni-wat, mu wala roni. Tas in mwi ta� tser. 8. Mu wa la mi wa hi:m mo wurei timan miran. E wa , "Mwar ' a, ni-wa t e wa la roni." 9. Miran timan ar wala ma r tsubu l Tiwil, mar lasl na-amp mu ror-ror . 10. Mi wa ok �a-in e-re masav, mu wa la mi wa-wan e-Ra . Mu hof. Mu wa la furi nu-a sa e-Ra. 11. Mu wa la mi wan mwi hafi furi nu-a. Wawa sa mu wo l0 we re nu-a . 12 . Mwar ' a mw i ka-ka l wa re wawa �a. Mi wa tan mu ron wa-ta n. Mwi sa re wawa �a. 13. Mi wan , m'ok lek re wowo-n'wat sa. Ko pwere- Wi f ewi n sa e betse 1 eh i pwere-pwere san. Pwere- pwere 5 i t i -e-Ra. 14. pwere m'pep. Wifewin ti-e-Ra mw i lai no-ran pwere-pwer' a. 15 . Mi wan mi wa�ani , ko mi wiel . Ko mwar' a e wan e hore toni pwere-pwere . 16. Ko e 1 a i no- ran ko e u r 0 i . Mew i nen ko win a e kete ran pwere-pwe re san. E rna . 17 . E wa�ani, ko e luha . Mwar' a e wa la e wan e hore toni pwere-pwere, 18 . ko e lai no-din ko e uroi. Wi n a e wa , "Pwere-pwere le me wal)ani , 19 . I)a e-wise re-l)an7 Mwi tsiga re-�an." E wa , "10, pe to silei." 20. Mewi nen mwi lawi ran pwere-pwere san mi rna . lOPe to sil ei." Mwi tsiri-wa-ni pitew pwere-pwer ' a. Mwi lildrore luha . 21 . Mu fok ko wat sin, mi mitani pwere-pwer ' a. 22. Mwar' a mu row t sa 1 i 1 • Mu wa la, mi wan mu hore toni pwere-pwer ' a. Win a mu row wa tsa 1 i 1 • E wa, 23. "10, inik Ie pu-ro� mo m'ok ururoi ran pwere-pwere sak. 10. Ko pe wetsi hi:m, ko po lek �a-el ko pin. Ko pe m'ok tabu na:m." 24 . Win a mi wa hi :m, mu kete na-lok, 25. Ko mwi sa-sale mi rna , ko mwi lai pitew mwar' a. 26. Mwi hani ko e wireni ro-mes ile� pitew pwere-pwer ' a. Ko mwar ' a e )'la, "Ko tala ne �a-hi :m7'" 27 . Win a e wa , "10. Tala e lap." "Ko no-un ne �a- hi :m7" E wa , "10, no-un e lap." 28. E wa, "po wan, po lai e rna". E 1 a i e rna . E tei na-ak sa e lap, na-ak wa la. 29. Mwi tei tsile, e wiwsi tsile. E wa , "Ko na- mban ne �a-hi:m wU-l)a e-tsiga7" 30. Na-mban ne I)a-hi :m". "Po wan, po lai e rna ." Mi wan, mwi lawi ko mwi si lei. 31 . Mw i 5 i 1 e its i 1 e, ko e wa , "Maki sa e-Ra we notout, ta-l im Ie- weral." 32 . lila ! Ro we-we furi na-mbo� ok ko pin." Or wan, or te i wu li.iwawa . 33. Or tsirini tal in buha , talin na-mban. Ot wiri tslle. Na-mbo� a ta-lim e-Ra ar wa re we 174 TALE B

notout. 34 . Ar nisi maki. Ot tsali rowe buha . Or lihe merer-pekes, tamauw wara, ni-wara, or lihe tsile. 35 . E woJi buha e wa la, ar l ril)e-nire na-ak. 36 . E woJ i huba sa e wiri re ni-wa t. Na-ak e sek 2 re ni-wa t. Or wo Ji wa mare na-mban. 37 . Na-ak e wa la e rna Tiwil. E hoJ e wa e-hut Tiwi l. 38. Wi Jewin e lek matmatni buha I)a-la. Ni-wa t e wala e to luha re melil)en. Na-ak ar huw wa e-hut. 39. Wi Jewin e lek I)a-la watsin. Tewen san e wala e wa tsi timan. 40. Timan e wa , "Ai! Ko inik, mo rna . Inik tsunob Ie wU -l)a ta-mats a1" E wa , "I na tsunob. 41. Ko kab rna ra wa la ra lihe buha." Timan miran ar wa la, mar lasi buha . 42. WiJewin san mw i lek I)a-la. Ar tigei watsin. E rna I)a-hi:m watsin. E-Ju .

SUMMARY

The two sons of the man of Tiwil and girl of Norishere went to look for shell-fish at night with torches. The elder lept on a rock which carried him to Raga , where he supported himself by eat ing the food fed by a Raga girl to her sow. She discovers him and cooks for him . He asks her whether she has adzes and sinnet and strips for making a sail, and makes a long-distance canoe . They wait till the Raga men are away attending a Maki in the int er ior, then drag the canoe down . The rock rises up beneath it , so that the canoe rests on the rock. They place tuskers in the canoe and sacrifice one by dashing its head against the rock. The rock with the canoe on it sailed back to Tiwil, where the rock returns to it s own place on the reef, and the man and girl marry .

TRANSLATION

The two sons (of the man whose fa ther had thrown him into the river and who had gone to live at Tiwi l and married the girl of Norishere) went to the shore to look for shell-fish, and saw a shell-fi sh of the kind called ne-l il in a hole in a rock. And they pulled and pulled at it (to get it out), but without succeS8, for it wa s stuck in the hole.

lThe rock that had brought him from Tiwil. 2The rock which had sunk, rose up beneath it. TALE B 175

So one of them said "We wi ll come back this evening when it is dark, with lights. It wi ll come out then and we shall be able to take it easily". The other said "A ll right ", and they re turned to the shore after dark bearing torches in order to attrac t the she l l-fi sh with their Zight . , One of the two (the younger ) stayed on the reef, while the other (e lder) jumped across on to a (separated) rock and by means of his light attracted the shell-fish out of its ho le (in the reef) and caught it. Then he decided to come back, bu t when he turned and looked down (in the darkness) he saw nothing but deep water all round him. Ho lding high his torch he ran round (on) the stone and it sailed (floated) away with him. His younger brother stayed on the reef, weeping (at the loss of his elder brother). Then he ran home to his fa ther and mot her, saying "That man, the rock ha s sai led away wi th him ". His mother and fathers ran down to the shore at Tiwi l, and saw the light (of his torc h) twinkling (as the rock bore him away) . It went right into the open sea, and sailed before the wind till it reached the island of Raga, where it made landfall. It saied straight into (the mouth of) a river on Raga, and went right up the river. (Now it so happened that) a wawa tree spread its roots into the river, and the man caught ho ld of the (root of the ) wawa tree, and the rock sank. Then he cZimbed out on the wawa tree, and stayed up there, sitting on a stone on a cliff. And there was a sow belonging to a native of Raga (which had strayed) , and a woman came looking for it, for it had had a litter, and she was bringing food for it. And having fe d the sow she went away . And the man chased the sow away and took its fo od and ate it. Next day the girl again prepared food for the sow and came and fed her, and again went away , and again the man came running and chased the sow away and took her food and ate it. (After some time) the girl said to herself "1 keep on feeding that sow, but what is the matter with her? Her belly is empty ". Again she said to herse lf "Very we ll, I will stay and watch". Next day she came again with food for that sow, saying "1 wi ll stay and watch". And when she had emptied her basket for the sow she turned aside and hid, so as to watch the sow. (And, as before) the man jumped out (from where he lay concealed) and ran and came and chased the sow away . (This time ) she (also) jumped out, saying "indeed, so it is you who keep on eating my sow 's food. Never mind. I will scrape out my oven for you. You just stay here, and I will cook for you. " And the girl went home, and made a pudding, and took it out of the oven, and came and gave it to the man. And he ate it and threw the leaves that it was wrapped in to the sow. 176 TALE B

And the man said to her "Have you adzes at home?" She said "Yes. many of them ". And he said "Have you �o�onut sinnet (ropes) at home ?" and she said "Yes. plenty ". He said "Go and bring them". (With them) he fashioned a large �anoe. a long-di stan�e �anoe. And when he had finished �utting out (the hull. planks. rails and figure-heads) and la�ing them together. he said "A nd have you (p laited strips for ) a sail at home. or not?" She answered "There is a sail at home � and he said. "Go and fet�h it". And she brought (the strips). and he sewed them together (to make the sail). When he had finished sewing them (and the sai l was ready) she told him "There is a Maki (about to be performed) by the natives of the interior of Raga five days hen�e " (imp lying that when all the �oasta l natives had gone into the interior to view the Ma ki. she and the man wou ld then be able to laun�h their �anoe and make off without being seen). He said "Good! then all we have to do is to �ount the days (and Wait) ". So they went and �u t aerial roots of the wawa tree from whi� h they removed the inner bark with whi�h to make tethers for their pigs and rope for the sai l. These they had ready twine d by the fifth day. on whi�h the Raga (�oa8tal) natives went into the interior to witness the Maki. Then those two tied tethers to all their pigs. and dragged them (to the shore). (in� luding ) a �ir� le- tusker boar. and a re-entrant tusker boar. together with a ge lded re-entrant-tusker. He pla�ed them on hi s shoulder and �arried them to the shore. where the two of them lifted the pigs into the �anoe . Then he pla�ed (yet another) pig upon his shoulder and sa�rifi�ed it by dashing its brains out on the ro�k (whi�h had brought them from TiwH) . And the �anoe rested on the ro�k (whi�h had sunk when it arrived. but now rose up and floated beneath the �anoe). Then they hoisted the sai l. and the �anoe (together with the ro�k on whi�h it rested) sailed before the wind till it �ame to Tiwi l. The man landed and went up to (the village of) Tiwil. but the woman stayed on the shore to guard the pigs. The ro�k sailed ba�k (of itself) ti ll it �ame to rest in its origina l position (on the reef) but they carried the �anoe to shelter on dry land. The woman stayed on the shore. (while) her hu sband ran and �ame ·to his fa ther. And his father said

"Hi! So it is you �ome ba�k! Are you a mol' 01' ghost ?" The son said "[ am a man. Come. all of you. let us go to the shore and drag up the pigs". His fa thers and his mo thers all ran and saw the pigs. (And there was) his wife (who ) had stayed on the shore. At last now they were married. at last he had �ome home. That is the end. 177

TALE C: THE MAN OF MESHUWARE, WHOSE ELEPHANTIASIS WAS CURED BY GHOSTS

(From Buremin .)

1. Tsunob sa, mwadi MeJuware. Mo ma tsil). Mi wan-wan no-ut pw i raY-raY. Mi man mwi lap. 2. Ko mwara nen mi we na-mbur . Ko mu to mori no-ut pu pOI). Ko mu JuJu lo. 3. Mwi re pi ma I)ela, ko mu tsubul e ma o Ko mwi las ma re nu-a ko ta-mats mar loloJ. 4. Ko mar wurei, "Tuar wele, ra ra-rawi toni ni-mben san. Ko pi ma, ra 1010J." Ta-ma ts ma r wa la mar wan, 5. mar re rawi toni ni-mben san. Ko mi wan, mar 1010J. 6. Ko mar 1010J ko mu rOl)e mwi res. Ko m'un, ko m'un ko, mwi tawiJ. Mu Ju , ko m'un ke le. 7. Ko m'un kele. M'un ke le, ko mwi taibari I)a- I a. Ko mi weh i na-ak we la. 8. Ko mu J u. Ko mi ma, ko wiJewin san mwi lasi ko e wurei , e wa , "Ko inik Ie wU-l)a e tsiga1" 9. Mu wurei e wa , "Ina. Mar ra-rawi toni n{l-n{l I)a re ba lak." E wa "io. E-res." 10. Ko ta-mats mar 1010J watsin. Ko mar lasi n{l-n€l I)a si mwar' a. 11 . Ko mwi sa ko e wurei e re i-san. E wa , "Ina i -sak n i -mben s i tuar. 12. Ini e ro pwi -tsa ni, mu wa la". E reni. Ko mw i sa ko e reni i-san. 13 . · Ko mwar' nen se re e wa e-h·ut watsin. "No ro pwi-tsa pe wa Woremet watsin." 14 . E wa , "Ko ina pe h{lJ te watsin 're na-amp hon, si Oremal. Pi e sale sak. Pe m'ok h{lJ ni-le watsln, m'ok h{lJ ni wats in ko pi mats. 15. Ko mar tewn i MeJuware, la-tap. E Ju ko watsin.

SUMMARY

A man of the mainland village of Me shuware, inland from Woremet , and marr ied to an At chin woman , is working late in hi s garden, and he sweats and has elephant iasis. As he comes down to the river at Woremet , when it is already dark, he sees ghosts bathing . He bathes with them , and they remove the cause of hi s elephant iasis. He goes home to his wife on Atchin. The ghosts meanwhile quarrel over which of them shall have the thing which caused the elephantiasis, and finally share it . He vows never to land at that place again , but at the men 's sacred cooking-place at Oremal . He dies, and is buried in his lodge at Meshuware. 178 TALE C

TRANSLA TI ON 1 There was a man of (the main land village of) Me s huware (inland fr om Woremet), who one day wa s working in hi8 garden so late that it was already dU8k before he 8topped. And he was sweating violently, and had elephantia8i8 of the leg. And when it was alm08t dark he put the provisions that he had been digging on hi8 8houlder in order to come down to the 8hore. And he went down to the 8hore, and when he arrived there he saw a number of gh08ts bathing in the river. And they said "(See) our dear friend, let us remove the foreign bo dy (which is caus ing his elephantiasis). Let him come, and we will all bathe together. " And the ghosts ran and came, in their desire to remove the foreign body from him. And he came, and they all bathed. And when they had bathed, he fe lt that he was we ll. And he dived, and dived again, and came to the surface� Then he dived again, and again, and yet again. And again he dived, and (thi8 time) reached the 8hore. Then he dr agged hi8 canoe down to the 8ea, and he paddled and came (to Atchin), and hi8 wife looked at him and 8aid "Is thi8 indeed you, or not?" And he 8poke, saying "(Yes, ) it i8 I. They have taken that thing ou t of my leg". She said "Indeed? That i8 good". And (when he had gone) the gh08t8 bathed again. And they 8aw that thing which had belonged to that man. And one of them 8aid he wanted it for him8e lf, and said "I want the foreign body that cau8ed our friend'8 elephantia8i8 for mY8e lf. He di d not want it (only for him- . 2 8e lf) , he ran ". And another wanted it for him8elf only . And (after that) the man did not want to go to the mainland that way any more, 8aying "I do not want to go to Woremet again, bu t will (in fu ture) go a8hore at the cooking place sacred to men, at Orema l. That will now be my landing -p lace. I 8hall alwaY8 land there in fu ture. I 8hall continue to U8e that a8 a landing -place henceforth until I die. And (when he di ed) they buried him at Me 8huware, in hi8 lodge . That i8 the end.

�videntlY a refUgee from the mainland married to an Atchin woman. 2As explained afterwards by the narrator , the ghosts in the end all shared it . 179

TALE D: LEBON SA RETURNS FROM OBA

(From Me1teg-tsung-wurei , Ma y 8th, 1915.)

1. Lebon Sa e 1010J. Na-ru e tsiri. E wa Oba . Ko mw i lek I)a- in watsin. Ko mi wiri no-un. 2. Ko mwi tei na-ak. Mw i tei ko mu roni . Mu roni tsi Ie ko mi wiwsi. Ko mw i s i lei na-mban nen . 3. Ko mwi sa-sawi no-woJ. Ko e tei wii liiwawa mi wiri. Mwi tsali na-mban. 4. E karas i buha ko tamauw. Mwi tsal i tsi Ie. Ko e telab mas. Ko e tabe na-ak wa la. 5. Ko no-ut mObo I) ko watsin ko mu wa la. Mu wa la ko watsin. 6. Ko mOok se nu-mbo : "wal)ewal)e, wal)ewal)e , wal)ewal)a mu lemule. Ina e no mule, no wane tamba e, Sal e-sale, mu le mule." 7. Lebon Sal)awii l mu rOl)e ralan. "Lebon E-siu, kab te mo-rol) . 8. Nu-mbo wii-I)a wentapawiri?" E wan ko mw i se kele nu-mbo. 9. Ko e wa , "Kab te rOl)e kele. Miterik Lebon Sa we le I) a ." E mul e ma o Mu h�J ma o 10. Mar wa la, mar tsil)i na-mbwe . Mar ul-ul, mar su segur. Mar puri na-tsats. 11. Mar wa la, mar weI dril)i. Ar wa , "Tas ir we le I)a mul ma ." Mu h�J. E sei biok sa we le. 12. Ko Lebon Sal)awiil e wiel wan e sei biok. Ko ar woJ to-toni buh� san. 1 3. Ar huw na-ak e wa e-hut . Ar wa , "Tasir wele I) a e mul ma pin." Ar wa , "Ko wiel I) a-mbe?" 14 . E wa , "No wiel Oba . Na-ru mi tsiri a." E Ju .

SUMMARY

While bathing on Atchin, Lebon the First was caught by the South West wind and driven to Oba , where he made a canoe and stole some pigs, and with them returned to Atchin . On hi s way he sang a song . As he approached the island , Lebon the Tenth heard him singing , and called Lebon's attent ion to the sound . They all sounded the gongs, and danc ed down to the shore to welcome him . He lands, bringing with him a small taro plant .

TRANSLAT ION

One day, whi Le Lebon the First was bathing, the South-West wind aaught him and drove him to aba, where he stayed awhi Le. Then he pLaited sinnet, aut down a tree for a aanoe and hoLLowed it out, and, when he had ho L Lowed it out, Lashed on the pLanks. Then he sewed strips together into a sai L and trimmed a paddLe. Then he aut aeriaL roots of the wawa tree to make ropes whiah he then attaahed to the saiL. Then, by 180 TALE D

pretending to feed them, he aaught a boar and a ge lded pig and tethered them. Finally, he aooked provisions for the journey and, ha ving aarried his aanoe down to the sea, waited till nightfall, and then set sai l. And as he sailed he sang this song: "wal)ewal)e, wal)ewal)e, wal)ewal)a mulemu le. Ina e no mule, no wane tamba e, Sale-sale, mule mule."

(A s he approaahed Atahin), Lebon the Tenth heard the sound of his voiae, and said to Lebon the Ninth flListen, is that a song or the sound of the wind?" And Lebon the First aontinued singing, and again sang the song . Then Lebon the Tenth said "Listen again. Can it be that it is the voiae of our dear Lebon the First?" And at last he reaahed the shore, and landed, and they all ran and sounded the gongs . Then they painted their faaes and donned saen,ted herbs in the baak of their be Us, and broke ,off branahes of aroton, and, singing, danaed down to the shore to welaome him, saying "It is our dear younger brother who has arrived. " And he landed, bearing a sma ll taro plant in his hand . And they all he lped to aarry out his pigs, one by one, from his aanoe. Then they dragged the aanoe ashore, saying "Our dear younger brother has aome baak at last ". And they asked him "Where have you aome from?", and he rep lied "I have aome from Oba. The South-West wind aaught me and drove me there ". Tha t is the end. 18 1

TALE E: THE PARROT AND THE TURTLE

(From Me1teg-tsung-wurei , May 8th, 1915.)

1. Tsuno sa e ma-homb. E wan e wile kor-toni wenen n'aip. Mi wa n mw i ni si ne-I)a mu te re-I)an. 2. Na-mwe r mw i tser toni. Mwi te luha ni kele. Mi wan kele, mwi las kele. 3. Na-mwer mwi tser toni kele. Ko mwi te luha ni kele. Mwi Jilei ko watsin. Mwi tei ni-mba l sa. 4. Mu Jok roni. Na-mwer a mu row ma , mu Ju roni. Ko mw i re pi wiel , ma , pwi tsire ke le. 5. M'bale. M'bale pini, mu we re nu-a . Mwi sale wa la. 6. Mwi sale wa e-hut. Mw i se ko watsin nu-mbo "Womaga womaga 0 tsere wa n'aip-aipe. 7. Re Jub re Jumbwere, or las na-mbem� , o sala, 0 sal-sal wa hutu." 8. Mwi sal, mwi lasi bah!. E wa , "Bahi , po lai a wa e-hut." E ro pwi - tsa. Mwi lasi boras. "Po lai a wa e-hut." E ro pwi -tsa. 9. E lasi ne-wu . E wa , "Ne-wu , po lai a wa e-hut. Pe lemak s�m." Ne-wu mu J�kele. 10. Mi wan mw i te I)a-hut. Mi wan mwi I a i n�-n� no-ran ne-wu . 11. Mwi rewtsi buha sa pitew i. Mw i lemak ni , re-I)a mu Jakele wa e-hut . 12 . Mu wa , "Inik we le ne-wu , e-res mo lai a ma I)a-hut." Ne-wu mu wa , "Inik we le." Na-mwe r e wa , "10." E Ju.

SUMMARY

A man was hungry and plant ed seeds of the wild yam , but a parrot pecked them out . So he hid himself, and wounded it with a stick, and threw it into a river. The parrot floated down to the sea, and asked first a shart and then a box-fish to take it to land, but they refused. Finally a turtle carries it ashore on it s back. The parrot rewards it with food and kills a pig for it .

TRANSLATION

A man was hungry, and sought out and collected the seed of the wild yam, and went and found a place in which he plan�ed it. But a parrot pecked it out. He planted it again, bu t when he returned he found that the parrot had again pecked it out . So he planted it again, but this time he watched. He cu t a stick, and hid himself nearby. And the parrot came flying, and alighted nearby, wishing to hop and peck it out again. So he hit it, and wounded it, and threw it into the river. And it floated down to the sea, and towards the shore, singing "The parrot, 182 TALE E

the parrot, pecks the wi Zd yam. The oZd man, the oZd man, he breaks your wing, oh fZoat, oh fZoat to the shore". It fZoated, and saw a shark, and said "Shark, bring me to Zand", but the shark wouZd not. Then he saw a box-fish, and said "Bring me to Zand ", but the box-fish wouZd not. Then it saw a turtZe, and said, "TurtZe, bring me to Zand. I wiZZ reward you ". And the turt Ze took it on its back, and brought it to Zand. And the parro t went, and brought food for the turtZe, and kiZZed a pig for it. Thus he rewarded it for having brought it on its back to Zand, and said "Dear turtZe, it was good of you to bring me ash-ore ". The turtZe said "Goodbye ", and the parrot answered "So (aZso to you) ". That is the end. 18 3

TALE F: THE RA IN STONE

(From Me1 teg-womu through Lawak , May 5th, 1915.)

1. WiJewin sa ko noreman sa, tewen san. Mor wan, mor ruw. Mor ruw ko mor hi l toni ni-wat sa. 2. Ko mor wiren toni. Mewi ke le ko mor wan mor ruw ke le. 3. WiJewln mi wan , meme (t)si ni-wat, ni-wa t a mor hi l toni re nu-al. Meme (t)si ko no-uJ m'uJ. 4. Mewi kele ko mor wan kel e. Meme (t)si kele. Ko no- u J m' u J . 5. Mwi lai watsin ni-wat ma Qa-hi :m roni. Mo karasi tewen san, mi wa e-hut. 6. Ko ini, mwi le-lek mi wat- wat. Ko no-uJ m'uJ. Inir tewen san mor wa e-hut ko no-uJ e se uJ teo 7. Pi wan tewen san pi wa e-hut sa men , ko no-uJ e uJ. 8. Mi wan ko tewen san mwi karasi wiJen, e wa , "Inik, po le-lek, ko ina, pe wa e-hut." Mi wan se re e wa e-hut. 9. Mu luha ma o Se re wa hi :m tsi wifewin. Mi wiel ko mi ma, 10. mwi ta-tser mi wan mu to re pwaraQ, mi mat-mata wiJen san. Wi Jewin mi wiel Qa-ok Malunbek. 11. Mwi lai ni-wa t mi wa la roni. Mi wan mw i te we-re n'das. 12. No-uJ m'uJ. Tewen san mu wa la, mw i lai ni-wat. 13. Mwi lai, e wa , "Inik mo kete m'ok kete no-uJ m'uJ. Ikir ram m'ok re i-si, inik, pu-roQ." Mi wan. 14. Tewen san mi wa n, mwi lai ni-wa t si wiJewi n, mi we san. 15. Noreman mw i lai ko mu to Malunbek. M'ok tepel re-Qan, no-uJ m'ok uJ. 16. Tsunob mar re par rewtsi re-Qa mu kete no-uJ m'uJ. Mi mats ko wa tsin. Ko nor Senha r ma r lai. 17 . Mar ok kete no-uJ re-Qan. Mi we sar watsin. E Ju .

SUMMARY

A woman and her husband were digging a hole for yams when they pulled out a stone and threw it away . Next day the woman pissed on it , and found that this act made it rain . She took the stone home and played a tric k on her husband , making it rain whenever he went to the mainland alone, but not doing so when she went with him . Su spect ing her, he one day remained at home , and saw her take the stone and put it int o the sea, whereon it rained . He took the stone from her , and himself made rain, so much so that all the people want ed to kill him . How he is dead, and the men of Senhar have the stone and make rain with it . 184 TALE F

TRANSLATION

·There was a woman, and her husband, whom, when they were one day digging a ho Le in which to pLant yams, puLLed out a stone, and threw it away . Next day they again went to dig hoLes for their yams, and the woman went and pissed on the stone which they had puLLed out of the ho Le, and the rain poured down. Next day they came again, and again she pissed on the stone, and again the rain poured down . Then she took the stone home with her . And she pLayed a trick on her husband, te L ling him to go to the mainLand whi Le she wou Ld stay at home pLaiting mats. And he went, and the rain poured down . Whe never she and her husband went to the main Land together it did not rain , bu t whenever the husband went to the mainLand aLone, the rain poured down. After a time, the husband pLayed a trick on his wife, saying "You stay at home, and I wiLL go to the main Land". However, he did not go to the main Land, but came back. He did not go home to his wife, but made his way straight to a cLiff, and stayed there, watching for his wife . And the woman went to Me Lunbek, and, taking the stone to the shore, went and put it into the sea, and (forthwith) the rain poured down. And her husband ran and came and took the stone . He took it, saying "So it is you who keep on ma king the rain pour down . We have been wondering who it was, and it is just you ". And the husband went, and took the stone away from the woman, and kept it for himseLf. And that man took it, and stayed at , Me Lunbek, and continued (without ceasing) to make magic wi th it, so that the rain continued cease LessLy to pour. And the peop Le wanted to kiLL him because he kept on making it rain. Now he is dead . And the men of l Senhar have taken the stone, and continue to make rain with it. Now it is theirs. That' is the end.

lIt descended to his sister 's son [informant 's comment]. 185

TALE G: THE OCTOPUS , THE RA IL AND THE SHELL-FISH

(First version; for other version, see Tale 0. )

1. Wifewin, noreman, tewen san. Mor wiel la re pwaraQ Le-beroQ Ma rur Wo rnats. Mor le-lek. 2. Ko tewen san mwi ake ne-wis ko e I iw-l iw ehi. Wifen san mi wa-wat e-re pwaraQ. 3. Mu rOQe na-hit, pila, tekau, mar pur-ror. Ini e re tewen san lamof, 4. e wa , "Hai! Ko se lasi te mwi I iw-l iw eh i Ie? Ko ro pwi las im te? Po wie1 ." 5. Mwi rets-rets. Mwi tsiga. Mwe I iQ ton i wew. Mi wan, mwi lasi, 6. mw i lasi nehit, tekau pila mar re-rakere. Mu fi tewen san. E wa , "Hai e! Po ma pa ! 7. Po lasi na-na fopon mar re-rakere." Ko tewen san mi ma o Mo wurei , mo wa , 8. "Po tsibar i ko po rets pit ewi r. Pw i re pu wurei ni-se, weral no-ut e pOQ pi ma pu wureim ni." 9. Mwi sarawan mwi ts ibari na-hit, tekau pi I a. Mu wurei mu wa , 10. "Pwi re po wure i ni-se, ko we ral no-ut e , pOQ ko po ma po wure i a n i . II Mi wa n ko wa tsin. 11. Noreman ma r matur no-ut e pOQ, inir wifen san. Na-hit mi ma no-ut e pOQ , na-hit, pila, tekau. 12. E wan e wurei ni noreman, e wa , "Kab se uroi a teo Pi we fopami ina." 13. E wa , "Natum noreman e-saQawu1." Wifewin mwi ts ian, m'pepe toni mwi sa. 14 . Mu fu ko e tsian luha . Ko m'pepe ton i mw i sa. M'pepe, m'pepe, m'pepe, 15. e pepe saQawul , noreman e-saQawul . Wifewin mw i tara. 16. E se re pe te Qa ni pep. Mar tur wa ts i. 17 . Ko wat si ko mar tei na-ak sa, na-ak nen e lap. In ir a e-saQawu l ko mar wa Siu. 18 . Ko timan miran mor wa , "Kab e Siu ko mw i na kam lasi masal ko. 19. Ni-mat, mi mat mwi na ko ka lav hosi tekau , na-hit, pi la. Ko mwi tsa." Ko mar wa n ko mar lai. 20. Ko mar lai na-hit, tekau . Tasin e wa , "Timar e wurei-ri ra se uroi te ." Ko tutufen e wa , 21 . "E! Ne re wanu fUhov i Ie." E wa , "Se re na-Qa Tsan . Ko ra uroi . 22 . E-re wanu fuho vile." Tasin e wure i ni, 23 . "M iran e timan e wa na wan nam e Siu, mwi-rena wan, tutufak mar uroi , 24 . Ko na ma Ts iQon Tahar, pe wa la we-re ni-tsam." E wan mu wa la we-re ni-tsam . Timan e miran or tur Onema. 25. Mor lasi natun mu wala we-re ni-tsam . 26 . E wa , "Tipwis, ram rets pitewi r, e-tsiga. Ar uroi hofi n'il-n'il Qa ." 27 . Timan e miran mor tOQfa luha ne Qa-hi:m. Mor ma o Timan mi mats. 28. Na-hit, tekau, pi la mar re-rakere. Timan mi mats. Natun mar h'ilf Onema . 29. Mar mul ma Qa-hi:m sar , ko miran e wa , "Ko kab te lasi timami . M i ma ts, e mat ur." 30 . Mar hili nu-al in. Ko mar se t siba r i t e . 31. Par wof i .. . we-re nu-al ko mar tsuleni n , al pu-roQ we-re nu-al . Timar Qa mi mats, nasan Winbwer is. E fu . 18 6 TALE G

TRANSLATION

There was a woman, and a man, her husband . They two went down to the shore and wa�ked among the rocks at Le-berong-marur and Wo r-na ts . They �ingered there together for a time, then the husband cocked his bow and shot fi sh, whi �e she went and p�aited on a rock. And whi�e she was p�aiting, she heard an oc topus, a rai � and a she � �-fi sh of the kind ca ��ed tekau brea king twigs behind her in the bush, as �overs do, wishing to attrac t a gir� 's attention. Thinking it was indeed a �over, she said "Hi ! Do you not see my husband shooting fi sh down there? Do you want him to see you ? Go away. " She then kept on te ��ing them to keep quiet, but they wou�d not, so at �ast she threw down the pandanus strips with whic h she was p�aiting, and went to see, and saw the octopus, the she��-fish and the rai � embracing one another. Then she ca��ed out to her husband, crying "Hi ! Eh! Come here ! Look at some things here embracing one another ". Her husband came, and spoke, saying "Touch them, and speak to them. If one of them wants to te �� you something, te�� it to come after dark tonight, and te�� yo u then. " She put out her hand and touched to octopus, the she��-fi sh and the rai �. And she spoke, saying "If you wan t to say anything, come after dark tonight, and te�� me. " And it came to pass tha t night, when the man was as �eep, he and his wife, the octopus , the rai � and the she��-fi sh came, and one of them spoke to the man, saying "Do not eat me . Then I sha�� be as one of you ". Then it said "You sha�� ha ve ten ma �e chi �dren." The woman conceived, and brought for th a chi �d. Then she conceived again, and again bore a chi�d, and she brought fo rth, and brought fo rth, and brought forth, she brought fo rth ten sons. And she was o�d, and was not such as shou�d have been ab�e to bear chi�dren. When they were a�� grown up, they fa shioned a canoe, a great sea going canoe, and the ten brothers a�� went in it to Ma �o. And before they went their fa ther and mother said "When you have been at Ma �o, and when the tide ha s been high, you ha ve been used to seeing fi sh, and when the tide ha s gone out you have been used to taking the she�� fi sh ca ��ed tekau, the octopus and the rai �. But do not do it". But whi �e they were away they took them, but the youngest brother said "Our fa ther to �d us we shou�d not eat them". But the e�de st said "Eh! This p�ace is different. " He said "We wou �d not eat them on Atchin. But here we can eat them. It is a different p�ace ". On the way home the youngest brother said "My fa ther and mother to�d me that if, when we went to Ma �o, my e�der brothers shou�d have eaten these things, then, when we came to the promontory at Tsingon Ta-har, I shou �d run out on to the outrigger-f�oat. " And it came to pass that he ran out TALE G 187

on to the outrigger fZoat. And the fa ther and mother were standing on the beach at Onema . And when they saw their son running out on to the outrigger fZoat, they said "ChiZdren, we kept on te Z Zing them, but it wa s in vain . They have eaten those things. And the fa ther and mother turned their backs on the shore and went to their house-encZosure . And when they got there , the fa ther died. The oc topus, the sheZZ-fi sh and the raiZ crawZed over and embraced him. The fa ther di ed. And his sons Zanded at Onema, and came into the viZ Zage, and went to their house enc Zosure . And their mother said "Come, Zook at your fa ther. He Zies dead". They dug a hoZe for him. They did not touch him, bu t when they shou Zd have carried him into the hoZe they just poked him in with sticks. Their fa ther, who died, was caZZed Win-bweris. That is the end. 188

TALE 1-1 : THE TRAGEDY OF A MAN , HIS WIFE AND HER LOVER

(Probabl y from Melteg-wuomu, through Lawak .)

1. Tsuneb sa mwi rewts i maki . Ko wifewin san . E tigei wiIewen e-ru. 2. Ko tasin sa , no reman ma-lakel , mi tei ne-wis san, mu tural) ne-l iw. Mi I iw-l iw ni-man. 3. E wan ko ne-l iw mwi ha mu tsev wa lolo'm si wiIewi n si tutuIan. 4. Ko wiIewi n si tutuIan mw i lai ne-l iw. Mwi I iiiwe n i . Mwar' a m'betselehi ne-liw san. 5. Ko betselehi ko e wa , "E ha rna I)a-el ko pin. Miterik e ha e-pe I)a-in." 6. Ko wiIew in mw i lasi mwar ' m'betselehi ne-liw. E wa , "A i ! Ko bet 5 e I e h i n i - 5 e ?" 7. E wa , "Ts iga, no betse lehi ne-l iw". Ko lasi wU-l)a e-tsiga?" E wa , "N i-le. Ko po rna po lai". 8. Mwar' a e wa , wan, mwi lai. Mwi haIi wa lolo'm. 9. Mu kete na-na mwi tsats pitew wifewin. Ko e wa , "Po tiwe i te na-na pwi sa , tev-tev pw i sa re-I)ak." E t i we i . 10. Ko e wiel watsin ko e lai ne-l iw. Ko mwi lai na-mbu wu , mw i tiwe i tev-tev kele re-l)an. 1 E wa la-tap. 11. Mi wan ko tutuIan mwi lasi tev-tev re wiIewin. Ko e se wurei te, ko e wa la-tap kele. 12 . E wan ko e wa re mal il) sa ko e Via , "I-si mal il)en?" Ko Iopon mar lek re-I)an. 13 . Ar wa , "Mwar' ok" . E lai na-mbu ko mu wuw i. 14 . Ko mu nunre ko mw i se lasi te tev-tev. E wa re ma lil) e-nats kele. E wa "I-se Ie mal il)en?" 15. Ar wa , "Mwar' ok." Mu nunre kele tev-tev; Mi se lasi teo Mu nunre re ma lil) e-siu, 16. ko mw i 5 e I as i t e. Ko e wa n e wa re ma lil) a tasin. Ko mwi lasi, 17 . ko mwi lasi re na-mbu si tasin. E wa, "Ko i - 5 e mel il)en ni-le?" Ar wa , "Tasim ko" . 18. E wa , "10. Ini le- rol) mw i kete n{l-n{l I)a me lasi ne I)a-hi:m re wiIewi n." 19. Mewi nen ko e wurei ni tas in, e wa , "Po rna , ro wa lameI". Tas in e wa , lila" . Mor wan. 20. "Ko po tei nu-as pwi sa." Mu tei tsile nu-as ko m�r wa re no-ut. 21. "Ko po hi li n'dr �m ok, ko po numbwe-numbwe po wan po tei ts i matuar." 22. Mwar' a mw i hi I i n'dram. Mwi hil i, mw i hil i, me wan, me wan, me wan, mwi se lai moni teo 23. Ko e hi li me lll)en , e lek re-I)an. Ko mw i hili mi wan ko mwi rere. 24 . Ko e liiv toni re nu-a! . Ko Iopon we le e ma- mbur. E wu rei nl tutuIiin . 25. E wa , "Iopon we le e ma-mbur". Ko tutuIiin e rna. Ko e wa , "Ne-mbe Ie?" E wa , "Po te wets i." 26. Mwar' ami wetsi. Ko mi tamar we-re nu-wal Ko tutuIan mwi rewtsi, mw i rewtsi pin. E mats. 27. Ko mu nu we-re nu-wal. Ko mi wan, mwi lai na-wits, ne-kal na-wits e-l im. 28. Mwi tewni roni ni. Mi wiel watsin. E wan ko tsunob Iopon mar uI-uIi, ar wa ," 29. "Ko tas im e-be7" Ko e wa , "E wa tsi matuak, 30. e numbwe-numbwe n'dram sa, e wan pwi te." Ko m i l Statements corrected afterwards by my informant s, who said that the design with which he scarified the woman was the same as he had already on his pipes. TALE H 189 we-we wa tsin na-mbol). 31. E wa na-mbol) e-lim, e wu rei wiJew in san , "Ko po ma, ro wa lamoJ." 32. Ko wiJewin e wa , "E-wise ko mo ro ro wiel? Se-re na-mbol) e-Iap wo r, maki mwi ar pa l le-rol)." 33. E wa , "Po ma". E wa ,. "Ko kam i kab lek, ko i-si pw l lai n�-n� rami?" E wa , 34 . "Ko kani pwi sa pw i lek. Ko inik, po ma." Ko wiJewin e tal). Mor wlel, mor wa lamoJ kele. 35. Mor wa re no-ut . Ko e wur ei , e wa , "Po te ni si tasim wele I)a ." 36. Ko wiJewin e tal) ko watsin. E wetsi nu-al ko mw i tal). E wetsi ko e lav toni na-wits. 37 . Ko mw i lai ne-tsal san , e witse reni ko e woI i mwa ra we le I)a we re-I)an. 38. Ko e tatai watsin. Ko e tal) ko watsin. E tal), ko e wiel mao 39. Ko tewen san e wa , "Po ma , po luha". Ko e wa , "E-tsiga. Ina pe wiel ." 40. Tewen san e wa , "Ai! Po ma, ro luha ." Ko e wa , "No ro pw i-tsa." Mi wiel mu tsubu l ma I)a- Ia. 41. Tewen san e wa , "Po ma". "Inik po luha we" . Mi wan ko mi wa wa-re ni-ma t. 42. Ko mu wu re i ni tewen san, e wa , "Po te kilq• Po lasi ni- as na-amp sa?" 43. Tewen san mu kila, e wan win a mu row tsubul , ko mu ron. Mu ron wa tsin. 44. Tewen san mwi tal), mu luha , ko mwi tal). Mu r;o-rom i mwi-Iap a mw i-Iap. 45. Mwi lai n'tal sa ko mwl Ii. E Ju .

SUMMARY

A man had two wives, and had just made Maki when his younger brother , when shooting at birds , accidentally let one of his arrows fall within one of the wives' enclosure . She took and hid it , and when he looked for it , asked him in side , and they lay together . She asked him to scarify a design on her, and he scarified the design which he had on his pan-pipes. Her husband returned and saw the design , and went to his younger brother 's lodge , where he saw the pr ototype on his pipes. Then he called him to dig a yam , and while his younger brother was digging he slew him , pushed him into the yam-pit and buried bananas with him . On the 5th day , he brought his wife to the spot , and she uncovered the pit and found him, and wrapped him as for burial in her shawl . Then she committed suicide by jumping off the reef. Her husband gr ieved and hanged himself.

TRANSLAT ION

There was a man who had just made the Maki saarifiae, and his wife . This man had married two wives. And one of his younger brothers fashioned a bow and bound heads on to his arrows, and went shooting birds . And as he was shooting it happened that one of his arrows aurved 190 TALE H

over in its ftight and descended into the house-enc tosure of one of his etder brother 's wives. And this woman took the arrow, and hid it. That man tooked for his arrow, saying to himse tf, "It curved over this way, I think it dropped just here ". And the woman wa tc hed that man tooking for his arrow, and said "Hi ! Wha t are you tooking fo r?" He said "Oh, no t hing ! I am onty too king for an arrow. Have you seen it or not?" She said "It is here, come and get it". So the man went and fe tched it, and entered into her house-enctosure, and did wrong with the woman. And she asked him "Wi H you ptease scarify a design on me (as a tove token) ?" So he scarified on her the same de sign that he had on his pan pipes. Then he went to his todge . And after a time his etder brother noticed the scarification on his wife . But he said nothing, but he too went to the todge, and went up to one of the steeping mats and asked "Whose steeping mat is this ?" There were severa t men in the todge, and they rep tied "That steeping mat be tongs to so -and-so ". And he took up the pan pipes (from the steeping mat) and btew on them, and examined them carefutty, but did not see the design (he was too king for) . Then he went to ano ther steeping mat, saying "Whose steeping mat is this ?" and they rep tied "So-and-so 's". And he examined the de sign on the pipes on that steeping ma t, but did not find the one he wanted. In this way he examined nine steeping mats, bu t stitt fai ted to find it. At tast he came to his younger brother 's steeping ma t, and there he saw it, on his younger brother 's pipes. And he asked "Whose steeping mat is this?" And they said "Your younger brother 's". So he said to himsetf "Indeed! So it was he who made that which I saw at home on my wife ". Next day he spoke to his younger brother, saying "Come, tet us go into the bush". The younger brother reptied "Very we tt". And the etder said "Make a digging stick", and when he ha d finished making it they went to his garden. And the etder brother said "Dig up tha t yam, and wrap it in teaves and go and take it to our mother 's brother ". Then the younger brother began digging the yam. (It was one of those very tong yams used for ceremoniat purposes which are severat feet tong, and grow straight down into the earth and must at att costs be taken out whote and without btemish. ) And he dug and dug, and went on digging, but stitt coutd not get to the bottom of it. So (as is usua t in such circumstances) he ended by digging a pit for himse tf atongside the yam, into which he got, and went on digging titt at tast he managed to tever the yam out from the pit. But a smatt piece was broken off, and he spoke to his brother, saying "A smatt piece is broken off, and is stitt in the ground". His etder brother came and said "Where then?", and TALE H 191

(when he had seen it) he said "Scrape it out". And the man scraped it out, and as he wa s bending down in the pit his eLder brother struck him, and be Laboured him so that he di ed. And he pushed him into the ho Le, and went and fe tched five bunches of bananas, and buried them with him. Then he went home. And some peop Le asked "Where is your younger brother ?", and he rep Lied "He is going to my mother 's brother. He is wrapping up a yam, to take to him ". And he counted the days, and on the fifth day [the day on whic h, in the mortuary rites, official mourning begins] he said to his wife, "Come, Let us go into the bush". And his wife said "Why do you want us to go ? It is but a few days since the Maki sacrifice [i.e. a time when they should properly be staying at home ]". But he said "Come . If. you both stay at home, who is going to fe tch your food? " Then he said (to that one of his two wives who had Lain wi th his younger brother) "Very we LL, one of you may stay behind, but you must come ". And that woman (suspecting the worst) wept. And they departed and went into the bush, to his garden. And he said "Now Look for your dear Lover". And she wept bitterLy, and scraped the earth away from the pig, we eping. And she scraped away the earth and took out the bananas, and took off her shawL, and spread it out on the ground, and Lifted that dear man on to it. And she wrapped him up (as for buriaL), and wept copiousLy. And, stiLL weeping, she turned away . And her husband said "Come back", but she said "No . I am going away ". Again he said "Come , Let us go back", but she said "I do not want to ". And she went, and came down to the shore, and again her husband said "Come ". But she said "You can go back aLone ". And she went, and came to the edge of the reef, and said to her husband "Look around. Do you see the smoke of someone 's fire?" And as her husband Looked round, she jumped down off the reef and was drowned. She drowned, and her husband wept, and went back, and wept. And he grieved greatLy, and took a rope and hanged himse Zf. 192

TALE K: THE TEN LEBON BROTHERS

(From Ta -maewo through Mel teg-lek.)

1. Mirar ni-wa t. Natun we sa�awul . Sa mu wo r womu Lebon Sa �awul . 2. Ko sa Lebon e-Siu, mwi tsire, Lebon o-wal , Lebon e-Mbut, Lebon o-Won, Lebon e-I im, Lebon e-Wats, Lebon e-Tol, 3. Lebon e-Ru, Lebon Sa, kel bwet . Ar hor-hor. Ar hor-hore ra l i e-Tsan. Ar lai masal e-sa�awu l 4. Ko ar luha ar rna , ar rna ko ar sek ni Ie-tar sa , inir na-mbun. 5. Na-mbu e ka r e-Iap. Ko e tsowile, e tsowile �a-Ia. Ko inir ar rna ar tsovha tsin. 6. Ko Lebon Sa e se masal. Mi rna ko e lai masal sa pitew Ie-tar a, inir na-mbun. 7. E wa "Ko lasi woJeni kiam a? Na-mbuk pwi nip ko po ar tigei . 8. Ni-Ie'r nir, ar se las woJen teo Nam wi-Iek, ko mar hoJ-hoJi pu-ro�." Mar wan, ma r Juw 10k-wits. 9. Mar we-we n'ehi �a . Mar we-we �a e-siu pu-ro�. 10. E wa , "Hai! Ko n'ehi Ie woJ-woJ ikir". Lebon Sa�awul ko , "Ko e-wise ni n'ehi el? Sa e tsowi? 11 . Ra we-we ko. Ko sa ne-mbe?" Lebo n Sa e wa , "Ko me lai pitew Ie-tar a, inir na-mbun". 12. E wa, "Ko ro po hitsi ko? In ik no-r{lm pwi tsa te pu-ro�." 13 . Lebon Sa e wa , "10. E-res. Ina pe koro�aJ pu-ro�." Masal e mases. Ar uroi tsi Ie. 14. Lebon Sa�awul e wa , "Na-mbo � e- Iap wor ." 15. Ko Lebon Sa�awul "Ra hor-hor kele." Ar hor-hor kele ral i e-Tsan. Ar lai kele masa l e-sal)awul . 16. Mar luha mar rna . Mar rna , ko Ie-tar a inir na-mbun m�r lek. 17 . Mar tsovha , mar tsovha mar tsovha. Lebon Sa e wieta. Le-tar a e wa 18 . "Hai! Ko wi n a ni-Ier, mo lai masal a pitewi?" E wa , "Inik, 0" . E wa , "10." 19. E wa , "Ko ma-Iakel e ser-ser pu-ro� 0" . Le-tar a e wa "Pwe ! Ko no wan no wuJoi n'amben I)a ma r woJ ar ruts row. 20. Ko pe mak, pe tuloni tsihim." 21 . E wa, "10. Pe te wan pe wurei ni tutuJak iniri." Ko mi wan, mu wa "Tutu, ko kam lasi Ie-tar a?" 22 . Ar wa , "10, tas ik". Lebon Sa�awul e wa , "Aru! Tas ik, inir wiJen sa mor lek. 23. Ikir pwi sa pwi t i ge i ." Lebon Sa e wa , "Tutu, ko pe te wure i na-na sa". 24 . Ar wa , "10 . Po te wurei". E wa , "tutu, ko Ie-tar ok ere pe tigei ." 25. Lebon Sa�awul e wa , "A ! Ko inik tsunob res ko sa? Ko kiam a, nam re-res Ie wor ko! 26. Mo Jowur Jur i kiam te?" E wa , "10; Ie-tar ok e re pe tigei . E wurei a ni." 27 . E wa , "10; po wan, po te na-mbo�". Lebon Sa mi wan. 28 . E wa , "E-sa�awul wer al . Po rna po tuloni." Mi rna rnu tuloni. Lebon Sa�awul e lai ni-wara , buha ni-wara. 29. Lebon e-Siu e lai na-ru. Lebon o-Wal_ e lai pekes . 30. Lebon e-Mbut e lai e wiJ-wiJ. Lebon o-Won e lai liw-Jeren. Lebon e-Lim e lai buh{l pal- pale. 31. Lebo n e-Wats e lai buh{l liv -tov. Lebon e-Tol e lai buh{l lap-lap. 32 . Lebon e-Ru e lai lih-wen buh{l . Lebon Sa e lai notin buh{l. E I a i buha e-sa�awu I. 33. Ko Lebon Sa�awul e wa , "Ko pwi re-ro� ina TALE K 193

pu-rol) pe t igei . 34 . Ko ina me lai buha mu womu. Ra wu l moni, ko ina pe tigei". 35. Win a mu ro pwi-tsa pi we tsi Lebon Sal)awu l. Ini e re pi we t 5 i Lebo n Sa . Ko inir we Lebon Sa or wa re ne-hi:m san. 36. Ko inir mar wan, ar wa re ne-hi:m sar. 37. Ko inir ar wa, "Ko ini tipwis ko-rol) ko e-wise I)a pwi tigei? Iki r a ram la-lap el, pwi sa pwi tigei " 38. Ar wa , "Tutu, ra karasi ni na-na pwi sa ko pi ko ikir pwi sa pwi tig ei." 39. E wa , "10, e-res, e-res." Ar wa la ar sal-s al. 40. Ko ar lasi tel e-pur-pur sa, mi mal)al) . Ko ar wa , "10, e-res .11 Ar Iu ar wan ko watsi. 41. Ar rna, ar lasi Lebon Sa . "Lebon Sa, we!!! E wa , "Po rna , 0" . E wa , "Ra e-be?" 42. Ar wa , "Ra wa la, ra sa l-s al . Ko wi n ok pw i lek ok." Lebon Sa e wa , "Kab womu, pe mak ko ." 43. Mar womu, ko watsin, ko e wurei win a, e wa , "1'10 lek, ko mo lasi mar karasi a, ko 44 . mo lasi na-mwer pwi sa pu row pw i tsovha, ko po lihi, po ma ts". Ko pe ar rna , pe lasim ko pu-rol)." 45. Ko mar wan, mar Iu. Mar Iu mar wan ko watsin. 46. Mar wan, mar lasi tel e-pur-pur Ie pa. E wa , "Pwi sa pu un wa." Lebon sal)awul e wa , "Ina." 47. Lebo n Sal)awul m'un wa I)a e IiI par-par . E wa , "Tasik, kami pwi sa." 48. Lebon e-Siu m'un wa I) a e IiI par-par. Lebon o-Wa l ko watsin, m'un ko e IiI par-par. 49. Lebon e-Mbut m'un e IiI pa r-par. Lebon e-Won m'un ko e IiI pa r-par. 50. Lebon e-Lim m'un ko e Ii 1 par-par. Lebon e-Wats m'un ko e Ii 1 par- par. 51 . Lebon e-Tol m'un ko e IiI par-par. Lebon e-Ru m'un ko e IiI par-par. 52. Lebon Sa ko watsin e wa , "Tutu, pe un pe ke te pi-pe ni- se?" E wa , "Po-un wa, ko po se tsibari te, 53. ko po luwa mam we- rel)an." Mu luwa mam We-rerjan. Tele-pur-pur e hatsibut horen maman, e mats. 54 . Lebon Sa e mats; e matur re-I)an. 55. TutuIan inir mar Iu no-woI ko ar re par ru l pur-pur no-woI. Mwi sa e wa , "Ina pe tigei". Mar wan mar wa la. 56 . Lebon Sal)awul mu womu. Mar wan re ne-hi:m si Lebon Sa. Mar nisi wini mu Ii. 57 . Lebon Sal)awul e wa , "Kab wa tsile watsin. Mwi ka-ka 1. Ko ra re ra tigei I) a mi mats. 58 . Ar luha we-re ne-hi:m sar. Lebon Sal)awu l ar wan ar lasi win a buan. 59. E wa , "Win a e mats." E wa, "Ia? Pe wa tan pe lasi e-wi se I) a mi mats." 60. E puri marwiri e-wats, mar wiri par. E hululol)e, e hululol)e re na-amp. 61 . Mwi rewtsi ni wa-sa, ko e se sup teo Mw i lai kele marwiri sa, mwi rewtsi ni kele sa. 62. Ko e se sup teo Mwi lai kele marwiri sa . Mwi rewtsi ni, mw i rewtsi ni ko e sup wa-sa. E lai kele mar iwiri sa, mwi rewts i n i, e mara rna woI wa-sa. 63. E 1 ek. Buan e wa , "Ko e-wi se?" E wa , "No Ii Ie. 64. Ko Lebon Sa, ma r karasi e ok I) a-la. Mar rna, mar laso l)a-e1. Ini ko mi wurei mwi re pe hili ko pe mats. 65 . Ko e re pi rna mw i las kele ia ko pu-rol)." 66. Mor lek ko watsi ko Lebon Sa, no-u m'u rna , ko tel e-pu-pur mi mal)al) . Mu 101) e rna I) a-hut . 67 . Mi rna ko mwi lasi win a ninir buan mor le-lek. E wa , "Hai! Ko wiel be?" 194 TALE K

68 . Ewa , "rar-tol ok ar ka rasi a." "Ar ka r asim ni ni-se?" E wa , "tele- pur-pur. Mar re namb un-un wa . 69. Ko mar un ko mar m'ok Ji 1 par-par pu-roJ). 70. Ko ina wa tsin, me un, ko mar re pe luwa mak we-reJ)an. Ko mw i hats to-toni mamak. 71. Ko inir ma r Ju, mar rna J)a-el J)a-hiit . Mar re-roJ) par tigei win ok." E wa "Ia!" 72. Buan e wa , "Po se tsi rer te wats in, ar karasim ko wor. 73. Ar re pa r tigei win el ko . Masal re-re wuJonen ko ar moJ-moJ ni. Ko iniki, mo lai masal pitew na-mbiik. 74 . Ko no ro pu ma-lakel ko po tigei ." Ko mar lek, 75. ko mar rOJ)e J)a mor rets e-re ne-hi:m si Lebon Sa. Lebon SaJ)awiil e wa , 76. "Lebon e-Ru, po te ri-ri , po te lasi i-si m�r rets re ne-hi:m si Lebon Sa . Wi n a e mats, ani i-si mor rets ne J)a-in?" 77 . Lebon e-Ru mw i ri-ri, e wa la 1 u ha , e wa , E! Tutu e!" 78. E wa , "Lebon Sa inir win a mor lek kele I e." E wa "Ra karasir, ra kete ni-se pwi sa J)a ikir pwi sa tigei ," 79. E wa , "10; ra karas i ni kele na-na pw i sa ." Ma r wan , ko wa ts in. 80. Lebon SaJ)awii l e wa , "We ! Kam i si kom rets?" E wa , "Kiam ko" . "Ko ko wiel ne-mbe ne mo rna?" 81 . Ko no-u mi rna ko tele-pur-pur mi 82 . E wa "Ia!" Wina buan e wure i ni Lebon Sa, e wa , "Po se ts i r-ts i rer te. 83. Ar mok ka rasim ko we! Ar re par tigei win ok." Mewl nen kele e wa , "Lebon Sa we ! 84 . Po rna ra wa la". E wa , "Ko no - u J e - 1 ap e 1 m' u J" . ne-J)a la. Ra how we-reJ)an." 86. Buan e wa , "Kab wan ko kab wa re na-·na pwi sa ko po wa wieta po-ro ini k." Mar wan J)a la J)a no-uJ m'uJ. 87. Mar wan, e wa la mar wa re pwere re n'bahur. Mar haJ-haJ; wan, mar haJ-haJi wan , e wa-wan mu Ju . 88. Lebon Sa mw i re pw i haJI; wan bahur e hatsi but hor er. 89. Ko Lebon e tur tser. Ko mar taJ); ar taJ) e-lap lolon bahur. Lebon Sa e luha rna J)a-hi:m. 90. Mi rna, e wa , "Kia nam wa la, tutuJak Inlr, bahur e hatsibut horer ne-J)a la. 91 . Ko ina no tur tser. Ko me luha, me rna Ie". 92 . Le-tar a e wa "Po se tsi r-tsirer te. Ar m'ok kara-karasim ko we ! Mar wiel ko no wa po se ts i rer te" . 93. E wa , "Lolak e tsats inir tutuJak werek nam korta." 94 . "Ko ko ro- rOJ) rar-tol lasiri." E wa "10." Mar wan ko wa ts in. 95 . Inir buan ko win a ko inir e-to l ma r wan. Mar wan ko watsin ko ma r rOJ)e mar taJ), mar taJ) re lolon bahur. 96. E wa , "Tasik, kia nam mats werek, bahur mwi hatsibut hore kiam." 97 . Win a buan e wu rei Lebon Sa , e wa , "Ko lolom e wurei par has tsal il Ie?" 98 . E wa "10; lola k e wu rei par has tsal il e-res." Le-tar a e tul-tulo po ko wa tsin. 99A "0 re nlom re 10m 0 re Ie nlom re nlom. 100. row-row se Ie mbeuro wo re nlom re nlom" . E se nu-mbo ko Lebon Sa e wa la e ral I batun bahuru. 101 . E wa I a, e wa I a mu Ju. Lebon Sa e row wan e J ewe i bahuru J)a-ok. Bahur a e mow kare. 102. Ar tsal i I. Win a buan e wa , "Hm ! Ka m'ok karasi tser ni Lebon TALE K 195

Sa. Kam sesuwei. 103. 1)90 ko kam lasi bahuru ok mwi hastibut hore kami. 104 . Mw i tsa ko kab ma ts nov -nov I) a -ok. Ko mwi res ko ini mu tur tser, ko I) a mwi kete I) a ka maur ko" . 105. E Ju ko wats in. Ko le-

tar a ernul. E wa , "Kab se ka rasi te Lebon Sa . 106. Kam i kab ral pwi - res." Ko ar wiel . 107 . Ar wiel ar rna ar sek ni Le-boriwer iv. Boron e-lap. E wa , "Tas ik werek, kab wiel be?" 108 . Ar wa, "E! Nam m'ok ral el ko pu-rol)." "Ka rna , ra mul, ra tabu te." 109. Mar mul ko wat sin ko mar wa re ne-hi:m si Lebor iweriv. "Kab tabu; ka Jure na-amp , kab tabu." Mar Jure na-amp lolo'm. 110. Lebon Sa mwi lek re perel)e-s is. Ill . Ko mwi re pwi lai na-amp par Jure ko mw i lasi sam-sam si Leboriweriv mwi Jilei wa ni. E wa , lOPe wan, pe lal n'dram." 112. Ko Lebon Sa e wa , "Tutu, pw i sam pin- pin ikir. Weral p'ur-uroikir". E wa "la?" 113. E wa , Tas ik, ko wuretun". "0, no wuretun". "Tas ik, ko ra kete pi pe ni-se? Ra wa la wa" . 114 . Mar wa la, ma r wan ko ar tei na-mbu piiloh. 115. Ar horotsi e-sal)awiil. Mwl sa ko e tori ne- lep sa. "Tasik, ra kete pi pe ni-se?" 116. Mar ma tsire nats. Mar nasi nats re piiloh. Mi wa-wa n a mu Ju . 117 . piiloh mu wu -wun tsile. Leboriweriv e wa , "Re-I)a I) a -el a e-mbe nir?" E rursi sam-sam. 118 . E wa , "Mirar par hitsir pa ." Mar wa la, mu horer. Mu horer ko watsin. Mar sa re ni-ar. Mar sa. 119. Lebon Sal)awii l e womu . Lebon e-Siu wa tsire. Lebon o-Wa l e tsire, 120. Lebon e-Mbiit e tsire, Lebon o-Won e tsire, Lebon e-Lim e tsire, Lebon e-Wats e tsire, 121. Lebo n e-Tol e tsire, Lebon e-Ru e tsire. Lebon Sa I) a-ta . Mw i re pwi sam wa Lebon Sa . 122 . E wa , "O! Tutu, pwi rewtsi a Ie. Po tsiri wa ni piiloh nats pwi sa." E tsiri wan i, wan. 123. E wa , "Nats, wiri , wiri, wiri, wiri " Leboriwer iv e watseni. Lebon Sa e sa. 124 . E wa , lOPe sam kami nl-aok wo r. Kab e-be I)a sami? Mw i re pw i sam wa Lebon Sa. 125. Lebon Sal)awiil e wa , "Po tsiri wa ni piiloh nats ok pwi sa ." 126. Mwi tsiri wa ni, e wa , "Nats, wiri, wlrl " Lebor iwer iv e watseni. Ar sa wa mare. 127 . Mwi sa ke le. mi wa wa wa , wan mw i re pwi sam wa Lebon Sa . E wa , "O! Tutu, pu rewtsi a Ie. 128. Po tsir wa ni wan piiloh nats ok pw i sa." Mw i tsiri wa ni wan e wa , "Nats e wiri, wiri ." 129. E watseni Ar sa wa ma re. Mwi sa kele e wa wa wan mwi re pwi rewts i Lebon Sa . 130. E wa , "Tutu, pu rew tsi a lew! Po t s i ri wa n i piiloh nats ok pw i sa ." 131. E wa , "Nats e wiri, wi r i ." E watseni, e rna I) a -tan, e re n'dan. 132. Lebor iweriv e wa , lOPe rewtsi kami niauk wor ." Mw i sa kele. Mw i sa kele mi wa wa wa wan, 133. mw i re pi rewts i Lebon Sa. Lebon Sa , "0, tuu, pu rewts i a lew! 134 . Po tsiri wa ni wan puoh nats ok pwi sa." E tsiri wa ni wan. E wa , "Nats, e wi ti, wiri." E sa-sare I) a-tan. 135. E wa , lOPe rewtsi kam i ni-auk wor ." E sa ke le, e wa wa wan kele mwi sa kele. 136. Mwi sa-sa mwi re-rol)e pwi rewtsi Lebon Sa . 196 TALE K

lebon Sa e wa "Tutu, pu rewtsi a. 137 . Po tsiri wa ni wan piiloh nats ok pwi sa .... E watseni e-sal)awiil . 138. Ko lebon Sa e wa "n i-ar a- a-a-a----ol ." Ar sa-sa, ar sa-sa wa re tawo sa. Mar ha sa . 139. Mar hasa e wa wa wa wa wan a. Mu Iu. lebon Sa mwi hasa kele. lebon Sa e wa , "Ni-ar a-a-a-a----weldra." 140. Ni-ar a mu wledra luha. leboreiweriv e watsen buri balan. E lek watsi. 141. Inir ar wa la- wala watsin, ar mul wa tsln. 142. Ar se nu-mbo: "Ruele, kami ka mul wa-ta, Kia womu , ruel, kru-u-u , ruele kru-u-u." E Iu.

TRANSLAT ION

Their mother was a stone. She had ten sons. The one that was born first was cal led Le-bon the Tenth, then came Le-bon the Ninth, then Le-bon the Eighth, Le-bon the Seventh, Le-bon the Sixth, Le-bon the Fift h, Le-bon the Four th, Le-bon the Third, Le-bon the Second, and finally the youngest, Le-bon the First. - One day they were chasing fish by surrounding them and dr iving them into a spot where they could spear them from all sides at once . This they repeated at intervals all round the coast of Atchin, and thus caught ten fi sh. And as they were coming back they met with an old woman and her granddaughter. The granddaughter was covered with sores and was scraping (and washing) them by the sea. But they all passed her by, with the exception of Le-bon the First, who came last and was carrying the fi sh. When he came up with them, he gave one of the fi sh to the old woman and her granddaughter . And the old woman said to him "Do you recognise us ? When my granddaughter grows old enough, you shall marry her. You have stayed behind (and taken notice of us), but the others have gone on without caring. " The brothers all went home and grated bananas for a pudding. And they counted up the fish, bu t could find only nine. One of them said "Hi ! There should have been one fish here for each of us". Then Le-bon the Tenth said "What has happened to these fish? Has one been dropped? Let us count them again. Where is the one that is missing ?" Then Le-bon the First said "I gave it to that old woman and her granddaughter. " Le-bon the Tenth said "So you want to copu late with her? Then there wi ll be no food for you ". Le-bon the First rep l ied, "Yes. That is all right. I wi ll . , just do wit�out". They cooked the fi sh, and when they had fi nished _ eating, Le-bon the Te nth said "There is still day light [?there are , still plenty of days?]; let us go chasing fi sh again. " And they chased TALE K 197

fish again at intervals round the coast of Atchin. And again they caught ten fi sh. And when they again came back to the point whence they had started, there were the old woman and her granddaughter, still there. And again they all passed them by, excepting for Le-bon the First, who came last, and the old woman said to him "Hi ! (Look at) this girl to whom you gave the fi sh!" He (looked and) said "You (wonder-maker, can it be true?) " She said "Indeed". He said "But she has suddenly become a young wo man ", and the old woman said "A h! Because I poulticed her body where it was sore, and the sores are all gone . You go ahead, and I will bring her to you (in marriage )". He said "Good. Let me first go and te ll my elder brothers. And he went and said to them "Elder brothers, you saw that old woman?" They said "Yes, younger brother". Then Le-bon the Tenth said "My word, younger brother, there was a young woman with her too . One of us should marry her". Le-bon the First said "Elder brothers, let me te ll you some thing ". They said "Very we ll, you te ll us. " And he said "Elder brothers, the old woman wants me to marry her". Then Le-bon the Tenth said "Oh! You think you are a fine fe llow then! But how abou t us ? We are fine too! Have you been arrogating yourself above us?" Le-bon the First answered "Indeed, the old woman said tha t I shou ld marry the girt. She told me so . " Le-bon the Tenth said (schemingly) "A ll right, go and appoint the day when you shall marry her. " So Le-bon the First went and said to the old woman "I wi ll marry the girl ten days from today. You bring her then". When the time came, she brought her. And Le-bon the Tenth brought a re-entrant-tuske r, Le-bon the Ninth a curved tusker, Le-bon the Eighth a crescent-tusker, Le-bon the Seventh a tusker of the grade called e wish-wish, Le-bon the Sixth a tuske r of grade I iw-sheren, Le-bon the Fifth one of the grade ca lled buho pal -pale, Le-bon the Fourth a buho I iv-tov, of which the tusk had only just erupted, Le -bon the Third a buho lep-Iep, Le-bon the Second a tee thing pig, and Le-bon the First a newly-weaned pig. That made ten pigs in all (the pigs being graded in size from the largest, supplied by the eldest brother, Le-bon the Tenth, to the smallest supp lied by Le-bon the First). Then Le-bon the Tenth (who had thus arranged matters) said "It wou ld appear seemly that I only should marry her, since it is I who have brought the largest pig. We have paid the fu ll price, and I will marry her ". But the girl did not want to marry Le-bon the Tenth.

She wfnted to go wi th Le-bon the First. And indeed she went with Le-bon the First, to his house, and the rest retired to their own houses. And they said among themse lves "But he is only a chi ld. Why shou ld he marry her? We who are grown men, let one of us have her ". 198 TALE K

And they said to Le-bon the Tenth "Elder brother. let us play some trick on him. so that he die. then one of us shall marry her. " Le-bon the Tenth said "Yes. very good ". So they went to the shore. and went afloat in their canoe and sailed till they saw a clam-shell with its valves gaping . And they said "That is good". Then they paddled back home and came and saw Le-bon the First. and said "He llo! Le-bon the First! " And they said "Come with us ". He said "Where to ?". and they replied "Let us go down to the shore and go afloat in our canoe . But that girl had better stay behind". Le-bon the First said "Go on. I will fo llow you ". So they went. and he spoke to the girl. saying "You stay here. And when you see that they have tricked me. and when you see a parrot fly past. then hang yourself. hang yourself so that you die. Bu t I wi ll come back and see you and it wi ll be all right. And they went. and paddled. and paddled ti ll they arrived at the place where they had seen the clam-she ll with its valves gaping . And they said "Let one of us dive down ". Le-bon the Tenth said "I wi ll". and he dived. but played a trick (whi le fe igning to dive down to the clam-she ll he in fact) swam under water in a different direc tion. When he came uP. he said "Younger brothers. one of you dive too ". So Le-bon the Ninth dived. and swam under water in a different direction . Then Le-bon the Eighth did the same. and so on. each of the nine elder brothers diving in turn. but all avoiding the clam-shell. ti ll it came to the turn of Le-bon the First. who asked "Elder brother. when I dive. what shall I do ?" Le-bon the Tenth answered "Dive down (to the clam shell). bu t do not touch it. but just stick your tongue into it". And he dived. and stuck his tongue into the clam-she ll. and the clam-she ll snapped it off. so that he died. And he died. and lay inside the clam shell. Then his elder brothers. in their haste to ge t back to land. wielded their paddles with such force that they almost broke. Each one said "I wi ll marry her ". and. having landed. they ran . Le-bon the Te nth was first. but when they arrived at Le-bon the First 's house they found the girl had hanged herself. Then Le-bon the Tenth said "Go home now. all of you. She has hanged herse lf. She whom we all wanted to marry is dead". So they all went to their respective houses. Then Le-bon the Tenth and his eight brothers went and saw the girl 's grand mother. and he said "That girl is dead". She said to herself "Indeed? I wi ZZ go down and see how she died". (So she went down alone to see the girl. ) And she broke off four canes and heated them by waving them over a fire. And she struck her with one of the canes. bu t she did not move. Then she took the second cane and struck her with it. but again she did not move. Then she took the third cane and struck her TALE K 199

wi th it. and as she struak. the girZ stirred. FinaZZy she took the fo urth aane and struak her wi th that. and as she struak the girZ rose. and stood upright . And the grandmo ther said "Why have you done this?� and the girZ said "I hanged myse Zf beaause they triaked Le-bon the First into going wi th them to the shore. They aame and saw him here. and he toZd me to hang myseZf so that I died. But he means aZZ the same to aome baak and see me. " And they two remained together. And Le-bon the First aame in with the rising tide. for the aZam-she ZZ gaped again and Zet him out. so that he swam ashore. And he aame and found the girZ and her grand mother sitting together. And she said "Hi ! Where have you aome fr om?" And he said "They aZZ pZayed a triak on me ". She said "How did they triak you?" and he rep Zied "By means of a aZam-she ZZ. They proposed we shou Zd aZZ dive in turn . They aZZ swam under water in another direation. but when it was my turn to dive. they aZZ wanted me to stiak my tongue into it . And it bit off my tongue. And they aZZ paddZed ashore here. wishing to marry the girZ". She said "Indeed?" Then the grandmother said "Don 't fo ZZow them Zest they try to triak you again. They wanted to marry this girZ. but that time they met us on the shore they refused to give her any fish. But you gave my granddaughter a fi sh. and I made up my mind that when she grew up you shouZd marry her ". Now the nine eZder brothers were aZZ gathered together. and they heard two peop Ze ta Z king in Le-bon the First 's house . And Le-bon the Tenth said "Le- bon the Seaond. peep in and see who those two are who are ta Zking in Le-bon the First 's house . The girZ is dead. so what two peop Ze aan be taZ king there?" Le-bon the Se aond peeped in. and ran baak. saying "Eh : EZder brother. eh!". and he said "It is even Le-bon the First and that girZ sitting and taZking together". Then Le-bon the Tenth said "Let us triak them again. how aan we manage so that one of us may marry her ?". and one of the others said "Ye s. Zet us triak him again somehow ". And they aZZ went to Le -bon the First 's house. and Le-bon the Tenth said "HeZZo! Who are you two who are ta Zking ?" Le-bon the First answered "Just we two. " His eZder brother said "But where have you aome from ?� and he repZied "The tide aame in and the vaZves of the aZam -she ZZ gaped and I just swam baak here". Le-bon the Tenth exaZaimed "Indeed?" When they were gone again. the girZ 's grandmother warned Le-bon the First. saying "Do not fo ZZow them. for aZas! they wi ZZ aZway s want to triak you. for they want to marry the girZ" . Next day Le-bon the Tenth said "Le-bon the First. heZZo! Come to the shore with us!" He objeated "It is raining heaviZy� but Le-bon the Tenth said "There are pZenty of 200 TALE K

holes in the trees by the shore. We can take she lter in them". And the grandmother again �arned him, saying "If it should happen that you all go inside anything, you take care to go last". They all �ent to the shore although the rain �as pouring, and they �ent, and ran, and entered into a ho le in the trunk of a bahuru tree . They all climbed in one after the other, but just as Le-bon the First �as about to climb in the bahuru tree closed round them, leaving Le-bon the First outside. And they all �ept. They �ept greatly, inside the bahuru tree . And Le-bon the First came back home, and said "We all �ent to the shore, and the bahuru tree closed round them (ate them all up ) on the shore. But I remained outside, and came back here ". And the old �oman said "Don 't keep on fo l lo�ing them. They al�ays �ant to trick you, alas! When they went, I told you not to fo llow them". And he said "I feel sad for my dear brothers, whom I have always gone about with". So she said "If you want to, we wi ll go and see them. " And so they went, he and the grandmother and the gir l, they three went, and heard how the nine brothers all wep t, how they wept inside the bahuru tree . And Le-bon the Tenth called out "Younger brother, dear, we are all dy ing . The bahuru tree has closed around us". Then the girl's grandmother spoke to Le-bon the First, saying "Do you want them to come out?", and he said "Ye s, I want them to come out safe ly". So the old woman chanted an incantation. And when she had finished singing the song, Le-bon the First ran circ ling round the base of the bahuru tree, and having circled round and round it he stamped on the tree, and the bahuru tree opened up and the nine brothers jumped out. And the girl 's grandmother said "Ha ! You keep on playing tricks on Le-bon the First. Now you have found what you de served. You have seen how the bahuru tree closed round you. We re it not for him, you wou ld have died there . It was a good thing for you that he stayed outside and acted so that you are still alive. " So that episode ended. And the old woman departed, saying "Do 'nt play any more tricks on Le-bon the First, but go about your business decently ". And one d�, when the,y were walking about they met Le-bor-i-�e -riv, who had big ears. He said "Younger brothers, �here are you coming from ?" They said "Oh, we are just wa lking about", and he said "Come wi th me, and let us cook a meal together ". So they all went and came to Le-bor-i-we-riv 's house, and he said �You cook. You light a fi re and cook". They lit the oven inside his house. And Le-bon the First stayed by the side-wall, and as he was about to pick up some firewood to he lp light the fire he caug ht sight of Le -bor-i-we-riv 's club which he ha d hidden there. But he held his peace, saying "I will go and TALE K 201

fetch some yams ", and with this excuse said to Le-bon the Tenth, "Elder brother, if we don 't look out he wi ll club us to death and wi ll eat us all up, even today ". Le-bon the Tenth said "Indeed?" Then again he said "Younger brother, are you speaking the truth?" He said "Yes, r am speaking the truth". The elder brother said "Younger brother, wha t shall we do ? Let 's run away ". So they all ran away, and, (taking their cue from Le-bon the First) cut bamboos of a kind called pul oh, ten of them, and each brother carried one section. Then they asked "Younger brother, what shall we do with them?" And he again to ld them, and they co llected blac k stinging ants of a kind ca lled nats, and put them into th. bamboos, and went on col lecting them till all the bamboos were ful l. Then Le-bor-i-we-riv, seeing they were gone, said "They were in here just now, where have they gone ?� and he heaved up his club, cursing and saying "Let them lie with their mothers ". And as they ran he chased them. He chased them hot ly till, to escape, they all climbed up a niar tree. Le-bon the Tenth climbed first, then Le-bon the Ninth, then Le-bon the Eighth, and so on, Le-bon the First coming last. And as Le-bor-i-we-riv was about to strike him down Le-bon the First cried out "Oh! Elder brothers, he will kill me. Pour out one of your bamboo-fulls of ants ". So one of them poured out his bamboo-fu ll of ants, saying "A nts, sting him, sting him, sting him, sting him, sting him " Le-bor-i-we -riv fe ll do wn, and Le-bon the First climbed higher. But Le-bor-i-we-riv said "r wi ll club you yet. Where have you got to, that r may club you?" And he was again about to strike at Le-bon the First when Le-bon the Te nth cried out "One of you pour out his bamboo-full of ants on him � and again one of the brothers poured out his bamboo-fu ll of ants, saying "Ants, sting him, sting him .... " Le-bor-i-we -riv fe ll down again, and the brothers all climbed higher . Bu t again he climbed up after them, and was again about to club Le-bon the First, when he cried out nOh, Elder brothers, he would strike me again. Pour out another bamboo-full of ants� and yet another brother poured out his quota of ants, saying "Ants, sting him, sting him ... ", and he fe ll down again. Bu t again he climbed, higher and ever higher, till he was again about to strike Le-bon the First, and he cried out "Elder brothers, alas! he is about to strike me . Pour out another bamboo-fu ll of ants". And yet another brother poured out his bamboo-fu ll, saying "A nts, sting him, sting him ... ", and Le-bor-i-we-riv again fe ll down right down to the ground. But he said "r will kill him ye t� and again climbed up . And he climbed, and climbed, and climbed ti ll he was again about to strike him, when Le-bon the First again cried out nOh, elder brothers, he wou ld ki ll me, alas! • 202 TALE K

Pou� out anothe� bamboo -fu ZZ of ants" . And yet anothe� b�o the� pou�ed

out his bamboo-futt, saying "Ants, sting him, sting him .... "

Le-bo�-i-we -�iv again cZimbed down to the g�ound so that he might shake

off the ants, but again said "I wi tt ki tt att of you yet ". And again

he cZimbed up and up and up, and kept on cZimbing, meaning to ki ZZ

Le-bon the Pi�s t. And Le-bon the Pi�st again c�ied out "EZde� b�othe�s,

he wouZd kiZZ me . Pou� out ano the� bamboo-fu ZZ of ants" .... And so

it continued, tiZZ Le-bo�-i-we-�iv had fa ZZen down ten times.

Then Le-bon the Pi�st said to the t�ee "N iar t�ee, a-a-a-, sp�ing

back! " (f�om which it is evident that the t�ee ha d p�eviousZy been

caused to bend) . And it sp�ang back, and Le -bo�-i-we -�iv fe ZZ down

and b�oke his Zegs. The�e he �emained, whi Ze they �an away, and

escaped, singing . Tha t is the end.

•

• •

•

• 203

TALE L: THE SLAY ING OF lAS

(?From Ta-maewo , through Mel teg-lek.)

1. Mwi ra l el, e-re Tsan e1. Mw i rew-rewtsi tsUnob. Ror in mw i tsats . E wa Senhar. E rewtsi tsUnob I)a-in. 2. E rna Em il Parav, e rewts i tsUnob I)a- in. E wa Em il Marur. e rew tsi ts·unob I)a-in. 3. E wa Em il Lap, e rewtsi tsUnob I)a-in. las ini I)a-tan Lamare. 4. Mi wahal row, we-re wanu ok tsile. Mwi rewtsi tsile. 5. Ma-ma l-mari , Ma l-mal -oba , miran e wa , "Natuk, ram ral ni-el ko las rorin e tsats. 6. E-wise mu ro rew-rewtsi tsUnob? Kom ter-ter wu e-tsiga? Kob tori pini. 7. Ra re-rol) ikir ni-wa pwi lap re no-ur el, a mu ror mw i tsa ts. Kob tori pini". 8. Mal -ma l-mari, Ma l -ma l -oba e wa . Po ho n'ai samam , ne-sar samam. Sa ne-sar e-ru ko nai sa . 9. Mal -mal-ma ri i-san ne-sar e-ru n'ai sa. Mal-mal-oba ne-sar e-ru ko n'ai sa ." 10. Ko mirar e sisen na-hases pitewir, ko e lai pitewi r. Mal -ma l -oba e wa , "Ina no ter-ter ." 11. Mal -mal-mari e wa , "Ina no ter-ter ." E wa , lOPe, po lek I)a-ok. 12 . Ko kia nob te lasi las." Mor wiel mor rna , mor wofi ne-sar sar, n ,-al.. sar. 13 . Mor wiel , mor wan, mor lasi las a miran mwi lek. E wa , "Ha i ! Ko k ia n 0 r e nob I as ina -sup a I)a -tan. " 14 . E wa , "Ko re p i wi se?" E wa , "E-tsiga. No re nob lasi ko pu-rol)." 15. E wa , "Kob luha. Ko no lasi kami e fu, ko po luha. las e rorin e tsats." 16. E . wa , "10 , ko kia no re nob I·as· I." E wa , "Kom lasi a e fu, ko kam ' kob luha." 17 . Or se luha teo Or tur tser . E wa , "Kia no re nob lasi las." 18. E wa , "Kob lek ok, ko ina pe lasi las." Mu wa la e wan, mwi lasi las Onema . Mi mer-merir. 19. E wa , "las, po e rna po wa la pwi ser-ser." lOPe wi se?" 20. "E! Po rna, po lasi n�-n� rar sa e-ru." "Ko i n i r n e -m be?" "Ko in i r ne I)a-hi:m. Po wa la piw ser-ser . pwi ser- ser." 21. las mu wa la e rna mw i lasi mor lak La-mare. "Were-wereko tasik were-werek! Ko kom m'ok wiel I)a-mbe Ie? 22. Me se lasi kami te tua ok. Kom rna ra le-Iek te I)a-el lolo'm." 23. Ko e wa , "Tasik, kob wa he ate." lnir mwi sa mi wahe. Mu ror pu hi . 24 . E row wa wo fe ni. lnir mw i sa mi wahe. Mu ror pu hi . Mwi re pu tor toni. 25. E row wofe n i . "Es! las, po se kete te pi-p'ok. Na-hut e lap ne-re batum. Ra wahe wa." 26. Ar-ru I)aor wa , "Tutu, ikir ra wa hama I. Ra wiel La-mare. 27 . Ra mer-mer ir re ma lUn ni-mbek. E wa , "10, ko mak, ra wan. 28. Mar wan ko wa tsin ko Mal-ma l -mari e wa "lkir I)a-tan, ra lek re ma lUn ni-mbek e1 ." 29. E wan ko wa tsin ko Mal -mal-ma ri e wahe . Ko e tsal i nl na-hases a re batun. E bub toni. 30. Ko e wi reni na-hases pitew Mal -ma l-oba . Mal -ma l-ma ri e tsali batun. 31. Mal �ma l -oba e bub °toni re ni-mbek. Mal-mal-mar i mw i tsali batun , 32 . ko e wiren i bUl)on hases pitew Mal-ma l-oba. Mal -ma l-oba e tsal i e to re ni-mbek a. 204 TALE L

Mal-ma l-mari e tsal i, 33. ko las ini ma tan e Iu, O! Mor tsa-tsali, mor tsal i tsile. Mal-mal-ma ri mwi tsal i tsile. 34 . Mal-ma l -oba e wa , "E Iu k01" Mal -mal-mari e wa , "10. Ko Ikir ko." E wa , "Ro mu l te." 35. Mor mara ma woI. las mw i re pi mara ma woI . 36. Na-hases a mu hu

to-toni re batun . Mal -ma l-mari e sa r i • Mu ru-ru-ruwon i we ok. Mal-ma l -oba e sa r i . 37. Mor sari tsi Ie ok ko mor rewtsi ko watsin, mor rewtsi pin i mi ma ts. E matur I)a-in. 38. Or par-pa r i na-mbwe . Senha r e ma , Em i I Parav e ma , Em i I Marur e ma, Em il Lap e mao 39. Mal- ma I -ma r i , Mal-mal -oba m i rar e ma o Mal-mal -oba mi ran e rets pitew las miran, 40. e wa , "Na-tum rorin mwi tsats, Ram ra l mw i res. Ror i n mwi tsats. Mu ro rew-rewtsi tsunob. 4l. Ko I k i r tsunob Ie pu ro we . ROar ikir pwi lap I)a-tan re no-ur el, I)a mu ro ketete tsunob. 42. Ko e-res ko wor natuk mor rewts i." las miran e wure i Mal -ma l-mari Mal -ma l-oba, ' 43. "Ko kami , kom rewtsi, ko kab ta-tal i, kob wan, kob tawn i. Ina me tara. Kam i, kob ta-ta Ii, kob wan, kob tawn i. 44 . E I u watsin. Ra ral pwi res watsin. Ka re kab kete ni-se wats in, kab kete watsin." E Iu. 45. Ko mi mats woIe ni no-ur el. E Iu . Or tawni, ko or lai siw-siw nen e-sal)awul. E Iu .

TRANSLATION

la s used to Live and go about his business here on Atohin, and he spent his time kiLLing peopLe, for his mind was bad . He went to Sen-har, and kiL Led peop Le there, he went to Em iL Parav, and ki LLed peop Le there, he went to Em iL Marur and kilLed peop Le there . He Lived even here, at La-mare. He made war on them aLl, against aLL these plaoes, and he kiUed them aU. One day the mother of Ma L -ma L-mari and Ma L-ma L-oba said "My sons, we Live and go about our business here, but la s 's mind is bad. Why does he want to keep on kiLling people? We know there are on ly so many of us on this isLand, bu t we do nothing abou t it. His mind is bad. You two catch him once and for alL " Ma L-mal-mari and Ma L -maL -oba said "Very well, do you make oLubs for us, and spears for us, for each one of us two spears and one club, for Ma L-ma L -mari two spears and a club, and for Ma L-ma L-oba two spears and a cLub ". She did so, and their mother aLso twined a rope for them, and gave it to them. Ma L ma l-oba said "I, I am brave", and Ma L-mal-mari said "I, too, am brave", and he said "Mo ther, you stay here, and we wiLL go and seek out las ". They set out and oame, bearing their spear s and cLubs . And they de parted and came and found la s 's mother where she Lived. And he said "Hi ! We two wan t to see the old man of this pLace ". She asked "Why ?", TALE L 205

and he answered "Nothing, we just want to see him ". She said "You two go back. l have seen enough of you. Go back. Ias 's mind is bad". He answered "Yes, but we want to see him � but she said "l have seen enough of you. Go back". But they did not go back. They stayed there. And again he said "We want to see Ia s". So she said "A ll right. Stay here . l will go and find him ". She ran, and came and fo und Ia s cooling himself under the trees at Onema, and said "las, come, run quickly". He said "Why ?", and she said "Hi ! Come and see two things that can be made into fo od for us". He said "Where are they?", and she rep lied "They are at home . Run quickly, quickly. " So las ran and came and saw those two at La-mare, and said "Dear little younger brothers, dear little things. Where have you come from? l have not seen you for so long. Come , let us sit down toge ther here, indoors". And he enticed them close to him, saying "Younger brothers, wi ll you please take the lice out of my hair ?" So one of them sat down to de-louse him, and, as he di d so, las turned to grab hold of him, but he jumped clear of him. Then the other sat down to de -louse him, and las turned to grab him too, but he too jumped clear of him, saying "las, do not do that. Your head is fu ZZ of lice. Do let us get them out", for the two brothers for their own purposes also wanted to get close to him. Bu t they di d not want to do it inside his house, so they said "Elder brother, let us go to the dancing-ground. Let us go to the dancing-ground at La-mare, and coo l ourse lves in the shade of the banyan tree there. " He agreed, saying "Veri well, you lead the way, and we will go ". So they all went, and Ma l-mal-mari said "Let us sit down here, and stay in the shade of this banyan tree. " Then Ma l-ma l mari again looked for lice in Ias 's hair, and (under cover of this operation) tied the rope which his mother had made for him to Ias 's head, and jerked it tight and threw the other end of it to Ma l-mal-oba. Ma l-ma l-mari tied it to his head and Ma l-mal-oba made it fast to the banyan tree . Thus it was that Ma l-mal-mari tied the rope to las 's head and threw the other end of it to Ma l-mal-oba, and that Ma l-mal-oba made it fast to the banyan tree so that it would not move. Whi le Ma l-ma l-mari was tying the rope to his head, las was trying to lull their fears by shutting his eyes, pretending to doze. And the two brothers tied the two ends of the rope tighter and tighter, till they were ready . At last Ma l-mal -mari had finished tying. Then Ma l-mal -oba whispered "A re you ready?" Ma l-mal-mari whispered "Yes. Now is our time ". Then he said to las "Now let us go ". And they two rose to their fe et and stood upright. las, too, wanted to rise and catch them, but the rope was fast to his head so that he could not move. And 206 TALE L

Ma L-ma L-mari 8peared him. pieraed him in many pLaae8. Like thi8 [the narrator demonstrates] . And Ma L-ma L-oba speared him. And when they had finished 8pearing him they aLubbed him with aLubs. 80 that he died. And there he Lay. Then they beat the gong8. and the men of Sen-har aame. and the men of EmiL Parav and the men of Emi L Marur and the men of Em iL Lep. The mother of Ma L-maL -mari and of Ma L-ma L-oba aame too. and spoke to Ia8 's mother. saying "Your 80n 's mind was mad. We aLL Lived peaaabLy. but his mind was bad. and he was aLways seeking to kiLL peopLe. Bu t we aL80 are human beings. We 8houLd be a numerOU8 peop Le on this isLand. bu t he was the who Le time wanting to harm U8. SO it i8 good that my 80n8 have at La8t 8Lain him. " And Ia 8 's mo ther 8poke to Ma L-maL -mari and Ma L-ma L-oba. saying "Si nae you two have 8Lain hi m. now wrap him up and go and bury him. I am grown oLd. You two then wrap him up and go and bury him. It i8 aLL over now. Now we oan Live in peaae. Wha tever now you want to do. you wi LL be abLe to do it wi thout interferenae." That is the end. He died just so. here on this i8Land. That i8 the end. They two buried him. and pLaaed ten grave- 8tones round hi8 grave. The end. . 207

TALE M: THE END OF LA-MARE AND THE FOUNDATION OF THE EXISTING VILLAGES

1. Re-I)a l)a-hUt mwi tai lewere e wa , "Na-vUl ok mwi sa, ko. 2. Ka wan ko ka re maki e pal ne-I)a Tsan. Na-vul mwi sa , ko kab wa , lORa wa Tsan, ra lasi maki." 3. Ram le-lek mu se parav te, ka re ra wan ra lasi maki. Na-vii l ok mwi sa I)a e re p'ok kisen. 4. No sale rOI) ni-auk. E-pe na-riv wanu le-lek ko pu-rol) . 5. Mu wotsanir ne-re labwen wew ko pu-rol) sa , ko ka m'ok wiel salar ka wan, ka re kab lasir. 6. Mar rOl)e retsan san m i ma . Ar wa , "E wuretun . Ko ra wotsan i k i r Ie pu-rol) we. 7. Ko maki m'pal mw i ser-ser . E se Jowur ikir te, ko e wurei mata-mata ko pu-rol)." 8. Ko Senha r ko mwi lil-dror e wie ni- wat san, e wa Senhar, 9. Emi 1 Para v ar weh i ni-wat san Em i 1 Parav . Em il Marur ar weh i e wan. Em il Lap e wehi ni-wat san e wan. 10. l)a- el ar wehi , ar wehi La-mare e ma re Buok. E Ju.

TRANSLATION

The men of the mainland ta lked among themselves. and one said "Every month you want to go and see a Maki sacrificed on Atchin. Then another month come s. and again you say 'Let us go to Atchin to witness a Ma ki '. After a little whi le you want to go and see another. After another month has passed it is the same again. I am always having to go there. The men of Atchin are like a rat staying always in one place, gathering its family together under the roots of a single pandanus tree, and you are always going to the same place to see them. " The men of Atchin heard what he said, and answered "It is true. We all ga ther together in one place, and Maki is continua lly being sacrificed there. He is not speaking disrespectfully of us. He is only saying what he has observed. " So the men of Sen-har dragged away their stones and set them up in Sen-har, and the men of Emi l Parav dragged theirs to Em il Parav, and the men of Em il Marur dragged away theirs also, so did the men of Emi l Lep. The men of Ruruar dragged theirs from La-mare here to Buok. That is the end. 20B

TALE N: RETS EXPELLED FROM PWETER-TSUT S

1. Rets e wa l ' toni na-to . E wa l' ton i to-bati . Mu ror-po e tsal i ni-mal. 2. E sa ron i re ni-ar. E wa-wan mare. Na-to I)ae sakel re n i -ma 1. E tsal i wan na-hases re ni-mal a. E tuhuni. 3. N i-Ial ) mw i lai . Le-rets mwi la fowu l. Mi mara ror-pol), mu rorak. 4. Rets mu tuhuni ni-mal a mi wan. Ni-lal) mwi ts iri. Mu row ron i mi wan. E wa- wan fowu l. 5. Mu rOl)e na-to mwi tarer e-re ni-ma l S. Mwi ror we mare. Mwi lasi na-to I)a. 6. Rets mi wehi luha ni ni-mal. Mi ma , mi ma 7. Pweter -tsuts. E pur-pur ni-mal S. E tai toni na-to watsi, e ra l. Ini e wa lao E wa e-hut . E fu ko e h�f Urari . Mi wan e lasi win a mwi 1 ek. B. Le-rets mwi lek re bakor Urarl. E wa , "Hai! Ko ini k." "10. Ina Ie me ma. 9. No lasi na-na Ie sa ko me wa la me ma ." E wa , "Ko lasi ni-se?" 10. "No lasi na-to Ie sa ko me wa la me ni-Ie." Or tabe na-ak a wa e-hut. Or ta I) a-hut ko or wiel . 11 . Or wa Bw�t-narer tsi matuan. Or lek I) a- in. Or tabu I)a-in. Or le-Iek no-ut pOI). 12 . E rere liwet ko or ma I)a la. Mor fu. Mor ma re ne-hi:m san. Ko or li-lits hore watsin. 13 . Mwi lek lolo'm a. Mwi le-Iek fUhav sa. Mar lek-lek- lek. Mar bets-betselehi. 14 . Mw i-tsa. Ar wa , "E he-mbe? E mats ni-ok fopon." Mar kete matsan na :n. Matsan na:n e fu. 15. Ko i,nir ar re e mats ko wa tsin. Ko tasin inir, tasin ar liw-l iwe na-riv, ko inir samwi liw. 16. Ne-li w e wa lolo'm. Le-rets e lai ne-liw, e lek roni. 17. Tas in e wa , "Tutu, pe asi wa lolo'm si tutufar?" Ar wa , "Es! Pw i-tsa te o Po se wan teo lB . Tutufar mw i sere hore ne-hi:m san." E wa "10; pe rubatsi ko pe ar sere kele ko pu-rol), pi pe I)a mwi sere." 19. Mu rubatsl mw i has wa lolo'm. 20. Mwi lasi win a mw i lek. Ko inik, ko lek ni-el pu- rol)." E wa , "10." 21 . "Matsa na:m mu fu". E wa , "Ia?". E wa , "No rOl)e ko" . Mu luha, wa tsal i 1 ko watsin. 22 . Mwi sere ke le ne-hi : m a. E wa , "Tutu, pe wurei na-na sa." Ar wa , "Ni -se?" 23. Ar wa . E wa , "Ko Le-rets a mwi lek ne lolo'm Ie pu-rol)." Ar wa , "Es!" 24 . Ar wa , "Ko lasi ta-mats wu e-tsiga?" E wa , "Es ! Ko ini. 25. Se-re ina tipwis pwi ka ra-karas . No wuretun." Ar lek e raY-raY, ko timan e ma I)a-hut . 26. Winberis e ma I)a -hut. Ar tabu. Tas i n e wa, "Tutu, pe wure i n�-n� I)a?" 27 . Ko tutu fan e ha tsi tsul)on, "Ko po se wurei te." Timan a ini mwi lasi. 2B . E wa , "Ai! Mwar' ok ere pu wurei ni-se?" E wa , "E-tsiga." E wa , "10 , ere pu wurei na-na ko sa. 29. A ko e-wise mo ha tsi tsul)on pitewi ? Mo re pu se wurei teo Sa e fowur i kami?" 30. E wa , "Ts iga." E wa , "E! Kob wurei." E wa , "E re pu wurei nl-se?" 31 . Win a ko pu-rol). E re pu wurei Le-rl1 ts ko pu-rol)." E wa , "E-wise?" 32. E wa , "Ini ni-auk pu- Ikir ram kete na-woni matsan na:n. 33. Ikir ram wurei I) a e mats. TALE N 209

Ram kete matsan." Timan e wa "Natuk, ko wuretun? Ini ni-ok pu-rol)?" 34. E wa "10." "Ini ne-mbe?" E wa , "Ne-I)a hi :m si Rets." 35. E wa , "E!" E wa , "Mwar ' a e lal)a Ie. Ikir ra re tsunob." E wa tsal i1. E fowuri miran, 36. e wa , "Ko pepe ni-se Ie? Mo pepe tsunob sa lal) a mu ror mwl tsats." 37 . Miran e wa , "Ko Rets e ma I)a-hut pin?" E wa , "Tsiga. Ini ne-I)a huut wor ." 38 . "Kab te mak ra wa n ra lasi ." Mi wan mwi tigeisi mal il). Mwi lasi Le-rets mw i lek. 39. E wa , "Aru! Natuk mpepe na-won i kami. 40. Kom lal) alal), kom kete na-na e tsats." Pal u- ulen my u to wof-wofe. E wa "Kob wala, kob wiel . 41. So Ie te I)a-el. Kom ror e stats, Ko b wiel." Mar tu-tu-tuloni Pwet er-tsuts. 42. Re-I)a Olep ar wa , "Rets a e wie1 ." E wiel mi ma Olep ar se rets to pitewi . 43. E tsovha mwi re pu h�fi, ko Bel -were-were e wa "Hai! Po te tur ok". 44. E wa , "E! Tasik no ror e stats, pe wie1 . Mar kon-toni a, mar re pe wie1 ." 45. E wa , "10, ko ina pi e "tutufak" te inik. Wi n ok pi ok te na-hi :m, pi e re ne-hi:m sa." 46. E lai tama uw ru e wul ni humbwen. E twi -tiwei. E wofi batun ma Pweter-tsuts . 47 . Ko ar ro pwi tsa ni. Ko e wurei tas in I)a-ta nen ke l bwet Lav . 48. E wa , "Pi e s�m batun tamauw ru, pi e s�m e row wanu ok." 49. Or wan, e kiki ni- tan pitewi . E wa, "Pi we s�m tsi le ko I)go'k. 50. No re par uroi batun tamauw-ru, ko ar ro pw i tsa. Ko inik, po uroi ko pi we s�m rowe wanu ok". 51. Ini , e fu , ko mwi lek tser Olep ko watsin. Mu kete n'amal san ko watsin Olep.

SUMMARY

Rets makes a kite and sends it , with a fowl on it, to Le-rets, who is married at Showul, as a love-gage . She , seeing it , come down to Urari, whither Ret s goes to join her . They spend the night at their mother 's brother 's village of Bwotnarer, but return at night to Rets's house on Atc hin , where she remains shut up for a year . Rets's younger brothers one day go shooting rats, and , an arrow fall ing into her enc losure, she is discovered. His father , Win-bweris, is furiou s. He does not , however , ki ll him , since it is the feast of Palu-ulen, but advises him to escape . They sound the gong-signal for the departing dead . As Ret s is passing through Olep he is accosted by Bel-were, who offers both him and Le-rets asylum. He consents, and Bel-were gives him a gelded curved-tusker for atonement . Ret s cut s it up and offer s the head to the men of Pweter-tsuts, but they refuse it. He then gives it to his younger brother , Lav , to eat , promis ing him all his land . Lav eats it and Rets gives him his land . Rets then goes to live at Olep , where he spends the rest of his life , and make s a dancing-ground . 210 TALE N

TRANSLAT ION

Ret8 courted hi8 8i8ter by mean8 of a fowl, a dapp led fowl. One day at daybreak he con8truc ted a kite . Then he climbed up into a ni-nar tree till he reached the top . And the fowl was sitting on the kite. And he tied the 8tring to the kite and 8ent it to her for a covenant. And the wind carried it away . Now hi8 sister Le -ret8 was married to a man of the main land village of Showu l, and that day she r08e up early in the morning to sweep the ground before her hou8e. And Ret8 8ent off the kite, and the wind blew it so that it flew, with the fowl on it, till it came to Showul. And Le-rets heard the fo wl crowing on the kite, and looked upward8 and 8aw that fowl. Then Rets pulled back the kite till it came to Pwe ter-tsuts. And he broke up the kite and let go the fow l, and the fo wl strutted away . Then he went down to the 8hore in order to cr08S over to the mainland, and paddled ti ll he came and landed at Urari . And when he go t there he found the girl waiting for him. Le-rets was waiting by the spring at Urari . He 8aid "Hello! So you have come ". She 8aid "Ye 8, I have come, I 8aw that thing you 8ent, and ran down here to meet you ". He asked "What was it you saw? ", and she an8wered "I even saw that fow l, and ran and came here ". And she he lped him carry his canoe a8hore . They carried it high up out of reach of the tide, and then we nt to the place called Bwo t-narer, where their mother '8 brother lived. And they 8tayed there, and cooked them8elve8 a meal. And they remained there ti ll it was dark. And at midnight went down to the 8hore and launched hi8 canoe and paddled over the 8trait to Atchin, and entered his hou8e un8een, and shut the do or. There 8he remained for a whole year. And her kinsmen waited, and wai ted, and wai ted, and 8earched and 8earched for her, but in vain . They 8aid "Where can she be ? She mU8t have died 80mewhere". And they performed the death rite8 called metsen for her . And after the dea th rite8 were over, and they all thought that 8he was dead, Ret8 '8 younger brothers one day went 8, hooting rat8. And it happened that a8 one of the younger brother8 was 8hooting, hi8 arrow fe ll inside Re t8 '8 hou8e enc l08ure. And Le-ret8 took it in8ide her hou8e, and kept it. And the younger brother 8aid "Elder brother8, 8hall I go inside our elder brother '8 hou8e ?" But they 8aid "No, you mU8t not. You mU8t not go in, for our elder brother has 8hut up his hou8e. " He said "I know, but all the 8ame I will go in and fetch my arrow, and shut up the do or again jU8t a8 he 8hut it so that he will not know ". And he undid the door, and went in8ide the hou8e, and found the girl sitting in8ide, and 8aid "So it i8 you! You have been here all the time!" She said "Ye8", TALE N 211

He said "But we have performed the dea th feast for you!" "Yes", she said, "I heard you doing it". He left her, and came outside, and closed up the house as he had found it, and went to his brothers and said "Elder brothers, let me tell you something ". They all said "What?� and he said "I found Le-rets, even she, sitting inside the house". And they all said "Don 't ta lk nonsense ", and continued "Have

you been seeing a ghost, 01' what?" But he rep lied "No . It was she herse lf. I am no chi ld that I shou ld be fooling you. I am te l ling the truth". They all waited till the evening, when their fa ther came back from his garden on the mainland. Win-bweris came back fr om the mainland, and when they had finished the evening meal the younger brother said "Elder brother, shall I tell him that thing?" But his brother bit his lip, meaning to say "Don 't tell him ". But their fa ther saw him doing it, and said "Hi ! Wha t does that fe llow want to say ?" He answered "No thing ", but their fa ther said "Indded he wants to tell me something. Why else did you bite your lip at him ? You don 't want him to telZ. Has anyone sworn you to silence?" The eldest brother rep lied "No ", so the fa ther said "Wel"l, speak, both of you. Wha t does he want to say?" Then the e"lder brother rep "lied "On "ly about that gir"l. He only wants to te ll about Le-rets. " The father said "What?" and he answered "Simp ly that she is there . We have performed her dea th feast in vain. We have been saying al"l the time that she was dead, and have performed the de ath feast for her, and she was here a"l"l the time. " The father said "My son, do you speak the truth? Is she indeed here ?" He answer ed "Yes ". Then he asked "Where is she ?", and he said "In Rets 's house". Their father exc laimed "Eh! " and then said "That fe llow . is demented. And we though� he was an ordinary man ". Then he went out into the outer (women 's) court, and swore at Rets 's mother, saying "What have you born me here? You have born me a demented son whose mind was wrong ". Then Rets 's mother said "Has Rets come home from the mainland yet?" He answered "No, he has not yet come back". Then he said to his sons "You "lead the way . Let us go and see her ". He went, and removed the do or-pane "l, and found Le-re ts sitting there, and said "A las! my wife has born you two in vain. You are demented. You have done a terrib"le thing ". 1 Now the feast of Pa lu-ulen was at hand, and he said to them "You 2 two escape (before worse befal"l you) . Depart. Do not stay here . Your

lNew Year feast of first-fruits, palolo and the return of the dead. 2Rets should normally have suffered the death penalty. The fact of his being let go appears to indicate a period of asylum, or at least unwillingness to kill, dur ing this feast . 212 TALE N

minds are wrong , and you must go ". And the men of Pwe ter-tsuts sounded the gongs with the signa l indicating the departure of the dead. And the men of Olep heard it, and said "Re ts is departing ". And he left Pwe ter-tsuts and came to Olep. But the men of Olep wo uld not speak to him. So he passed them in silence. But, as he was proceeding to the shore in order to get to the mainland, a man named Bel-were-were said "Hi ! Stay here !" But Rets said "Younger brother, I have been minded wrong, and must depart. They have sent me away, and want me to go ". Be l-were-were answered, saying "That is all right. Let it be as though I were your elder brother . Let the girl stay in this vi llage, even in my house". And he gave Rets a gelded curved-tusker for atonement, and Rets cut it up, and carried the head to pweter-tsuts, but the men of Pweter-tsuts refused it. Then he spoke to his younger brother, he who came last, the youngest, who was called Lav, saying "If you wi ll eat the head of this ge lded curved tusker, all my ground shall be yours ". They went together, and he marked out the ground for him, saying "A ll this, then, shall be yours. I wanted them to eat the head of the gelded curved- tusker, but they wo uld not. But you, you eat it, and all my land shall be yours ". That is the end of the story of Rets. The rest of his life he lived at Olep, and he made a da nc ing-ground for himse lf at Olep. 213

TALE 0: THE OCTOPUS , THE RAIL AND THE SHELL-FISH

(Second version; for other version, see Tale G. )

1. Midin mu tur mu so pep teo Mu to morl pwa i tara . Mwi lai wew san ko 2. mi wa la mi wat-wa t Lebwara� Marur. Mi wat-wat ko mu ro�e na- hit ko te-kau ko pila, inir e-tol . 3. Mar ar re-rakere. Ma r kete ni- wat mu tsov. Ko win a e wa , "I-se mu wi-tsov7 4. Po wiel we! Winberis e wa e-hut e to mor i pi ma ko ni-ok we ." 5. Mi wa -wan ko nl-wat a e tsov kele. "I-se mu wi-tsov7 Po wiel we! Winberis e to mor i pi ma." 6. Mwi lek- lek ko e to�e ni-wat a e tsov ke le. Ko i-si Ie ni m'ok wits7 7. Pe te lasi pa ." E wiel , wan mw i lasi na-hit mw i rerake pila, tekau. 8. Mar ar re-rakere. E wa , "A i! Kam i Ie pu-ro�, ka m'ok kete ni-wat mu tsov." E taibar i. 9. E wa , "Mwi re ka wurei ni-se, ko kab ar ma no-ut pu po� weral, ko kab wurei a ni." 10. E wa . E ma �a-hi:m. E ma a-hi :m ko wa tsin ko e wurei Winberis, 11. "Pe wure i na-na sa ." E wa , "Po wurei ni-se7" 12 . wa , "Tsunob sa e rets pitewim7" "E tsiga." E wa "No lasi tekau, na-hit, pila ar re-rakere �a-la." 13 . Ko ko tsibari wu e-tsiga7" E wa , "No tsibari." Ro wa , "E-res." 14 . E wa , "No re weral no-ut pu po�, ko mar re par wurei na-na pwl sa , 15 . Ko par ar wu rei a ni, wera l no-ut pu po�." No-ut m'bo� mor matur ko mar ma . 16. Ar wa , "Ko natum pwi sa�awul . Ko po se uroi kia teo Po pepe natun pwl sa�awul ." 17 . E wa , "Ko me tara Ie watsin." E wa , "10, po pepe natun pwi sa�awul ." 18. Mu ror-po� ko e wa Winberis, "Re-I)a ar a ni na-na sa. N�-n� �a me lasir, ar ma , ar wurei na-na sa." 19. "Ko ar wurei no-se7" "ar re-ro� natuk pwi sa�awul ." E wa , "Ko mo tara ko watsin." 20. E ar wa "10. Tahar ko. Mo lasir k07" Mu ar wureim ni k07 Ra te mat-mata. 21 . Win a m'pep, m'pep, ko m'pepe Rets . Ko Le- rets mu wor tsire. 22. Ko inir e-sa�awul , Lav, Awe , �0J, inlr e-lap. Natur mar la-lap ko wa tsin. 23. Ko ar wa Siu. Ko Winberis e wa , "Kab wa Slu, ko wanu masal ko �a-Siu. 24 . Ko kab ro-romi n�-n� �a mirami mu wurei . Ko kam uro i " 25. Ko e wurel ke l bwet nen, e wa , "Ka wa Siu, ko kam uroi hasi ko ka mu l ma ko kam ka li Ts i �on Tahar 26. ko po wa la wa re ni-tsam." Timan mw i lek taravir Onema . 27 . Mw i lasi �a kel bwet nen mu wa la re ni-tsam. E wa , "E!, natuk ar la�al a�" . 28. E wa la e ser-ser, e ma �a- hi:m. Mi ma �a-hi:m, mi ma we-re mel l�en. E matur. 29. Nahlt, tekau plla mar re-rake mar re-rake pini, mi mats.

Mar u r 0 i. 30. M ira r i n i e I e k • Natu n mar k a I i � a - hi : m . " Ka b wan, kab te lasi tlmam i lo-ut . 31. Ram rets ptiew kami, kam se werJuri te". Mar kali wan lo-ut. "Po las-lasi ne-mbe, ne-mbe." 32 . Ar hili nu-al watsin. Ar tel na-mbu. 33. Ar tsibwe we-re nu-al . Ar tawnl watsin. E J u ko. 214 TALE 0

TRANSLATION

Their mother remained barren titt she was nearty an otd woman. Then, one day, she took her pandanus strips and went to do he r ptaiting on the shore at Le -berong-marur. And whi te she was ptaiting she heard an octopus, a shet t-fish of the kind catled tekau and a rai t. These three were behind her in the bush, embrac ing one another. And they caused a stone to fa tt. This being one of the usuat methods used by ctandestine tovers to attract a girt 's attention, she said "Who threw that stone ? Go away, atas! Win-bweris is gone to the maintand, bu t, witt soon be coming back, atas!" After a time a stone fe ll again close by, and she again said "Who threw that? Go away, alas! Win-bweris will soon be here". She went on plaiting, and again heard a stone fa ll ctose by . Then she said to hersetf "Who can it be that keeps on throwing stones? I had better go and see". So she went, and came and saw the octopus embracing the rail and the shell-fi sh. They were all embracing one another. She said "Hi ! So it 's only you who keep on throwing the stones! " Then she touched them, and said "If you have been wanting to say something to me, come after dark, tonight, and telt me then. " Having said that, she went home . And when Win -bweris came home from the mainland she said "I want to tell you something ". He asked "What ,do you want to tell me ?", then he said "Has some man been speaking to you?" She said "No ", and then she said "I saw a shell fi sh, an octopus and a rail embracing one another on the shore ". He asked "Did you touch them or not?" She reptied "I touched them � and he said "It is good". She said "I thought it were better tonight, after it was dark; if they were wanting to te tl me something, they shoutd come tonight ". That night, when husband and wife had lain down to steep, he in his house, and she in hers, they came to her, and said "For you shall have ten chitdren. But you must not eat us. If you do not eat us you wi ll bear ten chi ldren". She said "But I am already old". They rep lied "We know, but you wi ll bear ten children alt the same ". When it was morning she said to Win -bweris "They came and told me something. Those things I saw, they came and told me sonet hing ". He asked "What did they te ll you?", and she said "They prophesied that I should have ten chitdren". He said "But you are too old atready ". She answered back "I know. It must be Tahar 's do ing ". He said "You saw them then? Did he come back and tell you that? Let 's wait and see . " That woman bore, and bore again . First she bore Bets, then Le-rets, ten of them attogether, Lav, Awe, Ngosh, and many more . And when her children were alt grown up they went on a voyage to Malo. And before TALE 0 215

they went. Wi n-bweris said to them "You are going to Ma Lo. Now. Ma Lo is a pLaae where there are many fish. Bu t remember that thing whiah your mother toLd you. If you shaLL have eaten those things whiah your mother to Ld you of ... " and he addre ssed the youngest. saying "If you shaLL have eaten those things. when you aome baak. and when you round the promontory aaLLed Tsingon Ta -har. whia h brings you in view of Atahin. then run out on to the outrigger fLoat". When they were due baak. their fa ther waited for them on the beaah at Onema. And when he saw the youngest running out on to the outrigger he said "A Las! My ahiLdren are demented". Then he ran quiakLy home. and aame to his house. and Lay down on his bed. and the oatopus. the sheLL-fish and the raiL arawLed over him and embraaed him. so that he died. They ate him up . And the mother waited for her ahi Ldren to aome. And when they rounded the aorner of the fenae Leading to his enaLosure. she aried "Come. see your fa ther in the inner aourt. We toLd you not to eat those things. but you wouLd not obey us ". They went round into the inner aourt. and she aried "Look. Look. where and how he is". Then they dug a ho Le. and aut bamboos. and with them poked him into the hoLe. And so they buried him. Tha t is the end. 216

TALE P: ON THE NATURE AND OMN IPOTENCE OF TAHAR

(From Ta-maewo through Buremin .)

1. Mirar na-viil , timar ni-a!. Mor tei ikir. Mew i ko e tei wen-wa- Ko na-mbol) sa kele ko e tei wen-wa-sal)awul. 2. Ko n a -m b 0 I) sa kele ko e tei wen-wa-sal)awul. E wan ko mu kete wiJewi n, n'dra mu to. 3. Ko mu hu watsin ko re-I)an mwi lap ko tipwis mu tural) watsin.

�. Tahar mwi tei wa tsi e wan tsunob. E wure i ko e te na-mbol) sar. 5. E wu r ei , "Ko inik, ko na-mbol) S'ilm e p'ok, po mats ni. Ko inik 1)90, ko po pa l ko." 6. Pw i-re pwi sa par liwe , e lai nawi ri e tsu-tsuni. Pwi-re pwi sa pwi tara, 7. Ko e wa , "10, ko inik, po tara, po ar mats." f wurei pwi sa, ko e te na-mbol) san, 8. ko ko e wurei "Na-vul S'ilm, ko ma ts." E wu rei sa wa , 9. "Po wor wa tsalil po mats, po luha ma tsihik." Ko pwi-re pwi sa "ko inik, po tur, 10. po tur wa n na-vul s�m pu we le- we le pu-rol) ko po mats." Pw i-re pwi sa, pi we ma-Iakel pu-rol) ko pi mats . 11 . Pwi-re pwi sa, e wa , "Inik, po tara pu wele-wele ko po mats." 12 . Ko e wu rei, "Po wo r wan bOI) pw i sa, ko po mats." Ko pwi sa, bOl)in pwi e-I im, ko pi ma ts. 13. Pwi sa ko e wu r ei, e wa , "Ko bahi p'uroim". 14 . Pwi sa e wa "Inik, po ron. N'das pu uroi." Pw i sa, ko e wa 15. "Inik po sa ko po watsen im ko po mats." Pw i Sa ko pi woJ ko pi mats. 16. Pwi sa pw i-re pw i Ii ko pi mats. Ko ini ko-rOI) mw i te i . 17. T a ha r mw i t e i i k i r . 18. Tahar e wiwiskir.1 Mwi tei na-ten e womu. Ko e wan ko mw i tei pi pi san . 19. Ko e ma , ko e ma ma ma ko mu tur I)a-el re batur. Ko mw i kete wiJewin ko n'il-n� san mu to I) in. 20. Ko noreman pipi san, pu to I)a-in. 21 . Noreman e wa tsi wiJewin, ko n'dra mu to ko we-re wiJ ewin, ko n'dra mu to re tapa re wiJewin. 22. Ko mu kete tipwis, ko mu wo r ko mwi te na-mbol) san . 23. Ko inik, na-m bOI) s'ilm. Po matsil) 1)90 ko ." E

wa pwi-re ni-Ial) mw i ser pwi lap ko po ma ts. 24 •. WU -I)a no-uJ P'uJ pwi lap ko po mats. Na-mbol) s'ilm tsile ko po mats. 25. Ko pw i-re par liwom ke par liwom . Pw i-re po ron ko e ron. 26. Pwi-re bahi p'uroi ko bahi e uroi . Pw i-re I) a pwi Ii ko e Ii. Pw i-re pi ma sa pu-rol) ko pi ma ts. 27. Pwi-re pu wurei ko pwi-re po we na-sup ko na-mbol) s�m ko po ar mats. 28 . Mi wiJeni rowe na-na tsile, n'il-n'il'k ko po las-Ias i, pu J u.

�he word for lashing together the parts of a canoe . TALE P 217

TRANSLA TION

The moon is our mother, and the sun our fa ther. They two made us. [Moon and sun together are Ta-har]. One day he made a thousand men, and another day he made another thousand, and another day me made another thousand. And it came to pass that he made woman, and [his?] btood [?sexual fluid, see below] wa s in her. And she conceived then, and her be tty became big, and a chitd took shape [mu turang = 'strong', 'fast ', i.e. the child is taking shape, and about to be born , is no longer mere fluid] . Then Ta-har made att men. He speaks, and appoints their days, saying "A nd you, your days witt be so many, and then you wi tt die.

And you there, you witt be kitted [pal = 'be sacrificed ']". If a man is going to be shot, he takes a cane and pierces him beforehand. If a man is going to grow otd, he says "Yes, and you witt grow otd, then you wi Zt di e". He speaks to another, and appoints his day, saying "In such a month you wi lt di e". To another he says "You wi lt be born out of the womb, and straightaway you shatt come back to me ", and to another "You witt live on a tittle, and your months shalt be but few, and you shatt die� to another, that he shalt grow to be a young man only, and shalZ die. To another he says "You wi tl be only just begin ning to grow old, and you will die ". And he says "You shall be born onty one day and you shalt die ", and to another that his days shalt be five, and he wi ll die. To one he says "A shark will eat you ", and to another "You witl be drowne d. The sea wi ll devour you ". To another he says "You wiZZ climb a tree, and wi It fa lt down aZZ by yoursetf, and you witZ die� and to yet another, that he witt get sores and di e, to stitZ another that he wi lZ hang himse Zf and di e. He alone made us. Ta-har made us. He lashes (the parts of) us together (as a man lashes together the parts of a canoe). First he made the buttocks. Then he went on and made the sexual organs. Then he worked on and on till he finished us off here, on our heads . [Here my informant indicat ed the whorl of hair on the head , called na-vul e shu-shu won i = 'the moon finishes it off' , also used of the moon setting] . And he made woman and that thing which is within her; and man, his sexuat organ that it might rest in it. And the man went to the woman, and his blood [sexual fluid?] re mained in the woman. And his blood [sexual fluid?] remained in the womb of the woman, and made a chi ld. And the child was born, and Ta -har appointed his day, saying "A nd you, such are your days, such wi Zt be your work". He says whether the wind shatl blow so hard that you will die, or whether the rain sha ll fa ll so much that you wilZ die. 218 TALE P

And if you are to be shot, you wi tt be shot; if you are to be drowned, you witt be drowned. If a man is to be eaten by a shark, a shark wi tt eat him. If he is to hang himse tf, then he wi tt hang himsetf. If he is simpty to sicken and die, it wi tt be so. If he says you are to become an otd man, when your day comes you wi tt die atso. He fore tetts att things for att men, everything that you wi tt ever see . 219

TALE Q: MALAIN AND MERE-TSANG

(Evidently recorded at Sen-har. )

1. Malain sa ko Mere-tsa�. Ko or uwu no-ut. Or uwu no-uJur row-row. Ko mor Juhu tawu e-ru �a-hUt. 2. Mar Juhu, mar Juhu ma r wan wa wa mare. 3. Ko tutuJan e ma , mwi lasi tawu mor JoJoJera . Ko e wurei e wa , "Kab kete bonon re-�a mwar ' ok." 4. E wurei �a tasln. Ko tasin e wurei e Ka b J uhu 5. wa . "E t 5 i 9 a wo r . wor." Ko e wan tutuJan mi wi-wlel mu luha mi ma ko mwi lasi mu JoJoJera . 6. ko e wa , "Kab kete wan bonon ne-�a mwar' ok." Ko tasin e wurei e wa , 7. "E tsiga wo r". TutuJan e re-ro� par kete to-toni ne-�a tasin. 8. Ko tasin e wur'ei e wa, "E tsiga wor" . TutuJan mi wiel , mu luha ma e wa , 9. "Kab kete wan telep bonon ne-�a mwar' ok." Ko tasin e wurel , e wa , "E tsiga wor ." 10. MI wan ko tutuJan lolon e har. E wa , "Es! Inik tipwis, ra wurei na-na mo so ro� woJe ni te" . 11 . Ra wurel tawu inik pi we tan, ko ina pi we mare Jopon." 12 . Wa tsin tasin e wurei e wa , "Ee! Po JoJoJera". TutuJan lolon e ha r. 13. Or rew-rewtsir, ar mbal. Matuar Emil Marur. 14 . Ko inir wiJen san e wa Wa la. Ko tasin lolon e har, e si�-sl� wa tsin. 15. E si�-wi� ko e ruruJi ne-wis. E wala, e tsubul �a-la. 16 . Ko e liw- liw ehi watsi Matba�or. Ko ma tuar inlr wiJen san or mul Wa la, 17 . ko mor Ju ma mor lasi e liw-liw ehi. Ko e hulowi . Matuan e Ju wan. 18 . Olow{ln e tor-toni Jowun na-ak. Ko ini e ro-rom i ko e re-ro� por tsil-t sile-were. 19. E te ne-wls we-re na-ak. Matua e wa "He! He! He! He! Olowak, po luha ." 20. Ko olow{ln e wa , "E! Matuak, ro wa Tsan." E ' wa , "Ro wan, po han �a-mbe?" 21 . E wa , "E! ro wa Tsan." Matuan mu wu-wurei, mwi-tsa. E wa re na-ak. Mor Ju ko watsin. 22. Mor ma , mor h{lJ Emil Marur. Matuan mwi kete na-w�t. E se tabu te re n'dan. 23. Mwl hili ni-wa t e tabu re-�an . Ko ini r nor Emil Marur mar ok hor-hor. 24 . Mar ok hore n'ehi. Ko mar ok ma �a-ok Ramason. Mar wan, mar ma Ramason, ko mar lai n'ehi. 25. Ko mar re par mul par tabu. Ko ini mwl lasi wiJen tipwis sa. 26. Timan n'asan JuJu. Ko Ini e lai n'ehi e wireni pitewi. 27. Na-mbo� e nats kele mar hor kele. Mar ma, ma, ma Ramason. Ko ma ria 5 I ke 1 e win a. 28. Ini e wlrenl n'ehl �a inl pitew wiJewin. Ko ma r wan Em il Ma rur. Mar re par tabu. 29. Mar re par tabu , ko mar wa , "Ko n'ehi �a inlk?" E wa , "Win wele �a mu �goni, ko me lai pitewi ." 30. Koe ka r-karas ko wor. Ini lolon e wurel wiJewin, ere pi tigei . 31 . Ko e wa-wa n wlJewin e ma-lakel. JuJun mwi lap ko watsin. 32. Ko timan mwi hll-hil no-ran. MI wan pu tuloni Jowul . Ko mar Ju �aOok, 33. mar rail pi wan pu tuloni �a-hUt Jowul . Ko e wan ko mwar' a Ini mw l liw.-l iw ehl Emi l Marur. 34. Ko mwi lasi wlJewin, timan mwi re pu tuloni. Ko m iran inI 220 TALE Q

re batun na-ak, 35 . ko timan ini re Jowun. Ko ini e sakel re lihwen , e kila luha , e hlsi na-tUI). 36. Mwi lasi mwar ' a mwi liw-liw ehi. Mwi kila ko e hulowi luha ni. 37 . Ko win a e wurei ni timan, miran, e wa, liTe! Ko re-ror] kob tuloni a Ie. 38 . Ko tsUnob sa mu hulowi a ni-aok. Ko watsi ko tim an e wurei ni miran, 39. "Ko Ie-tar, po ha le luha ni." Mor hale, mor Ju rna . Ko mwar ' a ini mu wa la. 40. Mu wa la mu tOl)sa. Mu tOl)sa e wa hi:m. Mi wan ko matuan mu kete no-ut. 41. Ko mu wa la mi wan mwi ha si re 1010n n'dram, ko mu Jok re-I)an. - 42. Ko matuan mi rna , mwi las i wiJewin, inir timan miran inir, mar lek, ko e wur ei, e wa , 43. "Ko olow{lm mu hulowi win el ko nam Ju luha rna , ko ini e wa la e-pe r]a-in?" 44 . Ko matuan mu kon i ko wa tsin. E koni wiJen san e wa , 45. "Po te be tselehi e-wise I)a mu wa la." M'betselehi ko watsin, e rna , e lasi re lolon n'dram . 46. E wa , "Hai! Ko inik, e-wise mo Jok?" E wa , "Matu{lm e re-roil po rna wa hi:m po lai buha." 47 . Or wa hi :m. Matuan e lai ni-wara sa , e lai na-ru, pekes, liw-Jeren, 48. E lai lai wan e lai buha e-sal)awUI. 49. Wat sin ko mor lek wa tsin Em il Marur. 50. Ko ar tei na-ak na-tor sa Emi 1 Parav. Ko ar wi Ie, 51. Emi 1 Marur l ko ar wi le, Em il Lap ko ar wi le, Ruruar ko ar wi le, Senha r ini, 52. Ko ar wi Ie i-san. Mi wan ko ar tuwe womu ni Em i 1 Parav. 53. Mar tuwe ts ile ni, e lai buha , e wul i pitewi . E wan ko ar tuha Emil Marur. 54. Ar tuwe tsile ko Em il Marur e lai buha e wul i pitewi i. Mi wan ko ar tuha Em il Lap.2 55. Ar tuha buha, ko e lai buha ar wul i pitewi. Mi wan ko ar tuha Ruruar. 56 . Ar tuha tsile ko ar wu li pit ewi . Mi wan ko ini ko wa t sin. E hi l-hil ko eke n'dram, 57. ko e wurei na-mbol) nen par tuwe i-san. Emi 1 Parav. Em il Marur, Em il Lap , Ruruar ar tuha na- W{lt san na hamal. 58. E wa , "ra tuwe i-san pi pe ni-se?" 59. Ko ini e wurei e wa , "Ra tuwe sak pi pe tawi . Pi parav pi e mare." 60. Mar twue, mar tuwe , wa wa wa wan. E wan e wa mare. Ko ar wa , "E Ju wU-l)a e-tsiga wor?" 61. "E-ts iga wor ." Mar wan, ma r wan, mi wa mare. Ko mar wurei kele e wa , 62 . "E Ju wU-r]a e-tsiga wor?" E wa , "Kam 1 as i Mal -weawel), Jowu l, wU e-tsiga wor?" 63. Mar wur ei, "E-tsiga wor". E ar wa , "Kab tuwe wo r ." 64 . Mar tu-tuwe , wan mar las i Jowul , Mal -weawel) ko Wa la. E wa , "Ko e Ju ko watsin." 65 . Mar tsubu l ko watsin. Mw i te n'dram . Mw i te tsile n'dram ko mi rewtsi buha wa tsin. 66. Mar lai watsin, mar mu l. Em i 1 Parav ko ernul, Emi 1 Marur ko e rnul , 67 . Emi 1 Lap ko e rnul, Ruruar ko ernul. Ko mi wan ko tutuJan mw i lek I)a-hut. 68 . Lolon e har. Mu rOl)e I)a mar ok wu l-wu l ptiewi . Ko ini m'ok lek l)a-hUt. 69. E wa , "Ini tipwls ko m'ok wan, ma r wu l -wul pitewi , ko ina

lLit . 'Senhar , it gathers its stones '. 2 Danc ing and pr esenting pigs apparently form a combined action. TALE Q 221

no wise me lek na-won? 70. Mwi tsire kele ma Qa Tsan. Ko inir nor Em i I Parav ar tei na-ak sa . 71. Na-ak na-tor sa. Ko mar wiwsi. Mar wiwsi, ko ini, ar le-Iek, 72. inir nor Emil Parav ar wiwsi na-ak. Ko mar Jure na-amp sar, ar kete na-Iok na:r. 73. Ko ini ar lal na-to ran sa ko n'dr�m na :n. Ko mar wiws i na-ak, ar wurei ar wa , 74 . "Ko inik po ar wan, po tabu . " Ko ini ko e se na-to, e wan e torwon i. 75 . Ko tutuJan natun noreman e-ru. Ko I n I e we na tun b{ltiram (Qa mu wor womu) . 76. Ko tasin e tori natun ta-mats wor wlets (Qa mu wor Qa-tan) . 77. Ko tutuJan me wi e I Qa-hiit ml mu l ma. Ko e kon l natun , e kon l natun b�t l ram, e wa , 78 . "Po wan, po Ju te na-amp 51 tlm{lm." Ko ml ma ko timan ini m u k e te n a - 10k. 79. E w u rei e wa , "Te, p e J una -amp?" Ko timii ne w a , "Po Ju na-amp, ko po wan ko mlr{lm p�r kete rln buha pu-roQ. 80. Tim{lm pu ar ma , ra hani na-Iok ni-Ie." Mar han na-Iok. 81 . Ko e wa-wan na- mboQ e nats kele. Na-mboQ e nats kele ko nor Emil Parav mar re mar wiwsi kele na-ak. 82 . Ko tasin e wurel tutuJan watsi, "Kaml, ko watsi kab le-Iek, 83. kab wiwsi na-ak. Ina pe wa e-hiit te." E wa wan. Tas in e mul ma Qa-hiit . 84. Ko e kon i natun, natun Qa tii-mats wor wieta, e wurei e wa , 85. "Po wan po Ju te na-amp si tim{lm." MI wan mu Jue na-amp. Ko t u t u J iin e 5 e w u rei t e p u wa , 86. " N a - 10k 5 a Ie, r a han i " . Ini e mo-roQ pu-roQ. 87 . Ko tas ln a mi wan e tabu. Mi wa -wan ko ar ho i na-ni, ar han. Ko ar han tslle, ko e hepe na-Iok. 88. E hepe na- 10k, e wa , "Ko po lai, wan, ko tim{lm pwl han." 89. Ko e lai, ko tasin lolon e ha r. E ro pwi-tsa e hani na-Iok. 90. "Ko po lav luha ni na-Iok ni tim{lm." E wa , "Kami ko kam han?" 91 . E wa , "Ko inik, ko se hand te, ko mo wan mo hani na-Iok na:r." Ko lolon e har. 92 . Lolon mw i har ko mu wala re n'Ama l Tara, ko mi wa n, mu wowe n'Amal san n'Ama l WaQgala. 93 . Ko tutuJan watsi e wewe san n'Amal Tara .

SUMMARY

Malain and Mere-t sang were brothers in the mainland village of Tutu. Malain was the younger . They make two mounds, one each, and Mere-t sang insist s that his brother's shall be smaller than his . Both mounds are piled higher and higher, and Malain refuses to make his smaller than his brother 's. So they fight . Malain runs down to the shore , where he boards the canoe of hi s mother 's brother who is returning from Wala. His mother 's brother takes him back to his own village of Emil Marur , and builds a dolmen for him to cook on, since he may not cook on the ground. The men of Emil Marur chase fish round Atchin, and when they come to Sen-har they see a girl , to whom he gives a fish, want ing to marry 222 TALE Q

her . When she is grown up , her father takes he r in his canoe int ending to take her to be marr ied to a Showul man . But he beckons to her , and they turn the canoe round and return . But he runs away and hides in one of his mother 's brot her 's yam-trellises. But his mother 's brother sends his wife to find him . She finds him , and he marries the girl and they settle down and live at Emil Marur . Then the men of Emil Parav make a canoe , and each village on Atchin builds a stone platform, and pays him for this right . Finally they build one for him . He tells them to build it high like the mound he made on the mainland . They build it higher and higher till from the top they can see Mal-weaweng, Showul and Wala . He lays out yams for workers and guests, and kills a pig and eats with them (i.e. breaks taboo ). Mere-tsang is jealous and comes over from the mainland . He ha s two sons , of whom Malain ha s adopted the younger . Mere-t sang sends his eldest son to Malain for a brand from his fire . Malain let s him take it , and invites Mere-t sang to share hi s meal . Mere-tsang does so . Later , however , Malain sends his adopted son to get a brand from Mere tsang . Mere-t sang let s him take it , but doe s not ask Malain to a meal . When Malain asks the son why , he says Malain may not eat wit h Mere-t sang because' he has broken the food taboo, by eating with the men of Emil .Parav . Ma lain is furious, and goes off and make s himself a dancing ground at Emil Wanggala. Mere-t sang make s himself a danc ing-ground at Emil Tara .

TRANSLATION

[There were two brothers, belonging to the mainland village of TutuJ, Ma lain and Mere-tsang. [Mere-t sang was the elderJ . They two were planting their gardens, they were planting decorated canes of the kind

ca lled nousu r row- row, "flying canes" which are placed in the middle of a yam-mound for the vines to grow on. They heaped up two mounds, there on the mainland. Each, with the he lp of his kinsmen, heaped up his own mound. And they heaped them higher, and ever higher. Then the elder brother came, and saw that the two mounds were of equa l height, and he spoke, saying "A ll of you put the cap on that fe llow 's mound [the cap is the small protuberance constructed on the top of the mound at the base of the flying cane which rises from it s summitJ. " He meant his younger brother 's. But the younger brother spoke, saying "Not yet. He ap it up yet higher ". After a time, the elder brother strolled back again, and came and saw that the mounds were still equa l, and again said "A ll of you, put the cap on that fe llow 's mound". But the younger TALE Q 223

brother again said "Not yet". Again the elder brother tried to get them to put an end to his younger brother 's mound, but the younger bro ther said "Not yet". So the elder brother went away, but came back again, saying this time "A ll of you, put the cap on that fe llow 's mound immedi ately ". But again the younger brother spoke, and said "Not yet". The n the elder brother became angry, and said "Oh! You are only a child. We tell you some thing but you do not understand. We tell you your mound should be lower, and that mine should be somewha t higher ". This time the younger brother said "A ll right! You make yours as high as mine!" The elder brother was furious, and they struck one anotherj and the two groups of kinsmen fought. Now, their mother 's brot her belonged to the vil lage of Emil Marur, on Atchin. And he and his wife had gone to Wa la. And the younger brother was angry, and departed in a rage. He departed in a rage, and shouldered his bow and ran down to the shore, and began shooting fi sh there, at Mat-bangor. And their mother 's brother and his wife left Wa la in their canoe, and as they were paddling towards Atchin they saw him shooting fish. And he beckoned to them. So the mo ther 's brother paddled and came to where he Was . And his sister 's son caught ho ld of the bow of his canoe. The mother 's brother thought he just wanted to have a talk, but when the other put his bow into the canoe, meaning to jump in, the mother 's brother said "Ho ! ho I hoI hoI My sister 's son, go back". But his sister 's son said "Eh! Mo ther 's brother, let me come with you to Atahin!" But he answered "If you come, where wi ll you eat?" [For Malain had attained to suc h high grade through sacrifice of pigs that he could not eat from the same fire as any man on Atchin, nor yet even on the ground]. But however muc h his mother 's brother ta lked, it Was of no avai l, and his sister 's son climbed into the canoe . So together they came and landed at Emil Marur . And his mother 's brother made a do lmen [?stone plat form] for him, for he might not cook on the ground. He built up the stones, and his sister 's son cooked on them. And the men of Emil Marur were chasing fi sh by driving and surroun ding them at intervals round the coast of Atchin. They chased fi sh till they came here, to Ramason [a spot on the coast belonging to the village of Sen-har , to which the narrat or belonged, and where we were sitting when he recited this tale] . They went on till they came to Ramason, and, having caught their fish, they wanted to go home and cook them . But he [Malain] espied a little girl, whose father 's name was Shu-shu. And he took a fish, and threw it to her. Another day, when they were again chasing fi sh, and gradually came round to Ramason, he 224 TALE Q

again saw the girl, and again threw her a fi sh. And they came back to Em il Marur, in order to cook. But when they came to cook, they all said to him "But where is your fish?" He said "Tha t de ar little girl begged me for mine, so I gave it to her ". But he was just deceiving them Lfor she had not asked him for it , but he had given it to her because] he desired her, and wanted to marry her . And it came to pass that when she was grown to be of marriageable age, and her breasts had become fu ll, that her fa ther dug yams for the marriage feast and set off with her in his canoe to take her to be married at 5howul. And as they were paddling round that way to take her to be married on the mainland at Showul, it happened that he [Malain] was shooting fish on the shore at Em il Marur . And he saw that woman, how her father was intending to give her away in marriage. It happened also that her mother was sitting in the sterm of the canoe, and her father in the bow, looking towards the mainland, but that she was sitting in the middle, looking backwards while she bailed out the bilge. And she saw him shooting fi sh, and how he beckone d her to come back. And the gir l spoke to her fa ther and her mother, saying "Father, you want to take me to be married there, but there is a man there who is bechoning me back". Then her fa ther said to her mother "Old woman, turn the canoe round and go back to him ". They turned the canoe round, and p�ddled £0 the shore. But he ran away . He ran and turned his back to the shore, and, going in land, went to the vi llage . It so happened that his mother 's brother was making a garden, and he ran and came and entered inside the trellis that he had erected for his yams. And his mo ther's brother came and saw the woman with her fa ther and mother, waiting on the shore, and the fa ther said to him "Your sister 's son beckoned to this girl and we padd led back, but where has he run to ?" Then the mother 's brother sent his wife, saying "Please look for him, and find out why he ran away ?" 50 she looked for him, and came and found him in the yam-trellis, and said "Hi ! You, why have you hidden?" Then she said "Your mother 's brother wants you to come home to take the pigs which he has ready for your marriage ". So they went home toge ther, and the mother 's brother brought a re-entrant-tusker, a curved-tusker, a crescend-tusker, a pig of grade liw-she ren, and yet more pigs, ti ll there were ten, and gave them for his marriage portion. And they two lived together in Emil Ma rur . And the men of Em il Parav set about making a great canoe . And they all col lected stones for a stone-platform. The men of Em il Parav co llected stones, the men of Emi l Marur collected stones, the men of Emi l Lep col lected stones, the men of Ruruar co llected stones. Then TALE Q 225

the men of Senhar coLLected stones for him. And it came to pass that the first stone-pLatform to be buiLt wa s that for the men of EmiL Parav, and when they had finished buiLding it they took a pig and gave it to him as payment. Then they danced for the men of EmiL Marur, and when they had finished buiLding the men of EmiL Marur took a pig and gave it to him as payment. Then they danced for the men of Emi L Lep, and when they had presented pigs to the workers, they took a pig and gave it to him as payment. Then they danced for Ruruar, and when they had presented pigs to the workers, they aLso paid him a pig. Then it came to be the turn for his, and he dug up yams and tied them to poLes and announced the day when they shou Ld buiLd his stone-pLa tform. The men of EmiL Parav, of EmiL Marur, of Emi L Lep and Ruruar aLL danced for his 8tone-p Latform in the dancing-ground, and said "How shaH we bui Ld his?" Then he spoke, and said "Let us buiLd mine Like I buiLd my mound. Let it be taLL and high". They piLed up the stones, and piLe them, higher, and higher, and higher. And they said "Is it fi nished yet, or not?" He said "Not yet". So they buiLding it ever higher. And they spoke again, saying "Is it finished yet, or not? Can you at the top see Ma L-weaweng and ShowuL, or not?" They said "Not yet". So he again said "BuiLd higher yet". And they went on piLing up the stones tiLL from the top they couLd see ShowuL, and Ma L -weaweng, and even Wa La. The n he said "Now it is finishe d". Then they cLimbed down, and he Laid out the yams. He Laid out aLL the yams, and then he kiLLed a pig. And they took their yams, and went away; the men of Em iL Parav and EmiL Marur, EmiL Lep and Ruruar aLL went. And it oame to pass that the eLder brother [Mere-t sang] stayed on the mainLand. And he was very angry, for he heard how they had aLL been paying Ma Lain for the right of erecting the stone-p La tforms . But he stayed aLL the time on the mainLand, saying "He i8 onLy a ohiLd, but they keep on buying the right of their stone-p Latforms from him. And I, how is it that I remain here doing nothing ?" So he fo LLowed his younger brother, and came to Atchin. And his younger brot her and the men of Emi L Parav were making a great oanoe out of a nator tree, and they Lashe d on the pLanks, and Lashed them, he heLping them, he and the men of EmiL Parav Lashed the parts of the oanoe together. And they Lit their ovens, and made puddings for themse Lves. And for him they brought a fowL and yams for him to eat. And one day when they were La8hing up the parts of their canoe they said "Now you, it is your turn to cook". And he took the fow L and wrapped it up and put in in the oven [thereby breaking the taboo against eating with others]. 226 TALE Q

Now, the eLder bro ther [Mere-t sang ] had two sons. The one about to be spoken of was the eLdest, he that was born first, for the other, caLLed "ghost born behind � that is to say h. that was born La st, had been adopted by the younger brother [MalainJ . No� the eLder brother [Mere-t sang] departed from the mainLand, and came to Atchin. And he sent his son, he sent his eLdest son, saying "Go, pLe ase, and bring a brand from your fa ther 's [Le. his paternal unc le 's, Malain 'sJ fire ". So he went, and found his fa ther [i.e. paternal unc le] making a pudding, and said "Father [Le. paternal uncle ], may I pLease take a brand from your fire ?" And his father [Le. paternal uncle] answer ed "Take a brand, and go and te LL your mother that she and your fa ther need on Ly prepare fo od for the pigs, and Let your fa ther come back here and eat this pudding with me ". They aH [1. e. Ma lain , Mere-t sang and his eldest son - possibly also the youngest son] ate the pudding together. And it came to pass that another day was appointed, another day was appointed on which the men of EmiL Parav shouLd continue Lashing their canoe. Then the younger brother spoke to the eLder brother, saying "You aLL stay here and Lash the canoe. I am going to the main Land ". [It is not clear from the story why he went there , unless simp ly to get food from his garden .] After a time, the younger brother came back from the mainLand. And he sent his son, the son ca LLed "g host born Last" [whom he had adopted from Mere-t sang], and spoke to him, saying "Go, pLease, and fetch a brand from your fa ther 's [Le. own father Mere-t sang 's] fire ". So he went, and fe tc hed the brand. But the eLder brother did not say "I have a pudding here, come and eat it with me ". He onLy schemed what he shouLd do . So the younger brother went, and cooked aLone. And they [the elder brother and his son] grated coconuts to squeeze over the pudding, and ate. And when they had finished eating, he [the elder brother ] cut a sLice from the pudding, cut a stice fr om the pudding, and said "Go and take this to your fa ther [paternal uncle, Malain] for him to eat". And he [the son] took it. And the younger brother was furious, and refused to ea t the pudding, saying "Take back the pudding to your fa ther ". Then he asked "Have you finished eating?" And he [his brother 's son] said "Yes. But you cannot eat with us, because you went and ate of their pudding [i.e. with the men of Emil Parav]. Then he was indeed furious, he was furious, and ran to Ama L Wangga La, and wen t and cLeared bush to make a dancing-ground for himseLf. Then the eLder brother cLeared bush to make a dancing ground for himseLf at Ama L Tara. 227

TALE R: THE STORY OF NaTSINAMBUR

1. Mar kete maki, ko ini buh� e-tsiga. Ko tsuneb tsile buha e to Qa-In. Ko Ini, sa men, e-tslga. 2. Ko mar wurel nl ma r wa , "Inik po lal buha pwl sa pwi ser-ser . 3. Ra re-roQ ra kete maki , ko inlk mwl-tslga ko maki mu to m'parav. Mar wun re-Qan mwi -Iap. 4. Ko Inl e se rets teo E mo-roQ ni Qa mar rets, ko Ini wan, mw i lek re ne-hl:m san, 5. ko mw l lek, mo-roQ, ko mo-roQe , e wa, "Ko ina pe wlel , 6. pe wa ok, pe betselehi buha pwi sa. Ko mwi re-Qa mwl-res ko no lai sa. 7. ko mwl re-Qa mar rewtsi a, ko e fu. Pwi sa te." Ko Ini e wieJ . E koke ne-wis san, e wieJ. 8. E wan ko e matur re lamef . Na-mboQ sa, ko mwi ran nen kel e ko mi wieJ . 9. E wan ko mu to mor l Qa ni-al pu nun ko mwl tslbari ne- hi:m. Ko mwl lasi tlpwis e-ru. 10. Ko mu fu-fun lr, e wa , "Ko timami?" Ar wa, liE wa la meL pu pa le no-ut". 11. Ko Ini e karaslr, e wurei e wa , "Ko ina me wiel, 12. me ma , hore ni-se nl-aok lameL ko me lasi timami, ko e wurei e re-roQ buha sa e tur ni-aok ne lolo'm. 13. E re- rOQ e wurel ra lai, ra lih e." Ko tlpwls e-ru or haf lolo'm, 14. or tigeisi ma l iQ, or haf lolo'm. Mor wan ko or Ilhe buha ma tsai li. 15. Ko e wurei, e wa , "Ko Qgo ko' buh{l nen kO ." E wa, "Ko timami mwi-re mi ma weral, 16. ko kab wu rei nl kob wa , 'tu�m Netsinambur e Jlhe buha'." 17 . Ko ini mu wa , "Ko ina tuak e se sa te n'a san pi p'ok. Buha ini e tsel ko wa tsin." 18. Mwi lai ne-wis m'betselehi , mwi-tsiga. Ko e ma fowurl natun , tlpwis a e-ru. Ko e fu watsin. 19. Mwar' a ini mu I ihe1 buha mi wiel roni . 20. Ko mi ma ko mi matur kele na-mboQ sa lamef. Ko mi wiel ko mu fok ni tsunob Qa inir mar kete maki . 21. Ko e lih e buha ko mw i fllehl wa ni buha lolo'm san. 22. E wan ko ar wu rei ar wa , "Ko we lan weraJ.1I Ko ini ml wan mwi litsi rofer. 23. Ko tsunob tsile ma r litsi rofer. Mar ni si ko ini, ko e wofl Qa ini. 24 . Ko mar wurei ar se wu rei ni te, ko inir ko mar wurei, "Ko ini e Jltsi rofer ; buh{l , Qa I)a-mbe? 25. Ko inir ma r wan, mar kete na-mbwe . Ko Ini e wu rei ni wlfewl n, e wa , 26. Po lasi ina, me wa la I)a-el , ko inlk re tawtsen, 27 . ko e wa-wan ram taw-tawnikir ko ro hitsits." Ko e wan mar wa la ko mar ma , 28. ko wlfewin e se wa la te, ar we taw-tawn ir te, ko noreman lolon e ha r. E kete na-amp e mats. 29. Tsuneb ar wurei ar wa , "Ko e-wise inl mwl kete na-amp mi mats?" 30. Mar fu-fu , ni, mar wa , "In ik, ko e-wlse mo kete na-amp e ma ts?" Ar wa , 31. Ini e wurel e wa , "Kab fu-fu nl wlfewl n. E rOQ wofe ni n�-n� nen." 32. Wlfewin e wurei e wa , liE re nam wa la nam taw-tawni. Klam ko nam hitsits. 33 . Ko ina no re pwl -tsa." Ko ar wa , liD! E wurei e-res. Po wan. 34 . Kab tiQ-tlQ lCarried? Otherwise he would have left tracks by which he could have been tracked. 228 TALE R kele na-mbwe." Noreman e woIe kale roIer. Ar wa la kele. 35. Inir wiIewin re tawtsen , inir re tawtsen ke le. Or wan , or taw-tawn ir, or hitsits watsin. E Iu watsin. 36 . Ko mew i nen mw i ran ke le na-mbo!) sa. Ko tutuIan mw i ka r asir, 37 . e wa lamer. ko ml wa to-toni natun sa wele-wele. Mor lek tser !)a- hi:m. 38. Ko inir mar wa lameI . Ko inir mor wan ko mor uI-uIi ni natun, 39. ko natun e wurei buh{l , "Timak buh{l san sa ne lolo'm, liwon e tal wa -ru." 40. E wa , "Ikir, ro wan, ro lasi." Inir mor wan mor lasi. E Iu wa tsin. 41. Mewi nen mwi ran ko no-ut m'po!) pu-ro!), ini mi wlel . Mi wan mwl lai ni-r am no-ut PO!) lamaI. Mw i lai roha . 42. Mu luha ma !)a-hi:m na-to mwi tarer. Mu kete na-lok sa . 43. Mwi ran mw i-res, ko mu huI natun, "Po wurei, po wa po wurei tim{lm pi ma , ra hani na ...lo k." 44. Ko timan e ro pwi -tsa. E-tsiga. Eluha wan kele, ko e wu rei kele. 45. E wa , "Te, po ma . Timak e re-ro!) ra hani na-lok." Ko timan e wa , "E! Ina no ro pw i-tsa. 46. Ko e wa , "E! , timak e re ra hanl na-lok." E wa , "E! Po wan, 47 . po wurei, po wa , "Te ra han . Timak e re pe ar lai nen pi wan". Ko e-tsiga. 48. Timan e wu rei e wa , "Po wu re i pi ma , ra han . E wa , "E! No ro pwi- tsa." 49. Mi wa-wan ko timan a mwi lap e wan, e tur, e wurei e wa , "Po ma ra han". E wa , "10. Ro mak ra han." 50. E wa n ko wats in. Ar kete na-ni. Ar ho i. Ar hai na-lok. Ko ma r wue toni roha. 51 . Timan a we le-wele mwl lasi na-to mu to. Timan a mw i lap e wu rei, 52. e wa, "Po uroi batun na-to". Ko e wurei e wa , lOPe uroi, pe lal ni-se pitewim7" 53. E wa , "E! Po uroi." E wa , "ina, n{l-n{l sak e-ts iga." E wa , "Po uroi". 54. Watsln e uroi. E han. Mar han tslle. A mw i lap nen e wu re i , e wa , 55. "Tas i k, in i k ko wel e-wele, ini k ta-mats wor wieta. Ko se rewtsi te buha a mu tur re ne-hl :m s{lm. 56. Ina pe rewtsl buha !)a mu tur re ne-hl:m s

SUMMARY

Notsi-na-mbur ha s no pig with which to make Maki , so steals one from another village. During the subs equent Maki he forces his wife to lie and copulate wit h him in the dancing-ground , but his elder brother invites him to eat the head of a fowl which he has cooked , and so forces him to give up hi s pig (which wa s a double-c ircle-tusker) in exchange for his less noble pig . TALE R 229

TRANSLAT ION

[The men of La-war ] were aLL making Maki, but he had no pig. ALL the other men had their pig8 ready, but he onLy had none. So they aLL 8poke to him, 8ay ing "Go and get a pig for your8e Lf, quickLy. We are aL L waiting to make Ma ki, but you have no pig, and the Maki i8 de Layed". They aLL rai Led again8t him greatLy. But he 8aid nothing. He heard what they 8aid, and went, and 8at down in hi8 hou8e, and 8at, and thought, 4nd thought, and at La8t 8aid "Very weLL, I wiLL go away. I wi LL go 80mewhere and Look for a pig, and if i t 8haLL go we LL with me I 8haLL bring one away, and if they kiLL me, it wi LL be the end of me; no matter". So he departed. He gathered up hi8 bow and arrOW8, and departed. And it came to pa88 that he 8Lept one night in the bU8h. And when it dawne d next day he got up and went on again, and a8 the 8un was about to 8et came to a viLLage . There he 8aw two chiLdren, and a8ked them, 8aying "Where i8 your fa ther ?" They an8wered "He i8 gone into the bU8h, to buiLd a garden fence ". Then he deceived them, and spoke, saying "I wa s wandering about, cha8ing 80mething, there in the bush, and 8aw your father, and he 8poke to me and to Ld me there was a pig here in hi8 hou8e . He toLd me that we 8houLd take it and Lead it away ". So the two chi Ldren entered into the hou8e. The y removed the door-pane L and entered the hou8e and dragged out the pig. And he 8poke to them, 8aying "Tha t i8 the pig ", and again 8aid "When your fa ther come8 in thi8 evening, teLL him 'Your friend Not8i-na-mbur has Led the [So he took it away .] [But when the owner of the pig] pig away II'. came home, he 8aid "But I have no fr iend with 8uch a name . ALa8! the pig i8 L08t!" And he took hi8 bow, and 8earched [for the thief], but it was in vain. And when he came back he 8wore at his 80n8, at th08e two chiLdren. That i8 the end. That man dragged off the pig, and went away with it. And on hi8 way back he again 8Lept one night in the bU8h. And when he got home he hid from the peop Le, who were aLready making Ma ki. And he dragged the pig and hid it away in hi8 hou8e. And it came to pa8S that they said "Today we wi LL dance [the dance called Seluen] ". And it came to pa88 that he bound reed8 into a torch. And they were aLL bind ing reeds into torche8, and when they saw him, how he carried a torch of hi8 own they aLL 8poke; they did not 8peak to him, but among them- 8e Lve8, 8aying "See! He i8 binding reed8 for a torch. Whence i8 his pig ?" And they aU went, and beat the gong8 [for the dance]. And he 8poke to hi8 wife, 8aying "When you 8ee me da ncing on thi8 8ide whiLe you are dancing on the other, when the time come8 Let U8 Lie down together and copu Late ". And it came to pa88 that they danced on to the 230 TALE R

danaing-ground, but his wife di d not dana e, and they did not lie down together. And the man was furious, and put out his light. And they all spoke, saying "Why has he put out his light?" They asked him, saying "You, why have you put out your light ?" He answered and said "You ask that woman. She knows ". The woman spoke, and said "He wants us to lie down on the ground together and aopulate, but I don 't want to ". Then they aH said "Oh! But he speaks we H. You go [and do it ]. All of you, go and strike up again on the gongs ". The man again bore his torah aloft, and they all danaed again, the woman on one side, and he on the other. Then they two went, and lay down together on the ground, and aopulated. That is the end. The morrow dawned to be another day . Then his elder brother played a triak on them, pretending to go into the bush, and taking with him a small ahild [Not s i-na-mbur 's son] . They two [in fact] stayed in the vilZage [while] the others went into the bu sh. And [when the rest had gone ] they two went [to Notsi-na-mbur 's house], and he questioned the ahHd, and the ahHd toZd him of the pig, saying "My father 's pig is in the house. Its tusk aurves round twiae". He said "Le t us go in, and see it", and they went in, and saw it. Tha t is the end. Next day at dawn but while it was yet dark he went to fe ta h yams, while it was yet dark, from the bush, and aame baak to the village as the aoak arowed, and made a pudding [and cooked a fowl in it ]. And when it was fu ll dawn he asked the ahi ld, saying "Go and speak to your fa ther, and tell him to aome and eat this pudding with me ". But his fa ther di d not want to. He would no t. But the ahi ld went baak again, and spoke to him again, saying "Fa ther, aome, my fa ther [paternal uncle] wants us to eat the pudding with him. " But his fa ther said "Eh ! I don 't want to ". But the ahild again said "Eh ! My father [paternal unc le] wants us to eat the pudding with him. " Then his fa ther repZied "You go, you eat it, say to him 'Father [pat ernal uncle], let us [others] eat it together, my fa ther wants me to take his portion to him [at home ]". But his fa ther [pat ernal uncle] wou ld not [accept this], and again spoke. saying "Tell him to aome and eat with me ". But his fa ther exalaimed "Ehl I don 't want to ". So it went on, ti H the elder father [paternal unc le] himse lf went, and stood before him, and spoke, saying "Come. let us eat together". Then rat last] he said "Very well, we will go, and eat". Then he went, and they aLL worked at the aoaonuts, and grated them [to squeeze over the pudding when it was cooked] . Then they took the pudding out of the oven, and unwrappe d the leaves [in which it had been cooked]. and the younger fa ther [ Notsi-na-mbur] saw the fowl in it. Then the elder fa ther said "You TALE R 231

eat the fO!1Jl. ' s head". But he [Notsi-na-mbur] spoke, saying "If I eat it, !1Jhat must I give you?" But the el.der just said "You eat it". Then said the younger "But I have nothing [to give]". The el.der just said "You eat it". The n at l.ast he ate it, and dined off it. And !1Jhen they had finished dining, the el.der spoke, saying "Younger brother, you are but the l.ittl.est. You are the "Ghost born l.ast". You shal.l. not kil.l. the pig !1Jhich has been standing in your house. I, even I, !1Jil.l. kil.l. that pig !1Jhich has been standing in your house. If you !1Jere to kil.l. it, you !1Joul.d be putting yourse l.f before me, and I shoul.d come l.ast". Thus for the Ma ki he !1Jas forced to give the circl.e-tusker he had stol.en to his el.der brot her, and he himsel.f ki l.l.ed, after!1Jards, that bel.onging to his el.der brother . 232

TALE S: N5TSINAMBUR TRICKS SOME VAO MEN

1. Nots i nambur. Wa-sa mw i karas i to-Vao. Mu tsubu l I)a-la Sanallw. 2. Ko mwi lasi to-Vao mar fu ma . To-Vao mar ril)en i roha. Ko mu wurei mu fu-fi, e wa , "Kab e-be?" 3. Ko to-Vao ma r wurei mar wa , "Kia, namb- wan Lo l -narol)" . 4. Ko e wurel e wa , "Kab i-se Lol-n arol)?" To-Vao ar wure i a r wa , "Namb-wu Ii pwere-pwere" . 5. Ko Notsinambur e wurei e wa , "Kab lai rna ne-hir ne-se pwi e-ru, 6. ko pe ar tsal i pwere-pwere nen ko pu tur taravi kami. 7. Ko mwi-re re-I)a kab wa Lol-narol), kam luha ma , kab ar ril)eni." 8. Ko to Vao I)a ar lai ne-hir ne-se e-ru pitewin. E tor I, e rnul, e wa n re ne-hi:m san. 9. Ko mw i lek-Iek mu rOI) ni I)a- mbe I)a par luha ma Lol -narol) to-Vao. 10. Ko mi wan mw i ritse-ni ni-asas. Ko mwi asas ko mi wan mw l talasi peke-were, 11. Ko mwl tsal i re weren matu. Ko mu funl robot nahor. Ko e luha wa Sanaliw I)a-la. 12. Eli w- liw ehi. Ko to-Vao I)a mar fu luha ma. Mar lasi I)a mu tur. 13. Ko in1 mwi ka ra-ka ras mwi re e koke ne-wls re weren matu. Ko mw i re e I iw-l iw ehi 14. Ko to-Vao I)a fopon mar lasi wofe . Mar wa , "Mwar' a ko I)go." 15. Ko fopon ar wurei, ar wa , "Ini, mwai r ko sa mwi I iw-l iw ehi I)go. Mwar' a mw l se roha, ini e-tsiga." 16. Ko to-Vao inir fopon ma r I as i wo fe n i . Mar wa . "In i . 17 . In i kO l)go mw i liw- liw eh i mw i karakaras, mwi-re e tsal i peke-were ma tu." 18 . Ko to-Vao sa mu wurei e wa , "E! e karakaras. Inl ko , mwar' nen ko ." 19. Ko mar fu wan, ko Notsi- nambur e wa , "Kam wu re i e-wise Ie?" 20. Ko to-Vao ma r wa , "Na re nab wa ril)e nl pwere-pwer ' sa mo tsal i." Ko Nots i nambur ini e wurel , wa , 21. "E! Ko kam lasi i-si e lai ne-se sami? " Ko to-Vao sa e wur ei, wa , 22. "Ko i n i k mo I a i . " Ko Nots 1 nambur e wa , "E! Ina e-tsiga. 23. Ko Notsinambur e saren i peke-were re weren matu?" Ko e wurei e wa , "Kam lasi paral) ko mwar' nen e pe ni-se?" 24 . Ko to-Vao ar wurei ar wa , "Ko inik." Ko Notsinambur e karakaras e wa , 25. "O! Inane tsali pekewere ne-re matu, ko inl mwair". 26. Ko mar wurel, mar wa , "EI Ko ini k." E wa , "Ina e-tsiga." Ko mu wa "Paral) ko mwar ' nen e asas?" 27 . Ko to-Vao ar wurel ar wa , "E-tsiga." Ko Notsinambur e wurei e wa , 28. "Ko ina me asas ni-le'r paral). Pwi-re I)a ina, ko kab lasi pe mot- mot . 29•. Ko n'tek tsunob a mwi nats kam lai pitewin ne-se sami . 30. Ina e-tslga. Pw i-re I)a ina, ko no mwair. Ka b te lasi me funi robot- nahur? Ko me asas, ko me tsal-tsal matu?" 31 . Ko to-Vao fopon ar wurei, ar wa , "10, ini e-tslga." 32. Ko fopon ar las wofe ni . Ar wa , "Inl ko rOI) I)go . E karakarasikir. 33. Inl ko pu-rol)". Ko to-Vao fopon ar wurei ar wa , "E! Inl ts iga." 34. ko to-Vao ar lat-lat ni. fopon to-Vao ar las wofe nl. Ko to-Vao fopon e-tsiga. 35. Ma r tsil- tsile-were watsln. Ko e wurel, Nots i nambur e wurei , 36. "Ko ina e-tsiga. TALE S 233

Pwi-re I)a ina, ko no woI i pwere-pwere nen mu to I)a-el I)a-Ia. Ko ina e-tsiga. 37 . Kami , kam lasi hoI i tsUnob mwi nats . Ina e- tsiga. 38 . Ko kam lai pitewin ko e 50 rOI) woIe nl te I)a pi rna . Ko e Iu watsin. Kam i ka mul. 39. Ne-se e tsal ko watsin. Ram se lasi woJe nl te tsUnob nen . Ne-se e tsal ko watsin. 40. Kam l ka b mul ko watsln, kab J u." Mar mul ko watsin. 41. Notsinambur e ka raka ras ko rOI). Ini, mwi se ne-se ko rOI).

SUMMARY

Not si-na-mbur tricks some Vao men by taking ne-se leaves from them, promising to bring a sow down to the shore in exchange , but disguises himself so that they do not recognise him , and get s away with it .

TRANSLATION

Once Notsi-na-mbur tricked some Vao men. He went down to the shore at Sanaliw, and saw the Vao men paddle and come to shore . They had their canoe loaded with tumeric leaves for trade. And he asked "Where are you going ?" And the Vao men spoke, saying "We are going to Lo l narong. " And he spoke, saying "What are you going to do at Lol-narong ?" The Vao men answered and said "We are going to buy sows ". Then Notsi-na-mbur spoke, saying "Give me two parcels of turmeric leaves, and later on I will tie up a sow fo r you, to wait for you. When you have been to Lol -narong and are on your way back you can take her aboard. " So the Vao men gave him two parce ls of turmeric leaves. And he took them, and went home with th em, and waited till he thought it was time for the Vao men to be returning from Lol-narong . Then he went and ground some ch arcoal with which to make black paint and blackened his face as if in mourning . Then he untied his bracer from his left wrist and laced it on again on to his right, in the manner of a left handed man, and stuck ferns of a kind ca lled robot nahur in his hair. Then he went back to the shore at Sana liw, and shot at fi sh. After a time the Vao men came paddling back, and saw him standing there. But he deceived them by carrying his bow in his right hand and by pret ending to shoot fish: And some of the Vao men recognised him, saying "That is the fe lloW", but some spoke saying "The man who is shooting fish there is left-handed, but the fe llow who took the turmeric leaves was not ". But those who recognised him said "It is he. It is he, who is shooting fi sh there. He has played a trick on us by pret ending that he wears his bracer on his right wrist". Then one of the Vao men 234 TALE S

answered, saying "Eh ! He is deceiving us! It is he, that man. " Then they padd led ashore and came up to him. And Natsi-na-mbur said "What is this that you are saying?" And the Vao men said "We want to take aboard the sow you said you would tie up ." But Na tsi-na-mbur. he spoke, saying "Eh ! Who was it you saw who took your turmeric leaves ?" One of the Vao men spoke, saying "But you. You took them ". Then Na tsi-na mbur said "Eh ! No t I. Did Notsi-na-mbur wear his bracer on his right wrist?" Then he went on speaking, and sand "Tha t man you saw this morning, what was he like?" And the Vao men answered and said "But it was you! " Then Natsi-na-mbur tricked them, saying "Oh! I lace my bracer on to my right wrist, but he laces his on to his left ". But they again answered, saying "Eh ! But it was you ". He said "It was not I� and added "Tha t fe llow this morning, was he blackened?" and the Vao men said "No. " Then Natsi-na-mbur spoke, saying "But I was already black ened here this morning. If it had been I, you would have noticed that I was black. It must have been some other man to whom you gave your turmeric leaves. It wa s not I. If it were I, I shou ld have been left handed. Did you perhaps notice that I was wearing robot nahur ferns in my hair?, and that I was bla ckened, and tha t I was braced on my right wrist?" Then some of the Vao men spoke, saying "Indeed, it is not he ". But some recognised him, and said "It is he all right. He is trying to deceive us, bu t it is he all right ". But others among them said "Eh! It is not he ". And the Vao men quarre lled among themse lves. Some recognised him, bu t others did not. And while they were di scussing among themse lves, he spoke, Natsi-na-mbur spoke, saying "But it was not I. If it had been I, then I should have brought that sow and it wo uld have been waiting here, on the shore. But it was not I. You had better look out for some other man. It was not I. For the man you gave them to has thought better of it and has decided not to come . That is all. You go away. Your turmeric leaves are lost. We shall never see that man again. Your turmeric leaves are lost. Go away now, paddle away ". So they went away . Na tsi-na-mbur has just been deceiving them. It was indeed he who had taken the turmeric leaves. 235

TALE T: N�TSINAMBUR COPULATES WITH HIS SISTER AND MOTHER I 1. Nots i nambur mwi kete ni-wat sa. Mw i tei ni-wat sa mu tur re ni-sii1 . Ko m'ok wiel . 2. Mar wa lamof, mw i lasi I)a mar ok Ju-Julo, wifewin mar ok Ju-fu lo, ko ni-tal) mu row firi. 3. Ko mar wan re ni-sal nen , ko n'dal) mu row firi, 4. ko mar lasi ni-wat a mu tur, ko mar kete wa na mbun ni-tal). Ko ma r kete mw i-re I)a re-I)an, 5. ko inir wiJewin ma r se tsu ton i te re salar, 6. ko na-mbun dal) kisen mw i ral)e re ni-wat. Ko ini m'ok wiel , mi wan mw i llis i I)a na-mbol) ta-ta-tsar mar wa lamoJ. 7. mar fu-fulo na-mbol) ta-ta-tsar. Ko ma r rna , ma r namp ta-ta-tsar re ni-wa t. 8. Ko ini mu ok lasi, ko mu wurei mu wu rei mu wa , 9. "Kab se namp te re ni-wat ok. No kete hore, pwi-re I)a mirak wU-l)a tsots ik, 10. wUI)-a buak wU-l)a pw i sa pw i namp, ko pe hitsi re-I)an. No hil hore ni-wat ok. 11. Kab se namp te watsi re-I)an." Ko e wan , mu fok re ni- wat a. 12. Mwi lasi I)a tso tsin mi wiel, mi wan, m'berteni , wan na-mbun dal) re-I)an, re ni-wat a. 13. Ko Notsi nambur ini mu fok lamof mw i lasi tso ts in I)a m'berten i wa n na-mbun dal) ko e wa la wan. 14 . Notsi nambur e wa la e wan ko mu hitsi tsotsin a. 15. Ko tso tsin a mu tur mare ko-rol), ko Notsinambur mw i hitsi, ko tsotsin a e wiel. 16. Notsi nambur a ini e wan e fok kele ko e lasi miran a e rna kele. 17. E berten i ke le na-mbun Ko Notsinambur a e row tsal i I kele, e wa la kele, e wan kele, e wurei, e wa , lOPe, pe hit sim kele". Ko miran e re e ro pwi -tsa . Ko Notsi nambur e wurei e wa , 20. "Ko ina me kete ni-wa t nu hor-hor, mw i-re wiJ ewin pa r se namp te re-I)an. Ko e-res pe hitsim." 21. Ko miran e ro pw i-tsa. E re-rake to-toni miran ko e hit si. 22 . Ko e wa I a wa t sin. Ko mar rna , mar wa hi:m, ko mar rewtsi ni . Timan mi rewtsi ni, 23. mu wurei ni Notsi nambur e wa , "Inik ko e-wise7 Mo hitsi mi-r am7 Ko Notsinambur e wurei e wa 24 . "Ina me kete ni-wa t mu hor-hor, ko me wurei inlri mar rOl)e ko ar re ina 25. ne ka ra-karasir. Ko me wan , me Jok, silehi, me lasi mi rak, tsots ik, 26. mar rna ko mor namp re-I)an ko me hitsir. Me hitsi inir a e-ru." 27 . E J u ko wa t sin.

TRANSLAT ION

No tsi-na-mbur made a stone, he hewed out a 8tone and put it to stand by the roadside, in such a pLace that those going to their garden8 in the bush must keep on pa8sing it. And he watched the women carrying their Loads home from the gardens, how their baskets were very heavy, and how, seeing that stone, they rested the bottom of their baske ts on it. When they rested the bot tom of their basket8 on it they did not

------� ------236 TALE T

remove the straps from their necks, but simp ly rested the bottom of their baskets on the stone . And he kept on passing, and every day they went into the bush, and every day returned carrying their loads . And each time they came and rested at the stone . And he watched them, and spoke, saying "Do not rest on that stone . I have placed a taboo on it, to the effe ct that whe ther it be my mo ther, or my sister, or my grand mother, or whoever it may be that takes a rest there, T wi ll copu late with her . I have placed a taboo on that stone, so do you not rest on it". Then he went and hid by that stone . And he saw how his sister came up, and approached it, and turned her back to it, and re sted the bottom of her basket on it, on tha t stone . And Notsi-na-mbur, he was hiding in the bush, and saw his sister, how she turne d her back to it, and placed the bo t tom of her basket on it. Then he ran out, and came up to her . Notsi-na-mbur ran out, and came, and copulated with that sister. And that sister was simply standing straight up , and he copu lated with her. Then that sister went on her way, and Notsi-na-mb ur, he went and hid again. And he saw that mother of his. She , too, came and turned her back to it and placed the bo t tom �f her baske t on it, on that stone . Then No tsi-na-mbur lept out again, and ran, and came up to her, and spoke, saying "Mo ther, I am going to copulate with you too ". Bu t his mother did not want to. But Notsi-na-mbur spoke, saying "But T have placed a taboo on that stone, that women should not rest on it. So it is right that I shou ld copulate with you". But his mother di d not want to, so he caught hold of her, and copulated wi th her. Then he ran away. And when they came home, they all stormed at him . His fa ther stormed at him, and spoke to Notsi-na-mbur, saying "Why did you copula te with your mother ?" Then Notsi-na-mbur replied, saying "T placed a taboo on the stone, and told them, and they heard it. But they thought I was joking. But I went and, and wa tched, and saw my mother and my sister, how they both came and rested on it, so I copu lated with them. I copulated with them both". That is the end. 237

TALE U: BAT-PILA'S SON AND THE OBA MAN 'S SON

1. Bat-plla ni-wa t. E pepe tsUnob sa. 2. Ko ta-Ba natun tsUno sa. Inir, a e-ru, ko or woJi ta la, or wan or tei . 3. Ta-Ba natun e tei na-mbur, ko Bat-pila natun e te i ray. Ko or wan or oni, ko or weh i e wa-ta, ko or wiwsi, 4. Ko or silei na-mbun nen. Mor sllei tsile na- mban mor ira. 5. Ko na-ak a Bat-pila natun e wa la e-res , ko ta-Ba na-ak a natun e wala e-tsats. 6. Ko mor rnamo r te I uha n i l)a-hUt . Ko mor I ek e-re ne-hi:m sar. Ko nl-lal) naru mw i ser. 7. Ko ta-Ba natun timan e wal)ani ni-wa ra sa. B. Ko ini e wurei Bat-pila natun, e wa , "Naru mw i ser ne-I)a la, e-res ro wa e-Ra." 9. Ko Bat-plla natun e wurei e wa , "Ro ril)eni ni-se7" Ko ta-Ba natun e wa , "Ro ril)eni buh'll I)a tlmar." 10. Ko Bat-pila natun e wa , "Ko sa pu-roI)7" 11. Ko ta-Ba natun e wa , "E-res ro ril)eni sa ok, ro wan ko ro watsenl e-Ra." 12. Ko ta-Ba natun ko Bat-pila natun inir a e-ru or wa la. Ta-Ba natun e I ihe buha ni-wara I)a timar. 13. Ko or wa la or wan, mor wehi na-ak wa la. Ko Bat-pila natun e wurei ta-Ba natun e wa . 14 . "Po tur ok, ko ina pe wa la wa hi:m." E wa la e wan, e lasi miran Bat-pila nl-wat. 15. E I)oni ni, e wu-rei e wa , lOPe , pe lai te buha pwi sa." 16. Miran ni-wat a e lai wan ni-war e-ru. Ko Ini eli he e wa I a . Ko e wan tsi ta-Ba natun, 17. e wa, "Inik, ko lihe buha l)a-mbe7" Ko Bat-pila natun e wa , lB. "Ina no I ihe buha e-ru I)a hi :m si mirak." Or wan or woJ i buha we-re na-ak. 19. Ko Bat-pi la natun e wurel e wa , "Inlk po wa la pu womu. Inik, na-ak s�m e wa la e-tsats." 20. Ko ta-Ba natun e wala e womu , e wa -wa n Sanwa ra , e toni e wa e-Ra , e wa la, e wa-wan, 21. e to mor i bun un. Ko Ba t-p i I a natun e weh i na-ak a ini we-re ni-tas. 22. E wa la kele, e hore e wa-wan Sanwara . E toni ke le, e wa e-Ra, 23. e wan , tsovi na-ak a ta-Ba natun. Ko ta-Ba natun e wieta, ko na-ak a Bat-pila natun e womun. 24 . E wa n e haJ La-tan Wo l-wol . Ko na-ak a ta-Ba natun e ar wieta. E wan, e hi:lJ we-tao 25. Ko or I ihe buha we-hUt. Or wehi na-ak e wa e-hUt. Ko or wan or wa hi :m. 26. Ko ti-e-Ra ar ka latsi buha, inir, a e-ru. Ko re- I)a ta-Ba ko natun ko ar kalatsl ko ratsln ko Jopon . 27 . Re-I).a Bat-pi la natun ko ratsln Jopon ko re-I)a ta-Ba natun. 2B . Ko e Ju wats in. Ko mor lek ruoll mwl ser , 29. ko inir or lihe kele balak wa la. Mor wan, or woJ i na-ak e wa la ko or woJi buha e wa re na-ak. 30. Ko Bat-pila nat un e wurel ta-Ba natun e wa , "Po tur I)a-Ok, ko ina pe wan, 31. pe wehi tal in na-mban pwl sa ." Ko ta-Ba natun e wa , "10, po wan." 32. Ko ini e wala e wan. Ko e se wehi te na-ha I)a pi we talin na-mban. 33. E sara-wan , e wa, e tsuri batun tawe sa, ko e ruruJi. Ko ratsin sa e wa ra , 34. e ha tsi to-toni pweren tawe. Ko ini mi weh i ko mu wala mi wan. 35. Ko rats ln ni-wara mw i ka-kal e-re I)ul in tawe . Mw i ha ts i to- toni. Ko ml wa ta-ta-tsar mi wa la. 36. Mu woJI ra tsin we-re na-ak. 238 TALE U

Ko mu wurei mu wurel ta-Ba natun kele, mu wure i e wa , 37 . "Inik po wa la pu womu. Na-ak s�m e wa la e-tsats." 38 . E wa la e wan e taka womu ke le Sanwara. Ko Bat-p ila natun ear iwei kele na-mban 39. ear wa la e wa e-ta. E wan e tsov ke le re-Qa ta-Ba natun. 4 o. Ko t a - Ba m i di n ini e lek womu Lologar. E tsu le tipaQ e-ru. Hwi lasi Qa Bat-pila, na- t un mu h�f, e wan, 41. ko e wurei e wa , "Inik, natun ni-wat na-won . 42. Ko r 0 po w a I a r i en ina t uk, po w i 5 e n i ?" Ko Bat- pila natun e wurei e wa , "Ko ini na-ak san e wala e-tsats. 43. Ko ina no lek La-ten Wo l- wol, ko no wurei no wa , 'Inik po wa la pu womu' . 44. Ko in i m u wa I a m u womu mwi taka womu Sanwara . Ko ina me ar wa la mi we-tao 45. Ko me rna me tsovi." E fu ko watsin. Ko Bat-pila natun mu h�f womu ko mw i lek ko watsi. 46. Lo lon mwi ha r. H'i wan ta-Ba natun mu h�f e rna kele. 47. Ko ta-Ba natun e wurei e wa , "Ko inik ko wise mo so wof ton i te buha pi wa e-hiit?" 48. Ko Bat-pila natun e wurei e wa , "H irar, ina me h�f womu ko e fowur i a". 49. Ko ta-Ba natun e f owuri miran , e wa , "Inik ko wise mo wurei mwar' el? 50. Ko ina, na-ak sak e wa la e-tsats. In i e lek e-Ra. 51 . Ko ina no wa la e womu, ko ini mw i ar wa la mi weta, rna mu tsovi ina. Ko mi rna mu h�f womu". 52. Ko Bat-pi la natun e wur ei , e wa, "Po so wurei te". Ta-Ba natun e wurei , e wa , 53. "Ro wof tu-tuoni buha." Ko Bat-pi la natun e wa , "E! Ro wof toni re-f)a in i k" . 54 . Or wan or wo f toni Qa ta-Ba natun. Ko e fu. Or wof rowa e wa e-hiit. 55. Ko ta-Ba nat un e wurei e wa , "Ro wof i kele Qa inik". Ko Bat-pila natun e wa , 56. "E! Ini pu tur pa. Ni-al pu mol -mol ko ro ar wofl." E karakaras . 57. Ko Bat-pila natun e wurei e wa , "Ro lihe buha Qa inik pi wa hi:m". 58. Ta-Ba natun e wa , "10." Or lihe ar wa hi:m. Ko mar wa-wan Qa-hi :m, 59. ko Bat-pila natun e karakaras, e wurei e wa , "Ina pe te riri ni na-ak. 60. Hw i-re Qa no-u p'u, ko pe wa tahani." E karakaras. Ko ini mi wa n mi weh i n-ak wa la, 61. mu wa la e wa la luha, rna Qa-Ok. Hi rna , mwi tsibari Rano mu womu. 62 . Ko to-Rano ar wurei ar wa , "Po rna , po h�f el". Ko ini e wa , "E ! Ina pe wa tan". 63. Ko e wofi balak a mwi lai f)a e-Ra sa, e wa , "Pi e sami n ill. Ina pe wa tan Ie." Ko m i rna kele Wa la. 64 . To-Wa la ma r wurei mar wa "Po h�f". Ko ini e wurei e wa , 65. "E! Ina pe wa tan." E lav kele ba lak bu-h� Qa sa kele pitewi to-Wala, 66. e wa , "Pi we sami n i . Ina pe wa la pe wa tan". Ko mi rna kele f)a-Tsan. 67 . Ko to-Tsan mar wurei ma r wa , "Po h�f f)a-ok" . Ko ini mu wurei mu wa "Pe wa tan". 68 . Ko e wof kele balak buh� sa pitew to-Tsan ke le. Ko e wa "Ina pe wa tan kele". 69. Ko e wan kele Vao. Ko to Vao ma r lasi kele, ma r wa , "Po h�f ke I e Qa-ok". 70. Ko ini e wure i e wa , "Ina pe wa tan". Ko e wof kele ba lak buh� f)a sa pitew to-Vao. 71 . Ko ini e wala kele, e wa la ke le, e wan e h�f f)a-Siu. 72. Ko ratsin ni-wa ra Qa mi we f)a TALE U 239 e-Ra e-re tawe I)a mwi re mi we talin na-mban, 73. ko ratsini-wara mwi ka-ka l re I)ulin tawe , ko mi wa mi wa la re na-ak. 74 . In i ko watsin sa men , ratsin nen, ni-war nen ini ko watsin sa men mw i re-I)a re na-ak. 75. Mu h�J wa tsi ron i I)a-Siu. Mwi lek watsin. 76. Ko buha tsi len mw i lav rowa we tsi tsunob tsi le, to-Rano, to-Wala, ikir I)a-Tsan, to-Vao. 77 . Ko ini mwi ril)eni Juri ratsin ko mi wan, mu h�J roni I)a-Siu. 78 . E wal)ani ko ini mu kete na-mwel . Mi mwel. Ko mwi rewts i. Ko buha tsilen mw i lai , 79. we tsi tsunob inir mar rewts i. Ko ini mw i ril)en i Juri ratsin. 80. Mi wan mw i rewts i I)a-Siu. E Ju ko watsin.

SUMMARY

Bat -pila 's son and the Oba roan's son each make a canoe. Trial trip . Oba man's canoe sails badly . They plan to sail to Raga . Oba man's son takes one pig, Bat -p ila 's son take s two. Oba man's son sails first , but is overtaken by Bat-pila 's son . They exchange their tuskers for hermaphrodites. Bat -p ila 's son steals a hermaphrodite tusker on Raga . Return to Oba . Bat -p ila 's son arrives first , and Oba man's mot her swears at him . Bat-p ila 's son deceives them , and sails away . Arrives a� Small Islands, gives them male pigs, but will not stay . Goes to Ma lo , stays there , and sacrifices the stolen hermaphrodite at right called 'Cycas '.

TRANSLAT ION

Ba t-pila was a stone, and bore a human son. An Oba man also had a son. These two [were friends and ] used to go about together. Each looked for a tree from which to manufacture a canoe, and, having found it, took his adze (tala) and fe lled it. Now, the Oba man 's son chose a tree of the kind ca lled ma-mbur, but Ba t-pila 's son fe lled a tree of the kind ca lled ray. Each man ho l lowed out his log, dragged it down to the beach, made fa st the gunwales, thwarts and outrigger, and then made a sai Z. 1 Wh en the strips of sai l have been sewn together, and the sai ls rigged, they set out for a trial trip . And the canoe made by Ba t-pila 's 2 son sailed we ll, but that of the Opa man 's son sailed badly. Then they returned, and beached their canoes, and came ashore [to wait for a fair wind] . lAccording to my fieldnote account , the sails were made of tobon na-ni, the material used for making the best kind of bark-board belt . 2According to my fieldnote account , it sank. 240 TALE U

At last the wind ca lled na-ru blew from the south-west. Now it happened that the fa ther of the Oba man was rearing a re-entrant-tusker (ni-wara). And the Oba man 's son spoke to Bat-pila 's son and said: "The south-west wind is blowing on the shore. It is meant that we should sail for Raga ". But Bat-pila 's son said: "What shall we take aboard to trade with?" And the Oba man 's son said: "Let us take our [sic ] father 's pig ". Ba t-pila 's son said: "On ly one ?". and the Oba man 's son replied: "That will be all right. We will take tha t one aboard and trade wi th it on Raga ". So the Oba man 's son and Bat-pila 's son, they two, went down to the shore, the Oba man 's son leading his father's re-entrant-tusker. So they went down to the shore, and dragged their canoes down to the sea. Then Ba t-pila 's son said : "Stop here. while I run up to the village ". And he ran, and came, and saw his mother Bat-pi la, the stone . And he requested her, saying: "Mo ther, let me take a pig". His mot her, that stone, went and fe tched two re entrant-tuskers, and he led the two pigs down to the shore . And when he came to the Oba man 's son, [the latter ] asked "Where di d you get those pigs?" And he rep lied: "I got those two pigs at home . from my mo ther ". And they carried the pigs into the canoe . And Bat-pila 's son: "You sail first, [since] your canoe sails badly ". l So the Oba man 's son sai led fi rst, and went on ti ll he came to San-wara [the Oba beach from which canoes set sail direct to Raga] . Then he let out his sail, and steered for Raga. And he sai led, and sailed ti ll he had almost disappeared over the horizon. Then Bat-pila 's son launched his canoe, and sailed till he came to San-wara. Then he too let out his sai l, and made for Raga, and overtook the Oba man 's canoe. so that the Oba man 's son came last and Bat-pila 's son 's canoe came first. And 2 he came and landed at [a place called] La-tan Wo l-wol. And the Oba man 's canoe fo l lowed and landed last. And they dragged their pigs ashore. and carried their canoes out of reac h of the tide. Then they went to the village . And the men of Raga exc hanged pigs with them, with both of them. And in exchange for the Oba man 's son 's pigs they gave [in add ition to ordinary pigs] several hermaphrodi te pigs . For Bat-pila 's son 's pigs they gave hermap hrodites. and also for the Oba man 's son 's pig. And so the bargain was conc luded. Then they waited till the wind ca lled ruol i blew from the north east. And [when it blew from the north-east ] they bore down their lTom' s passage. 2The place to which, according to my fieldnote account , the Oba man's son belonged. TALE U 241

exahange pigs to the shore. Then they dragged their aanoes down to the water, and lifted the pigs into the aanoes. And Ba t-pila 's son

spoke to the aba man 's son, and said : "Stay here, whi le I go to au t La creeper to make ] a rope for my sail". The aba man 's son rep lied: "Very we ll, go on ". And he ran, and when he aame [to the place], he di d not pu ll ou� a [underground ] areeper for his sai l-rope, but [in stead] put out his hand, aaught hold of the base of a [creeper of the tree called] tawe, and heaved it out. Now [it happened that ] a herma phrodite re-entrant-tusker was biting off the young shoots of the tawe. And he broke it off and ran off, with the hermap hrodite re-entrant tusker ho lding on with its teeth to the shoots of the tawe areeper [which] it was bi ting off. And he went right on ti ll he aame to the shore, and lifted the hermaphrodi te into the aanoe . And he spoke. He said again to the aba man 's son, saying : "You sail first again, [since] your aanoe sails badly". And [the Oba man's son ] sai led away ti ll he again aame first into the shallow waters off the aba aoast at San-wara . Then Bat-pila 's son in turn spread out his sai l and fo llowed him, and again overtook the aba man 's son. Now the mother of the aba man 's son was waiting for them [on the shore] at Lo lo-gar . She had poked in the eyes of two aoaonuts [to give them to drink]. And when she saw how Ba t-pila 's son aame ashore first [she was angry, and withheld the coconut from him . And ] she spoke and said: "You are only the son of a stone . How is it that you think you aan sai l in front of my son?" And Bat-pi la 's son rep lied, saying : "But his aanoe sai ls badly. Indeed, I stayed behind at La-tan Wo l-wol and spoke [to him] saying: 'You sail fir st ', and he sailed first, and aame fi rst into the shallow waters off the aoast of San-wara, and [even then] I sai led after him and overtook him ". So Bat-pila 's son landed first, and waited on the beaah. And he was very angry . And at la st the aba man 's son arrived, and landed too . And the aba man 's son sp oke, saying : "Why haven 't you aarried your pigs ashore ?" And Bat-pila 's son rep lied, saying : "[On ac count of] our [sic] mo ther. I landed first, and she swore at me ". Then the aba man swore at his mother, and said: "You, why did you speak [like that] to this man ? [As for] me, my aanoe sai ls badly. He stayed behind at Raga, and I sai led first, and he sailed after me, and aame and overtook me, and aame and landed first". And Ba t-pi la 's son spoke, saying "Don 't swear at her ". [Then] the aba man 's son spoke, saying : "Let us lift out our pigs ". But Bat-pila 's son said: "Eh ! Let us lift yours out [first]" . They went and lifted out those of the aba man 's son. And when they had lifted them out, they aarried them out of reaah of the tide. Then the 242 TALE U

Oba man 's son said: "Now let us lift yours out". But Ba t-pila 's son said : "No . Let them remain here till ,the sun has [sunk behind the trees, and ] beaome less fi erae, then we wi ll lift them out ". He was deae iving [him] . And Ba t-pila 's son spoke , saying : "Let us drag your pigs into the village ". The Oba man 's son rep lied: "A ll right". They dragged them to the vil lage. And they went on till they aame to his house, and Ba t-pila 's son deaeived him, saying: "Let me go and have a look at my aanoe, and if the tide has aome in I wi ll pull it up ". He was deaeiving, and he went and dragged his aanoe into the sea, and he sail ed, and sailed right baak here [to the Small Islands ]. First he reaahed Rano, and the men of Rano spoke, saying : "Come and land here ". But he said: "No, I must go down [i.e. north-eastward s, down the coast]". And he took one of the small pigs whiah he had re aeived in exahange at Raga, and said: "This is for you. I must go down [the coast]". And he aame next to Wa la. The men of Wa la spoke, saying : "Come ashore ", but he spoke, saying "No, I must go down [the coast ]". And he aame next to Atahin, and the men of Atahin spoke, saying: "Come ashore here ". But he rep lied, saying: "I mus t go down [the coast ]". And he gave one of the sma ll pigs to the men of Atahin also, saying : "I must go fur ther down [the coast]". And he aame next to Vao, and when the men of Vao, too, saw him, they also said : "Come ashore here� but he spoke, saying : "I must go down [the coast]". And he gave one of the small pigs to the men of Va o. And he set sail again. He sailed, and aame and landed at Ma lo. Now the hermaphrodi te re-entrant-tusker whiah had been at Raga alinging on to that tawe areeper whiah he had intended to make into a sai l-rope, that hermap hrodite re-entrant-tusker whiah had alung to the shoot of the tawe areeper, and whiah he had taken down to the shore and into the aanoe, this one [pig] only remained. That hermaphrodite re -entrant tusker alone now remained of all that ha d been in the aanoe . And he landed with it now at Ma lo, and stayed there. And all the ma le pigs he had given away to all these peop le, to the people of Rano, of Wa la, to us peop le of Atahin and to those of Va o. But the hermap hrodi te whiah he had taken aboard at Raga, he went and landed with this at Ma lo. He fed it and with it performed [the rite called] Cyaas. He performed [the right called] Cyaas. And [there] he killed [his hermaphrodite]. And all the ma le pigs he gave to the peop le [of Rano , Wala, At chin, Vao] for them to kill, but the hermaphrodite (s) whiah he had taken aboard he went and killed at Ma lo. This is the end. 243

TALE AA : THE SLAYING OF lAS

1. las mwi hore tsunob tsile I)a-Tsan . M'uroi nov-nov l. WiJewin sa mu hi li, mu hasi we-re PWaral)an rav. 2. Mu hili ko re- an. Mwi tslen, m'pep, pe-pe noreman e-ru . 3. Mor ruwi mor lap, mor la-lap. 4. Mu hoi n'ai si natun e-ru, ne-sar e-ru. 5. Mor tigei mirar, mor tawi ni Tsul)on Onema . l 6. Mor wiel . Sa e wiel I)a-ok, tauwtsen ok, tuan e wiel I)a-el. 7. Or las-las ir Ra-mason. 8. Mor rOl)e nu-mbo a las mw i wetsi mirar. 9. Tuan mu wa la I)a-ok , ko tuan mu wala I)a-el . 10. Mor wan mor lasi las mi wetsi mlrar. 11 . las me ro p'uroi Mal -mal -oba. Ma l-mal- mar i mu sari. 12. Me ro p'uroi Ma l-mal -oba, Ma l -ma l-marl mu sari. Mor wihe, mor tori I)a-el , amal Btlt-mau. 13. Mor tlw-tiwei, ma r urol. Tsunob I)a nir tsile mar uroi. 14. Mar ma- rum, mar lu-luha ma o

TRANSLATION

Tas used to ahase att the peop te of Atahin. He ate them att. Now there was a woman [named Um -but -ram , though the name is not given in the text]. She dug a ho te. She entered into a hote in a. rav tree. She dug into it. She aonaeived and bore two sons. They grew [?] and beaame big, they beaame very big [i.e. full grown]. She fa shioned atubs for her two sons, [and] two spears. These two boys marrked 2 [took?] their mother. They buried her at TsUngon Onema [but she re mained alive]. They watked about. One went round the south-east side of Atahin, the other went round the north-west side, ti tt they met at Ra-mason, on the north-eastern point of the Is tand. Here they heard the song of 3 Ta s, that he was going to exhume her . One of them ran baak one side of the istand, the other ran baak to the other side. They aame, and saw Tas exhuming their mother . Ia s wanted to eat Ma t-mat-oba, but Ma t-mat-mari speared him. He wanted to eat Ma t-mat -mari, but Ma t-mat mari stew him . He wan ted to eat Ma t-mat-mari, but Ma t-mat-oba speared him. They dragged him, they aarried him here to Amat Botmau. They aut him into tittte pieaes, and [all the people of At chin] ate him. Att those peop te ate him. [Before this] they were att witd; now they re turned home to their houses. lBut the story shows that she still remained alive, although buried. 2The word tigei is ambiguous . 3The song was sung by their mother , telling her two sons that he was going to exhume her . 244

TALE BB : THE MAN AND THE RAT

(Note : this type of tale is called tu-tuhunen.)

1. TsUnob sa mwi tei na-ak, mu wiwsi, ko mu Ju to. Mu tul -tulo po: 2. "Sue, tar-tari, be sue be-Iav ni-se1 3. Be lav raom (a - 0) tambol Sirimits." 4. Mu Ju ma TsUl)on Onema, mu llisi na-riv: "Wa-i-e! Pu Ju we be k01" 5. " .., pe Ju ok pe lai tapol Sirimlts." E wa mu Ju ma o 6. "Iki Ie rik1" Mu Ju wan mu ril)eni. 7. PI so kele nu-mbo: "Sue tar-tara, sue rarae, 8. Be sue be lav nl-se, be sue be lav raom, 9. (a - 0) be lav tambo l Sirimits." 10. Na-si mu Ju wan lopuri. Mi lasi. Na-si mu sara wele lopur i. "Wa- i-e! 11. Ko po Ju e-pe k01 Nom Ju el , nom te lav tambo l Sirimits." 12. "0 po Ju ma ikiri wer ek." 13. Mor Ju wan ; mor ril)eni; mor se kele nu-mbo. 14 . "Be sue tar-tara rarae, Be sue pe I av ni-se1 15. Be sue me lav raom (a - 0) , Be lav tambo I Sirimits." 16. Na-Iu mu sara. "Wa- i-e! Ka b Ju ma , na-riv wele I)a ." Ar bu-buwo re ni-Ies, re-I)an ni-Ies. 17 . Mar Ju wan. Na- Iul a mi wiel wan, mar tabe na-ak. 18 . Mu rOl)e na-wUn na-riv. "Uam-m-ml Na-wun n�-n� rak sa ni-el". 19. Na-riv a mu wa la mu motsi rUruil)e na-ak. 20. Mu wa la. Na-Iul a mbets-mbets mwl-tsa. 21 . Ni-man mar row. "I-se pu ka rasi".

TRANSLAT ION

A man ho l lowed out a canoe, and built �t up, and went paddling . 1 He sang a song : "Padd le hard, I paddle, wha t do I take ? I take fo od, sweet tapol fruit". He paddled and came to TsUngon Onema . He saw a rat, who said, "Hello! Whither are you padd ling ?" - "Oh I'm paddling here to get a tapo l fruit at Sirimits". He paddled towards it and said, "You dear thing ". He paddled up to it and took it into his canoe . Again he sang the song : "Paddle hard, paddle ... . 2 I padd le to get

�he word to at the end of the sentence here marks continuity. It is the verb of 'permanent being', and is used in Atchin in muc h the same way as tu in Fijian, after a main verb. 2The meaning of the word rarae was not found out . TALE BB 245

what? I paddZe to get some food, to ge t tapo ! fruit at Sirimits". A parrot paddZed and came to Lopuri . It saw him. The parrot was just aZighting at Lopuri, and it said: "He ZZo! Where are you paddZing to ?" He answered: "We two are paddZing here, we are getting sweet tapo! fruit." - "Oh! PaddZe and come he re, my dears ." They two paddZed and came, and took the parrot on board. They again sang the song, "PaddZe hard (rarae ). what do I get? I get food, I get tapo! fr uit at Sirimits. " A night-hawk had settZed, and it said, "HeZZo! AZZ of you, paddZe to me, dear rat. " They aZZ hid it in a coconut sheZZ, inside a coconut 1 sheZZ. They aZZ paddZed and came . The night-hawk wa Zked about and they beached the canoe. He sme ZZed the sme ZZ of the rat [saying], "Sniff! I sme ZZ something to eat here. " [But ] the rat ran away. It nibbZed through the canoe and ran away . The night-hawk searched in vain. The birds fZew away [saying] "Why have you deceived [us]?"

li.e. they hid the rat in a coconut shell Cused as a bailerl, because it was afraid of the night-hawk . The parrot was also afraid of the night-hawk . 246

TALE CC : THE TALE OF A SPIRIT

1. Tsunob sa niri wiJen san or wan or pa le ni-ar; or loni n{l-n{l-rar. 2. Or wan or pa le nl-ar . Or wan or ma-homb. 3. Mor wan mor ro por han. l Mor roni re n-dal) a or umJapwo l ini re ni-tal). 4. "I-se e uroi n{l-n{l rar l)a-tan7" 5. "Po mak ro mul, mew i ro ar ma ro pale kele ni-ar." 6. Or tabu kele. Mor ma mor loni n{l-n{l rar mor wan or pa le ke le ni-ar . 7. Mor wan ni-al e woJe n-mbat, mor re mor ma por han. 8. Mor se lasi 9. Mumun mamela ml wan m'ur-uroi n{l-n{l rar. 10. "I-se e uroi n{l-n{l rar7" Ni-ar ok pu to I)a-ok. Ro mu 1. Mew i ro ma ke le ro pale ni-ar." 11. Or tel n{l-n{l rar. E wurei wifen san: 12. "Inik po lek mat-matni n�-n� rar I)a-ok; po Jilehl re-I)a mum'ok lai n{l-n{l rar". 13. "10. Po wan po pale ni-ar (l)." 14 . Mw i Jok; wifen san e JOk. Mumun e mamela e tsipa1. 15 . Mu wa la mi wan, mu re pi lai n{l-n{l hanan. 16. Mwi lawi . "A inik le-ro." Mum'ok e uroi n{l-n{l ramam7" 17 . "10." "P' uroi n�-n{l r{lm ko wa . Tim{lm pi ma ko nl-ok." 18 . Timan mi mao E wa , "Po kila, mwar' el Ie pu-rol) mo urol n�-n{l na-rar." 19. Pi e natur wele7" Ar mu 1. Ar wan, ar kete na-lok. 20. Mwi han mi wa-wan mw i lap. Timan e re pi wan pu pale ni-ar. 21 . "Po wan ke te na-lok namamnimar ." E ketp. na-lok e-ru. E hani tsi le na:n, mamela. 22 . E hani tsile na :n ko e re pwi hani ni timan. Pe hani kele na-lok a timak ni-le Jopon ." 23. "10." Mw i hani ts i-le ko mw i re pwl hani ke le re-I)a timan. 24 . "Pa, pe hani ke le na-lok a timak ni-le." 25. "Owa ! E! , In iki mumun mamela pi tei i-si k07" M'uroi rev-rev." 26. E wa , "10." E lai na-wis san, n'al san, e wie1 . Miran e wa , "Natuk, po luha ma we le, wei!" 27 . E wa , "Natuk, po luha ma wele we il" E mu ro-rol) ini mumun

- m am e 1 a pi t e i i 5 i e . "Po luha, ina, pe wie1 ." 28. Mi wan, mw i tal) mu to mor i ne-I)a . 29. Miran e wa , "Natuk, po luha ma wele." E wa , "Po ki la timak ma 1)0 ." 30. Miran a mw i klla wan mwl ts ipal, mwar ' aero wi lilon (7) . 31. Miran e tal). E luha . Timan e wa , "Ko i wise ni I)go me wle17" E wa , "Tsiga no wurei na-lok ko pu-rol) ko mw i hani tsi le na:n. 32. Ko mu Ju . E re pwi han kele na:n. Ko inik, mumun mamela, pi tei se. 33. Po ma , por rev-rev I)a-tan. Ko me wiel no wurei e-pe ko pu-rOI). Mi wiel ; ro se woJe ni ko-ro, mw i ro pwi tsa ni kir, e wiel ko wei!"

l The word is uncertain and its meaning not ascertained. TALE CC 247

TRANSLAT ION

A man and his wife went to buiZd a fen ce. They hung up their food [in a basket on a tree]. They went and buiZt the fence . After a time they be came hungry . After a time they wished to dine. They inser ted their hands into the basket. They [? missed the food that was] in the l basket. "Who is eating our food here?" [the man said to hi s wife] . "You go fi rst; Zet us go home. Tomorrow we wi ZZ both come bac k again and we shaH continue to buiZd the fe nce ." They cooked [their evening meal] again. [Next day] they came and hung up their [basket full] of food ag ain. They continued [working till] the sun was overhead. They wished to dine. [Again] they missed their fo od. A mamela spirit had come and eaten up their meaL [The man said,] "Who is eating our fo od? 2 Let that fence stay here now. Let us go. Tomorrow we shaZZ return and con tinue to bui Ld the fence ." [Next day ] they put their fo od [in the same place] . He says to his wife : "You stay and keep an eye on our food here; you watch about [?] the spirit that takes our foo d. " [She says], "A H right, you go and buiZd the fe nce. " She hid; his wife hid. The spirit of the mamela burst [through the bu sh] . It ran and came for it wished to take their dinner. [She cried,] "Ho there !". She caught 3 it and said, NOh ! You dear, [are you the] spirit that eats our fo od ?" [The spirit child said], "Yes. " [She said ] "You take your food and go . Your fa ther wiZZ soon be coming ". The fa ther came . She says, "You Zook, it is onZy this fe Z Zow who has been eati ng our fo od. " [?He said] "Can it be our dear chiZd?" They aH went [?home]. They made a pudding . He [the spirit child] ate on and on. The fa ther wanted to go back and buiZd the fence. [She said ] "You go and prepare puddings for our food ". He made two puddings [i.e. one for himself and one for the spirit-child ]. The Zatter ate aZZ his He ate aZZ his, and wanted to ea t his fa ther 's [saying] "L et me ea t a ZittZe of this my fa ther 's. " He [she?] said, "Very weH". He ate aH his and wanted to eat some of his fa ther 's aZso, [saying] "Mother, Zet me eat that pudding of my fa ther 's. " [She say s] "Ho, there ! Hi ! You spirit of the mamela, who may you be? You have eaten what you have not dug from the ground". He says "Yes". He took his bow and his cZub, he went away. His mother said, "My chi Zd, l This is a su ggestion ad sensum. The text of the tale is not satisfactory as a whole. 2i.e• Let us leave off building the fence.

3From the sense of what follows it is clear that when she succeeded in catching the spirit , she found it was that of her own, probably dead , child. 248 TALE CC

l come home, alas!" He be thoug ht himself he was a mame la spirit. [He said] , "You go home; [as for] me, I [must ] depart." He went. She almost ... wep t. His mo ther said, "My chi ld, come home, dear one, ala s!" He [?she ] said, "Look at my fa ther ... ". That mother saw him go and disappear into the bush. That fe llow wanted to .... The mother wept. She went back [?home]. The father says, "Why did I go away ?" She says, "Nothing, only I wanted some puddi ng [for the spirit child] and he ate all yours [as we ll]. But it is all over . He wanted to eat yours also. And you, mamela spirit, who were you ? Come, le t us pull up yams here. And she went away . And I [?] went away, I only wished it thus. We did not rightly know him. He did no t want to stay with us, he went away, ala s! " 249

TALE DD : A FAM INE AND DROUGHT IN OLDEN DAYS

1. BOI) ne-wis' tuha wor, timamam , miramam mar liisi ni-ma ra , ni-ma ra mwi lap. 2. Mar ok Jobwe kiam ni ; nam ok rOl)e I)a ma r wurei, mar rOl)e ni-lal) e sar e-lap, ni-lal) e rawits. 3. We mare; mu Ju ko, mi wa tola. No-uJ m'uJ mwi liip, ni-l al) mu sar mw i-lap re-I)an. 4. Mu Ju ko e wa na-mbwere; mu Ju ko e wa na-ru ke le. 5. Mar se wa e-hut te no terik na-vu l pwi sa. 6. Mar lek I) a-hi:m ko pin. 7. N?-n? hanan mw i-tsa. Par uroi ni-se? Mu Jin ko mu Jin watsin. Mw i sa ko mu lek I) a-hi:m san. 8. Mwi kila we ok mu lasi roha wanu ok. Mw i sa ko e rep 'ok. 9. Roha ok, ko e-tsiga re-I)ar. Mwi te ni-al san ko wa tsin. 10. Mu Jin ko watsin. 11 . "Par ki-klla, par l1isi n?-n? hanan pu ka le I)a-mbe l)a1" 12 . N?-n? ko rlk n?-n? hanan ko rik. 13. Mar mats ko mar uroi pweren na-ni mar tsemwe ni-mbat ko rik I) a mu tu r, lap niri ko watsin. 14. I) a pu ki-ki la pu las-lasi n?-n? hanan pwi sa . Pu to Ie I)a pu tsel-tsel in rowe . 15 . Mwi sa ko e rum I) a-ok. I)a mu lek I) a-hi:m san. Mar wa la rowe . 16. Mar wa Tawal, Tawa l rik wiJewin, noreman, mar lek I) a-hi:m mi wan wanu. 17 . Mar lek tser mwar ' ar re lu-luh? rna ne-I)a mat lek tsar I)a-e 1. 18. Mar masa e-lap tia-ra mu kete ri-rik mar ma ts rik. 19. Mwi sa ko e rna to I)a -ok, mw i sa mi wi-wiel ko , e ma ts re ni-se1 . 20. I) a mi wanai mar sesuwe i re-I)an n?-n? n?-rar, ko mar rewtsi pin. 21. Mwar' e-p'ok tsilin wanu ok ko rik to Vao, to Wa la, to Rano, ma r tsel i pu rOI) ko wa ts in. 22. Wanu mwi res watsin ko mar lu-luh? rna , n'terek ni-ram pwi sa wU-l)a pw i e-ru, 23. ko wanu mwi res, wanu mwi res watsln. 24 . No-uJ m'uJ, tsile na-wits ro-ntarik mar maur ni. 25. No-uJ a m'uJ, mar kila re-I)an I) a wanu mi wan mu res luha ko watsin ne-I)a. 26. Mar wok I) a iniri re wanu , I)a -Tsan ko rik. 27. Mar lu-luha rna mar wok I)a-in I)a Siu, mar wuli ni-ram mar ko le ko watsin. 28. I)a mara 10-10J re-I)an ko wa tsin. 29. Mar rOl)e ni-mara mwi-lap, mwi -lap a mwi-lap; mar wu r ei, 30. "Pwi te-rik pi kete kele taron 'ok pwi-re pin I) a wuJonen, rOl)e pw i-tsa tarone Ie watsin. 31. N?-n? ri ta-maut mwi-lap te kete e se rna teo N?-n? ri ta-maut ok mwi-lap watsin, Ini ko pin ni- mara mwi-l ap a mw i-lap. 32 . Nam lasi mol-toni wanu mu res Ie wa tsin ko. Mwi sa ko e reini 1)1 mar -mar I)a-el. 33. "Po lasi klam ne-mbe wanu mwl res ko mw i sa ko e tigei Juri wiJen san ni-mar-ma r 1 iko (7) ar mel il)en tu-tuoni wiJewin ko ar wiel nats re te so-sopwe muru ni-ma ra e wu li e-lap." 34 . Mwi tsats wor. Mwi-lap.

TRANSL AT ION

In the olden day8 our fa ther8 and our mother8 experienced a famine, a great famine. They often te ll U8 of it. We often li8ten as they 250 TALE DD

speak. They heard the wind bLowing up for a hurricane . [First ] it bLew up [the coast , i.e. towards Ambrym] . That finished, and then it came from the north-west. The rain poured down and the wind bLew hard into Tha t finished, then it bLew west-by-north . That finished, then it came again from the south-west. They di d not [i.e. could not ] go to the main Land perhaps for a whoLe month. They did nothing but stay at home. [They had] no food . Wha t shouLd they eat? Then it l cLeared up and the sun shone . One man stayed at home. He Looked again and again. He saw Leaves eve rywhere . One man [did] thus . The re were no Leaves on [the trees] there. Then he made the sun to shine [by magic ]. Then it cLeared up . Let them keep on Looking, where shaLL they see food-stuffs growing ? Food indeed, food to eat indeed? They died, they wanted to eat coconut shoots, they even gnawe d [?sucked at ] a root as it Lay, many of them then. One might keep Looking [hoping that] he might fi nd something to eat. He might be Lost aLtogether. This one went wiLd [and ran] about. Tha t one stayed in his house . They went to Tawa L, even as far as Tawa L [to look for food]. Women and men stayed at home . He went to a pLace . They stayed for a Long time. They wanted to come back, those who kept on staying here [?there] . They be came very sick. In the end they got dysentery and even died. One man died that. Ano ther wand ered about [and ] died on the road. This one stoLe. They discovered him among their food-stuffs and they kiLLed him. PeopLe [were] in this condi tion even in every pLace, the peop Le of Vao, of Wa La and of Rano . Now they simp Ly wandered about. At Last the pLace became good. They came back. They were away perhaps one year, perhaps two . And the pLace became good, then it became good. The rain poured down . Bananas and wiLd yams grew. The rain poured down, and they Looked into that the pLace became good. They came back then thither. They returne d to their [house s], to their viLLages, even to Atchin. They came back, the returned thither. [The y went ] to Ma Lo, [where] they bought yams and brought them home . Those who had starved became fa t in [all ] those pLaces. They said: "Perchance it may again be as it was of oLd". [But we ] think that nowadays it wi LL not be so. The white man 's fo od in great quantities may prevent it [the famine] from coming. The food of the white man is pLentifuL now. It is fin ished the grea t famine. We saw how by degrees the pLace is becoming good. 2

lA magician, who made the sun shine. 2 A satisfactory translation of the rest of the tale was not reached at the time of transcription and is not attempted here. 251

TALE EE : TALE OF AN EXPEDITION TO RAGA

1. BOQ ne-wis nor Puruar mar tel na-ak sa, na-ak sa mwi -lap, a mw i-lap. 2. N'asan Man-wowa . Mar lai ma r wa e-Ra . Mwara Qa e-Ra lolor mw i tsats. Mar wahal to-Tsan. 3. Mar llwe e-ru Jopon. Ma r uloQ. Jopon mar hore ti-e-Ra . 4. Mar rna Qa-el Tsan mul rna , mar rna Qa-el Qa-Tsan. 5. Mar wurei mar wa , "Kiam na-wahal mw i-lap, mw i-lap a mw i-lap."

TRANSLAT ION

A Long time ago, the men of Ruruar fa shioned a canoe, a very great canoe. Its name was Man-wowa . They took it and went to Raga. The men of Raga were hostiLe. They made war on the men of Atchin. They shot a coupLe. They swam . The others chased the men of Raga. They came back, they came here to Atchin. They said, "We [have had] a great battLe, a very great battLe. "

TALE FF

The very brief tale that wa s numbered thus appears to be a Scripture paraphrase , and accordingly is not entered here, as not being a purely nat ive text . 252

TALE GG : PRODUCING MAN BY MAG IC

1. Tsunob sa, inir e-ru we ta-tasir. Mi tiwe i tas in. 2. Mar wahal. Mar liw-l iwer . Mu fu ko 'nir e-ru watsin, 'nir tas ir mor lek. 3. E wa , "Pe tiwei", mu I)o-I)oni. E wa , "Pe tiwoim7" E wa , "10." 4. Or wa Iamus e no-ut sar ko mu tiwei tasin. 5. Mu hi li nu-al mwi te ro-kalat. Mi tiwei ro-ka lat mow sal)awu l e numbwe. 6. Mi te we-re nu-al mu te tsi le we-re nu-al . 7. Ko mu lai roin na-wits. M'bosi . We-we bOl)in bOI) nen e-mbiit . 8. M'bosi ko mu mu l ko sa-sawi ne-wits mu rotsi tobon sar mow sal)awul, 9. mu tur ral)i mew sar mow sal)awul . Mu tinge tigesir. 10. Mar we ni tsUnob. Mar wa hi:m, mar lai tobon, mar lai nen na ne- wis, mar wiel , mar mar waha l ko mar liwe r, mar liwer ro-kalat. 11 . Mar liwer tsile. Tauwtsen wahal ko mar mu l I)a-Tsan. Mar wa hi : m sar. 12 . Mar lek I)a-Tsan mwi-res .

TRANSLAT ION

There was a man. [He and other ] they-two were brothers. He cut up his brother. They all fought . They all shot at one another . That ended and they two [were alone] now. The brothers remained. He said, "Shall I cut [you] up ?" He kept on asking. He says, "Sha ll I cut you up ?" The other said, "Yes". They went to Iamus, to their gardens, and he cut up his younger brother. He dug a pit. He plucked ro-ka lat leaves [nettle leaves]. He cut up a hundred nettle-Zeaves. He wrapped up [?his younger brother] in the leaves. He put [them] into the pit. He put them all into the pit. And he took banaka leaves. He covered them in. He counted the days, [till] the seventh day. And when he had covered [them?] in, he went and trimmed a bow, he cu t ma terials for a hundred smart be lts for them. He laid out in a row a hundred fe athers for them. He uncovered them. They had all become men. They went home . They took their be lts, they took ... bows . The y went from place to place. They fought and shot one another . They shot one another. The nettle leaves all shot one another . The side of the battle returned to Atchin. They went to their homes. They remained on Atchin peace fu ZZy. 253

TALE HH : THE RAT AND THE NIGHT-HAWK

(Another version of Tale BB. )

1. Na-riv mwi tei na-ak, mu roni, mi wa we-la, mi tei ne-wu, mi tei ni-tsam nen, 2. mu kotsi mu kots-kots, mi tei soliib, mi wiwsl, mw i tei no-wof nen. 3. Mara rur-pol), mu wur ei , "Pe wa Sirimits pe uroi tapol". 4. Mwi tabe we- la na-ak san ko mu fu . 5. Mu fu, wan Tsul)on Onema. mi lasi na-si mwi sakel . 6. Ko na-si I)a mi wa ruf, e wa, "Na- riv, po e-be ko7" Ko na-r iv mu wurei e wa , 7. "Pe wa Sirimits pe uroi tapo!." Ko e wa , "Po fu ma I)a-el, ikir werek" . 8. Mu fu wan mw i re- I)an ril)eni. 9. "Por fu wan re Ni-ar." 10. Mirolo sa mu tur e wa , "Na- riv, ko po e-be7" 11 . "Nom wa Sirlmits". "Kob wise7" "Nam (p) uroi tapo!." 12 . "Po fu ma I)a-el ikir." Mu Ju wan ko mw i sa. 13. Mar fu wan e-re Ma-wup. Pwe -pwere we le sa mu tur I)a- in L{)puri . 14 . "Ko na- riv, kab e-pe7" "Sirimits". "Ko po e-wise." "Pe uroi tapo! ." "Po fu ma I)a-el, iklr werek." 15. Mu fu wan ko mw i sa. Mu fu wan Pota- wora. Na-mwere wele sa mwi sakel I)a-in Pota-wora. E wa , 16. "Na-riv , kab e-pe7" "Nam wa Sirimits, nam(p) uroi tapo! ." "Po fu ma I)a-el , ikir werek." 17 . Mar fu wan , mw i sa. Mar fu wan puneme . 18. Wopun wele sa mw i sakel I)a- in. "Na-r iv, kab e-pe7" 19. "Nam wa Sirimits , nam(p) uroi tapol ." "Po fu ma I)a-el , ikir werek." 20. Mar fu wan ko mwi sa. Mu fu wan Pan-mala. 21. Mwi lasl na-lul sa; e wa , "Ra-tol kab e-pe7" "Nam wa Sirimits nam(p) uroi tapo 1." 22 . Mar Ju wan ko mar lai re-I)an las, ma r po-po we-reo Mar fu wan ko na-lul mwi sa , 23. Ko mar fu. Mu wurei ni, "Na-wun n�-n� rak sa ni-ok". 24. Ar wa , "Ni-s e7" Mar fu mu wurel ke le, "Na-wun n�-n� rak sa ni-ok." Ko na-riv mu motsi na-ak, mu motsi ruruil)e na-ak, ko n-das mi wa re na-ak ko mar ron. 25. Ni-man mar row. Na-lul mu ron. Ko na-riv mu 1�1) mi wa e-hut. 26. Mu wa la luha mi wa re ne-hi :m san.

TRANSLATION

A rat au t [down] a tree to make a aanoe . He hollowe d it out. He went to the shore, he fa shioned booms; he fa shioned an outrigger-float for it. He aarried it [to the shore ], he aarved a figure-head, he lashed [them ] together, he fa shioned a paddle for it. He rose in the morning and said, "I wi ll go to Sirimits so that I may eat the fruit of the tapol." He aarried his aanoe down to the sea and paddled away. [where ] [on Then he aame to Tsungon Onema, he saw a parrot perahed a tree]. The parrot aaHed to him, saying: "Rat, where are you going?" The ra t answered and said, "I am going to Sirimits to eat tapo l fruit. " 254 TALE HH

It [the parrot ] said, "Padd'Le over he re, ret us go together." The rat padd'Led over and took [the parrot] on board, saying, "Let us padd'Le [till we] come to Ni-ar. " A mi rolo-bird was standing [on the beach] and it said, "Ra t, where are you going?" [The rat replied] , 'We-two are going to Sirimits. " [The ml rol0 said], "What fo r?" [and the rat replied] "In order to ea t tapol fr uit ". [The mirol0 said], "Padd 'Le over here, 'Let us a'Lr go together ." They padd'Led over, and the mirol0 c'Limbed on board. They padd'Led and came to Na-wup . A dear 'Litt'Le pwe-pwere bird was standing there at Lopuri, and said, "Ra t, where are you a'L'L going ?" The rat said, "To Sirimits". [The pwe-pwere said] "What for ?" [The rat said ] "To eat tapo l frui t". [The pwe-pwere said ], "Padd'Le over here and 'Let us a'L'L go together ." It [the rat ] padd'Led over and it [the pwe-pwere] c'Limbed on board. Then they came to Pota wora. A dear 'Litt'Le na-mwe re bird was perching there, at Pota-wora. It said, "Rat, where are you a'L'L going to?" "We are a'L'L going to Sirimits, to eat tapol fruit. " "Padd 'Le over here, 'Let a'L'L of us dear friends go together". They a'Lr padd'Led over, and the na-mwere c'Limbed on board. Then they paddred to puneme. A wopun bird wa s perched there [and said], "Rat where are you a'L'L going?" "We are an going to Sirimi ts, to eat tapol fruit. " "Pa dd'Le over here, and ret a'L'L of us dear fr iends go together." They padd'Led over and it cHmbed on board. Then they padd'Led over to Pan-ma 'La. It [the rat ] saw a night-hawk, which said, "You three, 1 where are you a'Lr going to?" "We are a'L'L going to Sirimi ts to eat tapol fruit. " As they padd'Led over [towards the night-hawk] they took ha'Lf a coconut she'L'L and put the rat inside it. They padd'Led over and the night-hawk c'Limbed on board. They a'L'L continued paddHng. It [the night-hawk] said, "I sme 'L'L something for me to eat there. " They said, "What?" They went on padd'Ling, and he said again, "I sme'L'L something for me to ea t there". But the rat gnawed at the canoe, and it gnawed right through the canoe, so that the sea-water came into the canoe and they a'L'L sank. The birds a'L'L f'Lew away, but the night-hawk was drowned. The rat swam to shore . Then it ran back to its own home .

�here have actually been five birds mentioned; the trial is used , as in ot her Melanesian languages, as a limited plural . 255

TALE JJ : TAHAR INTRODUCES THE COCONUT TO THE TEN LEBON BROTHERS

1. Tahar mu Ju ko mi lasl Lebon sal)awul mat" tur re n-das. 2. Mu J u ma ko mwi sal tsi Lebon Sa. 3 • L e bon Sa m u w u rei . m i wa . "Ko w i e I Ie?" E wa . "Me lasi mo tur ko me Ju ma". 4. Ko mw l lai na-wop sa pitewin. Ko mu wu re i mu wa . "Inik. sa-mem le-ro?" 5. Lebon Sa e wurei e wa . "KlamtutuJak ko mar tur ni-ok." 6. "Ko po te mak. ro wan ro lasir." Mor wan . mor wa tsi Lebon e-ru. 7. Lebon Sa e wurei e wa . "Tsunob sa mw i ma mwi lasi a". 8. N'asan i-se?" Lebon Sa ewa . "N' asan Tahar." 9. Lebon Sa mu wurei e wa . "Tutu. mw i lai na-na sa pitewia Ie". 10 . Ko mu Ju. ko mwi lai na-ni e-ru pitew Lebon e-ru. Mu wurei Lebon e-ru. "Ko kam e-ru le-ro?" 11 . E wa . "Ko tutuJan ma r tur ni-ok wan ." Mu Ju. "Ko ra te wan ra lasir." 12 . Mar wa n. ma r lasi Lebon e-to1.

13 ... . mu Ju . ko mwi wan ko mw i lasi Lebon Sal)awU1 . E wa . "A i !" 14 . E wa . "Ko kab wiel be?" Lebon e-slu e wa . "Tutu. tsUnob sa Ie mi ma Ie." 15. E wam "Ko n'asan i-se?" E wa . "Tahar". 16. E wa . "Mw i lai na-na sa pitew kiam Ie." Mi wan ko wa tsl mw i lai na-ni pitew Lebon Sal)awul . 17 . Lebon Sal)awii l e wurei e wa . "Ni -se Ie?" Ko Tahar e wurei e wa . "Ko na-na ko sa me lai pitewim." 18 . Mu Ju ko Lebon e-siu e wa . "Tutu . mwi lal na-na sa pitew kir Ie. Nam se rOl)e woJe ni te n'asan. 19. Nam re namb uJ-uJI ko nam mata. TutuJar wo r po uJ-uJi pu ro e n'asan ni}-n� nen." 20. E wurei ni Tahar e wa . "Ni -se mor lai. mor wit sil)en kiam ni?" Ko Tahar e wurei e wa . "Nil-nil'k. n'asan na-ni . 21 . Ko por wan . po ruwi. po mat-mat ni pwi -res. Pi we sa po ar seken i hanan a mwi-res re-I)an. 22 . E se we mari teo I)a-tan ko r 0 • ko e 5 a - 5 a II • Tasin e wa . "Ko tutu. ko Tahar mi wit sil)en ikir. Ka b se wurei teo Ra te lek. ko pi wan ko ra witsil)en ini na-na pwi sa." 23. Mar lek. ko mar rOl)e n'ai mambur. Mar kila wa n. mar las i wiJew in mu tur. 24 . Lebon e-siu e wa . "Tutu". E wa . "WiJewin sa ni-ak". E wa . "Ko pu Ju po ma". 25. MI mao Lebon Sal)awUI e wa "Pu Ju we-re na-ak." WiJewin e wa . lOPe e-pe?" E wa . 26 . "Ko kam i Tahar ko wiel". Tahar e wa, "Ko ro po wl tsil)en ia pi-p'el ko?" 27 . Tahar wa "Ra te na-mbol). ra wa mewi ." Lebon Sa e wa . "E-tsiga. ne-morl me lker." 28 . Tahar e wa . "Mwi-tsa, ko ta-ru." Lebon e-ru e wa . "Ne-mor i m�l ker" •••• 29. Lebon Tahar e wa , "Ra te e-re na-mbol) tutuJar . na-mbol) e-sal)awUI Kab ar ma sal)awUI we-ra l." 30. Mar wan I)a-hi:m re ne-hi:m si Tahar. Tahar mu hot i buha e-mow sal)awU1. Mw i lai pitew tutuJan, Lebon Sal)awU1. 31 . Mu tu-tu wonu. Merer-pekes wa tsl Lebon Sal)awUI. I iw-Jeren wa tsi

Lebon e-slu •••• 256 TALE JJ

TRANSLAT ION

Ta har was paddLing in his canoe and saw the Ten Lebon [Brothers] standing in the sea. He paddLed towards them and Landed by the side of Lebon the First. Lebon the First spoke, saying, "Where do you come from?" Tahar rep Lied, "I saw you standing [here] and came paddling [to you] ." And he gave him a sprouting coconut. And he spoke saying, "Are you aLone here?" Lebon the First spoke saying, "We [are all he re together ]. My eLder brothers stand over there ". [Tahar] said, "You Lead the way, Let us go and see them". They went, and came to Lebon the Second. Lebon the First spoke, saying, "A man came and saw me ". [Lebon the Second said ,] "What is his name ?" Lebo n the First said, "His name is Ta har. " Lebon the First spoke and said, "Brother, he gave me something here ". Then he paddLed and gave two coconuts to Lebon the Second. He said to Lebon the Sec ond, "Are you two here aLone ?" He [Lebon the Second] said, "Our eLder brothers are standing there ". He [Tahar] paddLed and said, "Then Let us go and see them ". They went, and saw Lebon the Third .... [and so on , up to Lebon the Ninth] . He [Tahar ] padd Led and went and saw Lebon the Tenth. He [Lebon the Tenth] said, "Hi! " He said, "Where do you come from ?" Lebon the Ni nth said, "Brother, this man came here ". He [Lebon the Tent h] said, "A nd what is his name ?" Lebon the Ninth said "Tahar ". He [Lebon the Ninth] said, "He gave thi s thing to us". He [Tahar ] came now and gave ten coconuts to Lebon the Tenth. Lebon the Tenth spoke, saying, "Wha t is this?" And Tahar said, "Just something I have given you ". After that, Lebon the Ninth said, "Brother, he has given something to aLL of us. We do not know its name. We want to ask, but we are afraid. [You are] even our eLdest brother. You ask, that you may Learn the name of that thing ". He [Lebon the Tenth] sp oke to Tahar and said, "What is it that l you have given, that you have presented to us ?" He [Tahar ] spoke and said, "That thing, its name is Coconut. Just go and pLant it and tend it we LL, and it wiLL come to pass that one day you wi LL fi nd good fo od in it. Before it is [grown] high, whi Le it is yet quite Low, it bears fruit. " The younger brother said, "So, brother, Tahar has pre sented us with it. So not you [all] say anything . Let us wai t awhi Le, and after a time we shaLL present him with something. " They remained, and 2 they heard a twig snap. They Looked around, and saw a woman standing there. Lebon the Ninth said, "Brother ". He said, "A woman is standing lDeferential dual . 2 The usual sign made by a woman wishing to attract the attention of a man. TALE JJ 257

there. " He said to her, "PaddLe over here. " She aame . Lebon the Tenth said, "PaddLe over to Tahar 's aanoe ". The woman said, "Where must I go?" He said, "You wiLL go away with Tahar. " Ta har said, "Do you mean to make me a present of this vagina ?" Tahar said, "Let us appoint a day, Let us say tomorrow." Lebon the First said, "No, that is too soon. " Tahar said, "Ne ver mind, then the day after tomorrow". Lebon the Seaond said "That is too soon". FinaLLy Ta har said, "Let us appoint the day beLonging to the eLde st brother, the tenth day . Come baak again ten days from today ". They went to the viLLage, to the house of Tahar. Tahar tied up a hundred pigs [?for the bride-price] to stakes. He gave them to the eLdest brother, Lebon the Tenth. He aounted them off. A airaLe-tusker went to Lebon the First, a 1 iw-Jeran tusker to Lebon the Ninth .... [etc ., to the end] . 258

TALE KK : SHOOT ING THE BANANA

1. Mar lo-loJ tsile, mu Ju. Mar mul mar lasi na-wits mi mir mi wa n'ai tara hUt-hUt. 2. Tas in mw l liw wan mi se liw woJe ni teo 3. Tas in tuan nen mw l liw wan mwl se liw woJe ni te o 4. TutuJan a mwl -Iap mw i liw waa , mw i Ilw woI. 5. Mar wa la wan mar nisi na-wits mi mir. Tas in a mu wel e-wele mow wan. 6. Mwi re pw i tawe p'uroi . TutuJan a mw i-Iap e wa , "Pwi-tsa te". 7. Mwi Jowuri na-wits roni ne-l iw. Ar wa la re n-das, mar lo-loJ, mar luha ma �a- hi:m. 8. Mar re par uroi na-wits, mar se lasi te na-wits. Ne-l iw mu to tsa.

TRANSLATION

They finished bathing, and came and saw a banana that had ripened on an old tree in the bush. One of the younger brother s shot at it but missed. A fe llow younger brother shot and missed. The very eldest brother shot, and hit the mark. They ran and saw the banana that it was ripe. The very youngest brother went wi th the elder brother and the former wanted to pluc k the fruit and eat it. But the eldest brother said "No, please". He cursed the banana wi th the arrow in it. They ran to the sea, they bathed, and came back home . They [all] wanted to eat the banana, bu t they could not fi nd [it]. The arrow was still in it. 259

TALE LL: MEN TURNED INTO EELS

1. Pale ni-ar, e ruwi no-ut. Pwcre-pwere ar uroi. 2. Mwi lai ne-l iw si tutuJan; e I iwe pwere-pwere. Pwere-pwere mu wa la we-re nu-a. 3. E un e-re nu-a mwl sa we-re pwaral) . 4. TutuJan ma I)a-hi:m e Jowuri re ne-liw. "K o po bets ilehi ne-liw sak." Tasin mu betsilehi we-re nu-a. 5. Mu un mw i sa we ma re re pwaral). Mw i lasi pwere-pwere we na-so.

N e -I i w m u to r e -I)an. 6. " Ko po m a I)a - e I r 0 I e - I e k . " E I u ha w e - r e nu-a, e luha e wa hi:m, par na-mbwe . 7. Tsunob mw i lap mar ma o 8. Ar wa , "Ko e-wlse7" E wa , "Me liw ta-mats." 9. E tei pwe-pwe . 'N i r i tsunob e-lap ma r wan ma r tor-toni pwe- pwe bUl)on. 10. Mu tor i bUl)on, m'un roni, wan ko mw l lasi na-sup. E wahi batun, e bub ton i pwe-pwe e-re batun e Ju-Juoni pwe-pwe . 11. E ral)e ne-l i w. Mar wehi we mara. Mar weh i. Mu roni. 12 . Mar wa lamoJ . Ar lai roha, ar hili nl-ram, na-wits, na-ni , na-amp. 13. Tibwis, tibwis e-ru. Or lek mat-mat ni. Or liwe ni-lal), 14. Mara e rets, "Kob liw e pwe-re mat ak." T l mar mar mao "Te , n�-n� I)a mwi tsats." 15. "Tibwis e wur ei , ni-se ko7 Ra re ra uroi nil-n� rar." 16 . Mar Jure na-amp , ma r tore woni ma ra. Mar wuJoi mu to. E to e ran. 17 . Riir-pol) ar wan ar wets i. Ar urol . Ar uroi tsile, ko no-uJ m'uJ ko mar we mara . 18. Mar lal wats i re nu-a . Mar we mara tsile. Mar wa la ko watsin, mar wa re nu-a nan. 19. Mar ' we mara wats l. Timar mirar mor tori hanan sar mor wa , 'nir wen tsir re nu-a .

TRANSLAT ION

He builds a fence, he plants his garden. Sows ea t [the yams ]. He took an arrow belonging to his elder brother. He shot the sow. The sow ran into the fr esh water . It dived into the fresh wa ter and climbed up into a cave . The elder brother came home and swore at [his younger brother] about [having taken] the arrow, [saying], "Go and look for my arrow ". The younger brother looked for the arrow in the water. He dived and climbed up into the cave. He saw the sow [which] had become an old man with the arroW still sticking into him . [The old man said], "You come here and let us stay together". But the younger man went back into the water, and went back to the village and sounded the gongs. Many peop le ca me , and said, "Why are you sounding the gongs ?" He said, 1 "I have shot a ghost". They cut a rope . All those people went and caught ho ld of one end of the rope . He caught hold of [the other ] end lOf the kind used for hauling the logs from which gongs are made . 260 TALE LL

and div ed with it to where he had met the oZd ma n. He Zooked for Zice in [the old man's] hair, and fastened the rope round his head and jerked it tight. He drew out the arrow. They puZZed the rope and [as they dragged the pig-man into the water it] became an eeZ. They dragged the rope [till the eel came ] out. They aZZ went into the bush and took [cooking-] Zeaves, dug up yams, co ZZected bananas, coconuts and fire wood. [They left] the boys, the two boys, to stay and guard [the eel]. They two shot at the fZies [whic h collected on the eel]. The eeZ said, "You two, shoot at my eyes". Their fa thers came back. [The children said ] "Father, this thin g is bad. " They [the fat hers] said, "Wha t are the chi Zdren saying ? We want to eat our food [1.e. the eel]." They aZZ wrapped up the eeZ [in cooking leaves ] and pZaced it in the oven. It stopped there . It stopped tiZZ dawn. In the morning they took it out and ate it. They ate it aZZ. And the rain poured down and they aZZ became eeZs. They wriggZed about in that water now. They had aZZ become eeZs, their fa thers and their moth ers. They two [the two boys] threw their food to them . They two we nt. They [the others] aZZ went into the wa ter.

Capell, A. and Layard, J. Materials in Atchin, Malekula: Grammar, vocabulary and texts. D-20, vi + 265 pages. Pacific Linguistics, The Australian National University, 1980. DOI:10.15144/PL-D20.1 ©1980 Pacific Linguistics and/or the author(s). Online edition licensed 2015 CC BY-SA 4.0, with permission of PL. A sealang.net/CRCL initiative.